Table of Contents

 
UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, DC 20549
 
 
 
 
Form 10-K
 
     
þ
  ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
    For the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008
o
  TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
    For the transition period from          to          
 
Commission File Number 001-33625
VIRTUSA CORPORATION
(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)
 
 
 
 
     
Delaware
  04-3512883
(State or Other Jurisdiction of
Incorporation or Organization)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)
 
 
 
 
2000 West Park Drive
Westborough, Massachusetts 01581
(508) 389-7300
(Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including Area Code, of Registrant’s Principal Executive Offices)
 
 
 
 
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share           The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
None
 
 
 
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.  Yes  o      No:  þ
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.  Yes  o      No:  þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.  Yes  þ      No:  o
 
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§ 229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.  þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):
 
             
Large accelerated filer o
  Accelerated filer o   Non-accelerated filer  þ   Smaller reporting company  o
        (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)    
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).  Yes  o      No:  þ
 
The aggregate market value of the registrant’s voting and non-voting shares of common stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant on September 30, 2007, based on $15.00 per share, the last reported sale price on the NASDAQ Global Market on that date, was $131,733,030.
 
Indicate the number of shares outstanding of each of the issuer’s class of common stock, as of June 2, 2008:
 
     
Class
 
Number of Shares
 
Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share
  23,058,539
 
DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
 
The registrant intends to file a definitive Proxy Statement for its 2008 annual meeting of stockholders pursuant to Regulation 14A within 120 days of the end of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. Portions of the registrant’s Proxy Statement are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Form 10-K. With the exception of the portions of the Proxy Statement expressly incorporated by reference, such document shall not be deemed filed with this Form 10-K.
 


 

 
VIRTUSA CORPORATION

ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 10-K
Fiscal Year Ended March 31, 2008

TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
                 
        Page
 
PART  I
      Business     3  
      Risk Factors     13  
      Unresolved Staff Comments     31  
      Properties     31  
      Legal Proceedings     32  
      Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders     32  
 
PART II
      Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities     32  
      Selected Financial Data     34  
      Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations     35  
      Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk     50  
      Financial Statements and Supplementary Data     52  
      Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure     81  
      Controls and Procedures     81  
      Other Information     81  
 
PART III
      Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance     81  
      Executive Compensation     82  
      Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters     82  
      Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Directors Independence     82  
      Principal Accounting Fees and Services     82  
 
PART IV
      Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules     82  
    88  
    90  
  EX-10.7 Provision of IT Services for BT Contract
  EX-10.8 Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29, 2006
  EX-10.15 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan
  EX-10.22 Indenture of Lease dated May 17, 2007
  EX-21.1 Subsidiaries of Registrant
  EX-23.1 Consent of KPMG LLP
  EX-31.1 Section 302 Certification of Principal Executive Officer
  EX-31.2 Section 302 Certification of Principal Financial Officer
  EX-32.1 Section 906 Certification of Principal Executive Officer
  EX-32.2 Section 906 Certification of Principal Financial Officer


Table of Contents

 
Part I
 
This Annual Report on Form 10-K (the “Annual Report”) contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and are subject to the “safe harbor” created by those sections. These statements relate to, among other things, our expectations concerning our business strategy. Any statements about our expectations, beliefs, plans, objectives, assumptions or future events or performance are not historical facts and may be forward-looking. Some of the forward-looking statements can be identified by the use of forward-looking terms such as “believes,” “expects,” “may,” “will,” “should,” “seek,” “intends,” “plans,” “estimates,” “projects,” “anticipates,” or other comparable terms. These forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainties. We cannot guarantee future results, levels of activity, performance or achievements, and you should not place undue reliance on our forward-looking statements. Our actual results may differ significantly from the results discussed in the forward-looking statements. Our forward-looking statements do not reflect the potential impact of any future acquisitions, mergers, dispositions, joint ventures or strategic investments. Factors that might cause such a difference include, but are not limited to, those set forth in “Item 1A. Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this Annual Report. Except as may be required by law, we have no plans to update our forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of this report. We caution readers not to place undue reliance upon any such forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date made. You are advised, however, to consult any further disclosures we make on related subjects in our Form 10-Q and 8-K reports to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”).
 
Item 1.    Business
 
Overview
 
Virtusa Corporation (the “Company”, “Virtusa”, “we”, “us” or “our”) is a global information technology services company. We use an offshore delivery model to provide a broad range of information technology (IT) services, including IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing. Using our enhanced global delivery model, innovative platforming approach and industry expertise, we provide cost-effective services that enable our clients to use IT to enhance business performance, accelerate time-to-market, increase productivity and improve customer service. Headquartered in Massachusetts, we have offices in the United States and the United Kingdom and global delivery centers in Hyderabad and Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka. We have experienced compounded annual revenue growth of 46% over the five-year period ended March 31, 2008.
 
Our enhanced global delivery model leverages a highly-efficient onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix and proprietary tools and processes to manage and accelerate delivery, foster innovation and promote continual improvement. Our global service delivery teams work seamlessly at our client locations and at our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka to provide value-added services rapidly and cost-effectively. They do this by using our enhanced global delivery model, which we manage to a 20/80, or better, onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix.
 
We apply our innovative platforming approach across all of our services. We help our clients combine common business processes and rules, technology frameworks and data into reusable application platforms that can be leveraged across the enterprise to build, enhance and maintain existing and future applications. Our platforming approach enables our clients to continually improve their software platforms and applications in response to changing business needs and evolving technologies while also realizing long-term and ongoing cost savings.
 
We enable our clients to use IT to accelerate time-to-market, increase productivity and improve customer service. We are able to reduce costs through our enhanced global delivery model. We also reduce the effort and costs required to maintain and develop IT applications by streamlining and consolidating our clients’ applications on an ongoing basis. We believe that our solution provides our clients with the consultative and high-value services associated with large consulting and systems integration firms, the cost-effectiveness associated with offshore IT outsourcing firms and ongoing benefits of our innovative platforming approach.


3


Table of Contents

We provide our IT services primarily to enterprises engaged in the following industries: communications and technology; banking, financial services and insurance (BFSI); and media and information. Our current clients include leading global enterprises such as Aetna Life Insurance Company, British Telecommunications plc (BT), ING North America Insurance Corporation, International Business Machines Corporation, Iron Mountain Information Management, Inc., JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. and Thomson Healthcare Inc., and leading enterprise software developers such as Pegasystems Inc. and Vignette Corporation. We have a high level of repeat business among our clients. For instance, during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, 96% of our revenue came from clients to whom we had been providing services for at least one year. Our top ten clients accounted for approximately 76%, 72% and 62% of our total revenue in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively. Our largest client, BT, accounted for 27% and 23% of our total revenue in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.
 
Our solution
 
We deliver a broad range of IT services using an enhanced global delivery model and an innovative platforming approach. We have significant domain expertise in IT-intensive industries, including communications and technology, BFSI and media and information. We enable our clients to leverage IT to improve business performance, use IT assets more effectively and reduce IT costs.
 
Broad range of IT services.   We provide a broad range of IT services, either individually or as part of an end-to-end solution, from IT consulting and technology implementation to application outsourcing. Our IT consulting services include strategic activities such as defining technology roadmaps, providing architecture services and assessing application portfolios. Our technology implementation services include application development, systems integration and legacy system conversion and enablement. Our application outsourcing services include application enhancement, maintenance and infrastructure management.
 
Enhanced global delivery model.   We believe we have an enhanced and integrated global delivery model. Our enhanced global delivery model leverages a highly-efficient onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix and proprietary tools and processes to manage and accelerate delivery, foster innovation and promote continual improvement. We manage to a 20/80, or better, onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix, which allows us to provide value-added services rapidly and cost-effectively. During the past three fiscal years, we performed more than 80% of our total billable hours at our offshore global delivery centers. Our onsite client service teams comprise senior technical and industry experts, who work on an integrated basis with our offshore teams in India and Sri Lanka. We leverage our global delivery model across all of our service offerings.
 
Platforming approach.   We apply an innovative platforming approach across our IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing services to reduce costs, increase productivity and improve the efficiency and effectiveness of our clients’ IT application environments. As part of our platforming approach, we assess our clients’ application environments to identify common elements, such as business processes and rules, technology frameworks and data. We incorporate those common elements into one or more application platforms that can be leveraged across the enterprise to build, enhance and maintain existing and future applications. Our platforming approach enables our clients to continually improve their software platforms and applications in response to changing business needs and evolving technologies while also realizing long-term and ongoing cost savings.
 
Services
 
We provide a broad range of IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing services to our clients, either individually or as part of an end-to-end solution.
 
IT consulting services
 
We provide IT consulting services to assist our clients with their continually-changing IT environments. Our goal is to help them to continually improve the effectiveness and efficiency of their IT application environments by adopting and evolving towards re-useable software platforms. We help clients analyze


4


Table of Contents

business and/or technology problems and identify and design platform-based solutions. We also assist our clients in planning their IT initiatives and transition plans.
 
Our IT consulting services include the following assessment and planning, architecture and design and governance-related services:
 
         
Assessment
       
and Planning Services
 
Architecture and Design Services
 
Governance-Related Services
 
•   application inventory and portfolio assessment
•   business/technology alignment analysis
•   IT strategic planning
•   quality assurance process consulting
  •   enterprise architecture analysis
•   technology roadmaps
•   product evaluation and selection
•   business process analysis and design
  •   program governance and change management
•   program management office planning
•   IT process/methodology consulting
 
During our consulting engagements, we often leverage proprietary frameworks and tools to differentiate our services and to accelerate delivery. Examples of these frameworks and tools include our Strategic Enterprise Information Roadmap framework and our Business Process Visualization tools. We believe that our consulting services are also differentiated in that we are typically able to leverage our global delivery model for our engagements. Our onsite teams work directly with our clients to understand and analyze the current-state problems and to design the conceptual solutions. Our offshore teams work seamlessly with our onsite teams to design and expand the conceptual solution, research alternatives, perform detailed analyses, develop prototypes and proofs-of-concept and produce detailed reports. We believe that this approach reduces cost, allows us to explore more alternatives in the same amount of time and improves the quality of our deliverables.
 
Technology implementation services
 
Our technology implementation services involve building, testing and deploying IT applications, and consolidating and rationalizing our clients’ existing IT applications and IT environments into platforms.
 
Our technology implementation services include the following development, legacy asset management, data warehousing and testing services:
 
             
    Legacy Asset
  Data
   
Development Services
 
Management Services
 
Warehousing Services
 
Testing Services
 
•   application development
•   package implementation and integration
•   software product engineering
•   Business Process Management implementations
  •   systems consolidation and rationalization
•   technology migration and porting
•   web-enablement of legacy applications
  •   data management and transformation
•   business intelligence, reporting and decision support
  •   testing frameworks
•   automation of test data and cases
•   test cycle execution
 
Our technology implementation services are typically characterized by short delivery cycles, stringent service levels and evolving requirements. We have incorporated rapid, iterative development techniques into our approach, extensively employing prototyping, solution demonstration labs and other collaboration tools that enable us to work closely with our clients to understand and adapt to their changing business needs. As a result, we are able to develop and deploy applications quickly, often within solution delivery cycles of less than three months. We provide technology implementation services across Microsoft and Java-based, client-server and mainframe technologies.
 
Application outsourcing services
 
We provide a broad set of application outsourcing services that enable us to provide comprehensive support for our clients’ software applications and platforms. We endeavor to continually improve the applications under our management and to evolve our clients’ IT applications into leverageable platforms.


5


Table of Contents

Our application outsourcing services include the following application and platform management, infrastructure management and quality assurance management services:
 
         
Application and Platform
  Infrastructure
  Quality Assurance
Management Services
 
Management Services
 
Management Services
 
•   production support
•   maintenance and enhancement of custom-built and package-based applications
•   ongoing software engineering services for software companies
  •   systems administration
•   database administration
•   monitoring
  •   outsourcing of quality assurance planning
•   preparation of test cases, scripts and data
•   execution of test cases, scripts and data
 
We believe that our application outsourcing services are differentiated because they are based on the principle of migrating installed applications to flexible platforms that can sustain further growth and business change. We do this by:
 
  •  developing a roadmap for the evolution of applications into platforms
 
  •  establishing an ongoing planning and governance process for managing change
 
  •  analyzing applications for common patterns and service
 
  •  identifying application components that can be extended or enhanced as core components
 
  •  integrating new functions, features and technologies into the target architecture
 
Platforming approach
 
Our platforming approach is embodied in a set of proprietary processes, tools and frameworks that addresses the fundamental challenges confronting IT executives. These challenges include the rising costs of technology ownership and the need to accelerate time-to-market, improve service and enhance productivity.
 
Our platforming approach draws from analogs in industries that standardize on platforms composed of common components and assemblies used across multiple product lines. Similarly, we work with our clients to evolve their diverse software assets into unified, rationalized software platforms. Our platforming approach leads to simplified and standardized software components and assemblies that work together harmoniously and readily adapt to support new business applications. For example, a software platform for trading, once developed within an investment bank, can be the foundation for the bank’s diverse trading applications in equities, bonds and currencies. Our platforming approach stands in contrast to traditional enterprise application development projects, where different applications remain separate and isolated from each other, replicating business logic, technology frameworks and enterprise data.
 
At the center of our platforming approach is a five-level maturity framework that allows us to adapt our service offerings to meet our clients’ unique needs. Level 1 maturity in our platforming approach represents traditional applications where every line of code is embedded and unique to the application and every application is monolithic. Level 2 applications are less monolithic and more flexible and demonstrate characteristics such as configurability and customizability. Level 3 are advanced applications where the common code components and software assets are leveraged across multiple application families and product lines. Level 4 applications are framework-driven where the core business logic is reused with appropriate custom logic built around them. At the highest level of maturity are Level 5 applications, where platforms are greatly leveraged to simplify and accelerate application development and maintenance.
 
At lower levels of maturity, few assets are created and reused. Consequently, agility, total cost of ownership and ability to quickly meet client needs are sub-optimal. As organizations mature along this continuum, from Level 1 to Level 5, substantial intellectual property is created and embodied in software platforms that enable steady gains in agility, reduce overall cost of ownership and accelerate time-to-market.
 
Our platforming approach improves software quality and IT productivity. Software assets within platforms are reused across applications, their robustness and quality improves with time and our clients are able to develop software with fewer defects. A library of ready-made building blocks significantly enhances


6


Table of Contents

productivity and reduces software development risks compared to traditional methods. This establishes a cycle of continual improvement: the more an enterprise embraces platform-based solutions, the better the quality of its applications and the less the effort required to build, enhance and maintain them.
 
Global delivery model
 
We have developed an enhanced global delivery model that allows us to provide innovative IT services to our clients in a flexible, cost-effective and timely manner. Our model leverages an efficient onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix and our proprietary Global Innovation Process (GIP), to manage and accelerate delivery, foster innovation and promote continual improvement.
 
We manage to a highly-efficient 20/80, or better, onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix, which allows us to cost-effectively deliver value-added services and rapidly respond to changes in resources and requirements. During the past three fiscal years, we performed more than 80% of our total annual billable hours at our offshore global delivery centers. Using our global delivery model, we generally maintain onsite teams at our clients’ locations and offshore teams at one or more of our global delivery centers. Our onsite teams are generally composed of program and project managers, industry experts and senior business and technical consultants. Our offshore teams are generally composed of project managers, technical architects, business analysts and technical consultants. These teams are typically linked together through common processes and collaboration tools and a communications infrastructure that features secure, redundant paths enabling seamless global collaboration. Our global delivery model enables us to provide around-the-clock, world-class execution capabilities that span multiple time zones.
 
Our enhanced global delivery model is built around our proprietary GIP, which is a software lifecycle methodology that combines our decade-long experience building platform-based solutions for global clients with leading industry standards such as Rational Unified Process, eXtreme Programming, Capability Maturity Model and Product Line Engineering. By leveraging GIP templates, tools and artifacts across diverse disciplines such as requirements management, architecture, design, construction, testing, application outsourcing and production support, each team member is able to take advantage of tried and tested software engineering and platforming best practices and extend these benefits to clients.
 
We have adapted and incorporated modern techniques designed to accelerate the speed of development into GIP, including rapid prototyping, agile development and eXtreme Programming. During the initial process-tailoring phase of an engagement, we work with the client to define the specific approach and tools that will be used for the engagement. This process-tailoring takes into consideration the client’s business objectives, technology environment and currently-established development approach. We believe our innovative approach to adapting proven techniques into a custom process has been an important differentiator. For example, a large high-tech manufacturer engaged us to use our process-tailoring approach to design a common, standards-based development process for use by its own product development teams.
 
The backbone of GIP is our global delivery operations infrastructure. This infrastructure combines enabling tools and specialized teams that assist our project teams with important enabling services such as workforce planning, knowledge management, integrated process and program management and operational reporting and analysis.
 
Two important aspects of our global delivery model are innovation and continual improvement. A dedicated process group provides three important functions: they continually monitor, test and incorporate new approaches, techniques, tools and frameworks into GIP; they advise project teams, particularly during the process-tailoring phase; and they monitor and audit projects to ensure compliance. New and innovative ideas and approaches are broadly shared throughout the organization, selectively incorporated into GIP and deployed through training. Clients also contribute to innovation and improvement as their ideas and experiences are incorporated into our body of knowledge. We also seek regular informal and formal client feedback. Our global leadership and executive team regularly interacts with client leadership and each client is typically given a formal feedback survey on a quarterly basis. Client feedback is qualitatively and quantitatively analyzed and forms an important component of our teams’ performance assessments and our continual improvement plans.


7


Table of Contents

Sales and marketing
 
Our global sales, marketing and business development teams seek to develop strong relationships with managers and executives at prospective and existing clients to establish long-term business relationships that continue to grow in size and strategic value. As of March 31, 2008, we had 76 sales, marketing and business development professionals, including sales managers, sales representatives, account managers, telemarketers, sales support personnel and marketing professionals.
 
The sales cycle for our services often includes initiating contact with a prospective client, understanding the prospective client’s business challenges and opportunities, performing discovery or assessment activities, submitting proposals, providing client case studies and references and developing proofs-of-concept or solution prototypes. We organize our sales teams by business unit with professionals who have specialized industry knowledge. This industry focus enables our sales teams to better understand the prospective client’s business and technology needs and to offer appropriate industry-focused solutions.
 
Sales and sales support.   Our sales and sales support teams focus primarily on identifying, targeting and building relationships with prospective clients. These teams are supported in their efforts by industry specialists, technology consultants and solution architects, who work together to design client-specific solution proposals. Our sales and sales support teams are based in offices throughout India, Sri Lanka, the United Kingdom and the United States.
 
Account management.   We assign experienced account managers who build and regularly update detailed account development plans for each of our clients. These managers are responsible for developing strong working relationships across the client organization, working day-to-day with the client and our service delivery teams to understand and address the client’s needs. Our account managers work closely with our clients to develop a detailed understanding of their business objectives and technology environments. We use this knowledge to identify and target additional consulting engagements and other outsourcing opportunities.
 
Marketing.   We maintain a marketing presence in India, Sri Lanka, the United Kingdom and the United States. Our marketing team seeks to build our brand awareness and generate target lists and sales leads through industry events, press releases, thought leadership publications, direct marketing campaigns and referrals from clients, strategic alliances and industry analysts. The marketing team maintains frequent contact with industry analysts and experts to understand market trends and dynamics.
 
Strategic alliances.   We have strategic alliances with software companies, some of which are also our clients, to provide services to their customers. We believe these alliances differentiate us from our competition. Our extensive engineering, quality assurance and technology implementation and support services to software companies enable us to compete more effectively for the technology implementation and support services required by their customers. In addition, our strategic alliances with software companies allow us to share sales leads, develop joint account plans and engage in joint marketing activities.
 
Clients and industry expertise
 
We market and provide our services primarily to companies in North America and Europe. For additional discussion regarding geographic information, see note 16 to our consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this Annual Report. A majority of our revenue for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 was generated from Forbes Global 2000 firms or their subsidiaries. We believe that our regular, direct interaction with senior executives at these clients, the breadth of our client relationships and our reputation within these clients as a thought leader differentiates us from our competitors. The strength of our relationships has resulted in significant recurring revenue from existing clients. In the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, 73% of our revenue came from clients who spent more than $5.0 million with us and 86% came from clients who spent more than $2.0 million with us. Our largest client, BT, accounted for 27% and 23% of our total revenue in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.
 
We focus primarily on three industries: communications and technology, BFSI and media and information. We build expertise in these industries through our customer experience and industry alliances, by hiring


8


Table of Contents

industry specialists and by training our business analysts and other team members in industry-specific topics. Drawing on this expertise, we strive to develop industry-specific perspectives and services.
 
Communications and technology.   For our communications clients, we focus on customer service, sales and billing functions and regulatory compliance and help them improve service levels, shorten time-to-market and modernize their IT environments. For our technology clients, which include hardware manufacturers and software companies, we provide a wide range of industry-specific service offerings, including product management services; product architecture, engineering and quality assurance services; and professional services to support product implementation and integration. These clients often employ cutting-edge technology and generally require strong technical skills and a deep understanding of the software product lifecycle.
 
Banking, financial services and insurance.   We provide services to clients in the retail, wholesale and investment banking areas; financial transaction processors; and insurance companies encompassing life, property-and-casualty and health insurance. For our BFSI clients, we have developed industry-specific services for each of these sectors, such as an account opening framework for banks, compliance services for financial institutions and customer self-service solutions for insurance companies. The need to rationalize and consolidate legacy applications is pervasive across these industries and we have tailored our platforming approach to address these challenges.
 
Media and information.   For our media and information clients, we focus primarily on solutions involving electronic publishing, online learning, content management, information workflow and mobile content delivery as well as personalization, search technology and digital rights management. Many media and information providers are focused on building common platforms that provide customized content from multiple sources, customized and delivered to many consumers using numerous delivery mechanisms. We believe our platforming approach is ideally suited to these opportunities.
 
Competition
 
The IT services market in which we operate is highly competitive, rapidly evolving and subject to shifting client needs and expectations. This market includes a large number of participants from a variety of market segments, including:
 
  •  offshore IT outsourcing firms, such as Cognizant Technology Solutions Corporation, HCL Technologies Ltd., Infosys Technologies Limited, Patni Computer Systems Limited, Satyam Computer Services Limited, Tata Consultancy Services Limited, Tech Mahindra Limited and Wipro Limited
 
  •  consulting and systems integration firms, such as Accenture Ltd., BearingPoint, Inc., Cap Gemini S.A., Computer Sciences Corporation, Deloitte Consulting LLP, Electronic Data Systems Corporation, IBM Global Services Consulting and Sapient Corporation
 
We also occasionally compete with in-house IT departments, smaller vertically-focused IT service providers and local IT service providers based in the geographic areas where we compete. We expect additional competition from offshore IT outsourcing firms in emerging locations such as Eastern Europe, Latin America and China, as well as offshore IT service providers with facilities in less expensive geographies within India.
 
We believe that the principal competitive factors in our business include technical expertise and industry knowledge, a breadth of service offerings to provide one-stop solutions to clients, a well-developed recruiting, training and retention model, responsiveness to clients’ business needs and quality of services. We believe that we compete favorably with respect to these factors. Many of our competitors, however, have significantly greater financial, technical and marketing resources and a greater number of IT professionals than we do. We cannot assure you that we will continue to compete favorably or that we will be successful in the face of increasing competition.


9


Table of Contents

Human resources
 
We seek to maintain a culture of innovation by aligning and empowering our team members at all levels of our organization. Our success depends upon our ability to attract, develop, motivate and retain highly-skilled and multi-dimensional team members. Our people management strategy is based on six key components: recruiting, performance management, training and development, employee engagement and communication, compensation and retention. Although not currently a material component of our people management strategy, we also retain subcontractors at all of our locations on an as-needed basis for specific client engagements.
 
Recruiting.   Our global recruiting and hiring process addresses our need for a large number of highly-skilled, talented team members. In all of our recruiting and hiring efforts, we employ a rigorous and efficient interview process. We also employ technical and psychometric tests for our IT professional recruiting efforts in India and Sri Lanka. These tests evaluate basic technical skills, problem-solving capabilities, attitude, leadership potential, desired career path and compatibility with our team-oriented, thought-leadership culture.
 
We recruit from leading technical schools in India and Sri Lanka through dedicated campus hiring programs. We maintain a visible position in these schools through a variety of specialized programs, including IT curriculum development, classroom teaching and award sponsorships. We also recruit and hire laterally from leading IT service and software product companies and use employee referrals as a significant part of our recruitment process.
 
Performance management.   We have a sophisticated performance assessment process that evaluates team members and enables us to tailor individual development programs. Through this process, we assess performance levels, along with each team member’s potential. We create and manage development plans, adjust compensation and promote team members based on these assessments.
 
Training and development.   We devote significant resources to train and integrate all new hires into our global team. We conduct a training program for all lateral hires that teaches them our culture and value system. We provide a comprehensive training program for our campus hires that combines classroom training with on-the-job learning and mentoring. We also engage a leading e-learning company to provide world-class leadership development to our managers. We strive to continually measure and improve the effectiveness of our training and development programs based on team member feedback.
 
Employee engagement and communication.   We believe open communication is essential to our team-oriented culture. We maintain multiple communication forums, such as regular company-wide updates from senior management, complemented by team member sessions at the regional, local and account levels, as well as regular town hall sessions to provide team members a voice with management.
 
Compensation.   We consistently benchmark our compensation and benefits with relevant market data and make adjustments based on market trends and individual performance. Our compensation philosophy rewards performance by linking both variable compensation and salary increases to performance.
 
Retention.   To attract, retain and motivate our team members, we seek to provide an environment that rewards entrepreneurial initiative, thought leadership and performance. During the twelve months ended March 31, 2008, we experienced team member attrition at a rate of 21.3%, which included involuntary attrition. We remain committed to improving and sustaining our attrition levels in-line with our long-term stated goals. We define attrition as the ratio of the number of team members who have left us during a defined period to the total number of team members that were on our payroll at the end of the period. Our human resources team, working with our business units, proactively manages team member attrition by addressing many factors that improve retention, including:
 
  •  providing team members with opportunities to handle challenging technical and organizational problems and learn our platforming approach
 
  •  providing team members with clear career paths, rotation opportunities across clients and domains and opportunities to advance rapidly


10


Table of Contents

 
  •  providing team members opportunities to interact with our clients and help shape their IT strategy and solutioning
 
  •  creating a strong peer group work environment that pushes our team members to succeed
 
  •  creating a climate where there is a free exchange of ideas cutting across organizational hierarchy
 
  •  creating a family-oriented work environment that is fun and engaging
 
  •  recognizing team performance through highly-visible team recognition awards
 
As of March 31, 2008, we had 4,265 team members worldwide. We also retain outside contractors from time to time to supplement our services on an as needed basis. None of our team members are covered by a collective bargaining agreement or represented by a labor union. We consider our relations with our team members to be good.
 
Network and infrastructure
 
Our global IT infrastructure is designed to provide uninterrupted service to our clients. We use a secure, high-performance communications network to enable our clients’ systems to connect seamlessly to each of our offshore global delivery centers. We provide flexibility for our clients to operate their engagements from any of our offshore global delivery centers by using mainstream network topologies, including site-to-site Virtual Private Networks, International Private Leased Circuits and MultiProtocol Label Switching. We also provide videoconferencing, voice conferencing and Voice over Internet Protocol capabilities to our global delivery teams and clients to enable clear and uninterrupted communication in our engagements, be it intra-company or with our clients.
 
We monitor our network performance on a 24x7 basis to ensure high levels of network availability and periodically upgrade our network to enhance and optimize network efficiency across all operating locations. We use leased telecommunication lines to provide redundant data and voice communication with our clients’ facilities and among all of our facilities in Asia, the United States and the United Kingdom. We also maintain multiple sites across our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka as back-up centers to provide for continuity of infrastructure and resources in the case of natural disasters or other events that may cause a business interruption.
 
We have also implemented numerous security measures in our network to protect our and our clients’ data, including multiple layers of anti-virus solutions, network intrusion detection, host intrusions detection and information monitoring. We are ISO 27001 certified and believe that we meet all of our clients’ stringent security requirements for ongoing business with them.
 
Intellectual property
 
We believe that our continued success depends in part on the skills of our team members, the ability of our team members to continue to innovate and our intellectual property rights. We rely on a combination of copyright, trademark and design laws, trade secrets, confidentiality procedures and contractual provisions to protect our intellectual property rights and proprietary methodologies. It is our policy to enter into confidentiality agreements with our team members and consultants and we generally control access to and distribution of our proprietary information. These agreements generally provide that any confidential or proprietary information developed by us or on our behalf be kept confidential. We pursue the registration of certain of our trademarks and service marks in the United States and other countries. We have registered the mark “Virtusa” in the United States, the European Community and India and have filed for registration of “Virtusa” in Sri Lanka. We also have a registered service mark in the United States, “Productization,” which we use to describe our methodology and approach to delivery services. We have no issued patents.
 
Our business also involves the development of IT applications and other technology deliverables for our clients. Our clients usually own the intellectual property in the software applications we develop for them. We generally implement safeguards designed to protect our clients’ intellectual property in accordance with their needs and specifications. Our means of protecting our and our clients’ proprietary rights, however, may not be


11


Table of Contents

adequate. Despite our efforts, we may be unable to prevent or deter infringement or other unauthorized use of our and our clients’ intellectual property. Legal protections afford only limited protection for intellectual property rights and the laws of India and Sri Lanka do not protect intellectual property rights to the same extent as those in the United States and the United Kingdom. Time-consuming and expensive litigation may be necessary in the future to enforce these intellectual property rights.
 
In addition, we cannot assure you that our intellectual property or the intellectual property that we develop for our clients does not infringe the intellectual property rights of others, or will not in the future. If we become liable to third parties for infringing upon their intellectual property rights, we could be required to pay substantial damage awards and be forced to develop non-infringing technology, obtain licenses or cease delivery of the applications that contain the infringing technology.
 
Business Segments and Geographic Information
 
We view our operations and manage our business as one operating segment. For information regarding net revenue by geographic regions for each of the last three fiscal years, see note 16 to our consolidated financial statements for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 contained in this Annual Report.
 
For information regarding risks and dependencies associated with foreign operations, see our risk factors listed in “Item 1A. Risk Factors” contained in this Annual Report.
 
Our corporate and available information
 
We were originally incorporated in Massachusetts in November 1996 as Technology Providers, Inc. We reincorporated in Delaware as eRunway, Inc. in May 2000 and subsequently changed our name to Virtusa Corporation in April 2002. Our principal executive offices are located at 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581, and our telephone number at this location is (508) 389-7300. Our website address is www.virtusa.com. We have included our website address as an inactive textual reference only. The information on, or that can be accessed through, our website is not part of this Annual Report. Our Annual Report on Form 10-K, Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q, Current Reports on Form 8-K and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 are available free of charge through the investor relations page of our internet website as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file such material with, or furnish it to, the Securities and Exchange Commission. In addition, we make available our Code of Business Conduct and Ethics free of charge through our website. We intend to disclose any amendments to, or waivers from, our Code of Business Conduct and Ethics that are required to be publicly disclosed pursuant to rules of the SEC and the NASDAQ Stock Market by filing such amendment or waiver with the SEC and posting it on our website.
 
No information on our Internet website is incorporated by reference into this Form 10-K or any other public filing made by us with the SEC.


12


Table of Contents

Item 1A.    Risk Factors
 
We operate in a rapidly changing environment that involves a number of risks, some of which are beyond our control. This discussion highlights some of the risks which may affect future operating results. These are the risks and uncertainties we believe are most important for you to consider. Our operating results and financial condition have varied in the past and may vary significantly in the future depending on a number of factors. We cannot be certain that we will successfully address these risks. If we are unable to address these risks, our business may not grow, our stock price may suffer and/or we may be unable to stay in business. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us, which we currently deem immaterial or which are similar to those faced by other companies in our industry or business in general, may also impair our business operations.
 
Except for the historical information in this Annual Report, the matters contained in this report include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. The following factors, among others, could cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in forward-looking statements made in this report and presented elsewhere by management from time to time. Such factors, among others, may have a material adverse effect upon our business, results of operations and financial condition. You should consider carefully the following risk factors, together with all of the other information included in this Annual Report. Each of these risk factors could adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition, as well as adversely affect the value of an investment in our common stock.
 
Risks relating to our business
 
Our revenue is highly dependent on a small number of clients and the loss of any one of our major clients could significantly harm our results of operations and financial condition.
 
We have historically earned and believe that over the next few years we will continue to earn, a significant portion of our revenue from a limited number of clients. For instance, we generated approximately 54%, 49% and 43% of our revenue in our fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively, from our top five clients during those periods. For the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, BT, our largest client, accounted for 27% of our revenue; no other client accounted for 10% of our revenue in that fiscal year. During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, 96% and 97% of our revenue, respectively came from clients to whom we had been providing services for at least one year. The loss of any one of our major clients could reduce our revenue or delay our recognition of revenue, harm our reputation in the industry and/or reduce our ability to accurately predict cash flow. The loss of any one of our major clients could also adversely affect our gross profit and utilization as we seek to redeploy resources previously dedicated to that client. Further, the loss of any one of our major clients has required, and could in the future require, us to initiate involuntary attrition. This could have a material adverse effect on our attrition rate and make it more difficult for us to attract and retain IT professionals in the future. We may not be able to maintain our client relationships and our clients may not renew their agreements with us, in which case, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be adversely affected. For instance, in March 2007 we entered into a five-year IT services agreement with BT, which has been amended from time to time to reflect agreed upon changes to terms and conditions, including rates and other commercial terms, that is premised upon minimum aggregate expenditures by BT of approximately $200 million over the term of the agreement. However, there can be no assurance that we will realize the full amount of those expenditures or that the agreement will not be terminated or further amended prior to the end of its term.
 
In addition, this client concentration may subject us to perceived or actual leverage that our clients may have, given their relative size and importance to us. If our clients seek to negotiate their agreements on terms less favorable to us and we accept such unfavorable terms, such unfavorable terms may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Accordingly, unless and until we diversify and expand our client base, our future success will significantly depend upon the timing and volume of business from our largest clients and the financial and operational success of these clients. If we were to lose one of our major clients or have a major client cancel substantial projects or otherwise significantly


13


Table of Contents

reduce its volume of business with us, our revenue and profitability would be materially reduced and our business would be seriously harmed.
 
We depend on clients primarily located in the United States and the United Kingdom, as well as clients concentrated in specific industries, such as BFSI, and are therefore subject to risks relating to developments affecting these clients and industries that may cause them to reduce or postpone their IT spending.
 
For the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we derived substantially all of our revenue from clients located in the United States and the United Kingdom, as well as clients concentrated in certain industries. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we generated 69% of our revenue in the United States and 31% of our revenue in the United Kingdom. For the same fiscal year, we derived substantially all of our revenue from three industries: BFSI, communications and technology, and media and information. In particular, the BFSI industries have recently experienced substantial losses relating to market conditions and economic downturn which have also resulted in the consolidation of several large companies in the BFSI industries. During our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we earned approximately 38% of our revenue from BFSI clients and our revenue from this industry vertical grew by approximately 43% from the prior fiscal year. Any significant decrease in the growth of the BFSI industries, significant consolidation in these industries or decrease in growth or consolidation in other industry verticals on which we focus, could reduce the demand for our services and negatively affect our revenue and profitability. If economic conditions weaken, particularly in the United States, the United Kingdom or any of these industries in which we focus, our clients may significantly reduce or postpone their IT spending. Reductions in IT budgets, increased consolidation or decreased competition in these geographic locations or industries could result in an erosion of our client base and a reduction in our target market. Any reductions in the IT spending of companies in any one of these industries may reduce the demand for our services and negatively affect our revenue and profitability.
 
A significant or prolonged economic downturn in the IT services industry, or industries in which we focus, may result in our clients reducing or postponing spending on the services we offer.
 
Our revenue is dependent on entering into large contracts for our services with a limited number of clients each year. As we are not the exclusive IT service provider for our clients, the volume of work that we perform for any specific client is likely to vary from year to year. There are a number of factors, other than our performance, that could affect the size, frequency and renewal rates of our client contracts. For instance, if economic conditions weaken in the IT services industry or in any industry in which we focus, our clients may reduce or postpone their IT spending significantly which may, in turn, lower the demand for our services and negatively affect our revenue and profitability. As a way of dealing with a challenging economic environment, clients may change their outsourcing strategy by performing more work in-house or replacing their existing software with packaged software supported by the licensor. The loss of, or any significant decline in business from, one or more of our major clients likely would lead to a significant decline in our revenue and operating margins, particularly if we are unable to make corresponding reductions in our expenses in the event of any such loss or decline. Moreover, a significant change in the liquidity or financial position of any of these clients could have a material adverse effect on the collectability of our accounts receivable, liquidity and future operating results.
 
The IT services market is highly competitive and our competitors may have advantages that may allow them to compete more effectively than we do to secure client contracts and attract skilled IT professionals.
 
The IT services market in which we operate includes a large number of participants and is highly competitive. Our primary competitors include:
 
  •  offshore IT outsourcing firms
 
  •  consulting and systems integration firms
 
We also occasionally compete with in-house IT departments, smaller vertically-focused IT service providers and local IT service providers based in the geographic areas where we compete. We expect


14


Table of Contents

additional competition from offshore IT outsourcing firms in emerging locations such as Eastern Europe, Latin America and China, as well as offshore IT service providers with facilities in less expensive geographies within India.
 
The IT services industry in which we compete is experiencing rapid changes in its competitive landscape. Some of the large consulting firms and offshore IT service providers with which we compete have significant resources and financial capabilities combined with a greater number of IT professionals. Many of our competitors are significantly larger and some have gained access to public and private capital or have merged or consolidated with better capitalized partners, which events have created and may in the future create, larger and better capitalized competitors. These competitors may have superior abilities to compete for market share and for our existing and prospective clients. Our competitors may be better able to use significant economic incentives, such as lower billing rates or non-billable resources, to secure contracts with our existing and prospective clients. These competitors may also be better able to compete for and retain skilled professionals by offering them more attractive compensation or other incentives. These factors may allow these competitors to have advantages over us to meet client demands in an engagement for large numbers and varied types of resources with specific experience or skill-sets that we may not have readily available in the short- or long-term. We cannot assure you that we can maintain or enhance our competitive position against current and future competitors. Our failure to compete effectively could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations.
 
If we cannot attract and retain highly-skilled IT professionals, our ability to obtain, manage and staff new projects and continue to expand existing projects may result in loss of revenue and an inability to expand our business.
 
Our ability to execute and expand existing projects and obtain new clients depends largely on our ability to hire, train and retain highly-skilled IT professionals, particularly project managers, IT engineers and other senior technical personnel. If we cannot hire and retain such additional qualified personnel, our ability to obtain, manage and staff new projects and to expand, manage and staff existing projects, may be impaired. We may then lose revenue and our ability to expand our business may be harmed. There is intense worldwide competition for IT professionals with the skills necessary to perform the services we offer. We and the industry in which we operate generally experience high employee attrition. Given our recent significant growth and strong demand for IT professionals from our competitors, we cannot assure you that we will be able to hire or retain the number of technical personnel necessary to satisfy our current and future client needs. We also may not be able to hire and retain enough skilled and experienced IT professionals to replace those who leave. Additionally, if we have to replace personnel who have left our company, we will incur increased costs not only in hiring replacements but also in training such replacements until they can become productive and billable to our clients. In addition, we may not be able to redeploy and retrain our IT professionals in anticipation of continuing changes in technology, evolving standards and changing client preferences. Our inability to attract and retain IT professionals could have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.
 
Our quarterly financial position, revenue, operating results and profitability are difficult to predict and may vary from quarter to quarter, which could cause our share price to decline significantly.
 
Our quarterly revenue, operating results and profitability have varied in the past and are likely to vary significantly from quarter to quarter in the future. The factors that are likely to cause these variations include:
 
  •  the number, timing, scope and contractual terms of IT projects in which we are engaged
 
  •  delays in project commencement or staffing delays due to immigration issues or assignment of appropriately skilled or experienced personnel
 
  •  unanticipated contract or project terminations
 
  •  the accuracy of estimates of resources, time and fees required to complete fixed-price projects and costs incurred in the performance of each project


15


Table of Contents

 
  •  changes in pricing in response to client demand and competitive pressures
 
  •  the mix of onsite and offshore staffing
 
  •  the mix of leadership and senior technical resources to junior engineering resources staffed on each project
 
  •  unexpected changes in the utilization rate of our IT professionals
 
  •  general economic conditions
 
  •  seasonal trends, primarily our hiring cycle and the budget and work cycles of our clients
 
  •  the ratio of fixed-price contracts to time-and-materials contracts in process
 
  •  employee wage levels and increases in compensation costs, including timing of promotions and annual pay increases, particularly in India and Sri Lanka
 
  •  the timing of collection of accounts receivable
 
  •  the continuing financial stability of our clients
 
  •  our ability to have the client reimburse us for travel and living expenses, especially the airfare and related expenses of our Indian and Sri Lankan offshore personnel traveling and working onsite in the United States or the United Kingdom
 
  •  one-time, non-recurring projects
 
As a result, our revenue and our operating results for a particular period are difficult to predict and may decline in comparison to corresponding prior periods regardless of the strength of our business. Our future revenue is also difficult to predict because we derive a substantial portion of our revenue from fees for services generated from short-term contracts that may be terminated or delayed by our clients without penalty. In addition, a high percentage of our operating expenses, particularly related to personnel and facilities, are relatively fixed in advance of any particular quarter and are based, in part, on our expectations as to future revenue. If we are unable to predict the timing or amounts of future revenue accurately, we may be unable to adjust spending in a timely manner to compensate for any unexpected revenue shortfall and fail to meet our forecasts. Unexpected revenue shortfalls may also decrease our gross margins and could cause significant changes in our operating results from quarter to quarter. As a result, and in addition to the factors listed above, any of the following factors could have a significant and adverse impact on our operating results, could result in a shortfall of revenue and could result in losses to us:
 
  •  a client’s decision not to pursue a new project or proceed to succeeding stages of a current project
 
  •  the completion during a quarter of several major client projects could require us to pay underutilized team members in subsequent periods
 
  •  adverse business decisions of our clients regarding the use of our services
 
  •  our inability to transition team members quickly from completed projects to new engagements
 
  •  our inability to manage costs, including personnel, infrastructure, facility and support services costs
 
  •  exchange rate fluctuations
 
Due to the foregoing factors, it is possible that in some future periods our revenue and operating results may not meet the expectations of securities analysts or investors. If this occurs, the trading price of our common stock could fall substantially either suddenly or over time and our business, financial condition and results of operations would be adversely affected.


16


Table of Contents

We are investing substantial cash in new facilities and our profitability could be reduced if our business does not grow proportionately.
 
We have spent $7.7 million to date and currently plan to spend approximately $23 million over the next two fiscal years in connection with the construction and build-out of a facility on our planned campus in Hyderabad, India. We also intend to make increased investments to expand our existing global delivery centers or procure additional capacity and facilities in Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka. We may face cost overruns and project delays in connection with these facilities or other facilities we may construct or seek to lease in the future. Such delays may also cause us to incur additional leasing costs to extend the terms of existing facility leases or to enter into new short-term leases if we cannot move into the new facilities in a timely manner. Such expansion may also significantly increase our fixed costs, including an increase in depreciation expense. If we are unable to expand our business and revenue proportionately, our profitability will be reduced.
 
The international nature of our business exposes us to several risks, such as significant currency fluctuations and unexpected changes in the regulatory requirements of multiple jurisdictions.
 
We have operations in India, Sri Lanka and the United Kingdom and we serve clients across Europe, North America and Asia. For the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 , 2007 and 2006, revenue generated outside of the United States accounted for 31%, 26% and 14% of total revenue, respectively. Our corporate structure also spans multiple jurisdictions, with our parent company incorporated in Delaware and operating subsidiaries organized in India, Sri Lanka and the United Kingdom. As a result, our international revenue and operations are exposed to risks typically associated with conducting business internationally, many of which are beyond our control. These risks include:
 
  •  significant currency fluctuations between the U.S. dollar and the U.K. pound sterling (in which our revenue is principally denominated) and the Indian and Sri Lankan rupees (in which a significant portion of our costs are denominated)
 
  •  legal uncertainty owing to the overlap of different legal regimes and problems in asserting contractual or other rights across international borders, including compliance with local laws of which we may be unaware
 
  •  potentially adverse tax consequences, such as scrutiny of transfer pricing arrangements and tax holidays by authorities in the countries in which we operate, potential tariffs and other trade barriers
 
  •  difficulties in staffing, managing and supporting operations in multiple countries
 
  •  potential fluctuations in foreign economies
 
  •  unexpected changes in regulatory requirements
 
  •  government currency control and restrictions on repatriation of earnings
 
  •  the burden and expense of complying with the laws and regulations of various jurisdictions
 
  •  domestic and international economic or political changes, hostilities, terrorist attacks and other acts of violence or war
 
  •  earthquakes, tsunamis and other natural disasters in regions where we currently operate or may operate in the future
 
Negative developments in any of these areas in one or more countries could result in a reduction in demand for our services, the cancellation or delay of client contracts, business interruption, threats to our intellectual property, difficulty in collecting receivables and a higher cost of doing business, any of which could negatively affect our business, financial condition or results of operations.


17


Table of Contents

Currency exchange rate fluctuations may negatively affect our operating results.
 
The exchange rates among the Indian and Sri Lankan rupees and the U.S. dollar and the U.K. pound sterling have changed substantially in recent years and may fluctuate substantially in the future. We expect that a majority of our revenue will continue to be generated in the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling for the foreseeable future and that a significant portion of our expenses, including personnel costs, as well as capital and operating expenditures, will continue to be denominated in Indian and Sri Lankan rupees. Accordingly, any material appreciation of the Indian rupee or the Sri Lankan rupee against the U.S. dollar or U.K. pound sterling could have a material adverse effect on our cost of services, gross margin and net income, which may in turn have a negative impact on our business, operating results and financial condition. Although we have adopted an eight quarter hedging program to minimize the effect of the Indian rupee movement on our financial condition, the hedging program may be inadequate and could cause the Company to forego benefits associated with any significant depreciation of the Indian rupee which would otherwise have had a beneficial impact on our earnings and margins, and create a competitive disadvantage compared to companies exposed to the Indian rupee but who do not hedge. The appreciation of the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling since March 31, 2007 has had a negative impact on our earnings and margins, and any continued appreciation is likely to have a negative impact on future earnings and margins.
 
The loss of key members of our senior management team may prevent us from executing our business strategy.
 
Our future success depends to a significant extent on the continued service and performance of key members of our senior management team. Our growth and success depends to a significant extent on our ability to retain Kris Canekeratne, our chief executive officer, who is a founder of our company and has led the growth, operation, culture and strategic direction of our business since its inception. The loss of his services or the services of other key members of our senior management could seriously harm our ability to execute our business strategy. Although we have entered into agreements with our executive officers providing for severance and change in control benefits to them, our executive officers or other key employees could terminate their employment with us at any time. We also may have to incur significant costs in identifying, hiring, training and retaining replacements for key employees. The loss of any member of our senior management team might significantly delay or prevent the achievement of our business or development objectives and could materially harm our business. We do not maintain key man life insurance on any of our team members other than Kris Canekeratne.
 
We may lose revenue if our clients terminate or delay their contracts with us.
 
Our clients typically retain us on a non-exclusive, engagement-by-engagement basis, rather than under exclusive long-term contracts. Many of our contracts for services have terms of less than 12 months and permit our clients to terminate our engagement on prior written notice of 90 days or less for convenience, and without termination-related penalties. Further, many large client projects typically involve multiple independently defined stages, and clients may choose not to retain us for additional stages of a project or cancel or delay their start dates. These terminations, cancellations or delays could result from factors unrelated to our work product or the progress of the project, including:
 
  •  client financial difficulties
 
  •  a change in a client’s strategic priorities, resulting in a reduced level of IT spending
 
  •  a client’s demand for price reductions
 
  •  a change in a client’s outsourcing strategy that shifts work to in-house IT departments or to our competitors
 
  •  replacement by our client of existing software to packaged software supported by licensors
 
If our contracts were terminated early or materially delayed, our business and operating results could be materially harmed and the value of our common stock could be impaired. Unexpected terminations,


18


Table of Contents

cancellation or delays in our client engagements could also result in increased operating expenses as we transition our team members to other engagements.
 
We invest in auction rate securities that are subject to market risk and the recent problems in the financial markets could adversely affect the value and liquidity of our assets.
 
As of March 31, 2008, our long-term investments included $8.0 million of auction rate securities. In addition, all of our auction rate securities, including those subject to the prior failures, are currently rated AAA or Aaa, the highest rating available by a credit rating agency. A substantial majority of the underlying assets of these auction rate securities are student loans which are backed by the federal government under the Federal Family Education Loan Program. Prior to March 31, 2008, all auctions on our auction rate securities had failed and the securities have become illiquid. An auction failure means that the parties wishing to sell securities could not carry out the transaction. There is no assurance that these auctions on auction rate securities will succeed in the future. As a result, our ability to liquidate our investments in the near term may be limited, and our ability to fully recover the carrying value of our investments may be limited or non-existent. If losses become other than temporary in the future, we will be required to record an impairment charge in our consolidated statements of income. Any such loses or impairment charge could have a material adverse affect on our results of operations and financial condition.
 
We may face damage to our professional reputation if our services do not meet our clients’ expectations.
 
Many of our projects involve technology applications or systems that are critical to the operations of our clients’ businesses and handle very large volumes of transactions. If we fail to perform our services correctly, we may be unable to deliver applications or systems to our clients with the promised functionality or within the promised time frame, or to satisfy the required service levels for support and maintenance. If a client is not satisfied with our services or products, including those of subcontractors we employ, our business may suffer. Moreover, if we fail to meet our contractual obligations, our clients may terminate their contracts and we could face legal liabilities and increased costs, including warranty claims against us. Any failure in a client’s project could result in a claim for substantial damages, non-payment of outstanding invoices, loss of future business with such client and increased costs due to non-billable time of our resources dedicated to address any performance or client satisfaction issues, regardless of our responsibility for such failure.
 
We may not be able to continue to maintain or increase our profitability and our recent growth rates may not be indicative of our future growth.
 
We have been consistently profitable only since the quarter ended December 31, 2005. We may not succeed in maintaining our profitability and could incur losses in future periods. If we experience declines in demand or declines in pricing for our services, or if wages in India or Sri Lanka increase at a faster rate than in the United States and the United Kingdom, we will be faced with continued growing costs for our IT professionals, including wage increases. We also expect to continue to make investments in infrastructure, facilities, sales and marketing and other resources as we expand our operations, thus incurring additional costs. If our revenue does not increase to offset these increases in costs or operating expenses, our operating results would be negatively affected. In fact, in future quarters we may not have any revenue growth and our revenue and net income could decline. You should not consider our historic revenue and net income growth rates as indicative of future growth rates. Accordingly, we cannot assure you that we will be able to maintain or increase our profitability in the future.
 
Restrictions on immigration may affect our ability to compete for and provide services to clients in the United States or the United Kingdom, which could result in lost revenue and delays in client engagements and otherwise adversely affect our ability to meet our growth and revenue projections.
 
The vast majority of our team members are Indian and Sri Lankan nationals. The ability of our IT professionals to work in the United States, the United Kingdom and other countries depends on the ability to obtain the necessary visas and entry permits. In recent years, the United States has increased the level of scrutiny in granting H-1B, L-1 and ordinary business visas. In response to terrorist attacks and global unrest,


19


Table of Contents

U.S. and U.K. immigration authorities, as well as other countries, have not only increased the level of scrutiny in granting visas, but have also introduced new security procedures, which include extensive background checks, personal interviews and the use of biometrics, as conditions to granting visas and work permits. A number of European countries are considering changes in immigration policies as well. The inability of key project personnel to obtain necessary visas or work permits could delay or prevent our fulfillment of client projects, which could hamper our growth and cause our revenue to decline. These restrictions and additional procedures may delay, or even prevent, the issuance of a visa or work permit to our IT professionals and affect our ability to staff projects in a timely manner. Any delays in staffing a project can result in project postponement, delays or cancellation, which could result in lost revenue and decreased profitability and have a material adverse effect on our business, revenue, profitability and utilization rates.
 
Immigration laws in countries in which we seek to obtain visas or work permits may require us to meet certain other legal requirements as conditions to obtaining or maintaining entry visas. These immigration laws are subject to legislative change and varying standards of application and enforcement due to political forces, economic conditions or other events, including terrorist attacks. We cannot predict the political or economic events that could affect immigration laws, or any restrictive impact those events could have on obtaining or monitoring entry visas for our personnel. Our reliance on work visas and work permits for a significant number of our IT professionals makes us particularly vulnerable to such changes and variations, particularly in the United States and the United Kingdom, because these immigration and legislative changes affect our ability to staff projects with IT professionals who are not citizens of the country where the onsite work is to be performed. We may not be able to obtain a sufficient number of visas for our IT professionals or may encounter delays or additional costs in obtaining or maintaining such visas. To the extent we experience delays due to such immigration restrictions, we may encounter client dissatisfaction, project and staffing delays in new and existing engagements, project cancellations, higher project costs and loss of revenue, resulting in decreases in profits and a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition and cash flows.
 
Our management has limited experience managing a public company, and regulatory compliance may divert its attention from the day-to-day management of our business.
 
The individuals who constitute our management team have limited experience managing a publicly traded company and limited experience complying with the increasingly complex laws pertaining to public companies. We have hired, and may need to hire a number of, additional team members with public accounting and disclosure experience in order to meet our ongoing obligations as a public company. Our management team and other personnel will need to devote a substantial amount of time to these new compliance initiatives. In particular, these new obligations will require substantial attention from our senior management and divert its attention away from the day-to-day management of our business, which could materially and adversely affect our business operations.
 
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 requires, among other things, that we maintain effective internal control over financial reporting and disclosure controls and procedures. In particular, we must perform system and process evaluation and testing of our internal control over financial reporting to allow management and our independent registered public accounting firm to report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Our testing, or the subsequent testing by our independent registered public accounting firm, may reveal deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses. To comply with Section 404, we will incur substantial accounting expense and expend significant management time. Compared to many newly-public companies, the scale of our organization and our significant foreign operations may make it more difficult to comply with Section 404 in a timely manner. We may not be able to successfully complete the procedures and certification and attestation requirements of Section 404 by the time we will be required to do so. If we are not able to comply with the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner, or if we or our independent registered public accounting firm identifies deficiencies in our internal control over financial reporting that are deemed to be material weaknesses, we could be subject to sanctions or investigations by the NASDAQ Stock Market, the Securities and Exchange Commission or other regulatory authorities, which would require


20


Table of Contents

additional financial and management resources. In addition, because effective internal controls are necessary for us to produce reliable financial reports and prevent fraud, our failure to satisfy the requirements of Section 404 could harm investor confidence in the reliability of our financial statements, which could harm our business and the trading price of our common stock.
 
We may be required to spend substantial time and expense before we can recognize revenue, if any, from a client contract.
 
The period between our initial contact with a potential client and the execution of a client contract for our services is lengthy, and can extend over one or more fiscal quarters. To sell our services successfully and obtain an executed client contract, we generally have to educate our potential clients about the use and benefits of our services, which can require significant time, expense and capital without the ability to realize revenue, if any. If our sales cycle unexpectedly lengthens for one or more large projects, it would negatively affect the timing of our revenue, and hinder our revenue growth. Furthermore, a delay in our ability to obtain a signed agreement or other persuasive evidence of an arrangement or to complete certain contract requirements in a particular quarter, could reduce our revenue in that quarter. These delays or failures can cause our gross margin and profitability to fluctuate significantly from quarter to quarter. Overall, any significant failure to generate revenue or delays in recognizing revenue after incurring costs related to our sales or services process could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
We may not be able to recognize revenue in the period in which our services are performed, which may cause our margins to fluctuate.
 
Our services are performed under both time-and-material and fixed-price arrangements. All revenue is recognized pursuant to applicable accounting standards. These standards require us to recognize revenue once evidence of an arrangement has been obtained, services are delivered, fees are fixed or determinable and collectability is reasonably assured. If we perform our services prior to the time when we are able to recognize the associated revenue, our margins may fluctuate significantly from quarter to quarter.
 
Additionally, payment of our fees on fixed-price contracts are based on our ability to provide deliverables on certain dates or meet certain defined milestones. Our failure to produce the deliverables or meet the project milestones in accordance with agreed upon specifications or timelines, or otherwise meet a client’s expectations, may result in our having to record the cost related to the performance of services in the period that services were rendered, but delay the timing of revenue recognition to a future period in which the milestone is met.
 
Our inability to manage to a desired onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix may negatively affect our gross margins and costs and our ability to offer competitive pricing.
 
We may not succeed in maintaining or increasing our profitability and could incur losses in future periods if we are not able to manage to a desired onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix. To the extent that our engagements involve an increasing number of consulting, production support, software package implementation or other services typically requiring a higher percentage of onsite resources, we may not be able to manage to our desired service delivery mix. Additionally, other factors like client constraint or preferences or our inability to manage engagements effectively with limited resources onsite may result in a higher percentage of onsite resources than our desired service delivery mix. Accordingly, we cannot assure you that we will be able to manage to our desired onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix. If we are unable to manage to our targeted service delivery mix, our gross margins may decline and our profitability may be reduced. Additionally, our costs will increase and we may not be able to offer competitive pricing to our clients.


21


Table of Contents

Our profitability is dependent on our billing and utilization rates, which may be negatively affected by various factors.
 
Our profit margin is largely a function of the rates we are able to charge for our services and the utilization rate of our IT professionals. The rates we are able to charge for our services are affected by a number of factors, including:
 
  •  our clients’ perception of our ability to add value through our services
 
  •  the introduction of new services or products by us or our competitors
 
  •  the pricing policies of our competitors
 
  •  general economic conditions
 
A number of factors affect our utilization rate, including:
 
  •  our ability to transition team members quickly from completed or terminated projects to new engagements
 
  •  our ability to maintain continuity of existing resources on existing projects
 
  •  our ability to obtain visas for offshore personnel to commence projects at a client site for new or existing engagements
 
  •  the amount of time spent by our team members on non-billable training activities
 
  •  our ability to maintain resources who are appropriately skilled for specific projects
 
  •  our ability to forecast demand for our services and thereby maintain an appropriate number of team members
 
  •  our ability to manage team member attrition
 
  •  seasonal trends, primarily our hiring cycle, holidays and vacations
 
  •  the number of campus hires
 
If we are not able to maintain the rates we charge for our services or maintain an appropriate utilization rate for our IT professionals, our revenue will decline, our costs will increase and we will not be able to sustain our profit margin, any of which will have a material adverse effect on our profitability.
 
If we fail to manage our rapid growth effectively, we may not be able to obtain, develop or implement new systems, infrastructure, procedures and controls that are required to support our operations, maintain cost controls, market our services and manage our relationships with our clients.
 
We have experienced rapid growth in recent periods. From March 31, 2005 to March 31, 2008, the number of our team members increased from 2,251 to 4,265. We expect that we will continue to grow and our anticipated growth could place a significant strain on our ability to:
 
  •  recruit, hire, train, motivate and retain highly-skilled IT services and management personnel
 
  •  adequately and timely staff personnel at client locations in the United States and Europe due to increasing immigration and related visa restrictions and intense competition to hire and retain these skilled IT professionals
 
  •  adhere to our global delivery process and execution standards
 
  •  maintain and manage costs to correspond with timeliness of revenue recognition
 
  •  develop and improve our internal administrative infrastructure, including our financial, operational and communication systems, processes and controls


22


Table of Contents

 
  •  provide sufficient operational facilities and offshore global delivery centers to accommodate and satisfy the capacity needs of our growing workforce on reasonable commercial terms, or at all, whether by leasing, buying or building suitable real estate
 
  •  preserve our corporate culture, values and entrepreneurial environment
 
  •  maintain high levels of client satisfaction
 
To manage this anticipated future growth effectively, we must continue to maintain and may need to enhance, our IT infrastructure, financial and accounting systems and controls and manage expanded operations in several locations. We also must attract, integrate, train and retain qualified personnel, especially in the areas of accounting, internal audit and financial disclosure. Further, we will need to manage our relationships with various clients, vendors and other third parties. We may not be able to develop and implement, on a timely basis, if at all, the systems, infrastructure procedures and controls required to support our operations. Additionally some factors, like changes in immigration laws or visa processing restrictions that limit our ability to engage offshore resources at client locations in the United States or the United Kingdom, are outside of our control. Our future operating results will also depend on our ability to develop and maintain a successful sales organization despite our rapid growth. If we are unable to manage our growth, our operating results could fluctuate from quarter to quarter and our financial condition could be materially adversely affected.
 
Unexpected costs or delays could make our contracts unprofitable.
 
When making proposals for engagements, we estimate the costs and timing for completion of the projects. These estimates reflect our best judgment regarding the efficiencies of our methodologies, staffing of resources, complexities of the engagement and costs. The profitability of our engagements, and in particular our fixed-price contracts, are adversely affected by increased or unexpected costs or unanticipated delays in connection with the performance of these engagements, including delays caused by factors outside our control, which could make these contracts less profitable or unprofitable. The occurrence of any of these costs or delays could result in an unprofitable engagement or litigation.
 
We may face liability if we inappropriately disclose confidential client information.
 
In the course of providing services to our clients, we may have access to confidential client information. We are bound by certain agreements to use and disclose this information in a manner consistent with the privacy standards under regulations applicable to our clients. Although these privacy standards may not apply directly to us, if any person, including a team member of ours, misappropriates client confidential information, or if client confidential information is inappropriately disclosed due to a breach of our computer systems, system failures or otherwise, we may have substantial liabilities to our clients or our clients’ customers. In addition, in the event of any breach or alleged breach of our confidentiality agreements with our clients, these clients may terminate their engagements with us or sue us for breach of contract, resulting in the associated loss of revenue and increased costs. We may also be subject to civil or criminal liability if we are deemed to have violated applicable regulations. We cannot assure you that we will adequately address the risks created by the regulations to which we may be contractually obligated to abide.
 
Our failure to anticipate rapid changes in technology may negatively affect demand for our services in the marketplace.
 
Our success will depend, in part, on our ability to develop and implement business and technology solutions that anticipate rapid and continuing changes in technology, industry standards and client preferences. We may not be successful in anticipating or responding to these developments on a timely basis, which may negatively affect demand for our solutions in the marketplace. Also, if our competitors respond faster than we do to changes in technology, industry standards and client preferences, we may lose business and our services may become less competitive or obsolete. Any one or a combination of these circumstances could have a material adverse effect on our ability to obtain and successfully complete client engagements.


23


Table of Contents

Interruptions or delays in service from our third-party providers could impair our global delivery model, which could result in client dissatisfaction and a reduction of our revenue.
 
We depend upon third parties to provide a high speed network of active voice and data communications 24 hours per day and various satellite and optical links between our global delivery centers and our clients. Consequently, the occurrence of a natural disaster or other unanticipated problems with the equipment or at the facilities of these third-party providers could result in unanticipated interruptions in the delivery of our services. For example, we may not be able to maintain active voice and data communications between our global delivery centers and our clients’ sites at all times due to disruptions in these networks, system failures or virus attacks. Any significant loss in our ability to communicate or any impediments to any IT professional’s ability to provide services to our clients could result in a disruption to our business, which could hinder our performance or our ability to complete client projects in a timely manner. This, in turn, could lead to substantial liability to our clients, client dissatisfaction, loss of revenue and a material adverse effect on our business, our operating results and financial condition. We cannot assure you that our business interruption insurance will adequately compensate our clients or us for losses that may occur. Even if covered by insurance, any failure or breach of security of our systems could damage our reputation and cause us to lose clients.
 
Our ability to raise capital in the future may be limited and our failure to raise capital when needed could prevent us from growing.
 
We anticipate that our current cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments, together with cash generated from operations, will be sufficient to meet our current needs for general corporate purposes for the foreseeable future. We may also need additional financing to execute our current or future business strategies, including to:
 
  •  add additional global delivery centers
 
  •  procure additional capacity and facilities
 
  •  hire additional personnel
 
  •  enhance our operating infrastructure
 
  •  acquire businesses or technologies
 
  •  otherwise respond to competitive pressures
 
If we raise additional funds through the issuance of equity or convertible debt securities, the percentage ownership of our stockholders could be significantly diluted and these newly issued securities may have rights, preferences or privileges senior to those of existing stockholders. If we incur additional debt financing, a substantial portion of our operating cash flow may be dedicated to the payment of principal and interest on such indebtedness, thus limiting funds available for our business activities. Any such debt financing could require us to comply with restrictive financial and operating covenants, which could have a material adverse impact on our business, results of operations or financial condition. We cannot assure you that additional financing will be available on terms favorable to us, or at all. If adequate funds are not available or are not available on acceptable terms, when we desire them, our ability to fund our operations and growth, take advantage of unanticipated opportunities or otherwise respond to competitive pressures may be significantly limited.
 
Potential future acquisitions, strategic investments, partnerships or alliances could be difficult to identify and integrate, divert the attention of key management personnel, disrupt our business, dilute stockholder value and adversely affect our financial results.
 
We may acquire or make strategic investments in complementary businesses, technologies or services or enter into strategic partnerships or alliances with third parties to enhance our business. If we do identify


24


Table of Contents

suitable candidates, we may not be able to complete transactions on terms commercially acceptable to us, if at all. These types of transactions involve numerous risks, including:
 
  •  difficulties in integrating operations, technologies, accounting and personnel
 
  •  difficulties in supporting and transitioning clients of our acquired companies or strategic partners
 
  •  diversion of financial and management resources from existing operations
 
  •  risks of entering new markets
 
  •  potential loss of key team members
 
  •  inability to generate sufficient revenue to offset transaction costs
 
We may finance future transactions through debt financing or the issuance of our equity securities or a combination of the foregoing. Acquisitions financed with the issuance of our equity securities could be dilutive, which could affect the market price of our stock. Acquisitions financed with debt could require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow to principal and interest payments and could subject us to restrictive covenants. Acquisitions also frequently result in the recording of goodwill and other intangible assets that are subject to potential impairments in the future that could harm our financial results. It is possible that we may not identify suitable acquisition, strategic investment or partnership or alliance candidates. Our inability to identify suitable acquisition targets, strategic investments, partners or alliances, or our inability to complete such transactions, may negatively affect our competitiveness and growth prospects. Moreover, if we fail to properly evaluate acquisitions, alliances or investments, we may not achieve the anticipated benefits of any such transaction and we may incur costs in excess of what we anticipate.
 
Some of our client contracts contain restrictions or penalty provisions that, if triggered, could result in lower future revenue and decrease our profitability.
 
We have entered in the past, and may in the future enter, into contracts that contain restrictions or penalty provisions that, if triggered, may adversely affect our operating results. For instance, some of our client contracts provide that, during the term of the contract and for a certain period thereafter ranging from six to 12 months, we may not use the same personnel to provide similar services to any of the client’s competitors. This restriction may hamper our ability to compete for and provide services to clients in the same industry. In addition, some contracts contain provisions that would require us to pay penalties to our clients if we do not meet pre-agreed service level requirements. If any of the foregoing were to occur, our future revenue and profitability under these contracts could be materially harmed.
 
Negative public perception in the United States and the United Kingdom regarding offshore IT service providers and proposed legislation may adversely affect demand for our services.
 
We have based our growth strategy on certain assumptions regarding our industry, services and future demand in the market for such services. However, the trend to outsource IT services may not continue and could reverse. Offshore outsourcing is a politically sensitive topic in the United States and the United Kingdom. For example, many organizations and public figures in the United States and the United Kingdom have publicly expressed concern about a perceived association between offshore outsourcing providers and the loss of jobs in their home countries. In addition, there has been recent publicity about the negative experience of certain companies that use offshore outsourcing, particularly in India. Current or prospective clients may elect to perform such services themselves or may be discouraged from transferring these services from onshore to offshore providers to avoid negative perceptions that may be associated with using an offshore provider. Any slowdown or reversal of existing industry trends towards offshore outsourcing would seriously harm our ability to compete effectively with competitors that operate out of facilities located in the United States or the United Kingdom.
 
Legislation in the United States or the United Kingdom may be enacted that is intended to discourage or restrict outsourcing. In the United States, a variety of federal and state legislation has been proposed that, if enacted, could restrict or discourage U.S. companies from outsourcing their services to companies outside the


25


Table of Contents

United States. For example, legislation has been proposed that would require offshore providers to identify where they are located. In addition, it is possible that legislation could be adopted that would restrict U.S. private sector companies that have federal or state government contracts from outsourcing their services to offshore service providers. We do not currently have any contracts with U.S. federal or state government entities. However, there can be no assurance that these restrictions will not extend to or be adopted by private companies, including our clients. Recent legislation introduced in the United Kingdom would restrict or discourage companies from outsourcing their services, including IT services. Any changes to existing laws or the enactment of new legislation restricting offshore outsourcing in the United States or the United Kingdom may adversely affect our ability to do business in the United States or in the United Kingdom, particularly if these changes are widespread, and could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition and cash flows.
 
Our results of operations and business may be adversely affected by an investigation currently being conducted by the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor.
 
There are strict labor regulations associated with the H-1B visa classification. Larger employers of the H-1B visa program are often subject to investigations by the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor. The Department of Labor commenced an investigation to determine if we have complied with the elements of the Labor Condition Application(s) (ETA Form 9035) to hire certain H-1B non-immigrant workers. We believe the Department of Labor is primarily focused on whether our team members with H-1B renewals were paid at the appropriate pay level. However, the investigation has recently been commenced and is in its early stages. We do not currently know when this investigation will be concluded. An adverse finding by the U.S. Department of Labor may result in back-pay liability, substantial fines, and/or a ban on future use of the H-1B program and other immigration benefits, which could materially harm our business and results of operations.
 
Our services may infringe on the intellectual property rights of others, which may subject us to legal liability, harm our reputation, prevent us from offering some services to our clients or distract management.
 
We cannot be sure that our services or the deliverables that we develop and create for our clients do not infringe the intellectual property rights of third parties and infringement claims may be asserted against us or our clients. These claims may harm our reputation, distract management, cost us money and prevent us from offering some services to our clients. Historically, we have generally agreed to indemnify our clients for all expenses and liabilities resulting from infringement of intellectual property rights of third parties based on the services and deliverables that we have performed and provided to our clients. In some instances, the amount of these indemnities may be greater than the revenue we receive from the client. In addition, as a result of intellectual property litigation, we may be required to stop selling, incorporating or using products that use or incorporate the infringed intellectual property. We may be required to obtain a license or pay a royalty to make, sell or use the relevant technology from the owner of the infringed intellectual property. Such licenses or royalties may not be available on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. We may also be required to redesign our services or change our methodologies so as not to use the infringed intellectual property, which may not be technically or commercially feasible and may cause us to expend significant resources. Subject to certain limitations, under our indemnification obligations to our clients, we may also have to provide refunds to our clients to the extent that we must require them to cease using an infringing deliverable if we are unable to provide a work around or acquire a license to permit use of the infringing deliverable that we had provided to them as part of a service engagement. If we are obligated to make any such refunds or dedicate time to provide alternatives or acquire a license to the infringing intellectual property, our business and financial condition could be materially adversely affected.


26


Table of Contents

Any claims or litigation involving intellectual property, whether we ultimately win or lose, could be extremely time-consuming, costly and injure our reputation.
 
As the number of patents, copyrights and other intellectual property rights in our industry increases, we believe that companies in our industry will face more frequent infringement claims. Defending against these claims, even if the claims have no merit, may not be covered by or could exceed the protection offered by our insurance and could divert management’s attention and resources from operating our company.
 
Risks related to our Indian and Sri Lankan operations
 
Political instability or changes in the government in India could result in the change of several policies relating to foreign direct investment and repatriation of capital and dividends. Further, changes in the economic policies could adversely affect economic conditions in India generally and our business in particular.
 
We have three subsidiaries in India and a significant portion of our business, fixed assets and human resources are located in India. As a result, our business is affected by foreign exchange rates and controls, interest rates, local regulations, changes in government policy, taxation, social and civil unrest and other political, economic or other developments in or affecting India.
 
Since 1991, successive Indian governments have pursued policies of economic liberalization, including significantly relaxing restrictions on foreign direct investment into India with repatriation benefits. Nevertheless, the roles of the Indian central and state governments in the Indian economy as producers, consumers and regulators have remained significant. The rate of economic liberalization could change and specific laws and policies affecting software companies, foreign investment, currency exchange and other matters affecting investment in our securities could change as well. A significant change in India’s economic liberalization and deregulation policies could adversely affect business and economic conditions in India generally and our business in particular, if new restrictions on the private sector are introduced or if existing restrictions are increased.
 
Changes in the policies of the government of Sri Lanka or political instability could delay the further liberalization of the Sri Lankan economy and adversely affect economic conditions in Sri Lanka, which could adversely affect our business.
 
Our subsidiary in Sri Lanka has been approved as an export computer software developer by the Board of Investment in Sri Lanka, which is a statutory body organized to facilitate foreign investment into Sri Lanka and grant concessions and benefits to entities with which it has entered into agreements. Pursuant to our agreement with the Board of Investment, our subsidiary is entitled to exemptions from taxation on income for a period of 12 years expiring on March 31, 2019. Our subsidiary is also exempt from exchange control regulations which will enable our subsidiary to repatriate dividends abroad. Nevertheless, government policies relating to taxation other than on income would have an impact on the subsidiary, and the political, economic or social factors in Sri Lanka may affect these policies. Historically, past incumbent governments have followed policies of economic liberalization. However, we cannot assure you that the current government or future governments will continue these liberal policies.
 
Regional conflicts or terrorist attacks and other acts of violence or war in India, Sri Lanka, the United States or other regions could adversely affect financial markets, resulting in loss of client confidence and our ability to serve our clients which, in turn, could adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition.
 
The Asian region has from time to time experienced instances of civil unrest and hostilities among neighboring countries, including between India and Pakistan. Since May 1999, military confrontations between India and Pakistan have occurred in Kashmir. Also, there have been military hostilities and civil unrest in Iraq. Terrorist attacks, such as the ones that occurred in New York and Washington, D.C., on September 11, 2001, New Delhi on December 13, 2001, Bali on October 12, 2002, civil or political unrest in Sri Lanka and other acts of violence or war, including those involving India, Sri Lanka, the United States, the United Kingdom or


27


Table of Contents

other countries, may adversely affect U.S., U.K. and worldwide financial markets. Prospective clients may wish to visit several of our facilities, including our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka, prior to reaching a decision on vendor selection. Terrorist threats, attacks and international conflicts could make travel more difficult and cause potential clients to delay, postpone or cancel decisions to use our services. In addition, such attacks may have an adverse impact on our ability to operate effectively and interrupt lines of communication and restrict our offshore resources from traveling onsite to client locations, effectively curtailing our ability to deliver our services to our clients. These obstacles may increase our expenses and negatively affect our operating results. In addition, military activity, terrorist attacks, political tensions between India and Pakistan and conflicts within Sri Lanka could create a greater perception that the acquisition of services from companies with significant Indian or Sri Lankan operations involves a higher degree of risk that could adversely affect client confidence in India or Sri Lanka as a software development center, each of which would have a material adverse effect on our business.
 
Our net income may decrease if the governments of the United Kingdom, the United States, India or Sri Lanka adjust the amount of our taxable income by challenging our transfer pricing policies.
 
Our subsidiaries conduct intercompany transactions among themselves and with the U.S. parent company on an arm’s-length basis in accordance with U.S. and local country transfer pricing regulations. The jurisdictions in which we pay income taxes could challenge our determination of arm’s-length profit and issue tax assessments. Although the United States has income tax treaties with all countries in which we have operations, which mitigates the risk of double taxation, the costs to appeal any such tax assessment and potential interest and penalties could decrease our earnings and cash flows.
 
The Indian taxing authorities issued an assessment order with respect to their examination of the tax return for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2004 of our Indian subsidiary, Virtusa (India) Private Ltd., or Virtusa India. At issue were several matters, the most significant of which was the re-determination of the arm’s-length profit which should be recorded by Virtusa India on the intercompany transactions with its affiliates. We are contesting the assessment and have filed appeals with both the appropriate Indian tax authorities and the U.S. Competent Authority. As of March 31, 2008, we recorded a $0.5 million reserve related to this matter.
 
Our net income may decrease if the governments of India or Sri Lanka reduce or withdraw tax benefits and other incentives provided to us or levy new taxes.
 
Virtusa India is an export-oriented company under the Indian Income Tax Act of 1961 and is entitled to claim tax exemption for each Software Technology Park, or STP, which it operates. Virtusa India currently operates two STPs, in Chennai and in Hyderabad. Substantially all of the earnings of both STPs qualify as tax-exempt export profits. These holidays will be completely phased out by March 2010, and at that time any profits would be fully taxable at the Indian statutory rate, which is currently 34%. Although we believe we have complied with and are eligible for the STP holiday, the government of India may deem us ineligible for the STP holiday or make adjustments to the profit level resulting in an overall increase in our effective tax rate. In anticipation of the phase-out of the STP holidays, we intend to locate at least a portion of our Indian operations in areas designated as a Special Economic Zone, or SEZ, under the SEZ Act of 2005. In particular, we are building a campus on a 6.3 acre parcel of land in Hyderabad, India that has been designated as a SEZ. In addition, we have leased space and intend to operate on a SEZ designated location in Chennai, India. Although our profits from the SEZ operations would be eligible for certain income tax exemptions for a period up to 15 years, there is no guarantee that we will secure SEZ status for any other location in India. Additionally, the government of India may deem us ineligible for a SEZ holiday or make adjustments to the transfer pricing profit levels resulting in an overall increase in our effective tax rate.
 
In addition, our Sri Lankan subsidiary, Virtusa Private Ltd., or Virtusa SL, was approved as an export computer software developer by the Sri Lanka Board of Investment in 1998 and has negotiated multiple extensions of the original holiday period in exchange for further capital investments in Sri Lanka facilities. The most recent 12-year agreement, which is set to expire on March 31, 2019, requires that we meet certain


28


Table of Contents

new job creation and investment criteria. Any inability to meet the agreed upon timetable for new job creation and investment would jeopardize the new holiday arrangement.
 
Newly-enacted legislation in India could harm our results of operations and ability to attract, hire and retain qualified personnel.
 
In May 2007, the Parliament of India enacted the Finance Act, 2007, which, among other things, imposes a fringe benefit tax at the applicable Indian tax rate (currently 34%) on certain stock compensation and equity awards paid or issued to team members of our Indian subsidiaries. Specifically, the fringe benefit tax, which is payable upon the exercise of such equity awards, is based on the difference between the exercise price of the equity award and the fair market value of the equity award upon vesting. Because our potential tax liability is dependent on the fair market value of our common stock at the time of vesting of such equity awards, which could span over the next several years, and whether the equity awards are ultimately exercised, it is difficult to accurately forecast and could represent a significant liability and expense to us. We have decided to reduce the impact of this tax obligation on us, such as passing the cost of the fringe benefit tax on to our team members from our Indian subsidiaries. However, such alternatives do not eliminate the negative impact of the tax liability on our statements of income and result in significant non-cash compensation expense, which impacts our gross margin, operating profit margin and net income and creates volatility in our income from operations from period to period. This transfer of cost could significantly decrease the desirability of these equity awards to these team members, which could harm our ability to attract, hire and retain qualified personnel.
 
Wage pressures and increases in government mandated benefits in India and Sri Lanka may reduce our profit margins.
 
Wage costs in India and Sri Lanka have historically been significantly lower than wage costs in the United States and Europe for comparably-skilled professionals. However, wages in India and Sri Lanka are increasing, which will result in increased costs for IT professionals, particularly project managers and other mid-level professionals. We may need to increase the levels of our team member compensation more rapidly than in the past to remain competitive without the ability to make corresponding increases to our billing rates. Compensation increases may reduce our profit margins, make us less competitive in pricing potential projects against those companies with lower cost resources and otherwise harm our business, operating results and financial condition.
 
In addition, we contribute to benefit funds covering our employees in India and Sri Lanka as mandated by the Indian and Sri Lankan governments. Benefits are based on the team member years of service and compensation. If the governments of India and/or Sri Lanka were to legislate increases to the benefits required under these plans or mandate additional benefits, our profitability and cash flows would be reduced.
 
Our facilities are at risk of damage by earthquakes, tsunamis and other natural disasters.
 
In December 2004, Sri Lanka and India were struck by multiple tsunamis that devastated certain areas of both countries. Our Indian and Sri Lankan facilities are located in regions that are susceptible to tsunamis and other natural disasters, which may increase the risk of disruption of information systems and telephone service for sustained periods. Damage or destruction that interrupts our ability to deliver our services could damage our relationships with our clients and may cause us to incur substantial additional expense to repair or replace damaged equipment or facilities. Our insurance coverage may not be sufficient to cover all such expenses. Furthermore, we may be unable to secure such insurance coverage or to secure such insurance coverage at premiums acceptable to us in the future. Prolonged disruption of our services as a result of natural disasters may cause our clients to terminate their contracts with us and may result in project delays, project cancellations and loss of substantial revenue to us. Prolonged disruptions may also harm our team members or cause them to relocate, which could have a material adverse effect on our business.


29


Table of Contents

The laws of India and Sri Lanka do not protect intellectual property rights to the same extent as those of the United States and we may be unsuccessful in protecting our intellectual property rights. Unauthorized use of our intellectual property rights may result in loss of clients and increased competition.
 
Our success depends, in part, upon our ability to protect our proprietary methodologies, trade secrets and other intellectual property. We rely upon a combination of trade secrets, confidentiality policies, non-disclosure agreements, other contractual arrangements and copyright and trademark laws to protect our intellectual property rights. However, existing laws of India and Sri Lanka do not provide protection of intellectual property rights to the same extent as provided in the United States. The steps we take to protect our intellectual property may not be adequate to prevent or deter infringement or other unauthorized use of our intellectual property. Thus, we may not be able to detect unauthorized use or take appropriate and timely steps to enforce our intellectual property rights. Our competitors may be able to imitate or duplicate our services or methodologies. The unauthorized use or duplication of our intellectual property could disrupt our ongoing business, distract our management and team members, reduce our revenue and increase our costs and expenses. We may need to litigate to enforce our intellectual property rights or to determine the validity and scope of the proprietary rights of others. Any such litigation could be extremely time-consuming and costly and could materially adversely impact our business.
 
Risks related to our common stock
 
Provisions in our charter documents and under Delaware law may prevent or delay a change of control of us and could also limit the market price of our common stock.
 
Certain provisions of Delaware law and of our certificate of incorporation and by-laws could have the effect of making it more difficult for a third party to acquire, or of discouraging a third party from attempting to acquire, control of us, even if such a change in control would be beneficial to our stockholders or result in a premium for your shares of our common stock. These provisions may also prevent or frustrate attempts by our stockholders to replace or remove our management. These provisions include:
 
  •  a classified board of directors
 
  •  limitations on the removal of directors
 
  •  advance notice requirements for stockholder proposals and nominations
 
  •  the inability of stockholders to act by written consent or to call special meetings
 
  •  the ability of our board of directors to make, alter or repeal our by-laws
 
The affirmative vote of the holders of at least 75% of our shares of capital stock entitled to vote is necessary to amend or repeal the above provisions that are contained in our certificate of incorporation. In addition, our board of directors has the ability to designate the terms of and issue new series of preferred stock without stockholder approval. Also, absent approval of our board of directors, our by-laws may only be amended or repealed by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 75% of our shares of capital stock entitled to vote.
 
In addition, we are subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, which limits business combination transactions with stockholders of 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock that our board of directors has not approved. These provisions and other similar provisions make it more difficult for stockholders or potential acquirers to acquire us without negotiation. These provisions may apply even if some stockholders may consider the transaction beneficial to them.
 
These provisions could limit the price that investors are willing to pay in the future for shares of our common stock. These provisions might also discourage a potential acquisition proposal or tender offer, even if the acquisition proposal or tender offer is at a premium over the then current market price for our common stock.


30


Table of Contents

Because our common stock price is likely to continue to be volatile, the market price of our common stock could drop unexpectedly.
 
Our stock price has been and may continue to be volatile, and the market price of our common stock could drop unexpectedly. Some of the factors that may cause the market price of our common stock to fluctuate include:
 
  •  actual or anticipated variations in our quarterly operating results or the quarterly financial results of companies perceived to be similar to us
 
  •  announcements of technological innovations or new services by us or our competitors
 
  •  changes in estimates of our financial results or recommendations by market analysts
 
  •  announcements by us or our competitors of significant projects, contracts, acquisitions, strategic alliances or joint ventures
 
  •  changes in our capital structure, such as future issuances of securities or the incurrence of additional debt
 
  •  regulatory developments in the United States, the United Kingdom, Sri Lanka, India or other countries in which we operate or have clients
 
  •  litigation involving our company, our general industry or both
 
  •  additions or departures of key team members
 
  •  investors’ general perception of us
 
  •  changes in general economic, industry and market conditions
 
  •  changes in the market valuations of other IT service providers
 
Many of these factors are beyond our control. In addition, the stock markets, especially the NASDAQ Global Market, have experienced significant price and volume fluctuations that have affected the market prices of equity securities of many technology companies. These fluctuations have often been unrelated or disproportionate to operating performance. If any of the foregoing occurs, it could cause our stock price to fall and may expose us to securities class action litigation. Any securities class action litigation could result in substantial costs and the diversion of management’s attention and resources.
 
Our existing stockholders and management control a substantial interest in us and thus may influence certain actions requiring stockholder vote.
 
Our executive officers, directors and stockholders affiliated with our directors will beneficially own, in the aggregate, shares representing approximately 48% of our outstanding capital stock. Although we are not aware of any voting arrangements that are in place among these stockholders, if these stockholders were to choose to act together, as a result of their stock ownership, they would be able to control all matters submitted to our stockholders for approval, including the election of directors and approval of any merger, consolidation or sale of all or substantially all of our assets. This concentration of voting power could delay or prevent an acquisition of our company on terms that other stockholders may desire.
 
Item 1B.    Unresolved Staff Comments.
 
None.
 
Item 2.    Properties
 
Our principal executive offices are located in Westborough, Massachusetts, where we lease approximately 30,000 square feet. We also have sales and business development offices located in Reading and London in the United Kingdom.


31


Table of Contents

We have global delivery centers located in Hyderabad and Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka. We lease space at four facilities in Hyderabad, India, totaling approximately 168,500 square feet, and at two facilities in Chennai, India, totaling approximately 120,700 square feet. In Colombo, Sri Lanka, we lease space at four facilities totaling approximately 152,600 square feet. Our leases vary in duration and term, have varying renewable terms and have expiration dates extending from 2008 to 2012. In addition, in March 2007, we entered into a 99-year lease, as amended in August 2007, with an option for an additional 99 years for approximately 6.3 acres of land in Hyderabad, India, where we are presently building a campus. We have begun construction of Phase I of the campus which, when completed, will total approximately 340,000 square feet.
 
We believe that our existing and planned facilities are adequate to support our existing operations and that, as needed, we will be able to obtain suitable additional facilities on commercially reasonable terms.
 
Item 3.    Legal Proceedings
 
We are involved in various claims and legal actions arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of our management, the outcome of such claims and legal actions, if decided adversely, is not currently expected to have a material adverse effect on our operating results, cash flows or consolidated financial position.
 
Item 4.    Submission of Matter to a Vote of Security Holders
 
None.
 
PART II
 
Item 5.    Market for Our Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Purchases of Equity Securities.
 
Our common stock commenced trading on the NASDAQ Global Market on August 3, 2007 under the symbol “VRTU”. The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the high and low sale prices for our common stock for our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 since our initial public offering as reported on the NASDAQ Global Market.
 
                 
 
  High     Low  
 
Fiscal 2008:
               
Second quarter*
  $ 15.99     $ 11.04  
Third quarter
  $ 19.97     $ 12.57  
Fourth quarter
  $ 17.07     $ 8.55  
 
 
* Our common stock began trading on August 3, 2007.
 
As of June 2, 2008, there were approximately 23,058,539 shares of our common stock outstanding held by approximately 62 stockholders of record and the last reported sale price of our common stock on the NASDAQ Global Market on June 2, 2008 was $10.15 per share.
 
Dividend Policy
 
We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our capital stock. We currently expect to retain future earnings, if any, to finance the growth and development of our business and we do not anticipate paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future.


32


Table of Contents

Equity Compensation Plan Information
 
Equity Compensation Plan Information
 
The following table provides information as of March 31, 2008 with respect to the shares of our common stock that may be issued under our existing equity compensation plans.
 
We have three equity compensation plans, each of which has been approved by our stockholders: (1) Amended and Restated 2000 Stock Option Plan, which we refer to as the 2000 Plan; (2) the 2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan, which we refer to as the SAR Plan; and (3) the 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, which we refer to as the 2007 Plan. For additional information on our equity compensation plans, please see note 9 to the consolidated financial statements.
 
                         
    Number of Securities
             
    to be Issued Upon
    Weighted Average
       
    Vesting
    Exercise Price of
    Number of Securities
 
    of Awards or
    Awards or
    Available for Future
 
    Exercise of
    Outstanding
    Issuance Under Equity
 
Plan Category
  Outstanding Options     Options     Compensation Plans  
 
Equity compensation plans that have been approved by security holders — stock options(1)
    2,551,757 (2)   $ 5.64       476,390 (2)
Equity compensation plans that have been approved by security holders — stock appreciation rights(3)
    151,274       4.12       (2)
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders(4)
    869,055       2.74        
                         
Total
    3,572,086               476,390  
 
 
(1) Consists of the 2000 Plan and the 2007 Plan
 
(2) In the event that any option under the 2000 Plan or any stock appreciation right under the SAR Plan terminates without being exercised, the number of shares underlying such option or stock appreciation right becomes available for grant under the 2007 Plan. No further awards are authorized to be granted under the 2000 Plan or the SAR Plan.
 
(3) Consists of the SAR Plan.
 
(4) Consists of 869,055 shares issuable upon exercise of options granted to Mr. Danford Smith, our President and Chief Operating Officer, and Mr. Martin Trust, a board member.
 
Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities
 
(a) On August 8, 2007, we completed our initial public offering (the “IPO”) of 4,400,000 shares of common stock at a public offering price of $14.00 per share which we offered for sale pursuant to a registration statement on Form S-1 as amended (File No. 333-141952). Such registration statement was declared effective by the SEC on August 2, 2007. The managing underwriters in the offering were J.P. Morgan Securities Inc., Bear, Stearns & Co. Inc., Cowen and Company, LLC and William Blair & Company, LLC. Net proceeds of the IPO were approximately $52.8 million, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions of approximately $4.3 million and offering fees and expenses of approximately $4.5 million, which includes legal, accounting and printing costs and various other fees associated with registration and listing of our common stock. We expect to use a portion of the net proceeds from our IPO to fund the construction and build-out of a new facility on our planned campus in Hyderabad, India, of which we have spent approximately $7.2 million in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 and plan to spend approximately $23.3 million during our fiscal years ending 2009 and 2010. The balance of the net proceeds will be used for working capital and other general corporate purposes, including to finance the expansion of our global delivery centers in Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka, the hiring of additional personnel, sales and marketing activities, capital expenditures, the costs of operating as a public company and possible strategic alliances or acquisitions.


33


Table of Contents

(b) On April 9, 2008, we issued an aggregate of 6,285 shares of our common stock upon the exercise of a warrant issued to Silicon Valley Bank on April 9, 2001, giving effect to a net and automatic exercise provision in the warrant. The 6,285 shares were issued based on the exercise price of $5.48 per share (or an aggregate consideration of $85,224) and a fair market value per share of $9.19 (or an aggregate fair market value of $142,987), based on the closing price of our common stock on the NASDAQ Global Market on April 9, 2008. We issued the 6,285 shares of our common stock under Section 4(2) of the Securities Act (and/or Regulation D promulgated thereunder).
 
(c) During the fiscal quarter ended March 31, 2008, there were no repurchases made by us or on our behalf, or by any “affiliated purchasers,” of shares of our common stock.
 
Item 6.    Selected Financial Data
 
The selected historical financial data set forth below as of March 31, 2008 and 2007 and for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 are derived from our financial statements, which have been audited by KPMG LLP, our independent registered public accounting firm, and which are included elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. The selected historical financial data as of March 31, 2006, 2005 and 2004 and for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2005 and 2004 are derived from our financial statements which are not included elsewhere in this Annual Report.
 
The following selected consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements, the related notes and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” included elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. The historical results are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period.
 
Consolidated statement of operations data
 
                                         
    Fiscal Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006     2005     2004  
    (In thousands, except share and per share amounts)  
 
Revenue
  $ 165,198     $ 124,660     $ 76,935     $ 60,484     $ 42,822  
Costs of revenue
    92,847       68,031       43,417       31,813       22,648  
                                         
Gross profit
    72,351       56,629       33,518       28,671       20,174  
Operating expenses
    52,972       42,478       32,925       27,838       20,309  
                                         
Income (loss) from operations
    19,379       14,151       593       833       (135 )
Other income
    3,249       1,209       1,564       376       73  
                                         
Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)
    22,628       15,360       2,157       1,209       (62 )
Income tax expense (benefit)
    4,857       (3,630 )     176       99       146  
                                         
Net income (loss)
  $ 17,771     $ 18,990     $ 1,981     $ 1,110     $ (208 )
                                         
Net income (loss) per share of common stock
                                       
Basic
  $ 0.83     $ 1.09     $ 0.12     $ 0.07     $ (0.04 )
                                         
Diluted
  $ 0.76     $ 1.03     $ 0.11     $ 0.06     $ (0.04 )
                                         
Weighted average number of common shares outstanding
                                       
Basic
    21,368,470       6,005,619       5,613,623       5,448,048       5,561,278  
Diluted
    23,282,663       18,351,161       17,361,219       17,116,473        
 
Note:   The net income per share calculations for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005 give effect to the automatic conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock into 11,425,786 shares of common stock upon the closing of the IPO on August 8, 2007. The decrease in net income and earnings per


34


Table of Contents

share in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 is due to our one-time income tax benefit of $5.0 million in fiscal year 2007 caused by the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance. Fiscal year 2004 did not give effect to the conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock, which would have been anti-dilutive.
 
Consolidated balance sheet data
 
                                         
    As of March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006     2005     2004  
    (In thousands)  
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 41,047     $ 45,079     $ 30,237     $ 28,406     $ 30,361  
Working capital
    108,808       65,765       41,696       35,436       33,043  
Total assets
    180,770       99,319       58,719       50,085       47,141  
Redeemable convertible preferred stock
          60,862       60,814       60,758       60,701  
Total stockholders’ equity (deficit)
    155,834       19,259       (13,610 )     (17,899 )     (20,992 )
 
Item 7.    Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
 
Business overview
 
We are a global information technology services company. We use an offshore delivery model to provide a broad range of IT services, including IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing. Using our enhanced global delivery model, innovative platforming approach and industry expertise, we provide cost-effective services that enable our clients to use IT to enhance business performance, accelerate time-to-market, increase productivity and improve customer service. Headquartered in Massachusetts, we have offices in the United States and the United Kingdom and global delivery centers in Hyderabad and Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka. We have experienced compounded annual revenue growth of 46% over the five-year period ended March 31, 2008. At March 31, 2008, we had 4,265 employees, or team members, and for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we had revenue of $165.2 million and income from operations of $19.4 million.
 
In our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, our revenue increased 33% to $165.2 million compared to $124.7 million in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. Net income decreased by $1.2 million to $17.8 million in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, as compared to $19.0 million in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. The year-over-year decrease in net income of $1.2 million is primarily due to a one-time income tax benefit of $5.0 million in the prior year caused by the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance.
 
The key drivers of our revenue growth in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 were as follows:
 
  •  greater penetration of the European market, where we experienced revenue growth of 60% in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007
 
  •  strong performance of our BFSI industry vertical, which had fiscal year-over-year growth of 43%, our communication and technology industry vertical which had fiscal year-over-year revenue growth of approximately 34%, and our media and information industry vertical which had fiscal year over year growth of approximately 13%
 
  •  increased penetration at existing clients
 
  •  continued expansion of the market for global delivery of IT services
 
High repeat business and client concentration is common in our industry. During our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, 96% of our revenue was derived from clients who had been using our services for more than one year. Accordingly, our global account management and service delivery teams focus on expanding client relationships and converting new engagements to long-term relationships to generate repeat revenue and expand revenue streams from existing clients. We also have a dedicated business development team focused on generating engagements with new clients to continue to expand our client base, and over time, reduce client concentration.


35


Table of Contents

Our European revenue increased to $51.1 million, or 31% of total revenue, from $31.9 million, or 26% of total revenue for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and March 31, 2007, respectively. Other revenue diversification strategies include revenue by industry and revenue by service offering. Our revenue from application outsourcing services has represented a substantial majority of our total revenue. However, IT consulting services and technology implementation services have increased as a percentage of our total revenue in recent years.
 
We perform our services under both time-and-materials and fixed-price contracts. Revenue from fixed-price contracts was 21%, 14%, and 5% of total revenue for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively. The increased revenue earned from fixed-price contracts reflects our clients’ preferences.
 
As an IT services company, our revenue growth has been, and will continue to be, highly dependent on our ability to attract, develop, motivate and retain skilled IT professionals. We closely monitor our overall attrition rates and patterns to ensure our people management strategy aligns with our growth objectives. For the last twelve months ended March 31, 2008, our attrition rate was 21.3%. We remain committed to improving our attrition levels. There is intense competition for IT professionals with the skills necessary to provide the type of services we offer. If our attrition rate increases and is sustained at higher levels, our growth may slow and our cost of attracting and retaining IT professionals could increase.
 
In our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we experienced pressure on our cost structure due to the appreciation of the Indian rupee versus the U.S. dollar. This is in addition to the continuing wage inflation, primarily in India and Sri Lanka, that we have experienced over the last several years. In response to these pressures, in our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we initiated a hedging strategy using forward contracts designed to hedge fluctuation in the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling. There is no assurance that these hedging programs will be effective.
 
We have been profitable for the past ten consecutive quarters. We continually monitor and manage a number of operating metrics to ensure quality and reduce volatility in our earnings, including:
 
  •  Days sales outstanding, or DSO, is a measure of the number of days our accounts receivable are outstanding based upon the last 90 days of revenue activity, which indicates the timeliness of our cash collection from clients and our overall credit terms to our clients. DSO was 78 days and 79 days for our fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. Higher DSO reduces our cash balance because the revenue-to-cash conversion process takes longer.
 
  •  Realized billing rates are the rates we charge our clients for our services, which reflect the value our clients place on our services, market competition and the geographic location in which we perform our services. Our realized billing rates have increased in our fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively, and have remained unchanged for our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. Any increase in realized billing rates is a result of our ability to successfully preserve or increase our billing rates with existing and/or new clients.
 
  •  Average cost per IT professional is the sum of team member salaries, including variable compensation, and fringe benefits divided by the average number of IT professionals during the period. We experienced increases in our average cost per IT professional of 7.0% from our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, primarily driven by the year-over-year appreciation of the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar, and of 1.9% from our fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. These increases are primarily driven by wage inflation and increased fringe benefit costs in India and Sri Lanka, as well as increased foreign currency fluctuations which we expect will continue to increase for the foreseeable future.
 
  •  Utilization rate is the percentage of time billable IT professionals are deployed on client engagements, which indicates the efficiency of our billable IT resources. Our utilization rate is defined as number of billable hours divided by the total number of available hours of our IT professionals in a given period of time, excluding trainees. We track our utilization rates to measure revenue potential and gross profit margins. Management’s targeted range for utilization is between 70% and 75%. Generally, gross margin moves directionally with utilization rate. Utilization is affected by the rate of quarterly sequential


36


Table of Contents

  revenue growth. In higher growth periods, utilization tends to rise as more resources are deployed to meet rising demand. In addition, the seasonal graduation patterns introduce a higher number of graduates from universities who join us, which may temporarily lower our utilization rate during the period as these new graduates become deployable. When we anticipate periods of high growth, we hire in advance of current demand, which may temporarily lower our utilization rate. In order to facilitate growth and maintain client satisfaction, we seek to maintain a sustainable level of utilization.
 
  •  Attrition rate is the ratio of terminated team members during the latest twelve months to the total number of team members at the end of such period, which measures team member turnover. Increased attrition rates result in increased hiring, training and boarding costs and productivity losses, which may affect our revenue, gross margin and operating profit margin. Our attrition rate was 21.3% and 16.1% for our fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. The increase in attrition from our fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 is primarily related to the strong demand for IT professionals in India and Sri Lanka.
 
  •  Operating expense efficiency is a measure of operating expenses as a percentage of revenue. If we continue to successfully grow our revenue, we anticipate that operating expenses will decrease as a percentage of revenue as such expenses are absorbed across a larger revenue base. In the near term, however, any operating expense efficiency that we realize may be offset by higher costs of operating as a public company, as well as the negative impact on our operating margins resulting from the appreciation of the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar. We continually try to increase operating efficiencies and to lower operating expenses as a percentage of revenue.
 
  •  Effective tax rate is our worldwide tax expense as a percentage of our consolidated net income before tax, which measures the impact of income taxes worldwide on our operations and net income. We monitor and assess our effective tax rate to evaluate whether our tax structure is competitive as compared to our industry. Our effective tax rate was 21.5% for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to an income tax (benefit) rate of (23.6%) for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. The significant change in the rate for our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 was due to the recognition of the one-time benefit related to the release of a $5.0 million deferred tax asset valuation allowance in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. We anticipate that our effective tax rate will increase in our fiscal years ending after March 31, 2010 as our India STPI tax holiday expires.
 
  •  Onsite-to-offshore mix is the measurement of hours billed by resources located offshore to hours billed onsite by our team members over a defined period. We strive to manage both fixed-price contracts and time-and-materials engagements to a highly-efficient 20/80, or better, onsite-to-offshore service delivery team mix.
 
Sources of revenue
 
We generate revenue by providing IT services to our clients located primarily in the United States and the United Kingdom. We have historically earned and believe that over the next few years we will continue to earn, a significant portion of our revenue from a limited number of clients. For the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, our five largest and ten largest clients accounted for 54% and 76% of our revenue, respectively. Our largest client, BT, accounted for 27% of our revenue for the same period. Although no other client accounted for 10% or more of our revenue during our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, the loss of any one of our major clients could reduce our revenue or delay our recognition of revenue, harm our reputation in the industry and/or reduce our ability to accurately predict cash flow. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, 69% of our revenue was generated in the United States and 31% in the United Kingdom. We provide IT services on either a time-and-materials or a fixed-price basis. For the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, the percentage of revenue from time-and-materials and fixed-price contracts was 79% and 21%, respectively.
 
Revenue from services provided on a time-and-materials basis is derived from the number of billable hours in a period multiplied by the rates at which we bill our clients. Revenue from services provided on a fixed-price basis is recognized as efforts are expended pursuant to the percentage-of-completion method.


37


Table of Contents

Revenue also includes reimbursements of travel and out-of-pocket expenses with equivalent amounts of expense recorded in costs of revenue.
 
Most of our client contracts, including those that are on a fixed-price basis, can be terminated by our clients with or without cause on 30 to 90 days’ prior written notice. All fees for services provided by us through the date of cancellation are generally due and payable under the contract terms.
 
We have found there is a wide range in unit pricing from one client to another and from one engagement to another, driven by business need, delivery timeframes, complexity of the engagement, operating differences (such as onsite/offshore ratio), competitive environment and engagement size (or volume). As a pricing strategy to encourage clients to increase the volume of services that we provide to them, we may, on occasion, offer volume discounts. We manage our business carefully to protect our account margins and our overall profit margins. We have not experienced significant pressure from clients to reduce rates beyond what we consider to be our normal negotiation process. We find that our clients generally purchase on the basis of total value, rather than minimum cost, considering all of the factors listed above.
 
While we are subject to the effects of overall market pricing pressure, we believe that there is a fairly broad range of pricing offered by different competitors for each service we provide. We believe that no one competitor, or set of competitors, sets pricing in our industry. As a result, we do not see strong pricing pressure from competitors in our industry. We find that our unit pricing, as a result of our global delivery model, is generally competitive with other firms who operate with a predominately offshore operating model.
 
The proportion of work performed at our offshore facilities and at onsite client locations varies from period-to-period. Effort, in terms of the percentage of hours billed to clients by onsite resources, was 17% of total hours billed in each of the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, while the revenue from onsite and offshore resources accounted for 46% and 54% and 47% and 53%, during the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. We charge higher rates and incur higher compensation and other expenses for work performed at client locations in the United States and the United Kingdom than for work performed at our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka. Services performed at client locations or at our offices in the United States or the United Kingdom generate higher revenue per-capita at lower gross margins than similar services performed at our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka. We manage to a 20/80, or better, onsite-to-offshore service delivery mix and intend to manage to an efficient onsite-to-offshore service delivery ratio for the foreseeable future.
 
Costs of revenue and gross profit
 
Costs of revenue consist principally of payroll and related fringe benefits, reimbursable and non-reimbursable costs, immigration-related expenses, fees for subcontractors working on client engagements and share-based compensation expense for IT professionals including account management personnel.
 
Wage costs in India and Sri Lanka have historically been significantly lower than wage costs in the United States and Europe for comparably-skilled IT professionals. However, wages in India and Sri Lanka are increasing, which will result in increased costs for IT professionals, particularly project managers and other mid-level professionals. We may need to increase the levels of our team member compensation more rapidly than in the past to remain competitive without the ability to make corresponding increases to our billing rates. Compensation increases may reduce our profit margins, make us less competitive in pricing potential projects against those companies with lower cost resources and otherwise harm our business, operating results and financial condition. We deploy a campus hiring philosophy and encourage internal promotions to minimize the effects of wage inflation pressure and recruiting costs. Additionally, any material appreciation in the Indian or Sri Lankan rupee against the U.S. dollar or U.K. pound sterling could have a material adverse impact on our cost of services. Although we have adopted an eight quarter hedging program to minimize the effect of the Indian rupee movement on our financial condition, the hedging program may be inadequate and could cause the Company to forego benefits associated with any significant depreciation of the Indian rupee which would otherwise have had a beneficial impact on our earnings and margins, and create a competitive disadvantage compared to companies exposed to the Indian rupee but who do not hedge.


38


Table of Contents

Our revenue and gross profit are also affected by our ability to efficiently manage and utilize our IT professionals, as well as fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. We define utilization rate as the total number of days billed in a given period divided by the total available days of our IT professionals during that same period, excluding trainees. We manage employee utilization by continually monitoring project requirements and timetables to efficiently staff our projects and meet our clients’ needs. The number of IT professionals assigned to a project will vary according to the size, complexity, duration and demands of the project. An unanticipated termination of a significant project could cause us to experience a higher than expected number of unassigned IT professionals, thereby lowering our utilization rate, but such hedging program may be ineffective.
 
Operating expenses
 
Operating expenses consist primarily of payroll and related fringe benefits, commissions, share-based compensation and non-reimbursable costs, as well as promotion, communications, management, finance, administrative, occupancy, marketing and depreciation and amortization expenses. In the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, we invested in all aspects of our business, including sales, marketing, IT infrastructure, human resources programs and financial operations. Additionally, any material appreciation in the Indian or Sri Lankan rupee against the U.S. dollar or U.K. pound sterling could have a material adverse impact on our cost of operating expenses. We have adopted an eight quarter hedging program to mitigate the effect of the Indian rupee on our cost of operating expenses.
 
Other income (expense)
 
Other income (expense) includes interest income, interest expense, investment gains and losses and foreign currency transaction gains and losses. We generate interest income by investing in money market instruments, short-term investments and long-term investments. The functional currencies of our subsidiaries are their local currencies. Foreign currency gains and losses are generated primarily by fluctuations of the Indian rupee, Sri Lankan rupee and U.K. pound sterling against the U.S. dollar on intercompany transactions. We place our cash in liquid investments at highly-rated financial institutions. We believe that our credit policies reflect normal industry terms and business risk.
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
 
Our net income is subject to income tax in those countries in which we perform services and have operations, including India, Sri Lanka, the United Kingdom and the United States. In previous years, we accumulated net operating loss carry-forwards which were used to offset U.S. taxable income into fiscal 2008. We have benefited from long-term income tax holiday arrangements in both India and Sri Lanka that are offered to certain export-oriented IT services firms. As a result of these net operating losses and tax holiday arrangements, our worldwide profit has been subject to a relatively low effective tax rate as compared to the statutory rates in the countries in which we operate. The effect of the income tax holidays increased our net income in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007 by $3.9 million and $2.4 million, respectively.
 
Our effective tax rates were 21.5% and (23.6%) for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, we determined that it was more likely than not that our deferred tax assets would be realized based upon our positive cumulative operating results and our assessment of our expected future results. As a result, we released our valuation allowance and recognized a discrete income tax benefit of $5.0 million in our statement of income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. Our effective tax rate in future periods will be affected by the geographic distribution of our earnings, as well as the availability of tax holidays in India and Sri Lanka.
 
Application of critical accounting estimates and risks
 
Our consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with United States generally accepted accounting principles, or GAAP. Preparation of these financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount of revenue and expenses, assets and liabilities and


39


Table of Contents

the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities. We consider an accounting estimate to be critical to the preparation of our financial statements when both of the following are present:
 
  •  the estimate is complex in nature or requires a high degree of judgment; and
 
  •  the use of different estimates and assumptions could have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.
 
We have discussed the development and selection of our critical accounting estimates and related disclosures with the audit committee of our board of directors. Those estimates critical to the preparation of our consolidated financial statements are listed below.
 
Revenue recognition
 
Our revenue is derived from a variety of IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing services. Our services are performed under both time-and-material and fixed-price arrangements. All revenue is recognized pursuant to GAAP. Revenue is recognized as work is performed and amounts are earned in accordance with the SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin, or SAB, No. 101, Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements, as amended by SAB No. 104, Revenue Recognition. We consider amounts to be earned once evidence of an arrangement has been obtained, services are delivered, fees are fixed or determinable and collectability is reasonably assured. For contracts with fees billed on a time-and-materials basis, we generally recognize revenue as the service is performed.
 
Fixed-price engagements are accounted for under the percentage-of-completion method in accordance with the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Statement of Position, or SOP, 81-1, Accounting for Performance of Construction-Type and Certain Production-Type Contracts. Under the percentage-of-completion method, we estimate the percentage-of-completion by comparing the actual number of work days performed to date to the estimated total number of days required to complete each engagement. The use of the percentage-of-completion method requires significant judgment relative to estimating total contract revenue and costs to completion, including assumptions and estimates relative to the length of time to complete the project, the nature and complexity of the work to be performed and anticipated changes in other engagement-related costs. Estimates of total contract revenue and costs to completion are continually monitored during the term of the contract and are subject to revision as the contract progresses. Unforeseen circumstances may arise during an engagement requiring us to revise our original estimates and may cause the estimated profitability to decrease. When revisions in estimated contract revenue and efforts are determined, such adjustments are recorded in the period in which they are first identified.
 
Income taxes
 
The calculation of our tax liabilities involves dealing with uncertainties in the application of complex tax regulations in multiple jurisdictions. We record liabilities for estimated tax obligations in the United States and other tax jurisdictions. Determining the consolidated provision for income tax expense, tax reserves, deferred tax assets and liabilities and related valuation allowance, if any, involves judgment. We calculate and provide for income taxes in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate, including India, Sri Lanka, the United States and the United Kingdom, and this can involve complex issues which require an extended period of time to resolve. In the year of any such resolution, additional adjustments may need to be recorded that result in increases or decreases to income. Our overall effective tax rate fluctuates due to a variety of factors, including arm’s-length prices for our intercompany transactions, changes in the geographic mix or estimated level of annual pretax income, as well as newly enacted tax legislation in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate.
 
Applicable transfer pricing regulations require that transactions between and among our subsidiaries be conducted at an arm’s-length price. On an ongoing basis we estimate appropriate arm’s-length prices and use such estimates for our intercompany transactions.
 
At each financial statement date we evaluate whether a valuation allowance is needed to reduce our deferred tax assets to the amount that is more likely than not to be realized. This evaluation considers the


40


Table of Contents

weight of all available evidence, including both future taxable income and ongoing prudent and feasible tax planning strategies. In the event that we determine that we will not be able to realize a recognized deferred tax asset in the future, an adjustment to the valuation allowance would be made resulting in a decrease in income in the period such determination was made. Likewise, should we determine that we will be able to realize all or part of an unrecognized deferred tax asset in the future, an adjustment to the valuation allowance would be made resulting in an increase to income (or equity in the case of excess stock option tax benefits).
 
We have benefited from long-term income tax holiday arrangements in both India and Sri Lanka. Our Indian subsidiary is an export-oriented company that is entitled to claim a tax exemption for a period of ten years for each Software Technology Park, or STP, it operates. All of our STP holidays will be completely phased out by March 2010 and, at that time, any profits could be fully taxable at the Indian statutory rate, which is currently 34%. Although we believe we have complied with, and are eligible for, the STP holidays, it is possible that upon examination the government of India may deem us ineligible for the STP holidays or make adjustments to the profit level. In anticipation of the phase-out of the STP holidays, we intend to locate at least a portion of our Indian operations in areas designated as Special Economic Zones, or SEZs, to secure additional tax exemptions for a period of ten years, which could extend to 15 years if we meet certain reinvestment requirements. Our Sri Lankan subsidiary has been granted an income tax holiday by the Sri Lanka Board of Investment which expires on March 31, 2019. The tax holiday is contingent upon a certain level of job creation by us during a given timetable. Any inability to meet the agreed upon level or timetable for new job creation would jeopardize this holiday arrangement. Primarily as a result of these tax holiday arrangements, our worldwide profit has been subject to a relatively low effective tax rate, and the loss of any of these arrangements would increase our overall effective tax rate.
 
It is our intent to reinvest all accumulated earnings from India and Sri Lanka back into their respective operations to fund growth. As a component of this strategy, pursuant to Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 23, Accounting for Income Taxes-Special Areas, we do not accrue incremental U.S. taxes on Indian, Sri Lanka, or U.K. earnings as these earnings are considered to be permanently or indefinitely reinvested outside of the United States. If such earnings were to be repatriated in the future or are no longer deemed to be indefinitely reinvested, we will accrue the applicable amount of taxes associated with such earnings, which would increase our overall effective tax rate.
 
Share-based compensation
 
Under the fair value recognition provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standard (“SFAS”) No. 123R, Share-Based Payment , share-based compensation cost is measured at the grant date based on the value of the award and is recognized over the vesting period. Determining the fair value of the share-based awards at the grant date requires judgment, including estimating the expected term over which stock options will be outstanding before they are exercised, the expected volatility of our stock, the number of share-based awards that are expected to be forfeited and due to a recent tax law change in India, the expected exercise proceeds for share-based awards subject to the Indian fringe benefit tax. If actual results differ significantly from our estimates, share-based compensation expense and our results of operations could be materially impacted.
 
Effective April 1, 2007, a new fringe benefit tax was introduced in India that obligates us to pay, upon the exercise or distribution of shares under a stock-based compensation award, a non-income related tax on the appreciation of the award from date of grant to the date of total vesting. We intend to collect the cash amount of the fringe benefit tax from our team members. However under GAAP, the stock-based Indian fringe benefit tax expense is required to be recorded as an operating expense and the related cash recovery of such tax from our team members is required to be recorded to stockholders’ equity as proceeds from a stock-based compensation award. Our future operating results may experience volatility as a result of the timing of exercise or distribution of shares related to stock-based compensation awards to our team members who worked or are working in India. The amount of stock-based Indian fringe benefit tax expense recorded during our fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 was immaterial.


41


Table of Contents

We established a stock appreciation rights plan, or SAR Plan, during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. Prior to our IPO in August 2007, under the terms of the SAR Plan, all stock appreciation rights, or SARs, were settled in cash and the compensation cost and future liability for these SARs were determined using the fair value at the grant date and remeasuring the fair value of the vested SARs at the close of each reporting period. After our IPO, we are obligated under the SAR Plan to settle all SARs in shares of our common stock. Therefore, the SARs are now equity classified and are no longer remeasured. The liability measured as of our IPO date was $1.4 million and this amount has been reclassified as a component of additional paid in capital subsequent to our IPO.
 
Results of operations
 
Fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 compared to fiscal year ended March 31, 2007
 
The following table presents an overview of our results of operations for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007:
 
                                 
    Fiscal Year Ended March 31,              
    2008     2007     $ Change     % Change  
    (Dollars in thousands)  
 
Revenue
  $ 165,198     $ 124,660     $ 40,538       32.5 %
Costs of revenue
    92,847       68,031       24,816       36.5  
                                 
Gross profit
    72,351       56,629       15,722       27.8  
Operating expenses
    52,972       42,478       10,494       24.7  
                                 
Income from operations
    19,379       14,151       5,228       36.9  
Other income
    3,249       1,209       2,040       168.7  
                                 
Income before income tax expense (benefit)
    22,628       15,360       7,268       47.3  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    4,857       (3,630 )     8,487       (233.8 )
                                 
Net income
  $ 17,771     $ 18,990     $ (1,219 )     (6.4 )%
                                 
 
Revenue
 
Revenue increased by 32.5%, or $40.5 million, from $124.7 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $165.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. This increase is primarily attributed to greater demand for our IT services delivered through our global model. Revenue from clients existing as of March 31, 2007 increased in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 by $34.3 million and revenue from new clients added since March 31, 2007 was $6.2 million or 3.8% of total revenue for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. In addition, revenue from European clients in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 increased by $19.2 million, or 60%, as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. Revenue from North American clients increased by $21.1 million, or 23%, as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. We had 56 active clients as of March 31, 2008 as compared to 41 active clients as of March 31, 2007. In addition, we experienced strong demand across all of our industry verticals for an increasingly broad range of services, with our BFSI and communications and technology industry verticals experiencing fiscal year-over-year revenue growth of 43% and 34%, respectively.
 
Costs of revenue
 
Costs of revenue increased from $68.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $92.8 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, an increase of $24.8 million, or 36.5%. A significant portion of the increase was attributable to an increase in the number of our IT professionals to support revenue growth, from 3,312 as of March 31, 2007 to 4,036 as of March 31, 2008, resulting in additional compensation and benefits costs of $22.1 million. The net effects of a weaker U.S. dollar against the Indian rupee during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, also increased our costs of revenue by approximately $3.7 million which were partially offset by $0.2 million gain recorded on foreign


42


Table of Contents

currency forward contracts as part of our hedging program. These increases were partially offset by a decrease in share-based compensation expense of $0.6 million and a decrease in subcontractors costs of $0.7 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Gross profit
 
Our gross profit increased by $15.7 million or 27.8%, to $72.4 million for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to $56.6 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, primarily driven by higher utilization rates. As a percentage of revenue, gross margin was 43.8% and 45.4% in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively.
 
Operating expenses
 
Operating expenses increased from $42.5 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $53.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, an increase of $10.5 million, or 24.7%. The increase in our operating expenses in absolute dollars is due to the increase of $3.4 million in compensation and benefit costs and $0.7 million in share-based compensation expense associated with our non-IT professionals and an additional $3.9 million in infrastructure expenses to accommodate the increase in the number of IT professionals in Asia. In addition, operating expenses during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 increased by $0.6 million from the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 with respect to the incremental non-payroll costs associated with being a public company. The net effects of a weaker U.S. dollar against the Indian rupee during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, also increased our operating expenses by approximately $1.9 million. These increases were partially offset by the $0.1 million gain recorded on foreign currency forward contracts as part of our hedging program. As a percentage of revenue, our operating expenses decreased from 34.1% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to 32.1% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
Income from operations
 
Income from operations increased from $14.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $19.4 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, an increase of $5.2 million or 36.9%. This increase in income from operations resulted from higher overall gross profit and lower operating expenses as a percentage of revenue. As a percentage of revenue, income from operations increased marginally from 11.4% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to 11.7% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, primarily due to our lower operating expenses as a percentage of revenue, offset by a lower gross margin.
 
Other income
 
Other income increased from $1.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $3.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. The increase is primarily attributed to an increase in interest income of $2.7 million, from $1.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $3.9 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, partially offset by the increase in foreign currency transaction losses of $0.8 million, primarily due to the effects of a weaker U.S. dollar against the Indian rupee and our hedging program. The increase in interest income is due to an increase in average cash and cash equivalents and our investment balances during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as a result of our IPO, when compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
 
We had an income tax (benefit) of ($3.6) million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 compared to an income tax expense of $4.9 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. Our effective tax rate was an income tax (benefit) rate of (23.6%) for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, which is largely due to the recognition of a discrete income tax benefit of approximately $5.0 million due to the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance in our statement of income during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, as compared to an effective tax rate of 21.5% for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.


43


Table of Contents

Net income
 
Net income decreased from $19.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 to $17.8 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. This decrease was driven primarily by the recognition of a discrete income tax benefit due to the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, which offset an increase in income from operations and other income during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
Fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 compared to fiscal year ended March 31, 2006
 
The following table presents an overview of our results of operations for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006:
 
                                 
    Fiscal Year Ended March 31,              
    2007     2006     $ Change     % Change  
    (Dollars in thousands)  
 
Revenue
  $ 124,660     $ 76,935     $ 47,725       62.0 %
Costs of revenue
    68,031       43,417       24,614       56.7  
                                 
Gross profit
    56,629       33,518       23,111       69.0  
Operating expenses
    42,478       32,925       9,553       29.0  
                                 
Income from operations
    14,151       593       13,558       2,286.3  
Other income
    1,209       1,564       (355 )     (22.7 )
                                 
Income before income tax expense (benefit)
    15,360       2,157       13,203       612.1  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    (3,630 )     176       (3,806 )     (2,162.5 )
                                 
Net income
  $ 18,990     $ 1,981     $ 17,009       858.6 %
                                 
 
Revenue
 
Revenue increased by 62.0%, or $47.7 million, from $76.9 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $124.7 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. This increase is primarily attributed to greater demand for our IT services delivered through our global model. Revenue from clients existing as of March 31, 2006 increased in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 by $43.9 million and revenue from new clients added since March 31, 2006 was $3.8 million or 3.0% of total revenue for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. In addition, revenue from European clients for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 increased by $21.3 million as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. Revenue from North American clients for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 increased by $26.3 million as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. We had 41 active clients as of March 31, 2007 as compared to 46 active clients as of March 31, 2006.
 
Costs of revenue
 
Costs of revenue increased from $43.4 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $68.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, an increase of $24.6 million, or 56.7%. A significant portion of the increase was attributable to an increase in the number of IT professionals to support revenue growth, from 2,113 as of March 31, 2006 to 3,312 as of March 31, 2007, resulting in additional compensation and benefits costs of $21.5 million. We also experienced increases in subcontractor costs working on client engagements of $2.5 million and share-based compensation expense of $0.7 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. The net effects of a stronger U.S. dollar against the Indian rupee during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006, decreased our costs of revenue by approximately $0.3 million, partially offset by the impact of our hedged positions of $0.2 million.


44


Table of Contents

Gross profit
 
Our gross profit increased from $33.5 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $56.6 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, an increase of $23.1 million, or 69.0%. As a percentage of revenue, gross margin was 45.4% and 43.6% in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively.
 
Operating expenses
 
Operating expenses increased from $32.9 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $42.5 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, an increase of $9.6 million, or 29.0%. The increase in our operating expenses in absolute dollars is due to the growth in our headcount in non-IT professionals resulting in an increase of $2.8 million in compensation and benefit costs, $0.4 million in share-based compensation expense and an additional $2.6 million in infrastructure expenses to accommodate the increase in the number of IT professionals in Asia. In addition, we incurred an additional $3.7 million in professional services and travel expenses to establish a financial shared-services center in India to provide back-office transactional support to our Indian, U.K. and U.S. finance organizations and to formalize our internal control framework in anticipation of meeting the standards set forth by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006.
 
In the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006, we invested in sales, marketing, IT infrastructure, human resource programs and financial operations. Our investments in our infrastructure, principally in staff and systems, provided us with higher economies of scale and supported our revenue growth. As a result, our operating expenses, as a percentage of revenue, decreased from 42.8% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to 34.1% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Income from operations
 
Income from operations increased from $0.6 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $14.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, an increase of $13.6 million. This increase in income from operations resulted from higher overall gross profit and lower operating expenses as a percentage of revenue. As a percentage of revenue, income from operations increased from 0.8% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to 11.4% in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Other income
 
Other income decreased from $1.6 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $1.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. The decrease is attributed to the absence of one-time investment gains of $0.9 million, partially offset by an increase in interest income by $0.4 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. The increase in interest income is due to an increase in average cash and equivalents during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 when compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006.
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
 
We had income tax expense of $0.2 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 compared to an income tax (benefit) of ($3.6) million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. This decrease in income tax expense is largely related to the recognition of a discrete income tax benefit of $5.0 million due to the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance in our statement of income during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. This was partially offset by the provision of $1.4 million in income taxes in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. Also reflected in the provision are higher U.S. federal and state income taxes due to higher U.S. profit levels. Our effective tax rate was 8.1% for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 as compared to an income tax (benefit) rate of (23.6%) for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.


45


Table of Contents

Net income
 
Net income increased from $2.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 to $19.0 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. This increase was driven by the increase in revenue, offset by comparatively smaller increases in costs of revenue and operating expenses and the recognition of a discrete income tax benefit of $5.0 million due to the release of our deferred tax asset valuation allowance.
 
Liquidity and capital resources
 
We completed an IPO of our common stock on August 8, 2007. In connection with our IPO, we issued and sold 4,400,000 shares of common stock at a public offering price of $14.00 per share. We received net proceeds of $52.8 million after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions of $4.3 million and offering costs of $4.5 million.
 
We have financed our operations from sales of shares of equity securities, including preferred and common stock and from cash from operations. We have not borrowed against our existing or preceding credit facilities.
 
As of March 31, 2008, we had cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments of $81.9 million, of which $6.7 million was held outside the United States. There were foreign currency derivative contracts with a notional amount of $73.1 million outstanding as at March 31, 2008. We have a $3.0 million revolving line of credit with a bank. This facility provides a $1.5 million sub-limit for letters of credit. The revolving line of credit also includes a foreign exchange line of credit requiring 15% of foreign exchange contracts to be supported by our borrowing base. Advances under our credit facility accrue interest at an annual rate equal to the prime rate minus 0.25%. Our credit facility is secured by certain U.S. assets in favor of the bank and contains financial and reporting covenants and limitations. We are currently in compliance with all covenants contained in our credit facility and believe that our credit facility provides sufficient flexibility so that we will remain in compliance with its terms. As of March 31, 2008, we have no amounts outstanding under this credit facility. Our credit facility expires on September 30, 2008.
 
The funds held at locations outside of the United States are for future operating expenses and expansion of our business, and we have no intention of repatriating those funds. We are not, however, restricted in repatriating those funds back to the United States, if necessary. If we decide to remit funds from India to the United States in the form of dividends, they would be subject to Indian dividend distribution tax, which is currently at a rate of approximately 17%, as well as U.S. corporate income tax on the dividends.
 
On January 31, 2008, we purchased, from two banking institutions, multiple foreign currency forward contracts designed to hedge fluctuation in the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling. The contracts have an aggregate notional amount of approximately 2.9 billion Indian rupees (approximately $73.4 million) and will settle on a monthly basis over a 21 month period ending December 31, 2009. We have the obligation to settle these contracts based upon the Reserve Bank of India published Indian rupee exchange rates. The approximate weighted average Indian rupee rate associated with these contracts is 39.56.
 
As of March 31, 2008, our long-term investments included $8.0 million of auction-rate securities. All of these auction rate securities are AAA or Aaa rated by one or more of the major credit rating agencies. Furthermore, 85% of these auction rate securities are issued by state agencies which issue student loans, of which approximately 97% are guaranteed by the U.S. government under the Federal Family Education Loan Program (FFELP). The remaining 15% of these auction rate securities consists of investments in municipal bonds and preferred shares in a closed end mutual fund. As of March 31, 2008, we experienced failed auctions with respect to all of our auction rate securities, resulting in our inability to sell these securities. However, this does not represent a default by the issuer of the auction rate security. Upon an auction failure, the interest rate does not reset at a market rate but instead resets based on a formula contained in the security, which is generally higher than the current market rate. We have assessed each failed auction and believe that none of the underlying issuers of auction rate securities are presently at risk for default. At March 31, 2008, we recorded, as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income, a temporary impairment charge of $0.4 million, or $0.3 million, net of tax, related to our auction rate securities.


46


Table of Contents

We believe we will be able to recover our investment in auction-rate municipal debt securities due to: (i) the strength of the underlying collateral, substantially backed by FFELP, (ii) credit rating of the securities held by us and (iii) recent news that certain municipal issuers of auction-rate securities with failed auctions have announced plans to call such securities. All of the auction-rate municipal debt securities held by us are callable by the issuer at par value. If future auctions continue to fail, we believe the issuers of the auction-rate securities held by us will begin to call these securities to avoid paying the higher penalty interest rates associated with failed auctions. However, it could take until the final maturity of the underlying security (up to 37 years) to realize our investments’ recorded value. Based on our expected operating cash flows, and our other sources of cash, we do not anticipate the potential lack of liquidity on these investments will affect our ability to execute current and planned operations and needs for the foreseeable future.
 
We believe that our available cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments and cash flows expected to be generated from operations will be adequate to satisfy our current and planned operations for the foreseeable future. Our ability to expand and grow our business in accordance with current plans and to meet our long-term capital requirements will depend on many factors, including the rate, if any, at which our cash flow increases, our continued intent not to repatriate earnings from India and Sri Lanka and the availability of public and private debt and equity financing. To the extent we decide to pursue one or more significant strategic acquisitions, we may incur debt or sell additional equity to finance those acquisitions.
 
Anticipated capital expenditures
 
We are constructing a facility as part of a planned campus on a 6.3 acre site in Hyderabad, India. We expect to construct and build out this facility, which will be approximately 340,000 square feet, over the next two fiscal years at a total estimated cost of $31.0 million, of which we anticipate spending approximately $15.0 million during the fiscal year ending March 31, 2009. Through March 31, 2008, we have spent $7.7 million toward the completion of this facility with approximately $7.2 million spent during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. Other capital expenditures during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 were approximately $5.3 million. We expect other capital expenditures in the normal course of business during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2009 to be approximately $6.0 million, primarily for leasehold improvements, capital equipment and purchased software.
 
Cash flows
 
The following table summarizes our cash flows for the periods presented:
 
                         
    Fiscal Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
    (In thousands)  
 
Net cash provided by operating activities
  $ 13,440     $ 11,120     $ 1,892  
Net cash used for investing activities
    (73,147 )     (6,364 )     (865 )
Net cash provided by financing activities
    55,434       9,843       659  
Effect of exchange rate on cash
    241       243       145  
                         
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
    (4,032 )     14,842       1,831  
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of fiscal year
    45,079       30,237       28,406  
                         
Cash and cash equivalents, end of fiscal year
  $ 41,047     $ 45,079     $ 30,237  
                         
 
Net cash provided by operating activities
 
Net cash provided by operating activities was $13.4 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to $11.1 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. This increase was attributable to a decrease in our trade accounts receivable by $6.1 million as a result of our increased collection efforts, a decrease in deferred income taxes of $5.4 million, an increase in accrued compensation and benefits of $1.1 million and an increase in depreciation and amortization of $0.7 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. These sources of cash were partially offset by decreases in net income of $1.2 million, an increase in prepaid and other current assets of $3.3 million,


47


Table of Contents

an increase in other long-term assets of $3.8 million and a decrease in accounts payable of $2.8 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Net cash provided by operating activities was $11.1 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to $1.9 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. This increase was attributable to our increase in net income of $17.0 million, an increase in accounts payable of $2.0 million, an increase in share-based compensation expense of $1.1 million and a $0.9 million reduction on the one-time gain on the sale of an equity investment during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. These increases were partially offset by an increase in trade receivables by $6.1 million, an increase in deferred income taxes due to the release of our valuation allowance of $5.0 million and a decrease in deferred revenue by $0.7 million.
 
Net cash used for investing activities
 
Net cash used for investing activities was $73.1 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to $6.4 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. The increase was due to investments of cash and IPO proceeds into short-term investments of $79.8 million and long-term investments of $23.9 million, partially offset by proceeds from sale or maturity of short-term investments of $40.9 million and long-term investments of $4.7 million. Additionally, we invested $12.5 million in facilities and equipment including $7.2 million on our Hyderabad campus during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, as compared to total capital expenditures of $6.0 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. There was also an increase in restricted cash of $1.8 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. Further, we received proceeds from the sale of equity investments of $0.5 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, with no such transaction in the fiscal year ended March 31 2008.
 
Net cash used for investing activities was $6.4 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to $0.9 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. We invested $6.0 million on facilities and equipment during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, as compared to total capital expenditures of $1.4 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. In our fiscal year ended March 31. 2006, we contained our facilities and equipment spending and made an effort to redeploy existing equipment due to lower utilization at our global delivery centers in India and Sri Lanka, particularly during the first half of the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. There was also an increase in restricted cash of $0.9 million in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006.
 
Net cash provided by financing activities
 
Net cash provided by financing activities was $55.4 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, as compared to $9.8 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. The increase was due to the gross proceeds from our IPO of $61.6 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to proceeds from the sale of common stock of $11.0 million, net of expenses, during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. In addition, we received proceeds of $0.4 million from stock option exercises during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to proceeds of $0.5 million from other stock sales and stock option exercises during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. We also recognized tax benefits of $0.4 million on stock option exercises during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. This increase was partially offset by the $7.0 million of cash used to fund our IPO during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 as compared to $1.8 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007.
 
Net cash provided by financing activities was $9.8 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, as compared to $0.7 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. The increase was due to the proceeds of $11.0 million, net of expenses, on the sale of common stock to a wholly-owned subsidiary of BT. In addition, we received proceeds of $0.5 million from other stock sales and stock option exercises during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007 as compared to $0.9 million during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006. In the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, we incurred $1.8 million of costs to fund our IPO.


48


Table of Contents

Contractual obligations
 
We have no long-term debt and have various contractual obligations and commercial commitments. The following table sets forth our future contractual obligations and commercial commitments as of March 31, 2008.
 
                                         
    Payments Due by Period  
          Less Than
    1-3
    3-5
       
    Total     1 Year     Years     Years     5+ Years  
    (In thousands)  
 
Operating lease obligations(1)
  $ 14,014     $ 4,425     $ 7,458     $ 2,131     $  
Defined benefit plan(2)
    3,837       113       434       710       2,580  
Capital Commitments(3)
    11,022       11,022                    
                                         
Total
  $ 28,873     $ 15,560     $ 7,892     $ 2,841     $ 2,580  
                                         
 
 
(1) Our obligations under our operating leases consist of future payments related to our real estate leases.
 
(2) We accrue and contribute to benefit funds covering our employees in India and Sri Lanka. The amounts in the table represent the expected benefits to be paid out over the next ten years. We are not able to quantify expected benefit payments beyond ten years with any certainty.
 
(3) Relates to construction of our campus in Hyderabad, India, net of advances.
 
Off-balance sheet arrangements
 
We do not have any investments in special purpose entities or undisclosed borrowings or debt. We had cash-secured letters of credit totaling approximately $0.6 million at March 31, 2008.
 
We have entered into foreign currency derivative contracts with the objective of limiting our exposure to changes in the Indian rupee as described below in “Qualitative and Quantitative Disclosures about Market Risk.”
 
During the quarter ended March 31, 2008, we adopted an expanded foreign currency hedging program to further mitigate the risks of volatility in the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling, although such hedging program may not be effective. The expanded program contemplates a partially hedged position for a rolling eight quarter period.
 
Other than these foreign currency derivative contracts, we have not entered into off-balance sheet transactions, arrangements or other relationships with unconsolidated entities or other persons that are likely to affect liquidity or the availability of or requirements for capital resources.
 
Recent accounting pronouncements
 
In June 2006, the FASB issued Financial Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes-and interpretation of SFAS No. 109 (FIN 48), which clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes by prescribing a minimum recognition threshold for a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return that is required to be met before being recognized in the financial statements. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, measurement, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. On April 1, 2007, we adopted FIN 48. The cumulative effect of adopting FIN 48 of $0.1 million was recorded as a reduction of beginning retained earnings.
 
In March 2008, the FASB issued Statement No. 161, Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities , an amendment of FASB Statement No. 133. (SFAS No. 161). SFAS No. 161 requires enhanced disclosures about an entity’s derivative instruments and hedging activities with a view toward improving the transparency of financial reporting, and is effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years and interim periods beginning after November 15, 2008, with early application encouraged. SFAS No. 161 encourages, but does not require, comparative disclosures for earlier periods at initial adoption. We are currently evaluating the impact of adopting SFAS No. 161 on our consolidated financial statements.
 
In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 160, Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements — an amendment of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51 (SFAS No. 160). SFAS No. 160


49


Table of Contents

establishes accounting and reporting standards for ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent, the amount of consolidated net income attributable to the parent and to the noncontrolling interest, changes in a parent’s ownership interest, and the valuation of retained noncontrolling equity investments when a subsidiary is deconsolidated. SFAS No. 160 also establishes disclosure requirements that clearly identify and distinguish between the interests of the parent and the interests of the noncontrolling owners. SFAS No. 160 is effective for us beginning April 1, 2009. We are currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 160 will have on our consolidated financial statements.
 
In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities, Including an Amendment of FASB Statement No. 115 (SFAS No. 159), which is effective for our financial statements beginning April 1, 2008. SFAS No. 159 permits entities to measure eligible financial assets, financial liabilities and firm commitments at fair value, on an instrument-by-instrument basis, that are otherwise not permitted to be accounted for at fair value under other GAAP. The fair value measurement election is irrevocable and subsequent changes in fair value must be recorded in earnings. We are currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 159 will have on our consolidated financial statements.
 
In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements (SFAS No. 157). SFAS No. 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS No. 157 does not require any new fair value measurements, but provides guidance on how to measure fair value by providing a fair value hierarchy used to classify the source of the information. SFAS No. 157 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. However, on February 12, 2008, the FASB issued FSP 157-2 (the FSP) which delays the effective date of SFAS No. 157 for all nonfinancial assets and nonfinancial liabilities, except those that are recognized or disclosed at fair value in the financial statements on a recurring basis (at least annually). The FSP partially defers the effective date of SFAS No. 157 to fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008, and interim periods within those fiscal years for items within the scope of the FSP. We are currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 157 and the FSP will have on our consolidated financial statements.
 
Item 7A.    Quantitative and qualitative disclosures about market risk
 
Foreign currency exchange rate risk
 
We are exposed to foreign currency exchange rate risk in the ordinary course of business. We have historically entered into, and in the future we may enter into, foreign currency derivative contracts to minimize the impact of foreign currency fluctuations on both foreign currency denominated assets and forecasted expenses. The purpose of this foreign exchange policy is to protect us from the risk that the recognition of and eventual cash flows related to Indian rupee denominated expenses might be affected by changes in exchange rates. Certain of these contracts meet the criteria for hedge accounting as cash flow hedges under SFAS 133 , Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities .
 
We evaluate our foreign exchange policy on an ongoing basis to assess our ability to address foreign exchange exposures on our balance sheet and operating cash flows from the U.K. pound sterling, Indian rupee, and the Sri Lankan rupee.
 
During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, we adopted a foreign currency hedging program to mitigate the risks of volatility in the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling. The U.S. dollar equivalent market value of the outstanding foreign currency derivative contracts as of March 31, 2008 was $71.6 million. There were no outstanding foreign currency derivative contracts as of March 31, 2007.
 
Assuming the amount of expenditures by our Indian operations were consistent with fiscal 2008 and the timing of the funding of these operations were to remain consistent during our fiscal year ending March 31, 2009, a constant increase or decrease in the exchange rate between the Indian rupee and the U.S. dollar during the fiscal 2009 of 10% would impact our net income by $5.1 million excluding the effect of foreign currency derivative contracts which would offset 85% of the impact.


50


Table of Contents

Interest rate risk
 
We do not believe we are exposed to material direct risks associated with changes in interest rates other than with our cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments and long-term investments. As of March 31, 2008, we had $99.1 million in cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments and long-term investments, the interest income from which is affected by changes in short-term interest rates. Our investment securities primarily consist of auction rate securities, commercial paper and corporate debts. All of our investments in debt securities are classified as “available-for-sale” and are recorded at fair value. Our “available-for-sale” investments are sensitive to changes in interest rates. Interest rate changes would result in a change in the net fair value of these financial instruments due to the difference between the market interest rate and the market interest rate at the date of purchase of the financial instrument. A 10% decrease in market interest rates at March 31, 2008 would impact the net fair value of such interest-sensitive financial instruments by $0.3 million. We had no debt outstanding as of March 31, 2008.
 
Concentration of credit risk
 
Financial instruments which potentially expose us to concentrations of credit risk primarily consist of cash and cash equivalents, short-term investments and long-term investments, accounts receivable and unbilled accounts receivable. We place our temporary cash in liquid investments at highly-rated financial institutions. We believe that our credit policies reflect normal industry terms and business risk. We do not anticipate non-performance by the counterparties and, accordingly, do not require collateral. Credit losses and write-offs of accounts receivable balances have historically not been material to our financial statements and have not exceeded our expectations.
 
As of March 31, 2008, our long-term investments included $8.0 million of auction-rate securities. All of these auction rate securities are AAA or Aaa rated by one or more of the major credit rating agencies. Furthermore, 85% of these auction rate securities are issued by state agencies which issue student loans, of which approximately 97% are guaranteed by the U.S. government under the FFELP. The remaining 15% of these auction rate securities consists of investments in municipal bonds and preferred shares in a closed end mutual fund. As of March 31, 2008, we had experienced failed auctions with respect to our auction rate securities, resulting our inability to sell these securities. As a result, our ability to liquidate and fully recover the carrying value of our investments in the near term may be impacted. We believe that our available cash and cash equivalents, short term investments and cash flows expected to be generated from operations will be adequate to satisfy our current and planned operations for the foreseeable future.


51


 

Item 8.    Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Index to Consolidated Financial Statements
 
         
    Page
 
    53  
       
    54  
    55  
    56  
    57  
    58  


52


Table of Contents

 
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
 
Board of Directors and Shareholders
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries:
 
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of March 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in stockholders’ equity (deficit) and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended March 31, 2008. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.
 
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries as of March 31, 2008 and 2007, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended March 31, 2008, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.
 
As discussed in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for share-based payments effective April 1, 2005.
 
/s/   KPMG LLP
 
Boston, Massachusetts
May 29, 2008


53


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Consolidated Balance Sheets
 
                 
    March 31,
    March 31,
 
    2008     2007  
    (In thousands, except share and per share amounts)  
 
ASSETS
Current assets:
               
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 41,047     $ 45,079  
Short-term investments
    40,816        
Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $653 and $420 at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
    34,716       28,588  
Unbilled accounts receivable
    4,233       2,422  
Prepaid expenses
    4,025       1,862  
Deferred income taxes
    901       3,094  
Other current assets
    6,349       3,681  
                 
Total current assets
    132,087       84,726  
Property and equipment, net
    16,833       7,541  
Long-term investments
    17,091       41  
Restricted cash
    4,361       1,588  
Deferred income taxes
    4,429       1,946  
Other long-term assets
    5,969       3,477  
                 
Total assets
  $ 180,770     $ 99,319  
                 
LIABILITIES, REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Current liabilities:
               
Accounts payable
  $ 3,726     $ 4,414  
Accrued employee compensation and benefits
    10,424       6,999  
Accrued expenses — other
    8,375       4,338  
Deferred revenue
    351       877  
Income taxes payable
    403       1,163  
Accrued liabilities — stock appreciation rights
          1,170  
                 
Total current liabilities
    23,279       18,961  
Long-term liabilities
    1,657       237  
                 
Total liabilities
    24,936       19,198  
                 
Redeemable convertible preferred stock, at accreted redemption value:
               
Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock, $0.01 par value. Authorized, issued and outstanding zero and 4,043,582 shares at liquidation preference at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
          13,500  
Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock, $0.01 par value. Authorized zero and 8,749,900 shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; issued and outstanding zero and 8,647,043 shares at liquidation preference at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
          15,132  
Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock, $0.01 par value. Authorized, issued and outstanding zero and 12,807,624 shares at liquidation preference at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
          12,230  
Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock, $0.01 par value. Authorized, issued and outstanding zero and 7,458,494 shares at liquidation preference at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
          20,000  
                 
Total redeemable convertible preferred stock
          60,862  
                 
Commitments and guarantees
               
Stockholders’ equity:
               
Undesignated preferred stock, $0.01 par value; Authorized 5,000,000 and 29,016,038 shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; issued zero shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007
           
Common stock, $0.01 par value; Authorized 120,000,000 and 80,000,000 shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; issued 23,427,976 and 7,420,646 shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively; outstanding 23,008,411 and 7,001,081 shares at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively
    234       74  
Treasury stock, 419,565 common shares, at cost
    (442 )     (442 )
Additional paid-in capital
    137,774       19,205  
Accumulated earnings
    18,428       752  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
    (160 )     (330 )
                 
Total stockholders’ equity
    155,834       19,259  
                 
Total liabilities, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ equity
  $ 180,770     $ 99,319  
                 
 
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements


54


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Consolidated Statements of Income
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
    (In thousands, except per share amounts)  
 
Revenue
  $ 165,198     $ 124,660     $ 76,935  
Costs of revenue
    92,847       68,031       43,417  
                         
Gross profit
    72,351       56,629       33,518  
                         
Operating expenses:
                       
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    52,972       42,478       32,925  
                         
Income from operations
    19,379       14,151       593  
Other income (expense):
                       
Interest income, net
    3,917       1,246       800  
Gain on sale of investments
                927  
Foreign currency transaction gains (losses)
    (732 )     125       (193 )
Other, net
    64       (162 )     30  
                         
Total other income
    3,249       1,209       1,564  
                         
Income before income tax expense (benefit)
    22,628       15,360       2,157  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    4,857       (3,630 )     176  
                         
Net income
  $ 17,771     $ 18,990     $ 1,981  
                         
Net income per share of common stock
                       
Basic
  $ 0.83     $ 1.09     $ 0.12  
                         
Diluted
  $ 0.76     $ 1.03     $ 0.11  
                         
 
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements


55


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit)
 
                                                                                         
                                        Notes
                         
                                        Receivable
          Accumulated
    Total
    Total
 
                            Additional
          from
    Accumulated
    Other
    Stockholder’s
    Comprehensive
 
    Common Stock     Treasury Stock     Paid-in
    Deferred
    Employee
    Earnings
    Comprehensive
    Equity
    Income
 
    Shares     Amount     Shares     Amount     Capital     Earnings     Stockholders     (Deficit)     Loss     (Deficit)     (Loss)  
    (In thousands, except share amounts)  
 
Balance at March 31, 2005
    5,984,117     $ 60       (419,565 )   $ (442 )   $ 3,273     $ (71 )   $ (49 )   $ (20,219 )   $ (451 )   $ (17,899 )   $ 1,193  
                                                                                         
Accrued interest on notes receivable from employees
                                        (2 )                 (2 )        
Accretion of preferred stock issuance cost
                            (56 )                             (56 )        
Proceeds from sale of common stock
    266,030       2                   764                               766          
Proceeds from the exercise of stock options
    80,917       1                   108                               109          
Share-based compensation
                            1,516       71                         1,587          
Cumulative translation adjustment, net of taxes
                                                    (96 )     (96 )     (96 )
Net income
                                              1,981             1,981       1,981  
                                                                                         
Balance at March 31, 2006
    6,331,064     $ 63       (419,565 )   $ (442 )   $ 5,605     $     $ (51 )   $ (18,238 )   $ (547 )   $ (13,610 )   $ 1,885  
                                                                                         
Accrued interest on notes receivable from employees
                                        (2 )                 (2 )        
Repayment of principal and accrued interest on notes
                                        53                   53          
Accretion of preferred stock issuance cost
                            (48 )                             (48 )        
Proceeds from sale of common stock
    1,006,669       10                   11,410                               11,420          
Proceeds from the exercise of stock options
    82,913       1                   128                               129          
Share-based compensation
                            1,962                               1,962          
Adjustment to initially apply SFAS No. 158
                                                    (136 )     (136 )        
Cumulative translation adjustment, net of taxes
                                                    353       353       353  
Reclassification of warrants from equity to liabilities pursuant to adoption of FSP 150-5
                            (151 )                             (151 )        
Reclassification of warrants from liabilities to equity pursuant to warrant amendment
                            299                               299          
Net income
                                              18,990             18,990       18,990  
                                                                                         
Balance at March 31, 2007
    7,420,646     $ 74       (419,565 )   $ (442 )   $ 19,205     $     $     $ 752     $ (330 )   $ 19,259     $ 19,343  
                                                                                         
Proceeds from the exercise of stock options
    181,544       2                   440                               442          
Reclass of SARs from liability to equity
                            1,382                               1,382          
Deferred offering costs
                            (8,811 )                             (8,811 )        
Proceeds from initial public offering
    4,400,000       44                   61,556                               61,600          
Conversion of preferred stock to common stock
    11,425,786       114                   60,748                               60,862          
Share based compensation
                            2,817                               2,817          
Unrealized gain (loss) on available-for-sale securities, net of taxes $107
                                                    (196 )     (196 )     (196 )
Unrealized gain (loss) on effective cash flow hedges, net of taxes $567
                                                    (931 )     (931 )     (931 )
Pension benefit adjustment
                                                    (167 )     (167 )     (167 )
Adoption of FIN 48
                                              (95 )           (95 )        
Tax benefit related to stock plans
                            437                               437          
Cumulative translation adjustment, net of taxes
                                                    1,464       1,464       1,464  
Net income
                                              17,771             17,771       17,771  
                                                                                         
Balance at March 31, 2008
    23,427,976     $ 234       (419,565 )   $ (442 )   $ 137,774     $     $     $ 18,428     $ (160 )   $ 155,834     $ 17,941  
                                                                                         
 
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements


56


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
    (In thousands)  
 
Cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Net income
  $ 17,771     $ 18,990     $ 1,981  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Depreciation and amortization
    3,923       3,272       3,051  
Share-based compensation expense
    3,041       2,911       1,792  
Gain on sale of equity investment
                (927 )
Loss (gain) on disposal of property and equipment and investments
    (144 )     7       245  
Mark to market for liability classified warrants
          148        
Deferred income taxes, net
    402       (5,040 )      
Net changes in operating assets and liabilities:
                       
Accounts receivable, net
    (6,834 )     (12,887 )     (6,757 )
Prepaid expenses and other current assets
    (4,960 )     (1,625 )     (1,593 )
Other long-term assets
    (3,875 )     (10 )     (297 )
Accounts payable
    (1,011 )     1,836       (136 )
Accrued employee compensation and benefits
    3,052       1,981       1,846  
Accrued expenses — other
    2,032       941       1,560  
Deferred revenue
    (540 )     9       748  
Income taxes payable
    416       644       207  
Excess tax benefits from stock option exercises
    (437 )     (36 )      
Other long-term liabilities
    604       (21 )     172  
                         
Net cash provided by operating activities
    13,440       11,120       1,892  
                         
Cash flows used for investing activities:
                       
Proceeds from sale of equity investment
          466       461  
Proceeds from sale of property and equipment
    172       35       103  
Purchase of short-term investments
    (79,773 )            
Proceeds from sale or maturity of short-term investments
    40,943              
Purchase of long-term investments
    (23,929 )            
Proceeds from sale or maturity of long-term investments
    4,656              
Increase in restricted cash
    (2,690 )     (872 )      
Purchase of property and equipment
    (12,526 )     (5,993 )     (1,429 )
                         
Net cash used for investing activities
    (73,147 )     (6,364 )     (865 )
                         
Cash flows provided by financing activities:
                       
Proceeds from exercise of common stock options
    442       129       109  
Proceeds from sale of common stock
    61,600       11,420       766  
Principal payments on capital lease obligation
    (7 )     (22 )     (216 )
Repayments of notes receivable
          53        
Deferred stock offering costs
    (7,038 )     (1,773 )      
Excess tax benefits from stock option exercises
    437       36        
                         
Net cash provided by financing activities
    55,434       9,843       659  
                         
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
    241       243       145  
                         
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
    (4,032 )     14,842       1,831  
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year
    45,079       30,237       28,406  
                         
Cash and cash equivalents, end of year
  $ 41,047     $ 45,079     $ 30,237  
                         
Supplemental disclosure of cash flow information:
                       
Cash paid for interest
  $ 3     $ 13     $ 28  
Cash receipts from interest
  $ 3,275     $ 1,233     $ 807  
Cash paid for income tax
  $ 4,219     $ 722     $ 65  
 
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements


57


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
(thousands, except share and per share amounts)
 
(1)   Nature of the Business
 
Virtusa Corporation (the Company or Virtusa) is a global information technology services company. The Company uses an offshore delivery model to provide a broad range of information technology, or IT services, including IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing. Using its enhanced global delivery model, innovative platforming approach and industry expertise, the Company provides cost-effective services that enable its clients to accelerate time to market, improve service and enhance productivity. Headquartered in Massachusetts, Virtusa has offices in the United States and the United Kingdom, and global delivery centers in Hyderabad and Chennai, India and Colombo, Sri Lanka.
 
The Company completed an initial public offering, or IPO, of its common stock on August 8, 2007. In connection with the Company’s IPO, the Company issued and sold 4,400,000 shares of common stock at a public offering price of $14.00 per share. The Company received net proceeds of $52,789 after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions of $4,312 and offering costs of $4,499. Upon the closing of the IPO, all shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock automatically converted into 11,425,786 shares of the Company’s common stock.
 
(2)   Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
 
(a)   Principles of Consolidation
 
The consolidated financial statements reflect the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries, Virtusa (India) Private Limited, organized and located in India, Virtusa (Private) Limited, organized and located in Sri Lanka, Virtusa UK Limited, organized and located in the United Kingdom, Virtusa Securities Corporation, a Massachusetts securities corporation located in the United States, Virtusa International, B.V., organized and located in the Netherlands, Virtusa Consulting Services, Pvt. Ltd., organized and located in India, and Virtusa Software Services, Pvt. Ltd., organized and located in India. All intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated in consolidation.
 
(b)   Use of Estimates
 
The preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, including the recoverability of tangible assets, disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the reported period. Management reevaluates these estimates on an ongoing basis. The most significant estimates relate to the recognition of revenue and profits based on the percentage of completion method of accounting for fixed-price contracts, share-based compensation, income taxes and related deferred tax assets and liabilities. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. The actual amounts may vary from the estimates used in the preparation of the accompanying consolidated financial statements.
 
(c)   Foreign Currency Translation
 
The functional currencies of the Company’s non-U.S. subsidiaries are the local currency. India, Sri Lanka and the United Kingdom’s operating and capital expenditures are denominated in their local currency which is the currency most compatible with their expected economic results. India and Sri Lanka local expenditures form the underlying basis for intercompany transactions which are subsequently conducted in both U.S. dollars and U.K. pounds sterling. U.K. client sales contracts are conducted in U.K. pounds sterling.
 
All transactions and account balances are denominated in the local currency. The Company translates the value of these non-U.S. subsidiaries’ local currency denominated assets and liabilities into U.S. dollars at the


58


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
rates in effect at the balance sheet date. Resulting translation adjustments are recorded in stockholders’ equity as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss). The local currency denominated statement of income amounts are translated into U.S. dollars using the average exchange rates in effect during the period. Realized foreign currency transaction gains and losses are included in the consolidated statements of income. The Company’s non-U.S. subsidiaries do not operate in “highly inflationary” countries.
 
(d)   Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities
 
The Company enters into forward foreign exchange contracts to mitigate the risk of changes in foreign exchange rates on intercompany transactions and forecasted transactions denominated in foreign currencies. The Company designates derivative contracts as cash flow hedges if it satisfies the criteria for hedge accounting under SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities . Changes in fair values of derivatives designated as cash flow hedges are deferred and recorded as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income until the hedged transactions occur and are then recognized in the consolidated statements of income. Changes in fair value of derivatives not designated as hedging instruments and the ineffective portion of derivatives designated as cash flow hedges are recognized immediately in the consolidated statements of income.
 
With respect to derivatives designated as hedges, the Company formally documents all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The Company also formally assesses, both at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, whether each derivative is highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged item. If the Company determines that a derivative or a portion thereof is not highly effective as a hedge, or if a derivative ceases to be a highly effective hedge, the Company will prospectively discontinue hedge accounting with respect to that derivative.
 
(e)   Cash and Cash Equivalents and Restricted Cash
 
The Company considers all highly liquid investments with a remaining maturity of three months or less from the date of purchase to be cash equivalents. At March 31, 2008, cash equivalents consisted of money market instruments, U.S. Treasury bills and certificates of deposit.
 
The Company leases its Westborough, Massachusetts facility. The lease is secured by a credit facility, which, in turn is secured by a pledge of restricted cash. As of March 31, 2008 and 2007, cash of $490 was restricted in support of the Westborough, Massachusetts lease. The Company also has restricted cash in India totaling $1,242 and $935 at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively, which includes restricted deposits with banks to secure the import of computer and other equipment of $242 and $72 at March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively, deposits under lien of $299 and $219 respectively, against bank guarantees issued by a bank in favor of government agencies associated with the construction of its facility in India, and deposits under lien of $701 and $644 respectively against a bank guarantee related to a transfer pricing tax appeal with the government of India at March 31, 2008 and 2007. At March 31, 2008 and 2007, the Company had restricted cash in Sri Lanka of $129 and $163, respectively, for a bank guarantee relating to refunds of value-added tax from the Sri Lankan government. Additionally at March 31, 2008, the Company had restricted cash related to its hedging program of $2,500.
 
(f)   Investment Securities
 
The Company classifies all debt securities with readily determinable market values as “available for sale” in accordance with SFAS No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities. These securities are classified as short-term investments and long-term investments on the consolidated balance sheet and are carried at fair market value. Any unrealized gains and losses on these securities are reported as other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax, as a separate component of stockholders’ equity unless the decline in


59


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
value is deemed to be other-than-temporary, in which case, investments are written down to fair value and the loss is charged to the consolidated statement of income. Short-term investments are those with original maturities of more than three months and less than one year at the date of purchase and less than one year from the date of the balance sheet. Long-term investments are those with maturities of more than one year from the date of the balance sheet.
 
At March 31, 2008 and 2007, the Company held long-term investments in equity instruments of companies, which the Company accounts for under the cost method, as its ownership is less than 20% and the Company does not have the ability to exercise significant influence over the operations of these companies. In prior years, because evidence indicated that it would be highly unlikely that the Company would be able to sell or otherwise recover the cost basis of certain investments, the Company had reduced the carrying value of certain investments to zero to reflect the value of the investments.
 
During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006, the Company recognized a gain of $696 from “earn out” payments on the sale of an investment. The Company also recognized a gain of $231 on the sale of a second investment during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 which had a carrying value of zero.
 
(g)   Fair Value of Financial Instruments
 
At March 31, 2008 and 2007, the carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments, which included cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, unbilled accounts receivable, restricted cash, accounts payable, accrued employee compensation and benefits and other accrued expenses, approximate their fair values due to their short-term nature. Based on borrowing rates currently available to the Company for leases with similar terms, the carrying value of capital lease obligations approximated fair value at March 31, 2008 and 2007.
 
(h)   Concentration of Credit Risk and Significant Customers
 
Financial instruments which potentially expose the Company to concentrations of credit risk are primarily comprised of cash and cash equivalents, investments, accounts receivable and unbilled accounts receivable. The Company places its cash in highly rated financial institutions. The Company adheres to a formal investment policy with the primary objective of preservation of principal, which contains credit rating minimums and diversification requirements. Management believes its credit policies reflect normal industry terms and business risk. The Company does not anticipate non-performance by the counterparties and, accordingly, does not require collateral.
 
At March 31, 2008 and 2007, one client accounted for 36% and 28%, respectively, of gross accounts receivable. During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007, one client accounted for 27% and 23%, respectively, of the Company’s revenue.
 
(i)   Property and Equipment
 
Property and equipment are recorded at cost and depreciated over their estimated useful lives using the straight-line method. Property and equipment held under capital leases, which involve a transfer of ownership, are amortized over the estimated useful life of the asset. Other property and equipment held under capital leases and leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of their lease term or the estimated useful life of the related asset. Upon retirement or sale, the cost of assets disposed of and the related accumulated depreciation are removed from the accounts and any resulting gain or loss is credited or charged to income. Repair and maintenance costs are expensed as incurred.


60


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
(j)   Long-lived Assets
 
The Company’s long-lived assets include property and equipment. The Company evaluates the recoverability of its long-lived assets whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amounts of the long-lived assets may not be recoverable. Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amounts of an asset to future undiscounted net cash flows expected to be generated by the asset. If such assets are considered to be impaired, the impairment to be recognized is measured by the amount by which the carrying value of the assets exceed the fair value of the assets and the resulting losses are included in the statement of income.
 
(k)   Internally-Developed Software
 
Statement of Position (SOP) 98-1, Accounting for the Costs of Computer Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use , requires certain research and development costs associated with the application development stage to be capitalized for internal use software. At March 31, 2008 and 2007, capitalized software development costs pursuant to SOP 98-1 were approximately $825 and $870, respectively. These costs were recorded in property and equipment. Capitalized internal use software development costs are amortized over their estimated useful life, generally three years, using the straight line method, beginning with the date that an asset is ready for its intended use. For the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, amortization of capitalized software development costs amounted to approximately $326, $230 and $138, respectively.
 
(l)   Income Taxes
 
Income taxes are accounted for under the provisions of SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes , using the asset and liability method whereby deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the estimated future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates in effect for the year in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled.
 
At December 31, 2006, the Company determined that it was more likely than not that its deferred tax assets would be realized based upon its positive cumulative operating results and its assessment of its expected future results. As a result, the Company released its valuation allowance and recognized a discrete income tax benefit of $5,040 in its consolidated statement of income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. On an ongoing basis, the Company evaluates whether a valuation allowance is needed to reduce its deferred tax assets to the amount that is more likely than not to be realized based on the weight of all the negative and positive evidence.
 
Effective April 1, 2007, the Company adopted Financial Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes-an interpretation of SFAS No. 109 (FIN 48). In addition, the calculation of the Company’s tax liabilities involves dealing with uncertainties in the application of complex tax regulations in multiple jurisdictions. The Company records liabilities for estimated tax obligations in the United States and other tax jurisdictions (see note 10).
 
(m)   Revenue Recognition
 
The Company derives its revenue from a variety of IT consulting, technology implementation and application outsourcing services. Contracts for these services have different terms and conditions based on the scope, deliverables, and complexity of the engagement which require management to make judgments and estimates in determining the overall cost to the customer. Fees for these contracts may be in the form of time-and-materials or fixed price arrangements and volume discounts are recorded as a reduction of revenue over the contractual period as services are performed.


61


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Revenue on time-and-material contracts is recognized as the services are performed and amounts are earned in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) Staff Accounting Bulletin (SAB) No. 101, Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements , as amended by SAB No. 104, Revenue Recognition. The Company considers amounts to be earned once evidence of an arrangement has been obtained, services are delivered, fees are fixed or determinable, and collectibility is reasonably assured. For contracts with fees based on time-and-materials, the Company recognizes revenue over the period of performance.
 
Revenue from fixed price contracts is accounted for under the percentage-of-completion method in accordance with the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Statement of Position 81-1 (SOP 81-1), Accounting for Performance of Construction-Type and Certain Production-Type Contracts. Under the percentage-of-completion method, management estimates the percentage of completion based upon efforts incurred as a percentage of the total estimated efforts for the specified engagement. When total cost estimates exceed revenue, the Company accrues for the estimated losses immediately. The use of the percentage-of-completion method requires significant judgment relative to estimating total contract revenue and efforts, including assumptions relative to the length of time to complete the project, the nature and complexity of the work to be performed, and anticipated changes in other engagement-related costs. Estimates of total contract revenue and efforts are continuously monitored during the term of the contract and are subject to revision as the contract progresses. When revisions in estimated contract revenue and efforts are determined, such adjustments are recorded in the period in which they are first identified.
 
Revenue includes reimbursements of travel and out-of-pocket expenses with equivalent amounts of expense recorded in costs of revenue of $4,303, $3,312 and $1,724 for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively.
 
(n)   Costs of Revenue and Operating Expenses
 
Costs of revenue consist principally of salaries, employee benefits and stock compensation expense, reimbursable and non-reimbursable travel costs, subcontractor fees, and immigration related expenses for IT professionals. Selling and marketing expenses are charged to income as incurred. Selling and marketing expenses are those expenses associated with promoting and selling the Company’s services and include such items as sales and marketing personnel salaries, stock compensation expense and related fringe benefits, commissions, travel, and the cost of advertising and other promotional activities. Advertising and promotional expenses incurred were approximately $172, $207 and $455 for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively.
 
General and administrative expenses include other operating items such as officers’ and administrative personnel salaries, stock compensation expense and related fringe benefits, legal and audit expenses, public company related expenses, insurance, provision for doubtful accounts, depreciation and operating lease expenses.
 
(o)   Share-Based Compensation
 
Effective April 1, 2005, the Company adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 123(R), Share Based Payment , (SFAS 123R) using the modified prospective method. Accordingly, the statements of income for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 include compensation costs related to newly granted share-based awards calculated in accordance with SFAS 123R, as well as for those issued in prior years calculated in accordance with SFAS 123 that vest after the adoption date. The compensation cost is determined by estimating the fair value at the grant date of the Company’s common stock using the Black-Scholes option pricing model, and expensing the total compensation cost on a straight line basis (net of estimated forfeitures) over the requisite employee service period. Due to the fringe benefit tax in India, the Company estimated the fair value at grant date using the lattice model for stock options granted to employees based in India, during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. The total SFAS 123R compensation expense for the fiscal years ended


62


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 was $3,041, $2,911 and $1,792, respectively, with $661, $1,216 and $537, respectively, of this amount included in the costs of revenue, and $2,380, $1,695 and $1,255, respectively, included in selling, general and administrative expenses.
 
The fair value of each stock option is estimated on the date of grant using the respective option pricing valuation model with the following assumptions:
 
                         
Weighted Average Fair
                 
Value Options Pricing
  Year Ended March 31,  
Model Assumptions
  2008     2007     2006  
 
Risk-free interest rate
    4.02 %     4.63 %     4.24 %
Expected term (in years)
    6.25       6.25       6.44  
Anticipated common stock volatility
    43.8 %     50.06 %     60.10 %
Expected dividend yield
                 
 
The risk-free interest rate assumptions are based on the interpolation of various U.S. Treasury bill rates in effect during the month in which stock option awards are granted. The Company’s volatility assumption is based on the historical volatility rates of the common stock of its publicly held peers over periods commensurate with the expected term of each grant.
 
The expected term of employee share-based awards represents the weighted average period of time that awards are expected to remain outstanding. The determination of the expected term of share-based awards assumes that employees’ behavior is a function of the awards vested, contractual lives, and the extent to which the award is in the money. Accordingly, the Company has elected to use the SAB No. 107  Share-Based Payments (as amended by SAB 110) “simplified” method of determining the expected term or life of its share-based awards. The SEC permits the use of this method by newly-public companies that have relatively little plan history or peer-company, industry, or other empirical data available to determine the expected period or term over which its awards will be held before exercise.
 
As of March 31, 2008, there was $2,611 of total unrecognized compensation cost related to nonvested stock options granted under the Company’s Amended and Restated 2000 Option Plan and the Company’s 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (see note 9 for a more complete description of these plans). That cost is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted average period of 2.38 years.
 
In addition to the stock options described above, the Company established the 2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan, a stock appreciation rights (SARs) compensation plan during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006 (see note 9 for a more complete description of this plan). Prior to the Company’s IPO, SARs were required to be settled in cash under the terms of the plan. Thus, the Company determined the compensation cost and the future liability for these SARs by establishing the fair value of the SARs at the date of grant and remeasuring the fair value of the vested SARs at the close of each reporting period. Subsequent to the Company’s IPO, the Company is required, under the terms of the plan to settle, and has settled, all exercised SARs in shares of the Company’s common stock. Therefore, the SARs are now equity classified and are no longer remeasured. The liability measured as of the IPO date was $1,382 and this amount has been reclassified as a component of additional paid in capital during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008. During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, the Company recognized compensation expense in the amount of $455, $984 and $206, respectively, with $391, $883 and $185 of this amount included in costs of revenue, and $64, $101 and $21 in selling, general and administrative expenses.
 
(p)   Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
 
The Company maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts for estimated losses resulting from the inability of clients to make required payments. The allowance for doubtful accounts is determined by


63


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
evaluating the relative credit worthiness of each client, historical collections experience and other information, including the aging of the receivables.
 
(q)   Unbilled Accounts Receivable
 
Unbilled accounts receivable represent revenue on contracts to be billed, in subsequent periods, as per the terms of the related contracts.
 
(r)   Recent Accounting Pronouncements
 
In June 2006, the FASB issued FIN 48 which clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes by prescribing a minimum recognition threshold for a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return that is required to be met before being recognized in the financial statements. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, measurement, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. On April 1, 2007, the Company adopted FIN 48. The cumulative effect of adopting FIN 48 of $95 was recorded as a reduction of beginning retained earnings.
 
In March 2008, the FASB issued Statement No. 161, Disclosures about Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities , an amendment of FASB Statement No. 133. (“SFAS No. 161”). SFAS No. 161 requires enhanced disclosures about an entity’s derivative instruments and hedging activities with a view toward improving the transparency of financial reporting, and is effective for financial statements issued for fiscal years and interim periods beginning after November 15, 2008, with early application encouraged. SFAS No. 161 encourages, but does not require, comparative disclosures for earlier periods at initial adoption. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of adopting SFAS No. 161 on its consolidated financial statements.
 
In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 160, Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements — an amendment of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51 (SFAS No. 160). SFAS No. 160 establishes accounting and reporting standards for ownership interests in subsidiaries held by parties other than the parent, the amount of consolidated net income attributable to the parent and to the noncontrolling interest, changes in a parent’s ownership interest, and the valuation of retained noncontrolling equity investments when a subsidiary is deconsolidated. SFAS No. 160 also establishes disclosure requirements that clearly identify and distinguish between the interests of the parent and the interests of the noncontrolling owners. SFAS No. 160 is effective for the Company beginning April 1, 2009. The Company is currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 160 will have on its consolidated financial statements.
 
In February 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities, Including an Amendment of FASB Statement No. 115 (SFAS No. 159), which is effective for financial statements beginning April 1, 2008. SFAS No. 159 permits entities to measure eligible financial assets, financial liabilities and firm commitments at fair value, on an instrument-by-instrument basis, that are otherwise not permitted to be accounted for at fair value under other generally accepted accounting principles. The fair value measurement election is irrevocable and subsequent changes in fair value must be recorded in earnings. The Company is currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 159 will have on its consolidated financial statements.
 
In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements (SFAS No. 157). SFAS No. 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS No. 157 does not require any new fair value measurements, but provides guidance on how to measure fair value by providing a fair value hierarchy used to classify the source of the information. SFAS No. 157 is effective for fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2007. However, on February 12, 2008, the FASB issued FSP SFAS No. 157-2 (the FSP) which delays the effective date of SFAS No. 157 for all nonfinancial assets and nonfinancial liabilities, except those that are recognized or disclosed at fair value in the financial statements on a recurring basis (at least annually). The FSP partially


64


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
defers the effective date of SFAS No. 157 to fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008, and interim periods within those fiscal years for items within the scope of the FSP. The Company is currently evaluating the potential impact that SFAS No. 157 and the FSP will have on its consolidated financial statements.
 
(s)   Reclassifications
 
Certain prior-year amounts have been reclassified to conform to the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 presentation.
 
(3)   Net Income per Share
 
Prior to the Company’s IPO, the Company calculated net income per share in accordance with SFAS No. 128, Earnings per Share (SFAS No. 128) and EITF Issue No. 03-6, Participating Securities and the Two — Class Method under FASB Statement 128 (EITF No. 03-6). EITF No. 03-6 clarifies the use of the “two-class” method for the computation of earnings per share by companies with participating securities or multiple classes of common stock. The Company’s series A, B, C and D redeemable convertible preferred stock were participating securities due to their participation rights related to cash dividends declared by the Company. When determining basic earnings per share under EITF No. 03-6, undistributed earnings for a period are allocated to a participating security based on the contractual participation rights of the security to share in those earnings as if all of the earnings for the period had been distributed. Net losses are not allocated to preferred stockholders.
 
Basic net income per share for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006 has been calculated using the two class method. Basic net income per share is computed by dividing the net income available to common stockholders by the weighted average common shares outstanding. The net income available to common stockholders is calculated by deducting dividends allocable to the Company’s redeemable convertible preferred stock from net income. There have been no dividends to common or redeemable convertible preferred stock for any of the periods presented. Diluted net income per share is computed giving effect to all potentially dilutive common stock, including options and all convertible securities to the extent they are dilutive.
 
Subsequent to the IPO, for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, basic net income per share is computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding for the period, and diluted earnings per share is computed by including common stock equivalents outstanding for the period in the denominator. Common stock equivalents include shares issuable upon the exercise of outstanding stock options, SARs and warrants, net of shares assumed to have been purchased with the proceeds, using the


65


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
treasury stock method. The following table sets forth the computation of basic and diluted net income per share for the periods set forth below:
 
                         
    Fiscal Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
Numerators:
                       
Net income
  $ 17,771     $ 18,990     $ 1,981  
Net income allocated to participating redeemable convertible preferred stockholders
          12,447       1,328  
                         
Net income available to common stockholders
  $ 17,771     $ 6,543     $ 653  
                         
Denominators:
                       
Weighted average common shares outstanding
    21,368,470       6,005,619       5,613,623  
Dilutive effect of employee stock options and warrants
    1,828,021       919,756       321,810  
Dilutive effect of stock appreciation rights
    86,172              
Dilutive effect of redeemable convertible preferred shares
          11,425,786       11,425,786  
                         
Weighted average shares-Diluted
    23,282,663       18,351,161       17,361,219  
                         
Net income per share-Basic
  $ 0.83     $ 1.09     $ 0.12  
                         
Net income per share-Diluted
  $ 0.76     $ 1.03     $ 0.11  
                         
 
During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, options to purchase 257,386, 691,151 and 1,826,595 shares of common stock, respectively, were excluded from the calculations of diluted earnings per share as their effect would have been anti-dilutive.
 
(4)   Investment Securities
 
At March 31, 2008, all of the Company’s investment securities were classified as available-for-sale and were carried on its balance sheet at their fair market value. Fair market value was determined based upon quoted market prices for the applicable security.
 
The following is a summary of investment securities as of March 31, 2008:
 
                                 
          Gross
    Gross
       
    Amortized
    Unrealized
    Unrealized
       
    Cost     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
 
Available-for-sale securities:
                               
Commercial paper
  $ 14,969     $ 1     $ (14 )   $ 14,956  
Corporate bonds
    16,621       88       (41 )     16,668  
Auction Rate Securities
    8,350             (385 )     7,965  
Treasury Coupons
    8,579       12       (8 )     8,583  
Medium and Short-term notes
    4,885       11       (9 )     4,887  
Euro dollar bonds
    2,806       32             2,838  
Municipal bonds
    1,200       8             1,208  
Certificates of deposit
    800       2             802  
                                 
Total
  $ 58,210     $ 154     $ (457 )   $ 57,907  
                                 


66


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
At March 31, 2007, the Company had investments in Sri Lanka treasury notes and bills of $41 which were carried at cost and were redeemed during the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
The Company evaluates investments with unrealized losses to determine if the losses are other than temporary. The Company has determined that the gross unrealized losses at March 31, 2008 are temporary. In making this determination, the Company considered the financial condition and near-term prospects of the issuers, the magnitude of the losses compared to the investments cost, the length of time the investments have been in an unrealized loss position and the Company’s ability to hold the investments to maturity.
 
The following table shows the gross unrealized losses and fair value of the Company’s investment securities with unrealized losses that are not deemed to be other-than-temporarily impaired, aggregated by investment category and length of time that individual securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position as of March 31, 2008:
 
                 
    Less Than 12 Months  
          Gross
 
          Unrealized
 
    Fair Value     Losses  
 
Available-for-sale securities:
               
Commercial paper
  $ 7,929     $ (14 )
Corporate bonds
    4,910       (41 )
Auction Rate Securities
    7,965       (385 )
Treasury Coupons
    5,070       (8 )
Medium and Short-term notes
    1,967       (9 )
                 
Total
  $ 27,841     $ (457 )
                 
 
Available-for-sale securities by contractual maturity were as follows:
 
         
    March 31, 2008  
 
Due in one year or less
  $ 40,816  
Due after 1 year through 5 years
    9,126  
Due after 5 years
    7,965  
         
Total
  $ 57,907  
         
 
The Company’s investments in auction rate securities generally have contractual maturities in excess of one year; however, they are structured to provide liquidity to the Company every ninety days or less when interest rates are reset through a “Dutch” auction process. As of March 31, 2008, the Company held $7,965 of auction rate securities whose underlying assets are generally student loans which are substantially backed by the Federal government. During the period February 6, 2008 to March 31, 2008 auctions failed for all of the auction rate securities held by the Company at March 31, 2008, at which time, the Company reclassified these auction rate securities from short-term investments to long-term investments. There has not been a deterioration of the underlying credit quality of the auction rate securities, and the Company has the intent and ability to hold the securities until there is a recovery in the market value, if necessary. As of March 31, 2008, the Company recorded as a component of other comprehensive income (loss) an unrealized loss of $385, or $250 net of tax, related to its auction rate securities.
 
During the year ended March 31, 2008, the Company recorded net gains on investments of $64 on sales of marketable securities.


67


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
(5)   Property and Equipment
 
Property and equipment and their estimated useful lives in years consists of the following:
 
                     
    Estimated
           
    Useful Life
  March 31,  
    (Years)   2008     2007  
 
Computer equipment
  3   $ 17,043     $ 14,664  
Furniture and fixtures
  7     1,768       2,005  
Vehicles
  4     229       299  
Software
  3     3,689       2,835  
Leasehold improvements
  Lesser of
Estimated
Useful Life or
Lease Term
    3,476       2,220  
Capital work-in-progress
        9,559       1,039  
                     
          35,764       23,062  
Less — Accumulated depreciation and amortization
        18,931       15,521  
                     
        $ 16,833     $ 7,541  
                     
 
Depreciation and amortization expense for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 was $3,923, $3,272 and $3,051, respectively. Capital work-in-progress represents advances paid towards the acquisition of property and equipment and the cost of property and equipment not put to use before the balance sheet date.
 
(6)   Accrued liabilities
 
Accrued liabilities consist of the following:
 
                 
    March 31,
    March 31,
 
    2008     2007  
 
Accrued taxes
  $ 2,564     $ 1,841  
Accrued professional fees
    1,317       1,043  
Derivative instruments-current
    1,530        
Accrued miscellaneous
    2,964       1,454  
                 
Total
  $ 8,375     $ 4,338  
                 
 
(7)   Debt
 
The Company has a $3,000 revolving line of credit with a bank with a $1,500 sub-limit for letters of credit as of March 31, 2008. The revolving line of credit also includes a foreign exchange line of credit requiring 15% of foreign exchange contracts to be supported by the Company’s borrowing base. Advances under this credit facility accrue interest at an annual rate equal to the prime rate minus 0.25%. The credit facility is secured by the grant of a security interest in all of the Company’s U.S. assets in favor of the bank and contains financial and reporting covenants and limitations. The Company is currently in compliance with all covenants contained in its credit facility and believes that the credit facility provides sufficient flexibility so that it will remain in compliance with its terms. The credit facility expires on September 30, 2008. The Company had no amounts outstanding under this credit facility as of March 31, 2008.


68


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
(8)   Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock, Preferred Stock, and Common Stock
 
The Company completed an IPO of its common stock on August 8, 2007. In connection with its IPO, the Company issued and sold 4,400,000 shares of common stock at a public offering price of $14.00 per share. Upon the closing of the Company’s IPO, the Company’s series A, B, C, and D redeemable convertible preferred stock automatically converted into common stock.
 
The Company’s redeemable convertible preferred stock consisted of the following as of March 31, 2008 and 2007, respectively:
 
                                         
    Series A     Series B     Series C     Series D     Total  
 
Balance at March 31, 2007
  $ 13,500     $ 15,132     $ 12,230     $ 20,000     $ 60,862  
Conversion to Common Stock at IPO
    (13,500 )     (15,132 )     (12,230 )     (20,000 )     (60,862 )
Balance at March 31, 2008
  $     $     $     $     $  
 
In addition, the Company in its certificate of incorporation has authorized and reserved a total of 120,000,000 shares of $0.01 par value, common stock and 5,000,000 shares of $0.01 par value, undesignated preferred stock. None of the undesignated shares of preferred stock have been issued as of March 31, 2008.
 
Each share of common stock is entitled to one vote. The holders of common stock are also entitled to receive dividends whenever funds are legally available and when declared by the board of directors, subject to the prior rights of holders of all classes of stock outstanding.
 
On March 29, 2007, the Company issued and sold 918,807 shares of common stock at $12.27 per share for gross proceeds of approximately $11,273 to a wholly-owned subsidiary of British Telecommunications plc (BT), one of the Company’s clients. The per share price was equal to the estimated fair value of the common stock at the date of sale as determined by the Company’s board of directors. The sale represented 4.99% of the Company’s then outstanding common stock at the date of the sale.
 
In August 2006, the Company issued and sold 87,866 shares of its common stock to a newly-appointed member of the board of directors at $4.19 per share.
 
Each of the per-share prices listed above was equal to the estimated fair value of the common stock at the date of sale as determined by the Company’s board of directors.
 
(9)   Stock Options and Appreciation Rights
 
The Company’s Amended and Restated 2000 Stock Option Plan (the 2000 Plan), was adopted in the fiscal year ended March 31, 2001 under which shares were reserved for issuance to the Company’s employees, directors, and consultants. The 2000 Plan was amended over the years to reduce the number of shares reserved for issuance to a total of 3,281,149 as of March 31, 2008. Options granted under the 2000 Plan may be incentive stock options, nonqualified stock options or restricted stock. Incentive stock options may only be granted to employees. Options granted have a term of ten years and generally vest over four years. The Company settles employee stock option exercises with newly issued shares. The compensation committee of the board of directors determines the term of awards on an individual case basis. The exercise price of incentive stock options shall be no less than 100% of the fair market value per share of the Company’s common stock on the grant date. If an individual owns stock representing more than 10% of the outstanding shares, the price of each share shall be at least 110% of fair market value.
 
In July 2005, the Company adopted the Virtusa Corporation 2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan (the SAR Plan). Under the SAR Plan, the Company may grant up to 479,233 SARs to employees and consultants of Virtusa and its foreign subsidiaries, and settled the SARs in cash or common stock, as set forth in the SAR Plan. In connection with the adoption of the SAR Plan, the Company reduced the number of shares reserved for issuance under the 2000 Plan by 479,233 to 3,281,149, canceled options previously granted under the 2000


69


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Plan to certain non-U.S. employees, and issued SARs in replacement of the cancelled options that had the identical exercise price, exercise period after termination and vesting period as the canceled options. Prior to the Company’s IPO, the SARs could only be settled in cash. After the Company’s IPO, the cash settlement feature of the SARs ceased and exercises may only be settled in shares of the Company’s common stock.
 
The Company’s board of directors and its stockholders approved the Company’s 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (the 2007 Plan), in May 2007. The 2007 Plan permits the Company to make grants of incentive stock options, non-qualified stock options, SARs, deferred stock awards, restricted stock awards, unrestricted stock awards, and dividend equivalent rights. The Company reserved 830,670 shares of its common stock for the issuance of awards under the 2007 Plan. The 2007 Plan provides that the number of shares reserved and available for issuance under the plan will be automatically increased each April 1, beginning in 2008, by 2.9% of the outstanding number of shares of common stock on the immediately preceding March 31 or such lower number of shares of common stock as determined by the board of directors. This number is subject to adjustment in the event of a stock split, stock dividend or other change in the Company’s capitalization. Generally, shares that are forfeited or canceled from awards under the 2007 Plan also will be available for future awards. In addition, available shares under the 2000 Plan and the SAR Plan, including as a result of the forfeiture, expiration, cancellation, termination or net issuances of awards, are automatically made available for issuance under the 2007 Plan. In May 2007, the Company’s board of directors determined that no further grants would be made under the 2000 Plan or the SAR Plan.
 
The following table summarizes stock option activity under the 2000 Plan and the 2007 Plan for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006:
 
                 
    Number of
       
    Options to Purchase
    Weighted Average
 
    Common Shares     Exercise Price  
 
Outstanding at March 31, 2005
    2,138,862     $ 3.49  
Granted
    440,217       2.84  
Exercised
    (80,908 )     1.34  
Canceled and replaced with SARs
    (207,460 )     4.00  
Forfeited
    (340,696 )     4.00  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2006
    1,950,015       3.29  
Granted
    610,032       5.46  
Exercised
    (82,899 )     1.55  
Forfeited
    (134,746 )     5.05  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2007
    2,342,402       3.82  
Granted
    464,524       13.88  
Exercised
    (166,979 )     2.86  
Forfeited
    (88,190 )     5.93  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2008
    2,551,757       5.64  
                 
 
The following table summarizes options exercisable and available for future grant under the 2000 Plan and 2007 Plan at March 31, 2008:
 
         
    March 31,
    2008
 
Options exercisable
    1,458,250  
Options available for future grant
    476,390  


70


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
The aggregate intrinsic value and weighted average remaining contractual life of stock options outstanding at March 31, 2008 was approximately $12,423 and 6.70 years, respectively. The aggregate intrinsic value, weighted average remaining contractual life and weighted average exercise price of stock options exercisable at March 31, 2008 were $9,335, 5.52 years and $3.40, respectively. The aggregate intrinsic value of options vested and expected to vest during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008 was $11,195. The aggregate intrinsic value of options exercised during the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 was $1,536, $381 and $56, respectively. The weighted average fair value of options granted during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 was $13.88, $2.99 and $1.72, respectively. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, the Company realized $437 of income tax benefit from the exercise of stock options.
 
The tables below summarize information about the SAR Plan activity for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 as follows:
 
                 
    SAR Plan Activity  
          Weighted
 
          Average
 
    Number of
    Exercise
 
    SARs     Price  
 
Outstanding at March 31, 2005
        $  
SARs issued in replacement of canceled options
    207,453       4.01  
Granted
    11,677       2.72  
Exercised
    (3,463 )     1.57  
Forfeited or expired
    (31,797 )     4.76  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2006
    183,870       3.85  
Granted
    51,360       4.73  
Exercised
    (5,223 )     2.13  
Forfeited or expired
    (33,766 )     4.48  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2007
    196,241       4.04  
Granted
           
Exercised
    (22,466 )     2.68  
Forfeited or expired
    (22,501 )     4.58  
                 
Outstanding at March 31, 2008
    151,274       4.12  
                 
 
SARs exercisable and available for future grant at March 31, 2008:
 
         
    March 31, 2008
 
SARs exercisable
    86,836  
SARs available for future grant
     
 
The aggregate intrinsic value and weighted average remaining contractual life of outstanding SARs were approximately $854 and 6.09 years at March 31, 2008. The aggregate intrinsic value and weighted average remaining contractual life of the exercisable SARs at March 31, 2008 were approximately $551 and 4.98 years, respectively. The aggregate intrinsic value of SARs exercised during the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008 and 2007 was $293 and $28, respectively.
 
The weighted average fair value of SARs granted during the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 was $2.72. There were no SARs granted during the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company granted nonqualified options of 6,388 shares and 6,389 shares, respectively, of common stock to a non-employee at exercise prices of $7.39


71


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
and $2.88 per share, respectively, with immediate vesting and a two-year vesting period, respectively. The value of all of the options was determined using the Black-Scholes model with the following assumptions: no dividend yield, 50% to 80% volatility, risk-free interest rates of 4.16% to 4.86%, and expected terms of five to 10 years. During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, compensation expense related to non-employee options was not material.
 
During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2005, the Company granted options to purchase an aggregate of 869,055 of common stock outside of the 2000 Plan at an exercise price of $6.89 per share. Of the total grants, an option to purchase 798,722 shares was issued to an executive officer and an option to purchase 70,333 shares was issued to a director of the Company. On the first anniversary of the employment date of the executive officer, the executive officer’s option vests as to 25% of the shares, and the remainder vests in equal quarterly installments over the following three years. The director’s option vests in equal quarterly installments over three years. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2006, the executive officer’s option agreement was amended to reduce the exercise price from $6.89 to $2.38. The compensation related to these options, including the effect of the modification, is included in the accounting associated with the adoption of SFAS 123R (see note 2(o)).
 
(10)   Income Taxes
 
The income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit) shown below is based on the geographic location to which such income is attributed for each of the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006:
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
United States
  $ 7,878     $ 6,811     $ (1,744 )
Foreign
    14,750       8,549       3,901  
                         
Total
  $ 22,628     $ 15,360     $ 2,157  
                         
 
The provision (benefit) for income taxes for each of the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 consisted of the following:
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
Current provision:
                       
Federal
  $ 1,538     $ 262     $ 97  
State
    863       430       24  
Foreign
    2,065       717       55  
                         
Total current provision
  $ 4,466     $ 1,409     $ 176  
                         
Deferred provision (benefit):
                       
Federal
  $ 1,587     $ 3,195     $ (74 )
State
    (81 )     540        
Foreign
    (1,115 )     5       (24 )
                         
Total deferred provision
  $ 391     $ 3,740     $ (98 )
                         
Change in valuation allowance
          (8,779 )     98  
                         
Total provision (benefit) for income taxes
  $ 4,857     $ (3,630 )   $ 176  
                         


72


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
The items which gave rise to differences between the income taxes in the statements of income and the income taxes computed at the U.S. statutory rate are summarized as follows:
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
Statutory tax rate
    34.0 %     34.0 %     34.0 %
U.S. state and local taxes, net of U.S federal income tax effects
    2.1       3.1       (0.9 )
Benefit from foreign subsidiaries’ tax holidays
    (17.7 )     (13.8 )     (54.4 )
Change in valuation allowance
          (56.8 )     4.5  
Permanent items
    3.6       4.3       26.5  
Other adjustments
    (0.5 )     5.6       (1.6 )
                         
Effective income tax rate
    21.5 %     (23.6 )%     8.1 %
                         
 
The Company’s Sri Lanka subsidiary has entered into an agreement with the Sri Lanka Board of Investment whereby export business income of the subsidiary is exempt from Sri Lanka income tax through March 31, 2019. Additionally, the Company’s India subsidiary operates two Software Technology Parks (STPs) which qualify as Export Oriented Units and are exempt from India tax on business income through March 31, 2010. The effect of the income tax holidays was to increase both net income and diluted net income per share in the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006 by $3,949, $2,443 and $1,173, respectively, and by $0.17, $0.13 and $0.07, respectively.
 
Deferred tax assets (liabilities) as of March 31, 2008 and 2007 were as follows:
 
                 
    March 31,  
    2008     2007  
 
Net operating loss carryforwards
  $     $ 2,360  
Deferred revenue
    133        
Bad debt reserve
    232       118  
Depreciation
    181       179  
Tax credit carryforwards
    1,035       254  
Accrued expenses and reserves
    1,033       1,004  
Compensation expense
    2,043       1,099  
Other
    673       26  
                 
Total deferred tax assets
  $ 5,330     $ 5,040  
                 
 
At December 31, 2006, the Company determined that it was more likely than not that all of its deferred tax assets would be realized based upon its positive cumulative operating results and its assessment of its expected future results. As a result, the Company released the deferred tax asset valuation allowance and recognized a discrete income tax benefit of $5,040 in the consolidated statement of income for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007. At March 31, 2008, the Company has an Indian tax credit carryforward of $1,035, which is available to reduce future Indian income tax liabilities, and which expires in 2015.
 
The Company intends to reinvest certain of its foreign earnings indefinitely. Accordingly, no U.S. income taxes have been provided for approximately $32,529 of unremitted earnings of international subsidiaries as of March 31, 2008. The amount of taxes attributable to the permanently reinvested undistributed earnings is not practically determinable.
 
The Indian taxing authorities issued an assessment order with respect to their examination of the tax return for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2004 of the Company’s Indian subsidiary, Virtusa (India) Private Ltd., or Virtusa India. At issue were several matters, the most significant of which was the


73


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
redetermination of the arm’s-length profit which should be recorded by Virtusa India on the intercompany transactions with its affiliates. The Company is contesting the assessment and has filed appeals with both the appropriate Indian tax authorities and the U.S. Competent Authority. As of March 31, 2008, the Company accrued $487 related to this matter. The Indian taxing authorities have also indicated their intent to issue a similar assessment for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2005.
 
The Company adopted the provisions of FIN 48, on April 1, 2007. FIN 48 clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes by prescribing a minimum recognition threshold for a tax position taken or expected to be take in a tax return that is required to be met before being recognized in the financial statements. FIN 48 also provides guidance on derecognition, measurement, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. The cumulative effect of adopting FIN 48 of $95 was recorded as a reduction to opening retained earnings and an increase to long-term liabilities. The total amount of unrecognized tax benefits of $756 and $1,260 as of March 31, 2008 and April 1, 2007, respectively, would reduce income tax expense and the effective income tax rate, if recognized.
 
The following summarizes the activity related to the gross unrecognized tax benefits from April 1, 2007 through March 31, 2008:
 
         
Balance as of April 1, 2007
  $ 1,260  
Foreign currency translation related to prior year tax positions
    43  
Increases related to prior year tax positions
    51  
Decreases related to prior year tax positions
    (598 )
         
Balance as of March 31, 2008
  $ 756  
         
 
The Company continues to classify accrued interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits in income tax expense. The total accrued for interest and penalties relating to certain tax matters in India at March 31, 2008 and April 1, 2007 was $214 and $152, respectively. The total accrued interest and penalties relating to certain tax matters in the United States at March 31, 2008 and April 1, 2007 was $60 and $49, respectively. At March 31, 2008, the Company had $7 accrued for interest and penalties relating to certain tax matters in the United Kingdom.
 
There has been a $598 decrease in unrecognized tax benefits related to prior year U.S. tax positions. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, the Company reduced its liability for unrecognized tax benefits by $598 upon a change in estimate relating to certain unused net operating loss carryforwards in the United States. No significant changes in the unrecognized tax benefit balance are expected in the next twelve months.
 
Currently, the Company is under income tax examination in India. The Company does not believe that the outcome of any examination will have a material effect on its consolidated financial statements. The Company’s major taxing jurisdictions include the United States, United Kingdom, India, and Sri Lanka. With few exceptions, the Company remains subject to examination for all fiscal years ended after March 31, 2001.
 
The Company’s Indian subsidiary, Virtusa (India) Private Limited, is an export-oriented company under the Indian Income Tax Act of 1961 and is entitled to claim tax exemption for each Software Technology Park, or STP, which Virtusa India operates. Virtusa India currently operates two STPs, in Chennai and in Hyderabad. Substantially all of the earnings of both STPs qualify as tax-exempt export profits. These holidays will be completely phased out by March 2010, and at that time any profits would be fully taxable at the Indian statutory rate, which is currently 34.0%. In anticipation of the phase-out of the STP holidays, the Company intends to locate at least a portion of its Indian operations in areas designated as a Special Economic Zone, or SEZ, under the SEZ Act of 2005. In particular, the Company is building a campus on a 6.3 acre parcel of land in Hyderabad, India that has been designated as an SEZ. In addition, the Company has leased space and intends to operate on an SEZ designated location in Chennai, India. The Company’s profits from the SEZ operations would be eligible for certain income tax exemptions for a period of up to 15 years.


74


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
In addition, the Company’s Sri Lankan subsidiary, Virtusa Private Ltd., or Virtusa SL, was approved as an export computer software developer by the Sri Lanka Board of Investment in 1998 and has negotiated multiple extensions of the original holiday period in exchange for further capital investments in Sri Lanka facilities. The most recent 12-year agreement, which is set to expire on March 31, 2019, requires that the Company meet certain new job creation and investment criteria.
 
(11)   Post-retirement Benefits
 
The Company has noncontributory defined benefit plans (the Benefit Plans) covering its employees in India and Sri Lanka as mandated by the Indian and Sri Lankan governments. Benefits are based on the employee’s years of service and compensation. The Company uses March 31 as a measurement date for its plans.
 
Cost of pension plans
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
Components of net periodic pension expense
                       
Expected return on plan assets
  $ (36 )   $     $  
Service costs for benefits earned
    232       125       107  
Interest cost on projected benefit obligation
    61       30       21  
Amortization of the unrecognized transition obligation
                (16 )
Recognized net actuarial loss
    12              
                         
Net periodic pension expense
  $ 269     $ 155     $ 112  
                         
 
Actuarial assumptions
 
             
    Year Ended March 31,
    2008   2007   2006
 
Discount rate
  8.0%-15.0%   9.0%   9.0%
Compensation increases (annual)
  6.5%-12.0%   6.5%-8.0%   5.0%-8.0%
Expected return on assets
  8.0%-8.5%    
 
Discount rate is based upon high quality fixed income investments in India and Sri Lanka. The discount rates at March 31, 2008 were used to measure the year-end benefit obligations and the earnings effects for the subsequent year.
 
To determine the expected long-term rate of return on pension plan assets, the Company considers the current and expected asset allocations, as well as historical and expected returns on various categories of plan assets. The Company amortizes unrecognized actuarial gains or losses over a period no longer than the average future service of employees.
 
The Company’s benefit obligations are described in the following tables. Accumulated and projected benefit obligations (ABO and PBO, respectively) represent the obligations of a pension plan for past service as


75


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
of the measurement date. ABO is the present value of benefits earned to date with benefits computed based on current compensation levels. PBO is ABO increased to reflect expected future compensation.
 
Accumulated benefit obligation and projected benefit obligation
 
                 
    March 31,  
    2008     2007  
 
Accumulated benefit obligation
  $ 628     $ 386  
                 
Projected benefit obligation:
               
Balance at April 1,
  $ 575     $ 370  
Service cost
    232       125  
Interest cost
    61       30  
Actuarial loss
    167       109  
Benefits paid
    (95 )     (57 )
Exchange rate adjustments
    33       (2 )
                 
Balance at March 31,
  $ 973     $ 575  
                 
 
Fair value of plan assets
 
         
    March 31,
 
    2008  
 
Balance at April 1,
  $  
Employer contributions
    953  
Actual gain on plan assets
    35  
Benefits paid
    (26 )
Exchange rate adjustments
    14  
         
Balance at March 31,
  $ 976  
         
 
Plan asset allocation
 
                 
    March 31, 2008  
    Target
    Actual
 
    Allocation     Allocation  
 
Government securities
    70-80 %     75 %
Corporate Debt
    10-20 %     15 %
Other
    1-10 %     10 %
 
The Company’s plan assets are being managed by the respective insurance companies in India and Sri Lanka.


76


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Pension liability
 
                 
    March 31,  
    2008     2007  
 
PBO
  $ 973     $ 575  
Fair value of plan assets
    976        
                 
Funded status recognized
  $ (3 )   $ 575  
Amount recorded in stockholders’ equity
               
Net actuarial loss
  $ 303     $ 136  
                 
 
The amount in accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) that is expected to be recognized as a component of net periodic benefit cost over the fiscal year ending March 31, 2009 is $28. The Company expects to contribute $361 to its gratuity plans during the fiscal year ending March 31, 2009.
 
Estimated future benefits payments
 
         
Fiscal year ending March 31:
       
2009
  $ 113  
2010
    187  
2011
    247  
2012
    296  
2013
    414  
2014-2018
    2,580  
 
(12)   401(k) Plan
 
The Company sponsors a defined contribution savings plan under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code (the 401(k) Plan). The 401(k) Plan covers substantially all employees in the United States who meet minimum age and service requirements and allows participants to contribute a portion of their annual compensation on a pretax basis. Company contributions to the 401(k) Plan may be made at the discretion of the board of directors. During the years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, the Company did not contribute to the 401(k) Plan.
 
(13)   Related Party Transactions
 
In December 2000, in connection with the hiring of an executive officer, the Company issued an interest-free loan of 2,935 Sri Lankan rupees, or approximately $29, due and payable when the fair market value of the Company’s common stock reaches $20 per share following its IPO. The loan balance was repaid in full during March 2007.
 
During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, the Company purchased approximately $387, $1,048, and $942, respectively, in services from Lotus Travel Services. The managing director of Lotus Travel Services is a relative of an executive officer of the Company.
 
During the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, the Company made capital and operating lease payments for equipment of approximately $0, $230 and $291, respectively, to Alliance Finance Company. Relatives of an executive officer of the Company are directors of Alliance Finance Company.
 
(14)   Commitments, Contingencies and Guarantees
 
The Company leases office space under operating leases, which expire at various dates through the year 2013. Certain leases contain renewal provisions and generally require the Company to pay utilities, insurance, taxes, and other operating expenses.


77


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Future minimum lease payments under non-cancelable operating leases at March 31, 2008 are:
 
         
    Operating
 
    Leases  
 
Fiscal year ending March 31:
       
2009
  $ 4,425  
2010
    4,344  
2011
    3,114  
2012
    1,591  
2013
    540  
Thereafter
     
         
    $ 14,014  
         
 
The operating lease commitment for the fiscal year ending March 31, 2009 is net of $103 of sublease income. Total rental expense was approximately $5,957, $3,417 and $2,598 for the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively.
 
The Company is constructing a facility as part of a planned campus on a 6.3 acre site in Hyderabad, India which includes planned construction of approximately 340,000 square feet, over the next three fiscal years at a total estimated cost of $31,000, of which $7,698 was spent as of March 31, 2008. As of March 31, 2008, the Company had outstanding fixed capital commitments of $11,022, net of advances related to this facility construction.
 
The Company has deposits under lien of $238 against a bank guarantee issued by a bank in favor of Andhra Pradesh Industrial Infrastructure Corporation Limited which would be forfeited if the Company fails to meet certain hiring criteria with established timelines at its Hyderabad facility.
 
The Company indemnifies its officers and directors for certain events or occurrences under charter and indemnification agreements while the officer or director is, or was serving, at its request in a defined capacity. The term of the indemnification period is for the officer’s or director’s lifetime. The maximum potential amount of future payments the Company could be required to make under these indemnification obligations is unlimited. The costs incurred to defend lawsuits or settle claims related to these indemnification obligations have not been material. As a result, the Company believes that its estimated exposure on these obligations is minimal. Accordingly, the Company had no liabilities recorded for these obligations as of March 31, 2008.
 
The Company is insured against any actual or alleged act, error, omission, neglect, misstatement or misleading statement or breach of duty by any current or former officer, director or employee while rendering information technology services. The Company believes that its financial exposure from such actual or alleged actions, should they arise, is minimal and no liability was recorded at March 31, 2008.
 
The Company is not a party to any pending litigation or other legal proceedings that are likely to have a material adverse affect on its financial statements.
 
(15)   Derivative Financial Instruments and Trading Activities
 
The Company enters into foreign currency derivative contracts to mitigate the risk of changes in foreign exchange rates on intercompany transactions and forecasted transactions denominated in foreign currencies, particularly between the Indian rupee and the U.S. dollar and the U.K. pound sterling. The notional principal amounts of these foreign currency derivative contracts as of March 31, 2008 and 2007 were $73,101 and $0, respectively. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2008, the Company entered into foreign currency derivative contracts which met the criteria for hedge accounting as cash flow hedges pursuant to SFAS No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities .
 
Changes in the fair values of these hedges are deferred and recorded as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) until the hedged transactions occur and are then recognized in the consolidated statements of income in the same line item as the hedged item, whether it be to cost of sales or


78


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
operating expenses. During the fiscal year ended March 31, 2007, changes in the fair value of the portion of derivatives not designated as cash flow hedges were recognized in costs of revenue in the consolidated statements of income.
 
In connection with the cash flow hedges, the Company has recorded an unrealized loss of $931, net of tax as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) within stockholder’s equity as of March 31, 2008.
 
Foreign currency (gains) losses on settlement of cash flow hedges were ($272), $202 and $133 during the fiscal years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006, respectively.
 
(16)   Business Segment Information
 
The Company’s Chief Operating Decision Maker (CODM) reviews discrete financial information for the Company’s operations in the following operating segments: (i) the communications content and technology operating segment, which includes communications and technology and media and information; and (ii) the banking financial services and insurance operating segment. The CODM reviews historical forecast, summary and detailed revenue and margin information to monitor the operating performance and assess overall profitability of the Company. Discrete financial information is not available or reviewed by the CODM for any of the industries contained within these operating segments. The Company aggregates the two operating segments into a single reportable segment, information technology services.
 
Geographic information:
 
Total revenue is attributed to geographic areas based on location of the client. Geographic information is summarized as follows:
 
                         
    Year Ended March 31,  
    2008     2007     2006  
 
Customer revenue:
                       
North America
  $ 113,447     $ 92,356     $ 66,020  
Europe
    51,125       31,887       10,627  
Other
    626       417       288  
                         
Consolidated revenue
  $ 165,198     $ 124,660     $ 76,935  
                         
 
                 
    March 31,  
    2008     2007  
 
Long-lived assets, net of accumulated depreciation:
               
United States
  $ 1,843     $ 1,371  
India
    11,758       3,848  
Sri Lanka
    3,194       2,281  
United Kingdom
    38       41  
                 
Consolidated long-lived assets, net
  $ 16,833     $ 7,541  
                 


79


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
(17)   Quarterly Results of Operations (unaudited)
 
                                                                 
    Three Months Ended  
    March 31,
    December 31,
    September 30,
    June 30,
    March 31,
    December 31,
    September 30,
    June 30,
 
    2008     2007     2007     2007     2007     2006     2006     2006  
 
Revenue
  $ 45,040     $ 42,455     $ 40,257     $ 37,446     $ 35,272     $ 33,673     $ 30,090     $ 25,625  
Costs of revenue
    24,904       23,307       23,038       21,598       19,402       18,360       16,231       14,038  
                                                                 
Gross profit
    20,136       19,148       17,219       15,848       15,870       15,313       13,859       11,587  
Operating expenses
    14,521       13,281       12,510       12,660       11,788       11,244       10,173       9,273  
                                                                 
Income from operations
    5,615       5,867       4,709       3,188       4,082       4,069       3,686       2,314  
Other income
    1,163       1,096       801       189       3       288       237       681  
                                                                 
Income before income tax expense (benefit)
    6,778       6,963       5,510       3,377       4,085       4,357       3,923       2,995  
Income tax expense (benefit)
    1,519       1,706       943       689       450       (4,317 )     130       107  
                                                                 
Net income
  $ 5,259     $ 5,257     $ 4,567     $ 2,688     $ 3,635     $ 8,674     $ 3,793     $ 2,888  
                                                                 
Net income per share — Basic
  $ 0.23     $ 0.23     $ 0.21     $ 0.15     $ 0.21     $ 0.50     $ 0.22     $ 0.17  
Net income per share — Diluted
    0.21       0.21       0.20       0.13       0.19       0.47       0.21       0.16  
 
(18)   Subsequent Events
 
On April 3, 2008, the Company purchased multiple foreign currency forward contracts designed to hedge fluctuation in the Indian rupee against the U.S. dollar and U.K. pound sterling. The contracts, which meet the criteria for hedge accounting as cash flow hedges pursuant to SFAS No. 133, have an aggregate notional amount of approximately 682 million Indian rupees (approximately $16,900) and will expire on a monthly basis over a 24-month period ending on March 31, 2010. The Company has the obligation to settle these contracts based upon the Reserve Bank of India published Indian rupee exchange rates. The weighted average Indian rupee rate associated with these contracts is approximately 40.32.


80


Table of Contents

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Item 9.    Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure
 
None.
 
Item 9A.    Controls and Procedures.
 
(1)   Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures
 
We maintain disclosure controls and procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in our reports filed under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure. In designing and evaluating the disclosure controls and procedures, management recognized that any controls and procedures, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable assurance of achieving the desired control objectives, as ours are designed to do, and management necessarily was required to apply its judgment in evaluating the cost-benefit relationship of possible controls and procedures.
 
As of March 31, 2008, we carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures, as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Based upon that evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures are effective at that reasonable assurance level in (i) enabling us to record, process, summarize and report information required to be included in our periodic SEC filings within the required time period and (ii) ensuring that information required to be disclosed in the reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.
 
(2)   Report of Management on Internal Control over Financial Reporting
 
This Annual Report does not include a report of management’s assessment regarding internal control over financial reporting or an attestation report of the Company’s registered public accounting firm, KPMG LLP, regarding our internal control over financial reporting due to a transition period established by the rules of the SEC for newly public companies.
 
(3)   Changes in Internal Controls Over Financial Reporting
 
There have been no changes in our internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the last fiscal quarter that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.
 
Item 9B.    Other Information.
 
None.
 
PART III
 
Item 10.    Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance
 
The information required under this item is incorporated herein by reference to the Company’s definitive proxy statement pursuant to Regulation 14A, which proxy statement is expected to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission not later than 120 days after the close of the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.


81


 

 
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries
 
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements — (Continued)
 
Item 11.    Executive Compensation
 
The information required under this item is incorporated herein by reference to the Company’s definitive proxy statement pursuant to Regulation 14A, which proxy statement is expected to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission not later than 120 days after the close of the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
Item 12.    Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters
 
The information required under this item is incorporated herein by reference to the Company’s definitive proxy statement pursuant to Regulation 14A, which proxy statement is expected to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission not later than 120 days after the close of the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
Item 13.    Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence
 
The information required under this item is incorporated herein by reference to the Company’s definitive proxy statement pursuant to Regulation 14A, which proxy statement is expected to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission not later than 120 days after the close of the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
Item 14.    Principal Accountant Fees and Services
 
The information required under this item is incorporated herein by reference to the Company’s definitive proxy statement pursuant to Regulation 14A, which proxy statement is expected to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission not later than 120 days after the close of the Company’s fiscal year ended March 31, 2008.
 
PART IV
 
Item 15.    Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules
 
The following are filed as part of this Annual Report on Form 10-K:
 
1.   Financial Statements
 
The following consolidated financial statements are included in Item 8:
 
         
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
    53  
Consolidated Balance Sheets at March 31, 2008 and March 31, 2007
    54  
Consolidated Statements of Income for the Years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006
    55  
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit) for the Years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006
    56  
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years ended March 31, 2008, 2007 and 2006
    57  
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
    58  
 
2.   Financial Statement Schedules
 
The financial statement schedule entitled “Schedule II — Valuation and Qualifying Accounts” is filed as part of this Annual Report on Form 10-K under this Item 15.
 
All other schedules have been omitted since the required information is not present, or not present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule, or because the information required is included in the Consolidated Financial Statements or the Notes thereto.


82


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
 
The Board of Directors and Shareholders
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries:
 
Under date of May 29, 2008, we reported on the consolidated balance sheets of Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of March 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in stockholders’ equity (deficit) and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended March 31, 2008, which are contained in the March 31, 2008 annual report on Form 10-K. In connection with our audits of the aforementioned consolidated financial statements, we also audited the related consolidated financial statement schedule of Valuation and Qualifying Accounts in this Form 10-K. This financial statement schedule is the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on this financial statement schedule based on our audits.
 
In our opinion, such financial statement schedule when considered in relation to the basic consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.
 
As discussed in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for share-based payments effective April 1, 2005.
 
/s/   KPMG LLP
 
Boston, Massachusetts
May 29, 2008


83


Table of Contents

Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries

Schedule II — Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
For the years ended March 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006
 
                                 
    Balance at
    Charged to
          Balance at
 
    Beginning
    Costs and
    Deductions/
    End of
 
Description
  of Period     Expenses     Other     Period  
    (In thousands)  
 
Accounts receivable allowance for doubtful accounts:
                               
Year ended March 31, 2006
  $ 89     $ 326     $     $ 415  
Year ended March 31, 2007
  $ 415     $ 202     $ (197 )   $ 420  
Year ended March 31, 2008
  $ 420     $ 440     $ (207 )   $ 653  


84


Table of Contents

3.   Exhibits
 
The following exhibits are filed as part of and incorporated by reference into this Annual Report:
 
         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  3 .1   Amended and Restated By-laws of the Registrant (previously filed as Exhibit 3.1 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  3 .2   Form of Seventh Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant (previously filed as Exhibit 3.3 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  4 .1   Specimen certificate evidence shares of the Registrant’s common stock (previously filed as Exhibit 4.1 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  4 .2   Fourth Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement by and among the Registrant and the Investors named therein, dated as of March 29, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 4.2 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .1   Warrant by and between the Registrant and Silicon Valley Bank, dated as of February 27, 2002, as amended (previously filed as Exhibit 10.2 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .2   Lease Agreement by and between the Registrant and W9/TIB Real Estate Limited Partnership, dated June 2000, as amended by a First Amendment thereto, dated as of November 2000, and a Second Amendment and Extension of Lease thereto, dated as of December 30, 2003 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.3 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .3+   Amended and Restated 2000 Stock Option Plan and forms of agreements thereunder (previously filed as Exhibit 10.4 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .4+   2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan and form of agreements thereunder (previously filed as Exhibit 10.5 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .5†   Material Service Provider Agreement by and between the Registrant and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., dated as of December 6, 2004, as amended (previously filed as Exhibit 10.6 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .6+   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors (previously filed as Exhibit 10.7 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .7*†   Provision of IT Services for BT Contract by and between the Registrant and British Telecommunications plc, dated as of March 29, 2007, as amended by Amendment Number 1 to Contract, dated as of February 1, 2008, as amended by Amendment Number 2 to Contract, dated as of March 27, 2008, as amended by Amendment No. 3 to Contract, dated as of March 31, 2008, as amended by Amendment No. 4 to Contract dated as of March 31, 2008.
  10 .8*   Amended and Restated Credit Agreement between Registrant and Citizens Bank of Massachusetts, dated as of September 29, 2006, including Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Note, Amended and Restated Security Agreement and Negative Pledge Agreement, each dated as of September 29, 2006, as amended by the First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of September 30, 2007, as amended by the Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of December 31, 2007, as amended by the Third Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of February 7, 2008, as amended by the Fourth Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of March 31, 2008.


85


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  10 .9+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Kris Canekeratne, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.10 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .10+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Danford F. Smith, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.11 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .11+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Thomas R. Holler, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.12 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .12+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Roger Keith Modder, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.13 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .13+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and T.N. Hari, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.14 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .14   Co-Developer Agreement and Lease Deed between the Registrant and APIICL, a state government agency in India, dated as of March 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.15 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .15*+   2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, including Form of Incentive Stock Option Agreement, Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement for Company Employees, Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement for Non-Employee Directors and Form of Employee Restricted Stock Award Agreement.
  10 .16   Fifth Amended and Restated Stockholders Agreement by and among the Registrant and the Stockholders named therein, dated as of March 29, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.17 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .17   Agreement for Civil and Structural Works, including the General Conditions of the Contract by and between Virtusa (India) Private Limited and Shapoorji Pallionji & Company Limited, dated as of July 2, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.18 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .18+   2007 Executive Variable Incentive Cash Compensation Program (previously filed as Exhibit 10.19 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .19+   Non-Employee Director Compensation Policy (previously filed as Exhibit 10.20 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .20+   Virtusa Corporation Variable Cash Compensation Plan (previously filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q, filed September 7, 2008, and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .21   LEASE DEED by and between Andhra Pradesh Industrial Infrastructure Corporation Limited and Virtusa (India) Private Limited dated as of August 22, 2007 previously filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q, filed September 7, 2008, and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .22*   Indenture of Lease by and between Orion Development PVT. Ltd. and Virtusa (Private) Limited dated as of May 17, 2007
  21 .1*   Subsidiaries of Registrant
  23 .1*   Consent of KPMG LLP
  24 .1   Power of Attorney (included on signature page)
  31 .1*   Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

86


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  31 .2*   Certification of principal accounting and financial officer pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
  32 .1**   Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, 18 U.S.C. 1350
  32 .2**   Certification of principal accounting and financial officer pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, 18 U.S.C. 1350
 
 
+ Indicates a management contract or compensation plan, contract or arrangement.
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for certain provisions of this Exhibit.
 
* Filed herewith.
 
** Furnished herewith. This certification shall not be deemed filed for any purpose, nor shall it be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933, amended or the Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

87


Table of Contents

 
SIGNATURES
 
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized on the 3rd day of June, 2008.
 
Virtusa Corporation
 
  By: 
/s/  Kris Canekeratne
Kris Canekeratne
Chairman and Chief Executive Officer (Principal
Executive Officer)
 
Date: June 3, 2008
 
POWER OF ATTORNEY AND SIGNATURES
 
We the undersigned officers and directors of Virtusa Corporation, hereby severally constitute and appoint Kris Canekeratne and Thomas R. Holler, and each of them singly, our true and lawful attorneys, with full power to them and each of them singly, to sign for us and in our names in the capacities indicated below, any amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K, and generally to do all things in our names and on our behalf in such capacities to enable Virtusa Corporation to comply with the provisions of the Securities Act of 1934, as amended, and all the requirements of the Securities Exchange Commission.
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities indicated on the 3rd day of June, 2008.
 
             
Signature
 
Title
   
 
         
/s/  Kris Canekeratne

Kris Canekeratne
  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)
   
         
/s/  Danford F. Smith

Danford F. Smith
  President, Chief Operating Officer and Director    
         
/s/  Thomas R. Holler

Thomas R. Holler
  Executive Vice President of Finance and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)    
         
/s/  Andrew P. Goldfarb

Andrew P. Goldfarb
  Director    
         
/s/  Robert E. Davoli

Robert E. Davoli
  Director    
         
/s/  Izhar Armony

Izhar Armony
  Director    


88


Table of Contents

             
Signature
 
Title
   
 
             
/s/  Ronald T. Maheu

Ronald T. Maheu
  Director    
         
/s/  Martin Trust

Martin Trust
  Director    
         
/s/  Rowland Moriarty

Rowland Moriarty
  Director    


89


Table of Contents

 
Exhibit Index
 
 
         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  3 .1   Amended and Restated By-laws of the Registrant (previously filed as Exhibit 3.1 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  3 .2   Form of Seventh Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant (previously filed as Exhibit 3.3 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  4 .1   Specimen certificate evidence shares of the Registrant’s common stock (previously filed as Exhibit 4.1 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  4 .2   Fourth Amended and Restated Registration Rights Agreement by and among the Registrant and the Investors named therein, dated as of March 29, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 4.2 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .1   Warrant by and between the Registrant and Silicon Valley Bank, dated as of February 27, 2002, as amended (previously filed as Exhibit 10.2 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .2   Lease Agreement by and between the Registrant and W9/TIB Real Estate Limited Partnership, dated June 2000, as amended by a First Amendment thereto, dated as of November 2000, and a Second Amendment and Extension of Lease thereto, dated as of December 30, 2003 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.3 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .3+   Amended and Restated 2000 Stock Option Plan and forms of agreements thereunder (previously filed as Exhibit 10.4 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .4+   2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan and form of agreements thereunder (previously filed as Exhibit 10.5 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .5†   Material Service Provider Agreement by and between the Registrant and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., dated as of December 6, 2004, as amended (previously filed as Exhibit 10.6 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .6+   Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors (previously filed as Exhibit 10.7 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .7*†   Provision of IT Services for BT Contract by and between the Registrant and British Telecommunications plc, dated as of March 29, 2007, as amended by Amendment Number 1 to Contract, dated as of February 1, 2008, as amended by Amendment Number 2 to Contract, dated as of March 27, 2008, as amended by Amendment No. 3 to Contract, dated as of March 31, 2008, as amended by Amendment No. 4 to Contract dated as of March 31, 2008.
  10 .8*   Amended and Restated Credit Agreement between Registrant and Citizens Bank of Massachusetts, dated as of September 29, 2006, including Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Note, Amended and Restated Security Agreement and Negative Pledge Agreement, each dated as of September 29, 2006, as amended by the First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of September 30, 2007, as amended by the Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of December 31, 2007, as amended by the Third Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of February 7, 2008, as amended by the Fourth Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement, dated as of March 31, 2008.
  10 .9+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Kris Canekeratne, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.10 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).


90


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  10 .10+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Danford F. Smith, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.11 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .11+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Thomas R. Holler, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.12 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .12+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and Roger Keith Modder, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.13 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .13+   Executive Agreement between the Registrant and T.N. Hari, dated as of April 5, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.14 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .14   Co-Developer Agreement and Lease Deed between the Registrant and APIICL, a state government agency in India, dated as of March 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.15 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .15*+   2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, including Form of Incentive Stock Option Agreement, Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement for Company Employees, Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement for Non-Employee Directors and Form of Employee Restricted Stock Award Agreement.
  10 .16   Fifth Amended and Restated Stockholders Agreement by and among the Registrant and the Stockholders named therein, dated as of March 29, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.17 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .17   Agreement for Civil and Structural Works, including the General Conditions of the Contract by and between Virtusa (India) Private Limited and Shapoorji Pallionji & Company Limited, dated as of July 2, 2007 (previously filed as Exhibit 10.18 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .18+   2007 Executive Variable Incentive Cash Compensation Program (previously filed as Exhibit 10.19 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .19+   Non-Employee Director Compensation Policy (previously filed as Exhibit 10.20 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1, as amended (Registration No. 333-141952) and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .20+   Virtusa Corporation Variable Cash Compensation Plan (previously filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q, filed September 7, 2008, and incorporated herein by reference).
  10 .21   LEASE DEED by and between Andhra Pradesh Industrial Infrastructure Corporation Limited and Virtusa (India) Private Limited dated as of August 22, 2007 previously filed as Exhibit 10.1 to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q, filed September 7, 2008, and incorporated herein by reference)
  10 .22*   Indenture of Lease by and between Orion Development PVT. Ltd. and Virtusa (Private) Limited dated as of May 17, 2007
  21 .1*   Subsidiaries of Registrant
  23 .1*   Consent of KPMG LLP
  24 .1   Power of Attorney (included on signature page)
  31 .1*   Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
  31 .2*   Certification of principal accounting and financial officer pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

91


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.
 
Exhibit Title
 
  32 .1**   Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, 18 U.S.C. 1350
  32 .2**   Certification of principal accounting and financial officer pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, 18 U.S.C. 1350
 
 
+ Indicates a management contract or compensation plan, contract or arrangement.
 
Confidential treatment has been requested for certain provisions of this Exhibit.
 
* Filed herewith.
 
** Furnished herewith. This certification shall not be deemed filed for any purpose, nor shall it be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933, amended or the Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

92

Exhibit 10.7
PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
CONTRACT NUMBER: 678650.
CONTRACT RELATING TO: PROVISION OF IT SERVICES TO BT
This CONTRACT is made this 29th day of March, 2007
BETWEEN
(1) BRITISH TELECOMMUNICATIONS PLC(registered in England and Wales under Company Number: 1800000) whose registered office is 81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ
(“BT”)
(2) Virtusa UK Limited (registered in England under Company Number 05640127 whose registered office is 1 Callaghan Square Cardiff CF10 5BT (“the Supplier”)
(referred together in the Contract as “the Parties”)
For the sum of L1 payable to it by BT, Supplier shall complete and deliver to BT such work and/or equipment and/or services (as the case may be) as BT may order from time to time within the Term in accordance with the Contract which comprises this signed front sheet and the following appended documents:
     
1.
  DEFINITIONS
2.
  SCHEDULE 1: COE GENERIC REQUIREMENTS
3
  SCHEDULE 2: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
4
  SCHEDULE 3: MODEL CLAUSES FOR DATA PROTECTION
5
  SCHEDULE 4: BT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS AND POLICY
6
  SCHEDULE 5: NOT APPLICABLE
7
  SCHEDULE 6: IT SERVICES
8
  SCHEDULE 7: NOT APPLICABLE
9
  SCHEDULE 8: CHANGE CONTROL PROCESS
10
  SCHEDULE 9: CONFIDENTIALITY AGREEMENT
11
  SCHEDULE 10: GENERIC STANDARDS
and which, in the case of conflict, shall have precedence in the order listed unless expressly stated otherwise in the Schedule.
                     
SIGNED for and on behalf of SUPPLIER       SIGNED for and on behalf of BT    
 
                   
SIGNATURE
/S/ KRIS CANEKERATNE         SIGNATURE   /S/ MERYL BUSHELL    
 
                   
NAME KRIS CANEKERATNE       NAME MERYL BUSHELL    

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
                                 
    POSITION             POSITION     CHIEF  
    IN COMPANY     DIRECTOR     IN COMPANY     PROCUREMENT OFFICER  
 
                               
INDEX
         
    PAGES  
DEFINITIONS
    2  
 
       
SCHEDULE 1- REQUIREMENTS
    6  
1. INTRODUCTION
    6  
2. DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK
    6  
3. SUPPLY RELATIONSHIP-INTENTIONALLY DELETED
    6  
4. PLACE OF WORK
    6  
5. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
    6  
 
       
SCHEDULE 2- CONDITIONS
    7  
1. TERM
    7  
2. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
    7  
3. QUALITY OF SERVICES
    7  
4. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
    7  
5. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS
    8  
6. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING
    8  
7. SUPPLIER OBLIGATIONS
    9  
8. SERVICE LEVELS
    9  
9. CONTRACT PERSONNEL
    9  
10. INDUCTION AND TRAINING
    10  
11. KEY PERSONNEL
    10  
12. ACCESS, ASSISTANCE AND PROGRESS REPORTS
    10  
13. MISTAKES IN INFORMATION
    11  
14. BT ITEMS AND PROPERTY
    11  
15. FORCE MAJEURE
    12  
16. SOURCING WITH HUMAN DIGNITY
    13  
17. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
    13  
18. ELECTRONIC TRADING
    14  
19. GROUP COMPANIES
    14  
20. BT RESTRUCTURING
    15  
21. REGULATORY MATTERS
    16  
22. EURO CONFORMANCE
    17  
23. CONFIDENTIALITY
    17  
24. BENCHMARKING
    19  
25. VARIATIONS
    19  
26. SUSPENSION OF WORK
    20  
27. WORK SITE AND SECURITY
    21  

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
         
    PAGES  
28. RISK ASSESSMENT
    23  
29. BT SECURITY POLICY REQUIREMENTS
    23  
30. PROTECTION OF PERSONAL DATA
    24  
31. TRANSFER OF UNDERTAKINGS
    26  
32. TAX AND NATIONAL INSURANCE
    27  
33. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
    27  
34. ESCALATION
    30  
35. WARRANTY
    31  
36. TITLE AND RISK
    33  
37. RIGHT TO REJECT
    34  
38. EXPORT
    34  
39. DOCUMENTATION
    35  
40. DELIVERY
    35  
41. DEFAULT/LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
    35  
42. TOOLING
    36  
43. TERMINATION
    36  
44. TRANSITION
    39  
45. EXIT STRATEGY COOPERATION
    41  
46. INDEMITY
    42  
47. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
    43  
48. INSURANCE
    43  
49. PUBLICITY
    44  
50. SOFTWARE
    44  
51. SOFTWARE LICENCE
    44  
52. ESCROW
    45  
53. NOTICES
    46  
54. PRICING
    46  
55. PAYMENT AND INVOICING
    46  
56. GENERAL
    46  
57. NON-ASSIGNMENT
    47  
58. OPERATIONAL GOVERNANCE
    47  
 
       
SCHEDULE 3 MODEL CLAUSES FOR DATA PROTECTION
    48  
1. DEFINITIONS
    49  
2. DETAILS OF THE TRANSFER
    49  
3. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARY CLAUSE
    49  
4. OBLIGATIONS OF THE DATA EXPORTER
    50  
5. OBLIGATIONS OF THE DATA IMPORTER
    51  
6. LIABILITY
    52  
7. MEDIATION AND JURISDICTION
    53  
8. COOPERATION WITH SUPERVISORY AUTHORITIES
    53  
9. GOVERNING LAW
    54  
10. VARIATION OF THE CONTRACT
    54  

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
         
    PAGES  
11. OBLIGATION AFTER THE TERMINATION PERSONAL DATA PROCESSING SERVICES
    54  
 
       
SCHEDULE 3 APPENDIX A
    56  
 
       
SCHEDULE 3 APPENDIX B
    57  
 
       
SCHEDULE 4 THE BT SECURITY POLICY FOR SUPPLIER
    58  
1. DEFINITIONS
    58  
2. BT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLIER’S OBLIGATIONS
    59  
3. ACCESS
    61  
4. SECURITY REVIEW
    61  
5. TERMINATION
    62  
6. RIGHTS AFTER TERMINATIONS
    62  
7. ACCESS TO SUPPLIER SYSTEMS
    62  
8. BUSINESS CONTINUITY
    65  
 
       
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 1- BT SECURITY POLICY (SEE SEPARATE PDF FILE)
    68  
 
       
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 2 - BT HUMAN RESOURCES RECRUITMENT POLICY
    69  
1. SUPPLIER’S SELECTION PROCESS
    69  
2. VETTING OF CONTRACT PERSONNEL
    69  
3. REFERENCING
    71  
4. QUALITY OF CONTRACT PERSONNEL
    72  
 
       
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 2 - ANNEX 1 CRIMINAL DISCLOSURE DECLARATION
    73  
 
       
SCHEDULE 5 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    74  
 
       
SCHEDULE 6- IT SERVICES
    75  
1. SCOPE OF WORK
    75  
2. ORDERING PROCESS
    75  
3. GENERIC CONTACT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
    76  
4. MANAGEMENT INFORMATION
    77  
5. HOURS OF SERVICE
    77  
6. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE LICENCE
    77  
7. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
    78  
8. PRICING AND PRICING ARRANGMENTS
    78  
9. NOT USED
    79  
10. PRICE SATISFACTION
    79  
11. INTENTIONALLY DELETED
    79  
12. CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT
    79  
13. EXIT TRANSITION CO-OPERATION
    80  

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
         
    PAGES  
14. EXIT COSTS
    81  
15. ACCEPTANCE
    82  
 
       
SCHEDULE 6 APPENDIX 1 (PRICING)
    85  
1. IT SERVICES PRICING PRINCIPLES
    85  
2. PRICING MODELS
    92  
 
       
SCHEDULE 6- APPENDIX 2 WORK PACKAGE
    100  
1. DEFINITIONS
    100  
2. PROJECT BACKGROUND
    100  
3. DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF SERVICES
    100  
4. DELIVERABLES AND TRAINING AND DELIVERABLES
    102  
5. BT PROVIDED ITEMS
    102  
6. SUPPLIER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT
    102  
7. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
    102  
8. BT SYSTEMS
    102  
9. NETWORK AND IT REQUIREMENTS
    103  
10. TIMETABLE
    103  
11. SITE
    103  
12. ACCEPTANCE
    104  
13. PERSONNEL
    104  
14. REPORTING
    104  
15. CHARGES
    105  
16. BT OBLIGATIONS
    105  
17. RISKS AND ASSUMPTIONS
    105  
18. QUALITY STANDARDS AND ASSURANCE, AND CODES OF PRACTICE
    105  
19. PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
    105  
20. ADDITIONAL
    105  
21. WORK PACKAGE PRICE
    105  
 
       
SCHEDULE 6- APPENDIX 2 WORK PACKAGE TEMPLATE-APPENDIX A
    106  
 
       
SCHEDULE 6- APPENDIX A, ANNEX 1
    108  
 
       
SCHEDULE 7- INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
    108  
 
       
SCHEDULE 8- CHANGE CONTROL PROCEDURE
    111  
1. PRINCIPLES
    111  
2. PROCEDURES
    111  
 
       
SCHEDULE 9- CONFIDENTIALITY AGREEMENT
    113  
 
       
SCHEDULE 10- GENERIC STANDARDS
    114  

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
         
    PAGES  
1. CONTACT RESPONSE
    114  
2. TABLE OF COMPLIANCE
    114  
3. EMBEDDED BT GENERIC STANDARD 11 FOR COMPLETION
    114  
4. BT GENERIC STANDARDS 13 AND 18 FOR ACCESS AND COMPLETION
    114  

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
DEFINITIONS
In the Contract, the following expressions, where used, shall have the meanings respectively ascribed to them:
“ACCEPTANCE” means written acknowledgement by BT that Services, or part of them, have been completed in accordance with the Specifications, subject to any deficiencies stated in such acknowledgement. “Accept” and “Accepted” shall be construed accordingly;
“ACCEPTANCE TEST” means formal testing conducted to determine if the Work satisfies the criteria for Acceptance to enable BT to Accept the Work or any part;
“BT” means British Telecommunications plc, its successors and assigns;
“BT’S COMMERCIAL CONTACT” means such person whose identity and contact details may be notified to the Supplier’s Commercial Contact from time to time;
“BT DATA” or “BT’S DATA” means all data, information, addresses, telephone numbers, text, drawings, diagrams, images or sound embodied in any electronic or tangible medium, and ( i ) which are supplied or in respect of which access is granted to the Supplier by BT pursuant to this Contract, or ( ii ) which the Supplier is required to generate under this Contract, or ( iii ) which is obtained by the Supplier on behalf of BT for the purposes of this Contract;
“BT GROUP COMPANY” means in relation to BT, a company which is a subsidiary or a holding company of it, or any company which is a subsidiary of any such holding company, ‘holding company’ and ‘subsidiary’ having the meanings ascribed to them in section 736 Companies Act 1985 as amended;
“BT PROJECT MANAGER” means the BT operational representative the identity of who to be advised as and when an order is placed through Work Package and/or Purchase Order;
“BT SYSTEM” means any equipment, databases, software and any other material owned and/or provided by the Customer which BT uses or interfaces with in order to provide the Services;
“BT ITEMS” means all items provided by BT to the Supplier and all items held by the Supplier which belong to BT in connection with this Contract;
“CHANGE CONTROL PROCEDURE” means the procedure under which the BT may make a request for a change to the Contract, including a change to the Services, all as described in Schedule 10;

Page 2 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
“CHARGES” means the sums payable for the Services as described in Schedule 12 of this Contract and/or within each Work Package and/or Purchase Order;
“COMMENCEMENT DATE” means April 1st, 2007;
“CONTRACT” means this Contract including the schedules and appendices attached to it;
“CONTRACT PERSONNEL” means the Supplier’s employees, subcontractors and agents (and their employees, subcontractors and agents) engaged in the performance of the Contract;
“CENTRES OF EXCELLENCE” means one of the domains to which the Services are mapped into;
“CREATED INFORMATION” all Information generated in the course of or arising from the performance of the Contract;
“CUSTOMER” means BT external customer and who receive the benefit of the Services;
“DESIGN INFORMATION” means any Information provided by BT concerning the purpose, manufacture, design or configuration of Services;
“EFFECTIVE DATE” means the commencement date of the applicable Work Package;
“EQUIPMENT” means all components, materials, plant, tools, test equipment, documentation, firmware, Software, spares and parts and things comprised in Services;
“EXTENDED TERM” means extension of the Initial Term on twelve (12) monthly basis;
“FINANCIAL YEAR” means the period beginning April to the end of the following March;
“FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION” — the Supplier’s functional specification for the Software as supplied to BT or as published by the Supplier;
“INFORMATION” means information whether in tangible or any other form, including, without limitation, specifications, reports, data, notes, documentation, drawings, software, computer outputs, designs, circuit diagrams, models, patterns, samples, inventions, (whether capable of being patented or not) and know-how, and the media (if any) upon which such information is supplied;

Page 3 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
“INITIAL TERM” means a period of five years, commencing on the Commencement Date, or such longer period as provided by the Contract;
“INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT(S)” means any patent, petty patent, trade marks, service marks, trade names, copyright, database rights, design right, community design right, semiconductor topography right, registered design, rights in know-how, or any similar right in any part of the world and shall include any applications for the registration of any patents or registered designs or similar rights capable of registration in any part of the world;
“KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS” or “KPI’S” means the performance indicators which BT shall use as a means of measuring and monitoring the performance of the Supplier of this Contract, as may be amended by agreement in writing from time to time;
“LIQUIDATED DAMAGES” means the liquidated damages payable to BT in the event of a failure as set out in each Work Package or payment by BT of liquidated damages under clause 1.7 of Schedule 6 of this Contract.
“OFF-SITE TESTS” means all tests, specified in the Contract to be carried out on Services prior to delivery to the Site;
“OFFSHORE WORKING DAY” means 8 hours in any business day.;
“PURCHASE ORDER” means the order issued by BT to Supplier detailing the Charges, the Equipment, the Services and any other relevant information being ordered by BT and shall be deemed accepted when duly authorised and issued by BT under this Contract;
“REPLACEMENT WORK” means re-allocation of the Work provided by the Supplier under this Contract to BT or another supplier as notified by BT;
“SERVICES” means the service or where appropriate part of a service described in this Contract and Schedule 5, 6 and 7 which include all Equipment, Information and Work supplied to BT by Supplier;
“SERVICE LEVELS, SLAS, SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT” means the document attached to the Contract in the Work Package defining the service levels applicable to the Services;
“SITE” means location(s) or premise(s) specified by BT, upon which the Supplier is to provide services, install and/or deliver Services or perform Work;
“SOFTWARE” means all computer programs including but not limited to all source code and object code whether in machine readable, optically readable or any other format comprised in Services and the media on which it is supplied;

Page 4 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
“SPECIFICATION” any specification of Services provided by BT, and agreed to by the Supplier in each Work Package and/or Purchase Order under this contract.
“STATEMENT OF REQUIREMENTS” means the project plan document or statement of work issued by BT to the Supplier, and agreed to in writing by Supplier, detailing all of the responsibilities and deliverables by Supplier to BT;
“SUBCONTRACTOR” means any person, partnership or corporation with whom the Supplier places a contract and/or an order for the supply of any equipment, item, service or for any work in relation to the Contract, and “Subcontract” shall be construed accordingly;
SUPPLIER’S BACKGROUND INFORMATION” means any Information owned or controlled by the Supplier;
“SUPPLIER’S COMMERCIAL CONTACT” such person whose identity and contact details may be notified to BT’s Commercial Contact from time to time;
“SUPPLIER’S EQUIPMENT” means all items except BT Items brought onto Site by the Supplier in connection with, but not for incorporation in the Services, and which have not been supplied by BT;
“SUPPLIER SYSTEM” means any equipment, databases, software and any other material owned and/or provided by the Supplier which the Supplier uses or interfaces with in order to provide the Services;
“SYSTEMS” means the combination of telecommunications and computer hardware, computer software, computer peripherals and other items which the Supplier has and/or may develop and/or supply hereunder in order to perform the Services including the Supplier’s business organisation and processes;
“TERM” means both Initial Terms and Extended Term
“UK WORKING DAY” means between the hours of 08:00 and 18:00, Monday to Friday;
“WORK” means work the Contract requires to be undertaken for BT.
“WORK PACKAGE” means a request for Services, in the form attached hereto as Schedule 6, issued by any BT Group Company to the Supplier pursuant to which the Supplier is to provide Services to such BT Group Company in accordance with the specifications set forth therein if accepted by the Supplier, such acceptance to be evidenced by a signature of the authorised representative of the Supplier.

Page 5 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 1 — REQUIREMENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 This Contract governs the relationship between the Parties for the supply of Services by the Supplier to BT. It is intended as a broad agreement between the Parties under which BT shall procure Services from the Supplier. Each Work shall be performed in accordance with BT’s COE Generic Requirements and the Conditions of the Contract, including BT Generic Standards (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Terms and Conditions”) and all the Schedules appended herein in this Contract.
1.2 These Schedules shall be supplemented or varied to meet the requirements of BT through agreed Statement of Requirements and authorised Work Packages and/or Purchase Order.
2 DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 The Supplier shall provide the following provision of Services in the Initial Term and Extended Term (as the case may be) in order to support the range of BT products and services:
2.1.1 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
2.1.2 A range of IT Services to BT, including, but not exclusively, all or some of the IT Services listed below in Schedule 6 (“IT Services”).
2.1.3 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2.1.4 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2.2 Further particulars of the Services are described in Schedule 6 herein.
3 SUPPLY RELATIONSHIP-INTENTIONALLY DELETED
4 PLACE OF WORK
Work shall be undertaken at the BT and/or Customer site and/or Supplier’s Site/s as required by BT and confirmed in the Work Package and/or Purchase Order.
5 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
To the extent that the following documents form part of or apply to the Contract, in the case of conflict they shall have the following order of precedence:
1 signed Purchase Order or Work Package (as the case may be)

Page 6 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2 the Contract

Page 7 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 2 — CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1 TERM
1.1 The Contract shall commence on the Commencement Date and shall remain in force for the Term (“Initial Term”) unless extended or terminated in accordance with its provisions.
1.2 BT shall have the option to extend the Term by a further period of twelve (12) months each time, such option to be exercised by BT giving reasonable period of written notice (“Extended Term”) to that effect to the Supplier’s Commercial Contact on or before prior to the end of the initial Term or Extended Term (as the case may be) effective upon the prior written consent of Supplier. In the event the Contract is extended, BT reserves the right to contract on the terms and conditions in this Contract and/or by mutual agreement agree with the Supplier amended terms and conditions.
1.3 For the avoidance of doubt, BT shall be under no obligation to place any orders and/or Work under the Contract.
2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
For the avoidance of doubt in the event of discrepancies or conflict between the documents comprising this Contract, the terms of these documents shall prevail in the order shown on the signed front sheet of the Contract.
3 QUALITY OF SERVICES
3.1 Services shall comply in all material respects with the:
(a) Specifications. The warranty for any deliverable produced by the Services shall be as set forth in Section 35; and
(b) latest applicable issue from time to time of UK, European and International Standards and other documents referred to in the Contract.
3.2 The Supplier shall co-operate in any quality assessment required by BT from time to time and allow BT or its representatives access to its premises (and those of any Subcontractor) for this purpose.
4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The Supplier shall work to a Quality Management System that meets the requirement of BS/ISO9000 or equivalent, such as CMMiL3 or above. A body approved by any of the National Accreditation Councils must issue the certificate, if applicable.

Page 8 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
4.2 The Supplier will carry out and be able to supply evidence of periodic quality checks (at least quarterly) to ensure the consistency of delivery of the Services, and the provision of management information as agreed.
4.3 If the Supplier, having had at the Commencement Date a Quality Management System certified to comply with the requirements of BS/ISO9001 (EN 29001 or other equivalent) by an accredited certification body, ceases to maintain the certification, then the Supplier, for avoidance of doubt, shall be in breach of the Contract. (This shall also apply to any sub-contractors that may be used).
4.4 Additionally, the Supplier shall consider steps to meet the requirements of BS15000. Supplier shall provide a report of its current status regarding same.
5 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS
5.1 The Supplier and the Services shall comply with all relevant laws and regulations from time to time, with any Site regulations that may be notified to the Supplier, and with the latest applicable issue of ‘Working with BT (Distribution Guidelines)’ available at:http://www.selling2bt.bt.com/working/distribution/default.asp
5.2 The Supplier shall notify BT if it becomes aware of any non-compliance or receives any allegation of non-compliance with any relevant laws and regulation by any person in connection with the Services. Without prejudice to the foregoing, the Supplier shall provide BT with such assistance as BT may reasonably request to investigate any breach or suspected breach or correct any breach of the relevant laws and regulations. The Supplier shall on BT’s request, promptly take all reasonable action that is necessary and open to the Supplier in order to minimise the impact of the breach and any suspected breach of the relevant laws and regulations.
5.3 The Supplier shall provide to BT such information in such format as BT shall from time to time reasonably require concerning the weight and material composition of any packaging forming part of or accompanying Services.
6 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING
6.1 The Supplier shall not assign or subcontract the whole or any part of the Contract without BT’s prior written consent, which, if given, shall not affect the Supplier’s obligations or liabilities under the Contract.
6.2 The Supplier shall allow BT or its nominated representative(s) access to its Subcontractors for discussions in relation to the Contract provided

Page 9 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
that the Supplier is informed of the proposed agenda and the outcome of the discussions.
7 SUPPLIER OBLIGATIONS
7.1 The Supplier shall perform the Services in accordance with the Specifications in the Work Packages and all other applicable provisions of this Contract. The warranty for any deliverable produced by the Services shall be as set forth in Section 35.
7.2 The Supplier shall provide BT with a reasonable number of copies of any promotional literature relating to the Services which the Supplier may produce from time to time.
7.3 The Supplier shall give BT reasonable advance written notice of any change in or modification of the Services or of the Suppliers intention to discontinue any part of the Services.
7.4 Subject to Section 35 below, the Services when properly used will conform and operate in all respects with the Statement of Requirements and the technical and functional Specifications for the Warranty Period.
7.5 The Supplier shall not accept any request for procurement of Services from BT employees without obtaining express consent from BT through duly authorised and signed Work Package and/or Purchase Order.
8 SERVICE LEVELS
8.1 The Supplier shall ensure that the Services are performed substantially by Contract Personnel of the Supplier.
8.2 The Supplier shall provide the Services in accordance with the Service Levels in the individual Work Package and/or Purchase Order requirements, unless otherwise agreed.
8.3 If at any time after the Effective Date of the individual Work and/or Purchase Order requirements the Services are not supplied in accordance with the Service Levels, the Supplier shall, without prejudice to BT’s other rights and remedies make the necessary arrangements as agreed in the Individual work Package.
8.4 The remedies provided in this Clause headed “Service Levels” are without limitation to any other remedies BT or the Supplier may have under this Contract or at common law or equity in connection with Service non compliance.

Page 10 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
9 CONTRACT PERSONNEL
9.1 The Supplier shall ensure that all Contract Personnel are competent, appropriately qualified and meet with BT’s reasonable satisfaction.
9.2 The Supplier shall not (and shall ensure so far as possible that Contract Personnel shall not) during the Term or during a period of six months immediately after, either on its own behalf or on behalf of any other person, firm, company or organisation directly or indirectly induce or seek to induce any person, firm or company who at any time during the Term is or was a BT customer or in the habit of dealing with BT, and with whom the Supplier has had dealings because of or in connection with the performance of the Contract, to remove his or its business from BT.
9.3 Neither Supplier nor BT shall directly or indirectly induce, encourage, or seek to induce any employee of the other Party to leave such Party’s employment during the Term or during a period of six months immediately after, either on its own behalf or on behalf of any other person, firm, company or organisation.
9.4 A Party shall not be in breach of this provision if it recruits any of the other Party’s employees pursuant to an advertisement or a recruitment campaign not specifically targeted at the employees of the other Party.
10 INDUCTION AND TRAINING
The Supplier shall provide the necessary induction and introductory training before new personnel are actively deployed on any Work to the reasonable satisfaction of BT.
11 KEY PERSONNEL
11.1 The BT Project Manager may at the outset of or from time to time as agreed in writing with the Supplier, during the currency of any project inform the Supplier in writing of the names of any Contract Personnel BT considers are to perform key roles in relation to the assignment (“Key Personnel”).
11.2 The Supplier shall not change or remove or permit the change or removal of any Key Personnel without obtaining the prior written consent of the BT Project Manager. This clause shall however not apply to a case of retirement, resignation or termination of employment of any key personnel for whatever reason by the Supplier.
11.3 The Supplier shall remove from any assignment such Contract Personnel as BT may from time to time require forthwith upon written notice including justification given by the BT Project Manager to the

Page 11 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Supplier where BT in its sole discretion considers circumstances justify it, or otherwise, in any case:
(a) upon the expiry of at least one week’s written notice given by the BT Project Manager to the Supplier during the first eight weeks of any relevant assignment; or
(b) upon the expiry of at least four weeks’ written notice thereafter.
12 ACCESS, ASSISTANCE AND PROGRESS REPORTS
12.1 The Supplier shall:
(a) give to BT (or any person authorised by BT) such access at all reasonable times to the Supplier’s and any Subcontractor’s premises as BT may require from time to time to assess the progress of the Contract;
(b) provide such reports to BT and attend such meetings on the performance of the Contract as may be reasonably required by BT; and
(c) nominate a representative, familiar with all relevant aspects of the Contract, to attend all such meetings.
12.2 The Supplier shall maintain full and accurate records (“the Records”) of all the Services performed in connection with this Contract. The Supplier shall retain the Records for a period of six years after termination or expiry of the Contract. Records shall pertain to areas including, but not limited to, Corporate Tax, VAT, employment, source codes, invoices etc.
12.3 The Supplier shall grant to BT, any auditors (internal or external as appointed by BT) and/or their respective authorised agents the right of access to the Records and/or any Site and/or the Materials and/or the Systems and all supporting documentation and shall provide all reasonable assistance at all times during the Term of this Contract and for any reasonable period thereafter for the purposes of carrying out an audit of the Supplier’s compliance with this Contract including but not limited to all activities, charges, performance, security and integrity in connection therewith. Provided that such audit shall (i) occur at BT’s cost and expense and only on reasonable prior written notice to Supplier, (ii) be subject to confidentiality provisions herein (iii) be limited to BT’s records and related contracts and used solely to determine Supplier’s compliance with this Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, Supplier shall not be obligated to disclose any information of any kind related directly or indirectly to any other client of Supplier or any other information subject to a confidentiality agreement.

Page 12 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
13 MISTAKES IN INFORMATION
13.1 The Supplier shall inform BT in writing of any mistakes in Design Information within a reasonable time of receiving it.
14 BT ITEMS AND PROPERTY
14.1 All BT Items shall remain the property of BT and the Supplier shall:
(a) return them to BT upon completion or termination of the Contract or earlier reasonable request by BT;
(b) keep them securely and good condition, segregated and clearly marked as BT property; and
(c) be fully liable for any loss of or damage to them.
14.2 Upon receipt of any BT Items, the Supplier shall satisfy itself that they are adequate for the purpose for which they are being provided, and within 14 days of receipt shall notify BT of any defects or deficiencies.
14.3 The Supplier shall not, without the prior written consent of BT, use BT Items for any purpose other than as necessary for the performance of the Contract, or allow any third party to use, take possession of, or have any rights or lien over BT Items.
14.2 The Supplier shall not have, and shall ensure that Subcontractors shall not have, a lien on BT Items for any sum due. The Supplier shall take all reasonable steps to ensure the title of BT and the exclusion of such lien are brought to the notice of all Contract Personnel dealing with any BT Items.
14.4 If there is any threatened seizure of any BT Items, or if the Supplier (or any Subcontractors in possession of such BT Items) goes into receivership, administration or liquidation (or the equivalent of any of these) the Supplier shall:

Page 13 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) notify BT immediately;
(b) draw to the attention of the relevant official that BT Items belong to BT and do not form part of the Supplier’s assets; and
(c) allow BT to enter the Supplier’s premises or those of any Contract Personnel where BT Items are stored and take possession of them.
15 FORCE MAJEURE
15.1 Neither party shall be liable to the other party for any delay in the performance of the Contract directly caused by any force majeure event beyond its reasonable control (“the Delay Period”) provided such party shall have first given the other party written notice within seven days after becoming aware that such delay was likely to occur.
15.2 If the Supplier is so delayed, and the Delay Period exceeds 14 days, BT shall have the option by written notice to the Supplier to terminate the Contract immediately in whole or in part and have no liability for the whole or part so terminated.
15.3 For the avoidance of doubt, the provisions of this Condition shall not affect any right to terminate the Contract under the Condition headed “Termination”.
16 SOURCING WITH HUMAN DIGNITY
The following expressions are used in this Condition:
“GS18” — the BT Sourcing with Human Dignity Generic Standard and Principles of Implementation at the Website.
“Response” — a response to the GS18 questionnaire at the Website; and
“Website” — the website at http://www.selling2bt.com/working/humandignity/default.asp
The Supplier shall:
(a) aspire to GS18 standards with a view to the Supplier and Contract Personnel achieving them;
(b) if requested by BT, provide BT with a full Response within two months of the date of the request;
(c) promptly submit to BT a revised Response upon any material change in the previous Response at any time during the Term;

Page 14 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(d) where required work with BT towards the achievement of the GS18 standards (and use its reasonable endeavours to ensure all Contract Personnel will so work with BT and the Supplier); and
(d) co-operate with BT and permit BT and its authorised representatives on reasonable notice access to the Supplier’s premises and records in order to assess compliance with this provision and the level of achievement of GS18 (and use its reasonable endeavours to ensure BT has similar rights in relation to Contract Personnel co-operation, premises and records).
17 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The following expressions are used in this Condition:
“Response” — a response to the GS13 questionnaire (version 9) at the Website.
“Website” — the website at https://secure.selling2bt.bt.com/ext/html/gs13/
The Supplier shall:
(a) if requested by BT, provide BT with a full Response within two months of the date of the request;
(b) promptly submit to BT a revised Response upon any material change in the previous Response at any time during the Term; and
(c) when BT identifies areas that require environmental improvement within the bounds of this contract requirement, the Supplier shall work with BT towards achieving continuous improvement in such areas.
18 ELECTRONIC TRADING
18.1 BT shall send and the Supplier shall accept orders under the Contract only, subject to paragraph 3 of this Condition, by secure e-mail.
The Supplier shall:

Page 15 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) provide a functional SMTP e-mail account for the receipt of orders;
  (b)   ensure its respective e-mail client conforms to S/MIME and other general e-mail standards;
 
  (c)   provide to BT a Class 2 digital certificate for the encryption of e-mails to it, such certificate being issued by a reputable certification provider and complying the requirements of the Electronic Communication Bill section 7; and
(d) use all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain efficient secure e-mail transmission and reception at all times.
18.2 If, despite having used all reasonable commercial efforts, either Party is unable to transmit or receive secure e-mails in accordance with this Condition, it shall promptly inform the other Party, whereupon, for the duration of such inability, BT shall submit orders to the Supplier conventionally.
19 GROUP COMPANIES
19.1 For the purposes of this Condition, “BT Group Company” shall mean any company from time to time in the same group (as defined by s.53 Companies Act 1989) as BT.
19.2 At the joint request of BT and any BT Group Company, the Supplier shall fulfil any order received by such BT Group Company during the Term for Services the same as or substantially similar to the Services. Such fulfilment shall be on the same terms and conditions (mutatis mutandis) (excluding this Condition) and at the same or, at the Supplier’s discretion, lower price(s) as are set out in the Contract.
19.3 BT shall have no liability to the Supplier for or in connection with any order placed by any BT Group Company nor shall BT have its rights under the Contract prejudiced by the acts or omissions of any BT Group Company.
19.4 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract, BT shall have the right to disclose to any BT Group Company on a confidential basis all relevant Information in respect of the Contract.
20 BT RESTRUCTURING
20.1 For the purpose of this Condition:
“BT Affiliate” means a company in which BT owns from time to time, directly or indirectly, at least 20% of the voting share capital.
“Nominee” means any:

Page 16 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) company in the BT Group of companies from time to time;
(b) BT Affiliate;
(c) unaffiliated new company that may be formed by BT pursuant to a corporate reorganisation/restructuring, including any company in the same Group as such new company; or
(d) third party which by purchase, lease, outsourcing agreement or otherwise, assumes the operation, administration and/or management of any substantial portion of the business of BT affected by the Contract.
20.2 At BT’s written request, the Supplier agrees to the novation of the Contract (“Novation”) from BT to any Nominee as may be nominated by BT (“the Transferee”).
20.3 The Supplier and BT shall promptly do all acts and things necessary to effect the Novation, including the signing of a novation agreement, in such form as BT shall reasonably require, which agreement shall effect, without limitation:
(a) an assumption by the Transferee of all rights, obligations and liabilities of BT under the Contract (including rights, licences, obligations and liabilities that are accrued or expressed to be non-transferable, personal or otherwise but excluding the right to novate as conferred by this Condition); and
(b) a release by the Supplier of BT from all obligations and liabilities (including accrued obligations and liabilities) of BT under the Contract
20.4 Following the Novation, nothing in the Contract (including, without limitation, any software licences) shall prevent the Transferee as a contractor to BT from using the Services to provide BT with goods and/or services.
20.5 At BT’s written request, the Supplier agrees to the replication of the Contract for any Nominee nominated by BT, so creating one or more additional agreements, each between the Supplier and such Nominee and each identified by its own contract number, but containing the terms and conditions of the Contract (mutatis mutandis) including, without limitation, the same or lower prices, but excluding the right to replicate as conferred by this Condition. BT shall provide copies of the replicated agreement(s) for execution by the Supplier and shall procure their execution by the relevant Nominee(s).
20.6 If the Contract includes a commitment to purchase a stated or determinable quantity of goods, services or rights, or prices that vary

Page 17 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
based on the quantities purchased, the total purchases by BT and/or the Nominees under the Contract and/or the replicated agreements will be aggregated in determining the quantity or prices.
20.7 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract, BT shall have the right to disclose to any Nominee on a confidential basis all relevant information regarding the Contract.
21 REGULATORY MATTERS
21.1 The Supplier shall comply with all Regulatory Matters (including, without limitation, any actions that BT may require in accordance with any formal or informal undertaking given in response to, or with the object of avoiding being made, any orders, provisional orders, determinations, directions, decisions or interventions by a relevant regulatory authority) that are notified to the Supplier Regulatory Contact from time to time by the BT Regulatory Contact in so far as they relate to the performance of the Contract by the Supplier.
21.2 The Supplier shall ensure that it and Contract Personnel undertake and comply with such training and guidance as the BT Regulatory Contact may provide or specify from time to time in relation to Regulatory Matters.
21.3 The Supplier shall promptly provide such information to BT as shall be necessary for BT to respond fully and to the timescale required to any request or requirement for information from a government or any regulatory body, to the extent that such information relates to the performance of the Contract by the Supplier.
21.4 BT shall reimburse the Supplier for all costs and expenses incurred by it in the performance of its obligations under Paragraphs 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 of this Condition to the extent that such costs and expenses:
(a) would not have been incurred by the Supplier but for this Condition;
(b) are incurred solely, necessarily and exclusively in relation to such obligations;
(c) are reasonable;
(d) are validated to BT’s reasonable satisfaction;
(e) are not provided for under another term of the Contract; and
(f) do not result from acts or omissions of the Supplier which contravene or conflict with any Regulatory Matters previously notified to the Supplier by the BT Regulatory Contact.

Page 18 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
21.5 The Supplier shall permit BT and/or its authorised agents such access to the Supplier’s premises and such access to and copies of its Information (and to and of those of any Contract Personnel) as is reasonable for BT to assess and/or validate the Supplier’s performance of its obligations and/or its costs and expenses under or in relation to this Condition.
22 EURO CONFORMANCE
22.1 For the purpose of this Condition, “Financial Services” means those Services that process financial information.
22.2 The Supplier warrants that all Financial Services, in processing Financial Information, comply with:
(a) all laws and regulations applicable to all relevant currencies (including, without limitation, EC Regulations 1103/97 and 974/98); and
(b) if the UK becomes a “participating Member State” (as defined in EC Regulation 1103/97), all laws and regulations then applicable to sterling and/or to the euro (“Euro Conformance”).
22.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract, and without prejudice to any of BT’s other rights and remedies, BT shall not be obliged to accept nor to pay for financial Services if the Supplier is unable to demonstrate their Euro Conformance to BT’s reasonable satisfaction.
23 CONFIDENTIALITY
23.1 Subject to the Condition headed “Intellectual Property”, either party receiving Information (“the Recipient”) from the other shall not without the other’s prior written consent use such Information except for Contract purposes or disclose such Information to any person other than BT’s employees, agents and contractors or Contract Personnel who have a need to know and who are bound by equivalent obligations of confidentiality. Any breach of such obligations by Contract Personnel or BT’s employees, agents or contractors (as the case may be) shall be deemed to be a breach by the Supplier or BT respectively.
23.2 Paragraph 1 of this Condition shall not apply to Information that is:

Page 19 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) published except by a breach of the Contract; or
(b) lawfully known to the Recipient at the time of disclosure and is not subject to any obligations of confidentiality; or
(c) lawfully disclosed to the Recipient by a third party without any obligations of confidentiality; or
(d) replicated by development independently carried out by or for the Recipient by an employee or other person without access to or knowledge of the Information.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, either Party may disclose, only with the prior written consent of the other party, not to be unreasonably withheld, such terms as are required to be disclosed under strictures of confidentiality for fund raising or financing efforts to investors and lenders and bona fide potential investors and lenders (except no consent is needed to provide to a party’s auditors or attorneys) provided, however, that the receiving parties are bound by confidentiality terms no less restrictive than the terms set forth herein. In addition, the Agreement and terms hereof may be disclosed as otherwise but only to the extent required pursuant to applicable law, regulation or stock market or stock exchange rule; provided that, to the extent practicable, a Party proposing to make such a disclosure as required by law, rule or regulation shall inform the other Party a reasonable time prior to such required disclosure, shall provide the other Party with a copy of the text of such proposed disclosure sufficiently in advance of the proposed disclosure to afford such other Party a reasonable opportunity to review and comment upon the proposed disclosure (including, if applicable, the redacted version of this Agreement) and shall reasonably consider, consistent with applicable law, rule and regulation (including interpretations thereof), the requests of the other Party regarding confidential treatment for such disclosure.
23.3 The Supplier shall not publicise the Contract without BT’s prior written consent and shall ensure that any subcontractor is bound by similar confidentiality terms to those in this Condition.
23.4 Either party that has during the course of the Contract received Information in a recorded form from the other (or has recorded received Information) shall return or destroy (at the option of the disclosing party) such records upon:

Page 20 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) expiry or termination of the Contract; or
(b) upon earlier request
unless such records are part of the Services.
23.5 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
24 BENCHMARKING
The Supplier shall:
(a) undertake its own benchmarking exercises annually at a date to be agreed upon by the Parties;
(b) undertake such further regular benchmarking exercises as may be required by BT from time to time, having first agreed with BT the related processes and comparable suppliers;
(c) promptly provide written reports to BT on such exercises with an audit trail;
(d) provide evidence to BT that the quality, price and delivery of Services is world class;
(e) permit BT’s authorised representatives access to the Supplier’s premises and to its records to inspect and verify such exercises, evidence and reports and/or to allow BT to conduct its own benchmarking exercises, provided that such benchmarking exercises shall (i) occur at BT’s cost and expense and only on reasonable prior written notice to Supplier, (ii) be subject to confidentiality provisions herein (iii) be limited to BT’s records and related contracts and used solely to determine Supplier’s compliance with this Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, Supplier shall not be obligated to disclose any information of any kind related directly or indirectly to any other client of Supplier or any other information subject to a confidentiality agreements; and
(f) fully co-operate with BT during any benchmarking exercise undertaken by BT.
The Supplier’s obligations under this Condition shall be performed at the Supplier’s cost and expense, except as stated in 24 (e).
25 VARIATIONS
25.1 BT shall have the right from time to time during Term by written notice to require the Supplier to alter, amend, add to or otherwise vary any part of the Services (“Variation”) and the Supplier shall carry out such

Page 21 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Variation as agreed in writing by Supplier which agreement shall not be unreasonably withheld. No Variation required by BT shall render the Contract null and void.
25.2 The price(s) payable by BT for Services subject to the Variation shall be increased or decreased by a fair and reasonable amount and any dependent contractual time-scales shall be adjusted by a fair and reasonable amount. The Supplier shall satisfy BT of the reasonableness of any change in prices and/or time-scales and undertakes:
(a) to afford facilities to BT’s nominated representative to visit the Supplier’s premises for the purpose of examining the process involved in the execution of the Variation and estimating or ascertaining the cost of executing it; and,
(b) to provide BT with such particulars of costings in connection with the Variation as may be required by BT and to permit them to be verified by a representative of BT through inspection of its books, accounts and other documents and records, provided that such inspection shall (i) occur at BT’s cost and expense and only on reasonable prior written notice to Supplier, (ii) be subject to confidentiality provisions herein (iii) be limited to BT’s records and related contracts and used solely to determine Supplier’s compliance with this Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, Supplier shall not be obligated to disclose any information of any kind related directly or indirectly to any other client of Supplier or any other information subject to a confidentiality agreements
25.3 No Variation shall be carried out unless requested in writing by BT’s Commercial Contact or requested by Supplier but agreed to by BT’s Commercial Contact in writing. Any Variation carried out other than in accordance with this Condition shall be the sole responsibility of the Supplier and shall not result in any increase in the price(s) payable by BT or in any variation in time-scales.
26 SUSPENSION OF WORK
26.1 BT may suspend Work at any time and will pay to the Supplier all reasonable resulting expenses incurred by the Supplier (other than those arising from the Suppliers own default) provided that;
(a) no payment shall be made for any period of suspension, prevention or delay of less than 2 consecutive days; and
(b) the Supplier has within 10 days after the event giving rise to the claim, given written notice to BT of its intention to make such a claim; and

Page 22 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(c) the Supplier makes such claim giving full details of each item claimed and the reason for such cost within 30 days after the event giving rise to the claim.
26.2 The Supplier may suspend Work if BT fails, neglects or refuses to conform with the following provisions in the Contract:
a) Non-Solicitation in Condition 9.3
b) Payment Obligation in Condition 55
c) Confidentiality in Condition 23
and BT will pay to the Supplier all reasonable resulting costs and expenses incurred by the Supplier (other than those arising from the Supplier’s own default). Notwithstanding the above the Supplier shall promptly notify BT’s Commercial Contact in the event the Supplier finds BT not in conformance with a, b, or c above. Both Parties shall invoke the escalation procedure in accordance with the heading “Escalation” to resolve the non-conformance within 10 days. Where the non-conformance is not resolved within 10 days through the escalation procedure, the Supplier may suspend Work in relation to the Work Package as provided above.
27 WORK SITE AND SECURITY
27.1 The Supplier shall be deemed to have examined the Site and BT shall not be liable for any claim from the Supplier in relation to its misinterpretation of any Site-related matter, or any other matter in respect of which the Supplier could reasonably have satisfied itself by a visit to the Site, reference to BT or otherwise.
27.2 The Supplier shall before the commencement of any relevant Work inform BT of the number of employees to be brought onto the Site.
27.3 The Supplier shall designate one or more competent representatives to supervise the carrying out of the Work on the Site (the “Supplier’s Representative”), whose names shall be notified to BT in writing, and who shall be present on the Site continuously between 0800 and 1800 Monday to Friday excluding all relevant UK public holidays (“the Working Hours”). Any orders or instructions BT gives to the Supplier’s Representative shall be deemed to have been given to the Supplier.
27.4 Where Work is to be carried out on a BT Site, BT shall wherever possible and reasonable provide such facilities during Working Hours or such reasonable working hours as may be applicable to each Site as are agreed between BT and the Supplier. The Supplier shall satisfy BT

Page 23 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
that the power arrangements meet any safety provisions as may be applicable to the Site. Any statement of satisfaction by or on behalf of BT shall be without prejudice to the obligations and liabilities of the Supplier.
27.5 The Supplier shall give at least 7 days written notice to BT of the dates and times on which it proposes to deliver any Services or Supplier’s Equipment to the Site and shall upon despatch of Services or Supplier’s Equipment to Site notify BT of their details in writing.
27.6 No Services or Supplier’s Equipment shall be removed from any Site without BT’s written consent and, if given, the Supplier shall provide a receipt to BT or BT’s site representative listing full details of the Services or Supplier’s Equipment removed. The Supplier shall ensure that no BT Items, facilities or materials are used or removed from any Site without BT’s written consent and shall immediately notify BT of any known or suspected breach of security and give BT full co-operation in any investigation.
27.7 The Supplier shall remove Supplier’s Equipment and any defective Services leaving the Site clean and in good condition, either:
(a) immediately before submitting Services for Acceptance; or
(b) at any time before Acceptance, subject to 20 days written notice from BT.
27.8 The Supplier shall hand to BT any existing BT Items or materials recovered as a result of the Work if they are not to be used to meet the requirements of the Contract or deliver them to such place as directed by BT.
27.9 If the Supplier fails to remove Supplier’s Equipment from Site as specified above, then BT may remove it at the Supplier’s risk and expense.
27.10 The Supplier shall ensure that Contract Personnel comply with all security, safety and works regulations and such other local instructions as may be notified by BT or BT’s customer whilst on any Site.
27.11 BT may remove from and refuse entry and re-admission to a Site any person who is, in the reasonable opinion of BT, not complying with the requirements of this Condition or not a fit person to be allowed on Site.
27.12 BT may at its discretion, search any Contract Personnel or their vehicles or equipment upon any BT Site or upon entry to and departure from any Site. The Supplier shall use its best endeavours to ensure that Contract Personnel are aware of and comply with these requirements and that no Contract Personnel unwilling to so comply will be employed on any Site.

Page 24 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
27.13 The Supplier shall (and shall ensure Contract Personnel shall):
(a) access only those parts of Sites strictly necessary for the purposes of the Contract; and
(b) comply with the BT Security Access Policy set out at:
http://www.selling2bt.com/working/third_party_access/default.asp ; and
(c) use any equipment or lines provided by BT only for the purposes of the Contract, and, in particular shall not use BT equipment or lines for personal use.
27.14 The Supplier shall undertake a risk assessment and use appropriate physical and electronic security measures to use all reasonable endeavours to safeguard any BT Items against loss or theft. BT shall have the right to examine such arrangements and associated security procedures and to inspect all BT Items being held by or on behalf of the Supplier, and the Supplier shall use such additional reasonable security measures as BT shall from time to time require.
27.15 The Supplier shall supply on request details (name, address, date of birth) of any Contract Personnel who might have access to a Site.
27.16 BT may examine any Information relating to the handling, processing, transportation and storage of information or property of or supplied by BT and held by the Supplier under the Contract, which Information shall be kept by the Supplier for at least one year after the termination or expiry of the Contract.
27.17 BT shall not be responsible for safeguarding any property or money of Contract Personnel.
28 RISK ASSESSMENT
28.1 The Supplier shall provide a Risk Register for each Work Package/ project, which will form part of any subsequent contractual commitment.
28.2 The register shall as a minimum identify the risk, likely impact, probability evaluation and mitigation actions that will be taken to reduce the risk.
28.3 The register shall also identify any specific Supplier responsibility exclusions, which will vary dependent on the type of service provided.

Page 25 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
29 BT SECURITY POLICY REQUIREMENTS
29.1 The Supplier shall comply with the requirements of BT’s security requirements, as defined in BT Security Policy in Schedule 4 herein.
29.2 The Supplier shall not have or be permitted access to interconnection with BT Systems and access to BT Information (“Access”) other than for the Purposes (as defined in Schedule 4) in accordance with the Contract.
29.3 BT allows (so far as it can and is able to do so) the Supplier, while the Supplier is Authorised (as defined in Schedule 4) Access solely for the Purposes as defined in Schedule 4.
29.4 The Supplier shall take all reasonable steps to prevent unauthorised Access.
29.5 The Supplier shall provide BT with a generic risk management statement (in terms of risk management strategy and contingency plans) in connection with any services provided remotely from BT site, either in the UK or Offshore, to ensure continuity of service in the event of natural disaster, terrorist attack, war or similar.
29.6 In the event of conflict between this Condition and Schedule 4 in this Contract, the terms of Schedule 4 shall prevail.
29.7 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
30 PROTECTION OF PERSONAL DATA
30.1 Other than at BT’s request, where required to provide the Services, or where required by law the Supplier shall not disclose or allow access to any personal data as defined in the Data Protection Act 1998 (the “Data Protection Act”) relating to the Services (“BT Personal Data”) whether provided or acquired by the Supplier during the course of the negotiations leading to or on the execution and during the Term of this Contract, other than to a person placed by the Supplier under a like obligation who is employed or engaged by the Supplier or within the control of the Supplier in the performance of the Contract.
30.2 The Supplier shall store or process BT Personal Data only at sites and in a manner specifically advised to BT in writing in advance and only in accordance with the Data Protection Act. BT shall have the right to reasonably object to such storage or processing at any time in which case the Supplier shall store or process data only at sites or in a manner expressly agreed with BT.
30.3 The Supplier shall not use BT Personal Data for any purpose other than the performance of the Services and shall return any BT Personal

Page 26 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Data to BT immediately upon request at any time providing such return does not prevent the Supplier from fulfilling its obligations under this Contract. Upon expiry or termination of this Contract for whatever reason, the Supplier shall return to BT or at BT’s option destroy (and certify that it has destroyed) all BT Personal Data.
30.4 The Parties acknowledge that, in respect of all BT Personal Data controlled by BT and processed by the Supplier for the purpose of the provision of Services under this Contract BT alone shall determine the purposes for which and the manner in which such BT Personal Data will be processed (as defined in the Data Protection Act) by the Supplier.
30.5 Where, in connection with this Contract, the Supplier processes BT Personal Data on behalf of BT as a data processor, the Supplier shall:
(a) process BT Personal Data only on instructions of BT and to the extent necessary for the performance of this Contract;
(b) not disclose BT Personal Data to any person except as required or permitted by this Contract or with BT’s written consent; and
(c) implement appropriate technical and organisational measures to protect those personal data against accidental or unlawful destruction or accidental loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure or access, and against all other unlawful forms of processing.
(d) Subject to the indemnification processes and terms set forth in Section 33.11, 33.12 and 46.1 hereto, the Supplier shall at its own expense defend, indemnify and hold harmless BT against all third party actions, claims, demands and proceedings and all damages, costs and expenses incurred in connection therewith made or brought against BT by any person in respect of any loss or damages to that person relating to the misuse of the personal data of that person by the Supplier, its officers, contractors, sub-contractors, agents, servants, or employees or other person within its control.
30.6 The Supplier shall, with regard to personal data:
(a) comply and ensure that all its employees, agents and sub-contractors comply with all relevant provisions of any BT codes of practice (mutatis mutandis) notified to the Supplier from time to time, the Computer Misuse Act 1990 and the Data Protection Act; and
(b) keep and ensure all its employees, agents and Sub-Contractors keep all Information secure and confidential, act only on BT’s instructions with respect to it, and comply with such further

Page 27 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
reasonable requirements from time to time of BT for the security of it; and
(c) prior to any transfer of personal data, enter into or procure that the Sub-contractor delivering the Services will enter into contracts for the transfer of personal data, which in respect of the European Economic Area (the “EEA”) shall be on the basis of the Model Contract Terms as issued by the European Commission pursuant to the Data Protection Directives or such other data protection model contract terms as may be agreed between the Parties from time to time and in respect of countries outside the EEA on terms consistent with the legal requirements of such countries.
30.7 Where, in connection with this Contract, the Supplier processes BT Personal Data on behalf of BT as a data processor, the Supplier shall without delay execute Model Clauses in Schedule 3 for each and every Work Package and/or Purchase Order.
30.8 Other than as provided in this Clause 30, the Supplier agrees not to export any personal data outside the EEA without BT’s prior written consent.
31 TRANSFER OF UNDERTAKINGS
31.1 Within 7 days following a written request by BT at any time, the Supplier shall, at its own expense, provide in writing to BT or to such third parties as BT may direct, all Information concerning:
(a) any actual, threatened or potential litigation by or in relation to its employees;
(b) its employees’ terms and conditions of employment; and
(c) such other Information as BT considers necessary to ensure compliance with the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations or any similar or related legislation (“TUPE”) following the termination or expiry of the Contract in relation to the provision of services the same as or similar to services comprised in the Services (“Similar Services”).
31.2 The Supplier warrants that all Information supplied under Paragraph 1 of this Condition is complete and correct.
31.3 The Supplier indemnifies:
(a) BT (without prejudice to any other right of BT); and

Page 28 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(b) at BT’s request, any subsequent contractor to BT providing Similar Services
against all liability arising as a result of the operation of TUPE or otherwise in relation to the acts or omissions of the Supplier with respect to its employees during the Term, subject to the indemnification processes and terms set forth in Section 33.11, 33.12 and 46.1.
31.4 The Supplier shall use its reasonable endeavours to ensure that the composition of its workforce is not altered so as to affect materially the application of TUPE or the extent of such application.
31.5 The provisions of this Condition shall survive the expiry or termination of the Contract, and their existence, or BT’s exercise of any rights under them, shall not constitute or imply any admission by BT that TUPE is applicable or not.
32 TAX AND NATIONAL INSURANCE
The Supplier shall make all appropriate PAYE deductions for tax and National Insurance contributions from the remuneration it pays its personnel (none of whom shall be employees of BT) and the Supplier indemnifies BT in respect of any claims that may be made by the relevant authorities against BT in respect of tax demands or National Insurance or similar contributions relating to the Supplier’s personnel or, where the Supplier is a partnership, relating to any partner in the Supplier.
33 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
33.1 In this Condition, “New Information” means all Information generated in the course of or arising from the performance of the Contract.
33.2 BT shall exclusively own the New Information and all Intellectual Property Rights in it. Whenever the Supplier becomes aware of any invention or design comprised in the New Information as may reasonably be thought patentable or registrable the Supplier shall provide sufficient information to BT’s Commercial Contact (or such other person or address as BT may notify) to enable BT both to ascertain its technical and commercial significance, and, if required by BT, to apply for Intellectual Property Right protection.
33.3 The Supplier assigns to BT the copyright, design right and any other Intellectual Property Right in the New Information which shall vest in BT absolutely as and when such copyright, design right or other right comes into existence. All documentation or other items or media consisting of or containing New Information shall belong to BT. The Supplier shall mark each item of the New Information accordingly.

Page 29 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
33.4 The Supplier shall, at the request and expense of BT, to do or ensure that is done, everything that BT may reasonably require to apply for and to obtain Intellectual Property Rights in any New Information and to vest in BT absolutely any such Intellectual Property Rights, or any application.
33.5 The Supplier shall use reasonable care to ensure that nothing is done to prejudice the grant or creation of any Intellectual Property Right in respect of any of the New Information or to prejudice the exercise of any such Intellectual Property Rights.
33.6 The Supplier warrants that it has the right and power to grant to BT the rights and licences granted under the Contract.
33.7 The Supplier grants a non-exclusive irrevocable licence to BT whether by itself or by third parties on its behalf, free of any payment, to copy, disclose, publish, sell and use (with the right to sublicense any such rights) the Services without restriction. If the exercise of these rights and/or BT’s rights in the New Information requires licences to use the Supplier’s Background Information or the Intellectual Property Rights of any third party, then the Supplier shall be deemed to hereby grant or shall procure such licences for BT at no cost to BT.
33.8 Where BT has instructed the Supplier to procure third party components including software for BT use in the performance of the Services, which is sub-licensed to BT, the Supplier shall grant BT in the sub- licence similar warranties and indemnities as provided in the third party contract between the Supplier and third party until such time BT ceases use of the third party component.
For the purposes of this sub-paragraph,
“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE” will mean any Software that is owned by a person other than Supplier or BT and is used to provide the Services.
“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE LICENCE” will mean a license agreement that authorises BT or Supplier to use Third Party Software.
The Parties will identify in each Work Package or Purchase Order such additional Third Party Software as may be required for Supplier to perform a particular Work. Supplier shall perform the following actions in order to ensure Supplier has the necessary right to use Third Party Software in order to perform Services for BT under this Agreement (“Third Party Consents”) in the following order of precedence:
33.8.1 Solely for Services to be performed within the BT or on other premises, Supplier shall (i) work with BT to obtain the necessary Third Party

Page 30 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Consents; and (ii) execute any additional agreements or assurances with such third party which may be necessary to secure such Third Party Consents. BT’s failure to obtain any such Third Party Consents shall not be a breach of this Agreement; provided however, Supplier shall have no obligation to perform the Services dependent on such Third Party Software.
33.8.2 For Third Party Software as to which Supplier has an existing license for its own use, Supplier shall use all reasonable efforts to secure all necessary Third Party Consents including without limitation the right to use the Third Party Software for the benefit of BT.
33.8.3 For Third Party Software as to which Supplier does not have an existing licence for its own use, Supplier shall use commercially reasonable efforts to secure all necessary Third Party Consents including without limitation the right to use the Third Party Software for the benefit of BT. The parties may execute a Work Package or a Variation to effect the foregoing. Alternatively, Supplier and BT may agree that BT procure such Third Party License Agreement.
33.8.4 For Third Party Software as to which BT has an existing Third Party License for its own use and as to which Supplier does not already have a licence of its own permitting Supplier to use the Third Party Software to provide the Services or is unable to obtain under subsection (2) above, Supplier shall (i) work with BT to obtain the necessary Third Party Consents; and (ii) execute any additional agreements or assurances with such third party which may be necessary to secure such Third Party Consents. BT’s failure to obtain any such Third Party Consents shall not be a breach of this Contract; provided however, Supplier shall have no obligation to perform the Services dependent on such Third Party Software.
33.9 Supplier may not enter into oral or written agreements with any individual or business entity for or in the name of BT or BT Nominee or Affiliated Companies of BT. Supplier shall not cancel, substitute, terminate, change or add to any such Third Party Software Licence without BT’s prior written consent, which consent may be withheld in BT’s sole discretion.
33.10 The Supplier indemnifies BT against all actions, claims, proceedings, damages, costs, and expenses arising from any actual or alleged infringement of Intellectual Property Rights (excluding Third Party Software used as part of any Work which was pre-approved by BT and for which Supplier has not entered into a Third Party Software License) or breach of confidentiality by BT’s possession or use or sale, lease or hire of any of the Services anywhere in the world. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, Supplier will indemnify and pay to BT with

Page 31 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
respect to such third party claims under this Section and under this Agreement regarding indemnification obligations of Supplier, all such damages, costs and expenses finally awarded against BT to such third party by a court of competent jurisdiction after all appeals have been exhausted or at the time of a final settlement of such claims or final award or out of court settlement, if applicable.
33.11 BT shall notify the Supplier in writing of any such allegation received by BT and shall not make any admissions unless the Supplier gives prior written consent.
33.12 At the Supplier’s request and expense, BT shall permit the Supplier to conduct and control all negotiations and litigation. BT shall give all reasonable assistance and the Supplier shall pay BT’s costs and expenses so incurred.
33.13 The Supplier may at its expense modify or replace the Services to avoid any alleged or actual infringement or breach. The modification or replacement must not affect the performance of the Services. If neither of these remedies are reasonably available to the Supplier, the Supplier may require BT to cease using the infringing Work and the Supplier will issue BT a pro-rated refund based on a Contract Term year depreciation schedule for the infringing Work (as appropriate). Where BT is required to return the Services to the Supplier and such return requires goods to cross an international border, the rejected Services shall be returned to the Supplier on a CIP basis and the Supplier shall reimburse to BT the reasonable costs of transportation, delivery, importation and any necessary international trade formalities with which BT must comply. The Supplier may at its option, collect rejected Services. Replacement Services shall be delivered on a FCA basis and the Supplier shall reimburse to BT the reasonable costs of transportation, delivery, importation and any necessary international trade formalities with which BT must comply.
33.14 This indemnity shall not apply to apply to infringements or breaches arising directly from:
(a) compliance with the Design Information to the extent that such compliance directly or indirectly results in the infringement. This exception does not apply to infringements resulting from a BT requirement that the Services comply with a national or international standard; or
(b) the combination of the Services with other items not supplied under the Contract.
(c) any alteration or modification of any Services not provided or authorised by Supplier in writing, if the infringement would not have
Page 32 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
occurred but for the alteration or modification by a party other than Supplier
(d) any claim covered by paragraph 33.15 below or any intellectual property of BT, to the extent that such intellectual property caused such infringement.
33.15 Without prejudice to sub-paragraph 12(a) of this Condition, BT warrants that compliance with the Design Information will not cause infringement or breach.
33.16 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
34. ESCALATION
In the event that a material dispute relating to the Contract arises, the parties, shall escalate the dispute to the persons named or holding the positions (or their equivalents) at the Levels stated below and for the time periods stated below. If, despite each Level’s good faith discussions and negotiations for the time period stated below, such Level is still unable to resolve the dispute within the period stated below for such Level to the mutual satisfaction of the parties, the parties shall escalate the dispute to the next Level for the periods stated below, and so on until the procedure is exhausted. If the dispute is not resolved within the periods stated below (and any applicable agreed cure period), then the parties may pursue all other remedies provided at law or under this Contract. During the time of escalation per the process set forth below, neither party shall resort to litigation unless the other party is unwilling or unable to engage in the escalation process.
             
    For BT   For the Supplier   Time of Negotiation/Level
Level 1
  Commercial Contact   Client Services Manager   5 business days
 
           
Level 2
  Head of domain   Vice President   5 business days
 
      Client Services    
 
           
Level 3
  VP Global Sourcing of Centre of   General Manager   5 business days
 
  Excellence        
 
Level 4
  Chief Procurement Officer   Chief Operating Officer   5 business days
 
           
Level 5
  Group CFO   Chief Executive Officer   10 business days
Page 33 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
35 WARRANTY
35.1 The Supplier shall at its own cost promptly remedy (by, at BT’s option and by mutual agreement, repair, replacement or modify) any non-conformance of the Services from the Specification during the Warranty Period solely due to the fault of the Supplier as notified by BT in writing during the 180 day period (“the Warranty Period”) of their respective delivery to BT due to:
(a) poor or defective workmanship or materials;
(b) faulty design which deviates from the Specification, (other than a design made or furnished or specified by BT and for which the Supplier has previously disclaimed responsibility in writing within a reasonable time of receipt); or
(c) any negligent act or negligent omission by the Supplier or Contract Personnel.
If BT notifies Supplier in writing of any such non-conformance during the Warranty Period, Supplier’s sole and exclusive obligation, and BT’s sole and exclusive remedy shall be for Supplier to promptly repair, replace or modify such non-conformance at no additional expense to BT to comply with the warranty stated above, without prejudice to BT’s rights under the heading “Termination”.
35.2 Subject to the warranty terms above, the Supplier shall use all reasonable care to:
(a) ensure that any remedied part of Services is compatible with all Services; and
(b) complete the remedy to comply with the warranty above within the time-scales specified in the Contract (or, if none are specified, within a reasonable time); and
(c) ensure that defective Services are not remedied on BT premises without BT’s consent, unless, for operational or technical reasons they can only be removed or replaced with difficulty; and
(d) cause the minimum of disruption to BT and/or its customers in effecting any remedy. The time at which any remedy is to be effected shall be agreed with BT and BT may at its discretion direct the Supplier to work outside normal working hours at no cost to BT.
35.3 All repaired or replacement Services shall benefit from the provisions of this Condition and a new Warranty Period shall apply to them from their respective date of delivery to BT.
Page 34 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
35.4 The Supplier shall, upon receipt of Services returned under this Condition, immediately investigate those Services and take all necessary corrective action to prevent recurrence of the defects in Services. The Supplier shall report monthly in writing to BT’s Commercial Contact the outcome of all such investigations. The report shall contain such additional information and be in such format as BT shall reasonably require from time to time including but not limited to:
a) a summary of the Services rejected by BT under this Condition, along with the results of the investigation.
b) the details of any corrective action taken to prevent a recurrence of defects.
c) without prejudice to the rights of BT under this Condition, the reasons for any Services returned not being accepted under the terms of this guarantee and a breakdown of those Services by the code number quoted on any applicable fault label supplied.
35.5 Subject to Clause 33, the Supplier warrants that it has the right to supply the Software and grant licences for the Software as described in this Contract and will indemnify and hold harmless BT against any claim that it is not so entitled.
35.6 The Supplier warrants that the Software will after acceptance by BT and during the Warranty Period provide the facilities and functions set out in their Functional Specifications, and that the documentation provided by the Supplier for the Software will provide instruction to enable BT to make full and proper use of such facilities and functions.
35.7 In the event of a breach of warranty during the Warranty Period solely due to the fault of the Supplier, the Supplier shall correct or replace free of charge to BT, for the applicable Warranty Period commencing from Acceptance of the installation of the Software, any non-conformance of the Software for the Functional Specification in the Statement of Requirements or any part thereof. Where an error in Services in accordance with 35.1 or Software is discovered to be a consequence of
(a) an amendment or customisation made to the Software or Service by or on behalf of BT without the Supplier’s prior consent;
(b) the combination, operation, or use of the Software with any other software or materials not approved by Supplier or use of the Software on incompatible hardware or software environment not recommended by Supplier;
Page 35 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(c) operation or use of the Software otherwise than for the purposes or in accordance with this Contract and documentation provided by the Supplier,
(d) BT’s hardware malfunction,
(e) third party software;
then the Supplier may levy a reasonable charge for its time expended correcting the said error.
35.8 The Supplier shall use good quality materials, techniques and standards and execute this Contract with the care, skill and diligence required in accordance with the best computing practice and industry standards.
35.9 The Supplier hereby represents, warrants and covenants that the Software, when delivered to BT, does not and will not contain any computer code that would disable the Software or impair in any way its operation based on the elapsing of a period of time, exceeding an authorised number of copies, advancement to a particular date or other numeral, or other similar self-destruct mechanisms (sometimes referred to as “time bombs”, “time locks”, or “drop dead” devices) or that would permit the Supplier to access the Software to cause such disablement or impairment (sometimes referred to as a “trap door” device).
35.10 The Supplier agrees that in the event of a breach or alleged breach of Section 35.9 that BT shall not have an adequate remedy at law, including monetary damages, and that BT shall consequently be entitled to seek a temporary restraining order, injunction, or other form of equitable relief against the continuance of such breach, in addition to any and all remedies to which BT shall be entitled.
35.11 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
36 TITLE AND RISK
36.1 Without prejudice to BT’s right to reject under the Contract, the title in Services shall pass to BT upon the earlier of Acceptance or payment (and for any part of a Service, including any payment thereon) and shall be free from any claims or encumbrance whatsoever, with the exception of Software for which a licence is granted in accordance with the Contract.
36.2 If any Services are rejected by BT or the Contract is terminated, title to any Services not accepted by BT and any materials or things which have not been incorporated in any part of accepted Services, shall re-vest in the Supplier on the expiration of 30 days from the date on which
Page 36 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
such termination or rejection takes effect unless BT gives notice to the Supplier within such period that it intends to either issue any certificate of commercial service in respect of the rejected Services or otherwise retain title in them.
36.3 Any payment made by BT for Services, materials or things which re-vest in the Supplier is a sum due to BT from the Supplier.
36.4 The Supplier shall deliver to BT any Services the title in which BT has elected to retain provided that BT pays for the fees and expenses incurred up the time of delivery of the Services under this Condition and if it shall fail to do so BT may enter the Supplier’s premises and remove such Services and recover the cost of so doing from the Supplier, subject to BT paying a fair and reasonable price for such Services.
36.5 The risk of loss of or damage to Services shall pass to BT upon Acceptance, which Acceptance shall be defined in each Project.
37 RIGHT TO REJECT
37.1 BT shall have the right to reject the whole or any part of the Services prior to Acceptance that it reasonably considers are not in accordance with the Specification in the Statement of Requirements.
37.2 The Supplier shall at its own risk and expense, then use all reasonable endeavours to replace or repair rejected Services with Services that comply with the Statement of Requirements within 14 days (or any other reasonable period specified by BT) of notice of rejection from BT.
37.3 Written acknowledgement of receipt of Services by BT at the delivery point shall not affect BT’s rights subsequently to reject those Services. In the event a defect is identified in the Services delivered and prior to Acceptance, the Supplier shall at its own risk and expense, use all reasonable endeavours to replace or repair rejected Services with Services that comply with the Statement of Requirements within 14 days (or any other reasonable period agreed with the parties) of notice from BT of the deficiency.
38 EXPORT
The Supplier:
(a) warrants that it has obtained all necessary licences, authorities, consents and permits for the unrestricted export of Services to BT, and export or re-export to such countries as BT shall have notified to the Supplier at any time before delivery to BT; and
Page 37 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(b) indemnifies BT against all costs, claims, or demands resulting directly or indirectly from any breach of such warranty, subject to the provisions of Section 33.11, 33.12and 46.1.
39 DOCUMENTATION
In this Condition, “Documentation” means the installation, user and maintenance guides and/or other documentation supplied under the Contract relating to the use and/or operation of Services.
39.1 The Supplier grants to BT non-exclusive, royalty free, world-wide rights, by or on behalf of BT to copy and disclose, make adaptations of (and copy and disclose such adaptations) of the Documentation for its and, where not otherwise expressly restricted, third parties’ use of Services.
40. DELIVERY
40.1 The Supplier shall deliver Services in accordance with the Contract for time of delivery. If no such time is specified in the Contract, the Supplier shall deliver Services as agreed between the parties or, in the absence of agreement, at such time as BT may specify but not limited to in the Work Package or Purchase Order (as the case may be).
40.2 The Supplier shall deliver Services ordered by BT in accordance with the Requirements schedule to the Contract.
40.3 The Supplier shall not, without the prior written consent of BT, deliver any part order (by quantity or by item). If Services are not available for delivery at the due time, the Supplier shall (without prejudice to BT’s rights under the Contract) immediately inform BT by telephone, facsimile or e-mail and confirm such communication in writing.
41 DEFAULT/LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
41.1 Subject to the provisions of the Condition headed “Force Majeure”, and, if the Supplier does not deliver, install, or complete (as the case may be) any Services by the due date subject to any Variation and terms of any Work Package and/or Purchase Order, the Supplier shall be in breach of the Contract (but not necessarily material breach), and, where the relevant Work Package or this Contract provides for the payment of liquidated damages, shall pay to BT on request such an amount of liquidated damages as described in the relevant Work Package.
41.2 Payment of, or BT’s right to liquidated damages under this Condition shall not affect any of BT’s rights under the Condition headed “Termination”.
Page 38 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
41.3 Without prejudice to any other obligation of the Supplier, in respect of each activity specified in Schedules, 6 and, the Supplier shall perform the Work Package in accordance with the corresponding contract performance requirement.
42 TOOLING
42.1 For the purposes of this Condition, “Tooling” means any equipment and/or software developed, produced or used at any time in relation to the production of Services and owned or paid for or to be paid for or supplied by BT.
42.2 All Tooling shall be BT Items and shall remain the property of BT. Where Tooling is not already owned by BT, it shall become the property of BT from the date of the first payment by BT for it.
42.3 BT shall have the right, at any reasonable time on reasonable written notice to the Supplier, to inspect, or to take possession of, any or all Tooling.
42.4 The Supplier shall at all times maintain the Tooling in good condition and fit for its intended purpose and shall, within 7 days of receipt of written notice from BT, procure or modify any Tooling in accordance with BT’s reasonable instructions.
42.5 The Supplier shall, within 7 days of the expiry or termination (for whatever reason) of the Contract or within 7 days of receipt of a written request from BT, physically transfer the Tooling to BT or such third party as BT may notify to the Supplier in writing.
42.6 The Supplier shall regularly update and provide to BT a Tooling inventory, (including without limitation, details of description, quantity, location, rate of production, and the expected life of the Tooling) taking into account modifications to it from time to time.
42.7 The Supplier shall be solely responsible for the actions stated in paragraphs 4 to 6 of this Condition, including in situations where the Tooling is in the possession of a Subcontractor or other agent or nominee of the Supplier.
42.8 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
43 TERMINATION
43.1 If either party to the Contract commits a material breach or persistent material breaches of the Contract or Supplier or its group companies commits any material breach of any other agreement with any BT Group Company from time to time, the non-breaching party shall serve written notice on the breaching party (i) requiring such breach to be
Page 39 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
remedied within thirty (30) business days, and (ii) the commencing the escalation process procedure in clause 34 (such cure period and escalation period to run concurrently). If the breaching party fails to remedy the material breach within thirty (30) business days of written notice from the non-breaching party, then the other party shall have the right to:
(a) terminate the Contract; and
(b) make a claim against the breaching party for all direct damages resulting from such breach, subject to, and in accordance with the terms herein.
43.2 BT shall have the right at any time to terminate the Contract immediately and to make a claim against Supplier for, all direct damages resulting if the Supplier shall become insolvent or cease to trade or compound with its creditors; or a bankruptcy petition or order is presented or made against the Supplier; or where the Supplier is a partnership, against any one partner, or if a trustee in sequestration is appointed in respect of the assets of the Supplier or (where applicable) any one partner; or a receiver or an administrative receiver is appointed in respect of any of the Supplier’s assets; or a petition for an administration order is presented or such an order is made in relation to the Supplier; or a resolution or petition or order to wind up the Supplier is passed or presented or made or a liquidator is appointed in respect of the Supplier (otherwise than for reconstruction or amalgamation).
43.3 [***]
“Change of Control” means any of the following transactions which result in a third party acquiring Control (as defined below) of the Supplier or its direct or indirect holding company (or its or their business or assets): (A) a merger, consolidation, business combination, recapitalization, liquidation, dissolution or similar transaction involving the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company); (B) the acquisition by any person or group (including by way of a tender or exchange offer or issuance by the Supplier ) (or its direct or indirect holding company), directly or indirectly, of beneficial ownership or a right to acquire beneficial ownership of shares in the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company) or (C) a sale or other disposition by the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company) of assets or earning power aggregating a majority of the assets or earning power of the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company), excluding all sales of equity pursuant to an initial public or subsequent public offering by Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company) or (D) or any agreement to do any of the foregoing.
Page 40 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
“Control” shall mean the legal or beneficial ownership of more than 50% of the voting or equity interests or assets of the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company); or the power or right to direct or cause the direction of the management and/or affairs of the Supplier (or its direct or indirect holding company) or its or their business (including acting as the general partner of a limited partnership).
43.4 Except as otherwise expressly provided in individual Work Packages and Purchase Orders, [***], BT may terminate Work carried out under an individual Purchase Order and/or Work Package. Termination of Work carried out under individual Purchase Orders and/or Work Package shall not affect the status of Work carried out or to be carried out under other Purchase Orders and/or Work Package issued under the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt, any termination by BT under this Clause shall not affect BT’s obligations under Clause 55 and Schedule 6.
43.5 Where BT terminates the Contract under paragraph 43.4 and does not have any other right to terminate the Contract, in addition to Supplier’s rights and BT’s obligations under Clause 55 and Schedule 6, the following shall apply:
(a) BT shall subject to subparagraph (b) below, pay the Supplier such for Services performed to the date of termination and pay such amounts as may be necessary to cover its reasonable costs and outstanding and unavoidable commitments (and reasonable profit thereon) necessarily and solely incurred in properly performing the Contract in relation to Applicable Services (as defined below) prior to termination.
(b) BT shall not pay for any such costs or commitments that the Supplier is able to mitigate and shall only pay costs and commitments that BT has validated to its satisfaction. BT shall not be liable to pay for any Applicable Services that, at the date of termination, BT is entitled to reject (including any Services for which BT may have put into service) or has already rejected. BT’s total liability under sub-paragraph (a) above shall not in any circumstances exceed the price that would have been payable by BT for Applicable Services if the Contract had not been terminated.
(c) In this paragraph 4, “Applicable Services” means Services in respect of which the Contract has been terminated under this paragraph, which were ordered by BT under the Contract before the date of termination, and for which payment has not at that date become due from BT.
(d) Except as expressly set forth in Clauses 43.4 and 43.5, sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) above encompass the total liability of BT for
Page 41 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
termination pursuant to this paragraph 4, and BT shall be liable for no other costs, claims, damages, or expenses resulting from such termination.
43.6 Notwithstanding anything contained above, in the event of termination of this Contract for any reason whatsoever, BT shall be liable to pay the Supplier all undisputed invoices for the Services rendered up to the date of such termination.
43.7 Each right of BT under this Condition is without prejudice to any other right of BT under this Condition or otherwise.
44 TRANSITION
Where the Supplier undertakes Work which requires transition:
44.1 The Supplier shall complete transition of the Work (as detailed in the relevant Statement of Requirements) within three (3) months (“the Transition Period”) of commencement of the Work.
44.2 The start date for the transition work shall be identified as Effective Date which date shall be mutually agreed in Statement of Requirements.
44.3 The Supplier shall initiate transition for critical work areas identified by BT, ahead of the transition start date, by making a transition team available by a date to be mutually agreed by both Parties and confirmed in Statement of Requirements.
44.4 Project Plan
If it is not feasible to migrate all the Work identified in the relevant Statement of Requirements simultaneously the Supplier should propose a project plan to indicate when the Work is to be migrated. The plan should be structured to maximise the cost and efficiency benefits that can be achieved.
44.5 Transition Plan:
44.5.1 A transition plan shall be agreed between BT and the Supplier, which shall include such details as Activities, Elapsed Timescales, Milestones, Dependencies and Acceptance criteria for successful completion of the transition work.
44.5.2 BT and the Supplier shall hold regular joint management reviews of the transition process. The transition plan shall be used to monitor the progress of the transition Work.
Page 42 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
44.6 REMEDIES:
44.6.1 In the event of the transition work not being completed within the Transition Period solely to a default by the Supplier, BT shall have the following options:
(a) Either, agree an extension of the transition period by up to a maximum of 2 months, for which the Supplier shall provide additional resource required to complete transition at no extra costs to BT.
(b) Upon 30 business days written notice and failure to cure by Supplier, BT may terminate the Contract.
The remedies listed above may apply, subject always to a maximum total amount of the costs incurred by BT as a result of this default. BT wishes to retain the right to terminate however the total remedy amount described above will be the Supplier’s sole financial liability and BT’s sole financial remedy for failure to achieve completion of transition within the Transition Period.
44.6.2 In the event of the transition work not being completed within the Transition Period as a result of a delay caused by a BT dependency, BT shall ensure that any reasonable extra costs incurred by the Supplier are reimbursed to a maximum total amount of the extra costs incurred by the Supplier.
44.7 Timescales
The agreement shall be in two parts:
(a) Transition, and
(b) Ongoing Work
Commencement of Ongoing Work shall be dependent on the Supplier demonstrating that they meet the transition Acceptance criteria as set forth in the Work Package.
44.8 Transition Escalation
In the event of a breakdown or failure in transition that does or could reasonably be expected to result in a remedy claim for failure on the part of either BT, the Supplier or both the escalation process will be as follows:
BT: BT Transition Manager
The Supplier: Program Manager
Page 43 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
It will be the responsibility of these managers to consider the instance of failure, agree an appropriate course of action to correct the failure, assess any financial impact on the disadvantaged party and agree a suitable remedy. In the event that this cannot be agreed, it will be referred to respective Executive Sponsors for final resolution.
45 EXIT STRATEGY COOPERATION
45.1 If the Contract is terminated by BT, or not renewed with the Supplier beyond the Initial Term, and if required by BT, the Supplier shall co-operate fully with BT and with any third party nominated by BT, at no additional cost to BT, except for undisputed invoices, in facilitating the provision of replacement work (“Replacement Work”). Such co-operation shall include, without limitation:
(a) the supply by the Supplier of such Supplier’s Background Information as is reasonably necessary to enable Replacement Work to be provided in a similar manner to that in which Services had or should have been provided by the Supplier; and
(b) the granting by the Supplier to BT or, at BT’s option, a third party, of a licence to use such Supplier’s Background Information solely in relation to the provision of Replacement Work for a period expiring five years after the date of termination (or part termination) of the Contract; and
(c) the undertaking by the Supplier of reasonable endeavours to procure for BT or BT’s nominated contractor the grant or transfer of all licences and permissions under third party Intellectual Property Rights which may from time to time be reasonably necessary for the provision of Replacement Work to the extent that such third party Intellectual Property Rights have been used in the provision of Services by the Supplier.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Replacement Work shall include for Work under a Work Package and/or Purchase Order, which had ceased or lapsed over a period of time.
For the purpose of this clause (Transition Co-operation) “Supplier’s Background Information” shall mean all Information owned or controlled by the Supplier or companies in the same group (as defined by s.53 Companies Act 1989) as the Supplier.
45.2 To ensure a smooth transition at the end of the Contract, BT requires the Supplier to maintain Documentation relating to the processes and procedures used in the execution of the Contract for the Work for the lifetime of the Contract.
Page 44 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
45.3 Further to the above, the Supplier shall use all reasonable endeavours to maintain the Key Personnel throughout the Replacement Work period and in the event the Supplier fails, refuses and/or neglects to maintain the same, the Supplier shall reimburse BT any cost incurred by BT for any delay on the part of Supplier in completing the Replacement Work.
45.4 For the avoidance of doubt, such Documentation shall be subject to the Condition titled Intellectual Property of the Conditions of Contract schedule.
45.5 The Supplier agrees to vacate BT’s premises within a reasonable period and deliver to BT those BT assets in the Supplier’s custody.
45.6 The provisions of sub-clause 45.1 above shall survive the termination of the Contract.
46 INDEMNITY
46.1 Without prejudice to any other rights or remedies available to BT, the Supplier shall indemnify BT against all third party claims and proceedings, damages, costs and expenses arising or incurred proximately caused by the:
(a) death or personal injury of any Contract Personnel in relation to the performance of the Contract, except to the extent caused by BT’s negligence; or
(b) death or personal injury of any other person to the extent arising as a result of the negligence or wilful acts or omissions of the Supplier or Contract Personnel in relation to the performance of the Contract; except to the extent caused by BT’s negligence ; or
(c) loss of or damage to any BT property to the extent arising as a result of the negligence or wilful acts or omissions of the Supplier or Contract Personnel in relation to the performance of the Contract; or
(d) any complaint made pursuant to the Employment Rights Act 1996 (as amended, replaced, consolidated or re-enacted from time to time) by any Contract Personnel whether in the Employment Tribunal or civil courts or otherwise, or, without limitation, as a result of any claim or demand by any Contract Personnel in respect of any other claim whatsoever within the jurisdiction of an Employment Tribunal or wrongful dismissal, breach of contract or any other claim arising at common law, sex, race or disability discrimination or equal pay (in all cases, whether arising under UK or European law); or
Page 45 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(e) under Part 1 of the Consumer Protection Act 1987 (or any equivalent product liability legislation) in relation to Services;
provided that Supplier shall pay all such damages, costs and expenses arising from such claim as finally awarded against BT to such third party by a court of competent jurisdiction after all appeals have been exhausted or at the time of a final settlement of such claims or final award or out of court settlement, if applicable, subject to the terms set forth in Paragraph 33.11 and 33.12.
46.2 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
47 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
47.1 Subject to Paragraph 3 of this Condition, neither party shall be liable to the other under the Contract for any indirect or consequential loss or damage.
47.2 Subject to Paragraph 3 of this Condition the total liability of either party to the other under the Contract shall not exceed the greater of either:
(a) [***]
(b) [***] of the total of all sums paid or due to the Supplier for Services performed in the previous 12 months from the date of the claim.
47.3 Paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Condition shall not apply to loss or damage arising out of or in connection with:
(a) death or personal injury or loss or damage for which liability cannot be limited or excluded by law; or
(b) the wilful failure or gross negligence of either party in performing its contractual obligations; or
(c) paragraph 46.1(d) of the Condition headed “Indemnity”; or
(d) the Conditions headed “Liquidated Damages”, “Intellectual Property”, or “Confidentiality”.
47.4 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
48 INSURANCE
48.1 The Supplier shall at its own expense maintain for the Term such insurance as is legally required and appropriate in respect of its obligations, including, without limitation, third party liability insurance with an indemnity limit of not less than [***] for each and every claim and in the annual aggregate to the extent that if any claim (a settled
Page 46 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
claim in excess of [***] made by a third party against the Supplier materially erodes the third party liability insurance, the Supplier shall promptly notify BT of such claim and, if the Services include specialist or professional services, professional indemnity insurance with an indemnity limit of not less than [***] for each and every claim and in the annual aggregate.
48.2 If the Supplier cannot evidence such insurance to BT on request, BT may arrange such insurance and recover the cost from the Supplier.
48.3 The Supplier shall notify BT’s Commercial Contact as soon as it is aware of any event which may give rise to an obligation to indemnify BT under the Contract, or to a claim under any insurance required by the Contract.
48.4 This Condition shall not limit the Supplier’s liability under the Contract.
49 PUBLICITY
49.1 The parties agree that their respective marketing and public relations representatives will work together in good faith to create jointly approved releases. Subject to obtaining BT’s written consent (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed)Supplier may name BT in a press release as a client and as a client in marketing materials, display BT’s logo or logos on Supplier’s website, and use a client brief describing the Services provided to BT by Supplier.
50 SOFTWARE
The Supplier warrants that:
(a) all Software is free from all forms of:
(i) “electronic possession”, “logic bombs” “viruses” and “worms” that could have been detected by using the latest (at the date of despatch) commercially available virus detection software; and
(ii) “spyware” and “adware”
(which expressions shall have meanings as they are generally understood within the computing industry);
(b) after Acceptance by BT, subject to the terms of Section 35, the Software will perform in all respects in accordance with the Functional Specification for the Warranty Period; and
(c) it has and shall employ only good quality materials, techniques and standards in performing the Contract and at all times apply the
Page 47 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
standards of care, skill and diligence required of good computing practice.
51 SOFTWARE LICENCE
51.1 The Supplier grants to BT a non-exclusive, non-transferable, perpetual, irrevocable licence to BT for BT by itself, or by third parties on its behalf to use, copy, install, maintain, modify, enhance and adapt the Software in accordance with the licence type specified in the Requirements section of the Contract, effective from the date such Software is respectively delivered to BT.
51.2 Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, the Supplier grants to BT non-exclusive, royalty free, world-wide rights to any Software supplied under the Contract to the effect that BT has:
(a) all the rights of a lawful user (as defined in the Copyright (Computer Programs) Regulations 1992) of the Software; and
(b) the rights to copy, disclose and use for any purpose any Information which:
(i) has been derived by BT from observing, studying or testing the functioning of the Software;
(ii) relates to the ideas and principles which underline any element of the Software; and
(iii) is not subject to the Suppliers (or its licensor’s) copyrights in the United Kingdom; and
(c) the rights to:
(i) use Information obtained from de-compiling the Software to write independent, interoperable programs and to supply such Information to third parties for that purpose; and
(ii) copy and adapt the Software for the purposes of error correction, repair and maintenance and, where necessary, for the lawful use of the Software, and the right to engage a third party for those purposes.
For the avoidance of doubt, nothing in the Contract shall prevent BT from selling or deploying products, systems and services that are developed by BT using the Software.
Page 48 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
52 ESCROW
The Supplier shall at BT’s request and the Supplier’s expense, enter to an IPR deposit arrangement in respect of all Software with BT and an agent acceptable to BT. The Supplier shall ensure all relevant Information and documentation is deposited (including, without limitation, all source code and listings) as would be enable a competent computer programmer readily to understand and maintain the Software. Without affecting any other rights it may have, BT shall have the right, free of all charges, to use such source code, Information and documentation, when released, in order to use or maintain (including to upgrade) the Software, to modify or have modified the Software, and to license such modified Software to or have it maintained by third parties.
53 NOTICES
Written notices under the Contract may be delivered by hand, post, facsimile transmission or e-mail to BT’s Commercial Contact or the Supplier’s Commercial Contact (as the case may be) and shall be deemed to be given upon receipt (except notices sent by facsimile transmission, which shall be deemed to be given upon transmission).
54 PRICING
The price(s) payable by BT for Supplies, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract, shall be inclusive, where relevant, of all packing, delivery to Site, any licence fees, installation, testing and commissioning and all other charges associated with Supplies, but shall exclude VAT.
55 PAYMENT OBLIGATIONS; MINIMUM COMMITMENTS; INVOICING
55.1 Certain obligations of the parties relating to minimum commitments and discount structures are set forth in Schedule 6.
55.2 BT will pay due invoices submitted in accordance with this Condition within 60 days of the later of either the date of the invoice or the date upon which the invoice (including electronic copy of invoices) is received by BT. All payments shall be made in pounds sterling.
55.3 When payment becomes due, the Supplier shall forward invoices to, unless otherwise specified by BT in the Purchase Order:
BT Accounts Payable Team
PO Box 371
Parkway Business Centre
Manchester
M14 0WE
Page 49 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
55.4 Each invoice shall specify: its date; the Contract number; the order reference; line reference; the relevant BT item code(s) if appropriate; the correct price; the full description of the Supplies to which the invoice relates (as defined in the Contract); the portion of the Supplies for which payment is due and, if appropriate, the cumulative amount invoiced to date. The agreed payment currency and the Incoterm must be specified in relation to any non-UK transaction. Any discounts should be separately shown with a clear indication of what the discount is for.
56 GENERAL
56.1 The invalidity or unenforceability for any reason of any provision of the Contract shall not prejudice or affect the validity or enforceability of its other provisions.
56.2 The headings to the Contract provisions are for reference only and shall not affect their interpretation.
56.3 No delay, neglect or forbearance by either party in enforcing any provision of the Contract shall be deemed to be a waiver or in any way prejudice any rights of that party.
56.4 No waiver by either party shall be effective unless made in writing or constitute a waiver of rights in relation to any later breach of the Contract.
56.5 In relation to its subject-matter, the Contract is the entire agreement between the parties and governs their relationship to the exclusion (to the extent permitted by law) of any other terms and conditions, including, without limitation, those upon which any quotation or tender response has been given to BT.
56.6 The Contract is governed by English law and subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.
56.7 The Supplier shall not be, nor in any way represent itself as, an agent of BT and shall have no authority to enter into any obligation on behalf of BT or to bind BT in any way.
56.8 Any estimated contract value stated on the front sheet of the Contract is for BT administrative purposes only and shall not constitute or imply any commitment by BT.
56.9 Except as expressly set out in the Contract no assignment of or licence under any Intellectual Property Right or trade mark or service mark (whether registered or not) is granted by the Contract.
Page 50 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
56.10 A person who is not a party to the Contract may not enforce any of its terms under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999.
56.11 This Condition shall survive the Contract.
57. NON-ASSIGNMENT
Supplier shall not assign or transfer any, right, obligation or interest hereunder without the prior written consent of BT, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed; provided also that the successor/assignee of any such assignment agrees to be bound by all the terms of this Contract.
58. OPERATIONAL GOVERNANCE
The parties agree, within one month of contract date, to use commercially reasonable efforts to establish a program management plan (“PMO”) for the Contract.
Page 51 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 3 MODEL CLAUSES FOR DATA PROTECTION
THIS SCHEDULE MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE PARTIES.
STANDARD CONTRACTUAL CLAUSES (PROCESSORS)
For the purposes of Article 26(2) of Directive 95/46/EC for the transfer of personal data to processors established in third countries which do not ensure an adequate level of data protection
Name of the data exporting organisation: British Telecommunications plc, 81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ
tel.:                                              fax:                                               ;
e-mail:                                                                                                                  
A company registered in England & Wales Number:                                                                                          
(the data EXPORTER)
and
Name of the data importing organisations:                                                                                           
[the Supplier]
Tel:                       e-mail:                                               fax:                      
A company registered in England & Wales Number:                                                                                         
[the Sub-Contractor if any]
Address tel.:                                              fax:                                             ;
e-mail:                                             
A company registered in [India] Number:                                                                                          
(jointly and severally, the data IMPORTER)
HAVE AGREED on the following contractual Clauses (the Clauses) in order to
Page 52 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
adduce adequate safeguards with respect to the protection of privacy and fundamental rights and freedoms of individuals for the transfer by the data exporter to the data importer of the personal data specified in Appendix A.
1. DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of the Clauses:
(a) ‘personal data’, ‘special categories of data’, ‘process/processing’, ‘controller’, ‘processor’, ‘data subject’ and ‘supervisory authority’ shall have the same meaning as in Directive 95/46/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 October 1995 on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (the Directive).
(b) ‘the data exporter’ shall mean the controller who transfers the personal data;
(c) ‘the data importer’ shall mean the processor who agrees to receive from the data exporter personal data intended for processing on his behalf after the transfer in accordance with his instructions and the terms of these Clauses and who is not subject to a third country’s system ensuring to adequate protection;
(d) ‘the applicable data protection law” shall mean the legislation protecting the fundamental rights and freedoms of natural persons and, in particular, their right to privacy with respect to the processing of personal data applicable to a data controller in the Member State in which the data exporter is established:
(e) ‘technical and organisational security measures’ shall mean those measures aimed at protecting personal data against accidental or unlawful destruction or accidental loss, alteration, unauthorized disclosure or access, in particular where the processing involves the transmission of data over a network, and against all other unlawful forms of processing.
2. DETAILS OF THE TRANSFER
Page 53 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
The details of the transfer and in particular the special categories of personal data where applicable are specified in Appendix I which forms an integral part of the Clauses.
3. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARY CLAUSE
(a) The data subject can enforce against the data exporter this Clause, Clause 4(b) to (h), Clause 5(a) to (e), and (g), Clause 6(l) and (2),
Clause 7, Clause 8(2), and Clauses 9, 10 and 11, as third-party beneficiaries.
(b) The data subject can enforce against the data importer this Clause, Clause 5(a) to (e) and (g), Clause 6(1) and (2), Clause 7, Clause 8(2), and Clauses 9, 10 and 11, in cases where the data exporter has factually disappeared or has ceased to exist in law.
(c) The parties do not object to a data subject being represented by an association or other body if the data subject so expressly wishes and if permitted by national law.
4. OBLIGATIONS OF THE DATA EXPORTER
The data exporter agrees and warrants:
(a) that the processing, including the transfer itself, of the personal data has been and will continue to be carried out in accordance with the relevant provisions of the applicable data protection law (and, where applicable, has been notified to the relevant authorities of the Member State where the data exporter is established) and does not violate the relevant provisions of that State;
(b) that he has instructed and throughout the duration of the personal data processing services will instruct the data importer to process the personal data transferred only on the data exporter’s behalf and in accordance with the applicable data protection law and these clauses;
(c) that the data importer shall provide sufficient guarantees in respect of the technical and organisational security measures specified in Appendix B to this contract;
Page 54 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(d) that after assessment of the requirements of the applicable data protection law, the security measures are appropriate to protect personal data against accidental or unlawful destruction or accidental loss, alteration, unauthorised disclosure or access, in particular where the processing involves the transmission of data over a network, and against all other unlawful forms of processing, and that these measures ensure a level of security appropriate to the risks presented by the processing and the nature of the data to he protected having regard to the state of the art and the cost of their implementation;
(e) that he will ensure compliance with the security measures:
(f) that, if the transfer involves special categories of data, the data subject has been informed or will be informed before, or as soon as possible after, the transfer that his data could be transmitted to a third country not providing adequate protection;
(g) that he agrees to forward the notification received from the data importer pursuant to Clause 5(b) to the data protection supervisory authority if he decides to continue the transfer or to lift his suspension;
(h) to make available to the data subjects upon request a copy of the Clauses set out in this Annex, with the exception of Appendix B which shall be replaced by a summary description of the security measures.
5. OBLIGATIONS OF THE DATA IMPORTER
The data importer agrees and warrants:
(a) to process the personal data only on behalf of the data exporter and in compliance with his instructions and the clauses; if he cannot provide such compliance for whatever reasons, he agrees to inform promptly the data exporter of his inability to comply, in which case the data exporter is entitled to suspend the transfer of data and/or terminate the contract;
(b) that they have no reason to believe that the legislation applicable to him prevents them from fulfilling the instructions
Page 55 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
received from the data exporter and his obligations under the Contract and that in the event of a change in this legislation which is likely to have a substantial adverse effect on the warranties and obligations provided by the Clauses, they will promptly notify the change to the data exporter as soon as they are aware, in which case the data exporter is entitled to suspend the transfer of data and/or terminate the contract;
(c) that they have implemented the technical and organisational security measures specified in Appendix B before processing the personal data transferred;
(d) that they shall promptly notify the data exporter about:
(i) any legally binding request for disclosure of the personal data by a law enforcement authority unless otherwise prohibited, such as a prohibition under criminal law to preserve the confidentiality of a law enforcement investigation;
(ii) any accidental or unauthorised access; and
(iii) any request received directly from the data subjects without responding to that request, unless he has been otherwise authorised to do so;
(e) to deal promptly and properly with all inquiries from the data exporter relating to his processing of the personal data subject to the transfer and to abide by the advice of the supervisory authority with regard to the processing of the data transferred;
(f) at the request of the data exporter to submit his data processing facilities for audit of the processing activities covered by the clauses which shall be carried out by the data exporter or an inspection body composed of independent members and in possession of the required professional qualifications bound by a duty of confidentiality, selected by the data exporter, where applicable, in agreement with the supervisory authority;
(g) to make available to the data subject upon request a copy of the Clauses set out in this Annex, with the exception of Appendix B
Page 56 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
which shall be replaced by a summary description of the security measures in those cases where the data subject is unable to obtain a copy from the data exporter.
6. LIABILITY
1. The parties agree that a data subject, who has suffered damage as a result of any violation of the provisions referred to in Clause 3 is entitled to receive compensation from the data exporter for the damage suffered.
2. If a data subject is not able to bring the action referred to in paragraph I arising out of a breach by the data importer of any of his obligations referred to in Clause 3 against the data exporter because the data exporter has disappeared factually or has ceased to exist in law or became insolvent, the data importer agrees that the data subject may issue a claim against the data importer as if he were the data exporter.
3. The parties agree that if one party is held liable for a violation of the clauses committed by the other party, the latter will, to the extent to which it is liable, indemnify the first party for any cost, charge, damages, expenses or loss it has incurred.
Indemnification is contingent upon:
(a) the data exporter promptly notifying the data importer of a claim; and
(b) the data importer being given the possibility to cooperate with the data exporter in the defense and settlement of the claim.
7. MEDIATION AND JURISDICTION
1. The data importer agrees that if the data subject invokes against him third-party beneficiary rights and/or claims compensation for damages under the clauses, the data importer will accept the decision of the data subject:
(a) to refer the dispute to mediation, by an independent person or, where applicable, by the supervisory authority;

Page 57 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(b) to refer the dispute to the courts in the Member State in which the data exporter is established.
2. The data importer agrees that, by agreement with the data subject, the resolution of a specific dispute can he referred to an arbitration body if the data importer is established in a country which has ratified the New York Convention on enforcement of arbitration awards.
3. The parties agree that the choice made by the data subject will not prejudice his substantive or procedural rights to seek remedies in accordance with other provisions of national or international law.
8. COOPERATION WITH SUPERVISORY AUTHORITIES
1. The data exporter agrees to deposit a copy of this contract with the supervisory authority if it so requests or if such deposit is required under the applicable data protection law.
2. The parties agree that the supervisory authority has the right to conduct an audit of the data importer which has the same scope and is subject to the same conditions as would apply to an audit of the data exporter under the applicable data protection law.
9. GOVERNING LAW
The Clauses shall be governed by the law of the Member State in which the data exporter is established, namely England and Wales.
10. VARIATION OF THE CONTRACT
The parties undertake not to vary or modify the terms of the Clauses.
11. OBLIGATION AFTER THE TERMINATION OF PERSONAL DATA PROCESSING SERVICES
1. The parties agree that on the termination of the provision of data processing services, the data importer shall, at the choice of the data exporter, return all the personal data transferred and the copies thereof to the data exporter or shall destroy all the personal data and certify to the data exporter that he has done so, unless legislation imposed upon the data importer prevents him from returning or destroying all or part

Page 58 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
of the personal data transferred. In that case, the data importer warrants that he will guarantee the confidentiality of the personal data transferred and will not actively process the personal data transferred anymore.
2. The data importer warrants that upon request of the data exporter and/or of the supervisory authority, he will submit his data processing facilities for an audit of the measures referred to in paragraph 1.
ON BEHALF OF THE DATA EXPORTER:
Name (written out in full):
         
 
 
 
   
 
       
Position:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
       
Address:
       
 
       
Signature
 
 
   
 
       
ON BEHALF OF THE DATA IMPORTER:
   
 
       
Name [the Supplier]:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
       
Position:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
       
Address:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
Signature
       
 
       
Name [the Sub-Contractor if any]:
   
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
       
Position:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   

Page 59 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
         
IN CONFIDENCE
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
       
Address:
       
 
       
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
       
Signature
       

Page 60 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 3 APPENDIX A
THIS APPENDIX MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE PARTIES
DATA EXPORTER
The data exporter is British Telecommunications plc who has
DATA IMPORTER
The data importer is
DATA SUBJECTS
The personal data transferred concern the following categories of data subjects:
CATEGORIES OF DATA
The personal data transferred concern the following categories of data:
(ARROW)
SPECIAL CATEGORIES OF DATA (IF APPROPRIATE)
No data classified as Sensitive Personal Data will be processed outside the EEA.
PROCESSING OPERATIONS
The personal data transferred will be subject to the following basic processing activities:
                         
    DATA EXPORTER       DATA IMPORTER    
 
 
  Name:           Name:        
 
     
 
Authorised signature
         
 
Authorised signature
   

Page 61 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 3 APPENDIX B
THIS APPENDIX MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE PARTIES
Description of the technical and organisational security measures implemented by the data importer in accordance with Clauses 4(d) and 5(c) (Schedule 3):
Generic measures for each service line in Appendix A [1 though 6]
Operational Organizational Measures
Technical and Security Measures

Page 62 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 4 THE BT SECURITY POLICY FOR SUPPLIER
This Schedule consists of this Cover Page of BT Security Requirements and BT Security Policy appended hereto.
The Supplier shall ensure that the provision of the Services and/or the performance of the Services under this Contract shall not cause the BT Group of Companies to breach its BT Security Policy and ISO17799 as set out in the Schedule.
Good security practices are essential to protect both company and customer related information. This is why, the BT Group of Companies, are committed to securing compliance with relevant legislation, protecting confidentiality and maintaining customer confidence by adopting British Standard 7799 and ISO 17799, which is as follows:
BT SECURITY REQUIREMENT
While information is the cornerstone of our ability to provide superior service, our most important asset is our customers’ trust. Keeping information secure, and using it only as it is intended to be used, is a top priority for all of us at BT. In order to establish and maintain the levels of information security during the Term of this Contract on the part of the Supplier, Supplier and it’s Contract Personnel must comply with the BT Security Policy. To the extent that the terms of this Schedule conflict with terms of this Contract between Supplier and BT, the terms of this Schedule shall prevail.
1 DEFINITIONS
The following expressions are used in this Schedule:
“Access” means interconnection with BT Systems and access to BT Information.
“Authorised” means having undergone and being fully compliant with NAIF.
“BT Information” means all information (including BT customer information) used or accessible to the Supplier in association with providing the Service.
“BT Security Contact” means BT Security Operations Centre (0800321 999) or such other person whose details shall be notified by BT to the Supplier from time to time.
“BT Security Policy” means the annexe in Schedule 1.
“BT Systems” means [insert brief description of relevant BT systems] and/or such other systems as may be agreed in writing from time to time by the BT and the Supplier.

Page 63 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
“BT Human Resources Policy” means guidelines at www. [TBC] issued by BT in regards to appointment of Contract Personnel who will work for BT under this Contract.
“Disaster Recovery Plan” means the Supplier’s plans to maintain Service in the event of natural or man made incident that affects their ability to provide Service from the primary location and/or site.
“ISO17799” means the International Security Standard.
“NAIF” — Network Authorisation and Interconnect Facility is a procedure to register all UK and Global network interconnects between BT and external companies. An interconnect request is initiated by a BT Project Manager by completing a BT web based form.
“Process” means operational procedures.
“Purposes” means the proper performance by the Supplier of its obligations under and in accordance with the Contract.
“Standards” means all the relevant standards associated with information management security.
For the avoidance of doubt without prejudice to the definition of “BT” in the condition headed “definitions”, in this schedule “BT” shall include British Telecommunications PLC.
“Target” means systems, applications, switches, routers, and any other related equipment.
2 BT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLIER’S OBLIGATIONS
The Supplier warrants that it shall take all reasonable steps to comply with BT Security Policy as well as the detailed policies as follows which shall form the basis of Supplier’s information management and security policy and the Supplier shall demonstrate to BT that it has either achieved compliance with ISO17799 or is working towards such achievement.
2.1 The Supplier shall comply with BT policy on information classification, handling and disposal.
2.2 The Supplier shall comply with BT’s physical and logical access controls.
2.3 The Supplier shall not use BT Information for any purpose other than for the Purposes and performance of the Services.

Page 64 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2.4 The Supplier shall take reasonable steps (subject to the provision of the Contract) to preserve the integrity of BT Information and to prevent any corruption or loss of BT Information.
2.5 The Supplier shall permit BT or its authorised representatives access at any time to any premises or computer equipment at or from which Access can be obtained in order to verify compliance with the Contract by performing physical and logical audits as well as penetration testing to ensure compliance with BT Security Policy and Standards.
2.6 BT requires the Supplier to maintain systems which detect and record any attempted damage, amendment or unauthorised access to BT Information.
2.7 The Supplier authorises BT to investigate any security breach, including the confiscation for evaluation of any suspected or infringing hardware.
2.8 The Supplier shall train all the Contract Personnel in security awareness to BT standards, with special emphasis on the secure handling and management of passwords, tokens and information. Contract Personnel may be expected to complete the BT CBT training modules or equivalent, as advised by BT during the Term of the Contract.
2.9 The Supplier shall use its best endeavours to ensure that any link, email or any communication whatsoever that convey information relating to this Contract and/or the Services and traverse a non-BT owned network, the said information must be protected by encryption to the standards defined in the BT Security Policy particularly 3 DES 128 bit.
2.10 The Supplier shall appoint a single point of contact for any security issues i.e. a senior manager or CIO responsible for security.
2.11 When requested by BT, the Supplier shall make available for review the Supplier’s Disaster Recovery Plan with respect to this Contract and recovery plan exercise, practice, rehearsal or drill results.
2.12 The Supplier shall make available for review the Supplier’s operational procedures relevant to this Contract to determine the Supplier’s compliance with BT Security Policy.
2.13 The Supplier shall conduct recruitment checks, subject to the restrictions (legal or otherwise) and customary practices applicable in the jurisdiction in which the recruitment checks are conducted, to comply with BT Human Resources Policy found in Appendix 2 of this

Page 65 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Schedule and supply BT with documentary evidence of such checks as and when requested by BT.
2.14 The Supplier shall notify the BT Security Contact of any changes to its Access method through the firewalls, including the provision of network address translation.
2.15 The Supplier shall notify BT immediately should any Contract Personnel be removed for any reason whatsoever from this Contract thus enabling BT to disable, transfer or modify the access rights to systems and information.
2.16 The Supplier shall not (and, where relevant, shall procure that any Contract Personnel shall not) without the prior written consent of the BT Security Contact connect any equipment not supplied by BT to any BT LAN port.
2.17 The Supplier shall inform the BT Security Contact immediately upon its becoming aware of any actual or suspected unauthorised Access or misuse of BT Systems or BT Information or breach of any of the Supplier’s obligations under this Condition.
2.18 The Supplier consents to BT’s gathering information relating to Access. This information may be collected, retained, and analysed to identify potential security risks and may include, but is not limited to, trace files, statistics, network addresses, and the actual information or screens accessed or transferred.
2.19 The supplier shall ensure that all BT information, contract personnel and networks involved with this contract are logically and physically separated in a secure manner from all other information, personnel or networks created or maintained by the Supplier.
3 ACCESS
3.1 BT allows (so far as it can and is able to do so) the Supplier, while the Supplier is Authorised Access solely for the Purposes.
3.2 In relation to Access, the Supplier shall (and, where relevant, shall procure that all Contract Personnel shall):
(a) ensure each individual user has a unique user identification and password known only to such user.
(b) promptly provide to BT such reports as BT shall from time to time require concerning the Supplier’s use and security of Access and any related matters.

Page 66 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(c) ensure that physical access to computer equipment having Access or storing or having access to BT Information is password-protected to reflect the Supplier’s obligations.
(c) ensure onward bridging or linking to BT computer systems is prevented unless authorised by BT and complies with Security Standards as defined in the BT Security Policy.
(d) ensure no viruses or malicious code (as the expressions are generally understood in the computing industry) are introduced to and that there is no corruption of BT Systems or BT Information.
4 SECURITY REVIEW
4.1 The Supplier is cognisant of BT’s requirement to carry out regular assessment of Supplier’s compliance of BT Security Policy which would include all elements of physical and logical audits, penetration testing and items listed in Clause 2 and 3 above of the Supplier’s Systems (“Security Review”). The Supplier shall facilitate this assessment by permitting BT to collect, retain and analyse information to identify potential security risks and may include but not limited to trace files, statistics, network addresses and the actual information or screens accessed or transferred.
4.2 In the event, BT identifies a threat, to the confidentiality, integrity or availability of BT Information in Supplier’s Process or Systems, Supplier shall promptly correct any threat of security risk in the Supplier’s Process or Systems that is revealed in the Security Review, as soon as reasonably practicable under the circumstances.
4.3 Supplier shall co-operate in any Security Review, providing reasonable access, accommodation, facilities and assistance to BT employees all Supplier’s Systems as reasonably necessary to verify the integrity of security of Supplier’s Systems including permitting interview of any sales, engineering or other operational personnel of Supplier to ensure compliance of BT Security Policy to Supplier’s premises.
5 TERMINATION
5.1 In the event, the Supplier fails, neglects and/or refuses to rectify the Security Risk as identified in the Security Review during the Term of the Contract within thirty (30) days of written notice of such breach from BT, BT may terminate this Contract for material breach without prejudice to any other rights BT may have against the Supplier under this Contract for breach and/or default.

Page 67 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
5.2 The Supplier shall indemnify BT from and against any third party costs, losses, damages, proceedings, claims, expenses or demands incurred or suffered by BT which arise as a result of third party claims against BT as a result of this breach by the Supplier of its obligations under this Schedule;
provided that Supplier shall pay all such damages, costs and expenses arising from such claim as finally awarded against BT to such third party by a court of competent jurisdiction after all appeals have been exhausted or at the time of a final settlement of such claims or final award or out of court settlement, if applicable, subject to the terms set forth in Paragraph 33.11 and 33.12.
6 RIGHTS AFTER TERMINATION
If the Supplier has during the course of the Contract received Information in a recorded form from BT (or has recorded received Information), the Supplier shall return or destroy such records upon:
(a) expiry or termination of the Contract; or
(b) upon earlier request unless such records are part of the Services.
7 ACCESS TO SUPPLIER SYSTEMS
7.1 If Contract Personnel is granted access to the Suppliers Systems that hold, process or access BT Information the Supplier shall:
a) ensure each individual Contract Personnel has a unique user identification and password known only to such user for their sole use.
b) promptly provide to BT such reports as BT shall from time to time require concerning the Supplier’s use and security of access to Supplier Systems.
c) allow access to BT Information and application system functions in Supplier System to the minimum required to enable the Contract Personnel perform their duties.
d) allow access to Contract Personnel holding or accessing BT Information using a secure login process.
e) establish formal procedures to control the allocation and de-allocation of access rights to Contract Personnel who have access to BT Information and/or system functions

Page 68 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
f) ensure that the allocation and use of powerful privileges and access to sensitive tools and facilities in Supplier Systems are controlled and limited to only those users who have a business need.
g) ensure that the allocation of user passwords to Supplier Systems that hold or access BT Information is controlled through a formal auditable management process.
h) conduct regular reviews of user access rights.
i) ensure that remote and home working activities are only permitted where authorised by BT and subject to appropriate security controls within the Supplier’s organisation including but not limited to remote access by users is subject to strong authentication.
j) demonstrate that users follow good security practices in the management of their passwords.
k) ensure that a password management system is in place to provide a secure and effective interactive facility that ensures quality passwords.
l) ensure that user sessions are terminated after a defined period of inactivity.
m) ensure that audit logs are generated to record user activity and security-relevant events.
n) ensure that monitor audit and event logs is performed by Supplier’s staff independent of those users being monitored.
o) make available audit logs where required by the requirements in the Order to BT for review.
p) use encryption techniques ( as a minimum 3 DES 128 bit) to protect the confidentiality and integrity of sensitive information.
q) harden all systems holding, processing or accessing BT Information to BT standards (available from the BT Standards web site on request).
r) ensure that development, test and live environments are segregated from the other work areas in Supplier’s buildings.
s) implement controls to detect malicious software and protect against the malicious software.

Page 69 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
7.2 The Supplier must demonstrate that Contract Personnel who hold and use data on PCs and mobile computing devices are responsible for ensuring that the PCs and mobile computing device are protected from unauthorised access. BT Information with classification “In Confidence” and above information must be encrypted on all mobile computing devices
7.3 The Supplier shall ensure that all Supplier Systems have formal security incident management procedures with defined responsibilities.
7.4 Any un-authorised software is identified and removed from Supplier Systems holding, processing or accessing BT Information.
7.5 Access to diagnostic and management ports as well as diagnostic tools must be securely controlled to BT’s reasonable satisfaction.
7.6 Access to audit tools must be restricted.
7.7 Enhanced independent code reviews are be performed (including penetration testing) on all Supplier Systems.
7.8 Supplier’s servers must not be deployed on un-trusted networks without appropriate security controls.
7.9 Changes to any Targets must be controlled and subject to formal change control procedures. All documentation relating to Targets must be protected from un-authorised access or amendment.
7.10 Security procedures and controls must be used to secure equipment holding, accessing or processing BT Information used in Supplier Systems but outside the Suppliers premises.
8 BUSINESS CONTINUITY
8.1 When requested by BT, the Supplier shall make available for inspection the Supplier’s business continuity plan and disaster recovery plans with respect to this Contract and recovery plan exercise, practice, rehearsal or drill results.
8.2 The Supplier must demonstrate that they have conducted a thorough business impact analysis and risk analysis which takes an holistic view of possible disruption to their ability to meet BT’s business requirements on the occurrence of a force majeure event that has or is likely to have an effect on the Services or on

Page 70 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
the occurrence of disaster from natural or man made incident that affects their ability to provide Service from the primary location and/or site. Consideration of the following 8 dimensions of their operations should be demonstrable to BT.

Page 71 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
8.3
     
ASPECT OF    
CORPORATE    
RESILIENCE   EXAMPLES OF RISKS (BUT NOT EXCLUSIVELY)
NETWORKS
  Single points of failure or nodes which are insufficiently protected, either physically or with disaster recovery solutions
 
   
SYSTEMS
  a critical system which is supported from only a single building, has no disaster recover fall back capability, has no feasible workaround if down, running on unsupported software or is supported by only a very few people with highly specialised skills.
 
   
PEOPLE AND PROCESES
  a critical process can only be operated by a few people with specialist skills or knowledge; people operating in areas with environmental or civil unrest threats
 
   
PROPERTY
  A key process can be operated from only one or two specific locations; the building/site is of sub-standard construction or poorly maintained or there is an environmental hazard to buildings (nearby danger of fire, flood, civil disturbance, traffic congestion preventing access etc)
 
   
SUPPLY CHAIN
  A dependency on a single supplier for a service/product without which the service/product could not be (this includes internally traded services/products) delivered to time and quality that BT expects.
 
   
DATA
  Information necessary to support BT business is poor quality, not sufficiently available or not sufficiently secure
 
   
CUSTOMERS
  Will the business be able to survive the loss of a major contract or conversely deliver on a significant increase in business without loss of quality?
8.4 Supplier must produce a report of risks resulting from a business impact analysis/risk assessment (“BIA/RA”) which is supplied to BT in a form defined by BT at the time such that it is suitable for inclusion in the BT risk review process.
8.5 For risks of a severity level which is determined by BT at the material time, the Supplier must be able to show a plan to mitigate the risk within a time period agreed with BT.
8.6 The Supplier must produce an end-to-end business continuity plan for all key processes supporting BT within a single framework of business continuity. The plans for all key buildings which buildings from where Services are provided with

Page 72 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
associated risk assessment and fallback exercise results must be available for BT to inspect.
8.7 The Supplier’s business continuity strategy should be compliant with BS25999 or an equivalent local country standard. Supplier has a continued focus on strengthening the resiliency of its business. To that end, Supplier has a Risk Management Team focused on business continuity. Supplier has also engaged with a leading third party risk management consulting firm to assist Supplier to build a standards based business continuity framework in alignment with the new BS 25999 standard. As the BS25999 standard has only recently become finalized, Supplier has already established a goal to become compliant with the recently finalized BS25999 by December 31, 2007.
Supplier is currently ISO 27001 certified. This certification ensures compliance with not only information security but also business continuity best practices.
8.8 The Supplier must be able to demonstrate that business continuity is embedded in its culture through regular communications and ensuring ownership within operational teams as well as through central co-ordination.
8.9 The Supplier’s BIA/RA and business continuity plans must be reviewed, maintained and tested regularly (at least annually). The results of such review and testing must be available to BT on request.
8.10 The Supplier must be able to demonstrate that any partner companies, sub-contractor, outsourcing agencies or other suppliers on which it depends to deliver BT requirements are resilient and have a similar and sufficient degree of business continuity requirements as are imposed on the Supplier by this Contract. These processes shall include incident reporting including internal escalation within the Supplier’s company, together with immediate escalation and reporting of defined events to BT in accordance with the Schedule headed “Governance”.
8.11 The Supplier shall immediately notify BT Security Contact if it becomes aware of anything that may have a material adverse effect on the Supplier’s ability to perform its obligations under this Contract or is experiencing an incident of a severity where it is judged that it is possible that BT business may be impacted.

Page 73 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
8.12 The Supplier must be able to demonstrate a robust incident management strategy which must be regularly exercised. The BT Security Contact must be notified of planned exercises to give BT the opportunity to attend and observe these exercises as appropriate, and the results of such exercises made available to BT.

Page 74 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 1 — BT SECURITY POLICY
[***]
[***]

Page 75 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 2 — BT HUMAN RESOURCES RECRUITMENT POLICY
1. SUPPLIER’S SELECTION PROCESS
The Supplier shall:
1.1 Confirm that, as a minimum requirement, their recruitment policy and processes align with BT’s pre-employment checks, policy and processes, in particular in relation to basic ID checks, references, health declaration and criminal convictions, as detailed below;
1.2 Warrant that the Contract Personnel provided to perform Work under the Contract meet, and continue to meet for the duration of their assignment under the terms of this Contract, BT’s minimum pre-employment requirements;
1.3 ensure that no individual who has previously held a BT contract of employment, and has left BT on redundancy terms, is assigned to a BT Work Package in the same capacity (grade or job type) or location that they were employed in on their last official day with BT. In any event, where any person who has taken redundancy from BT is assigned back to BT through the Supplier, a minimum of 28 days must have elapsed between their last official day with BT and the first day of assignment to BT.
1.4 Provide BT with documentary evidence of the requirements detailed herein on request from BT.
2. VETTING OF CONTRACT PERSONNEL
2.1 The Supplier shall ensure that the following checks have been undertaken prior to contract personnel being assigned to the Contract. Full details shall be retained on file and made available to BT at BT’s request.
A) IDENTITY — to be verified by current Photographic ID such as current Passport or photographic Driving Licence.
B) PROOF OF RESIDENCE — verified by one of the following e.g. Utility Bill, National Insurance or Medical Card, Tenancy Agreement or equivalent.
C) RIGHT TO WORK IN THE COUNTRY THAT THE WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED — If Work is to be performed in the UK, the right to work must be verified in line with the Immigration and Asylum Act 1996 regulations and a valid Work Permit must be produced for non-UK nationals where there is no standard right of employment agreement in place.

Page 76 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
For all other countries where Work is to be performed, the Supplier shall ensure that it meets any specific legal and or regulatory requirements as appropriate.
D) EDUCATIONAL AND PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS (IF REQUESTED BY BT AS PART OF A WORK PACKAGE) — The Supplier shall ensure that all documents presented by the Contract Personnel are original copies and that copies are held on file and available for inspection by BT on request.
E) CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS DISCLOSURE — Prior to an offer of employment being made, the Supplier shall ensure that all potential Contract Personnel sign a statement declaring whether they have any criminal convictions, or are subject to any ongoing criminal investigations. Where the individual makes any such declaration, the Supplier shall assess the situation and, if in any doubt, refer the application to BT for joint review and agreement.
In relation to Work performed on-site in the UK, the Supplier shall ensure that all contract personnel sign a Criminal Disclosure Certificate that has been issued within the past two years. If the Supplier fails to ensure that Contract Personnel do not meet this requirement within 30 days of the start of the assignment, BT shall have the right to remove such personnel from the Contract without prior notice and the Supplier shall be liable for providing a replacement at its own cost.
F) HEALTH DECLARATION — The Supplier shall ensure that potential Contract Personnel sign a health declaration form sufficient to enable a full assessment of health to be undertaken by the Supplier.
2.2 BT shall have the right of access to all documentation relating to the recruitment process and to appoint a BT representative to assist and/or monitor the recruitment process e.g. interview selection, on request.
2.3 The Supplier shall complete a summary checklist confirming that all the above checks have been made, and appropriate documentation (original) has been evidenced and copies held on file. The summary checklist shall include as a minimum:
- Candidate Name.
- Line Manager.
- Vacancy Job Title and BT Work Package, Purchase Order or Project name.

Page 77 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
- Photographic proof of identity.
- Proof of residence.
- Proof of right to work.
- Educational and professional qualifications.
- Criminal Convictions Disclosure completed and signed.
- Health Declaration completed and signed.
- Signature and full details of duly authorised Supplier representative to verify the above.
2.4 The Supplier shall ensure that all Contract Personnel assigned to this Contract are contractually obligated, under their conditions of employment, to notify the Supplier immediately of any material change in their personal circumstances that may impact on the status of their employment including, but not limited to, for example: criminal convictions and/or cases pending, health declaration, right to work in the country where Work is to be performed etc.
3. REFERENCING
3.1 The Supplier shall follow the referencing procedure outlined below at all times. Each item must be viewed as progressive, failure to comply with each item, in order shown, shall result in rejection of a potential assignee to the Contract. All Contract Personnel shall be fully referenced by the Supplier for a period of 3 years in writing.
a) Exceptionally, and only by agreement with BT, where BT requires contract personnel at short notice (and this cannot be done prior to commencement of assignment) the Supplier must ensure that verbal references are taken and recorded on file, specifying name of referee, date reference was taken, responses given and the name of the consultant who took the reference. BT reserves the right to request evidence that verbal references have been taken.
b) The Supplier shall undertake an interview to establish the background of the potential Contract Personnel to BT. The Supplier shall investigate the individual’s employment history, including previous employers, nature and periods of work or unemployment e.g. student’s, housewife or receiving government benefit. If the Supplier is not fully satisfied at the time of interview and the information given cannot be substantiated, then the Supplier must reject the individual from being assigned to the Contract.

Page 78 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
c) The Supplier shall follow up the individual’s references by requesting written confirmation from previous employers. The only exception to this shall be where the previous individual’s employer(s) has been declared as bankrupt. If this is the case, the Supplier shall seek further employment references and verification of character.
d) Where a character/personal reference is sought, the Supplier must ensure this is obtained from a person with an authoritative status such as that of a professional or managerial nature. These references shall be verbally verified, such verbal verification being appropriately recorded and held on file.
e) If the individual so assigned was a Contract Personnel for an existing client of the Supplier, the Supplier must seek to ensure the individual has been fully referenced in accordance with this clause. BT reserves the right to audit any of the above at any time, throughout the duration of the contract.
f) The Supplier shall complete a referencing certificate for all Contract Personnel assigned to the Contract. A copy shall be retained in the Contract Personnel’s work record / personnel file to complete the audit trail.
4. QUALITY OF CONTRACT PERSONNEL
4.1 Skills and Experience
4.1.1 Contract Personnel must be willing to undertake the full range of responsibilities required by individual Work Packages/Purchase Orders and in accordance with the full terms and condition of this Contract.
4.1.2 It shall be the responsibility of the Supplier to provide personnel with the necessary skills, qualifications, experience and personal qualities in order that they are fully equipped to undertake the full requirements outlined in the job dimension and individual role as defined by the BT Work Package/Purchase Order.
4.1.3 The Supplier must show a commitment to equal opportunities in their recruitment to all people meeting the requirements of the job irrespective of their race, religion, sex, age, marital status or disability.
4.1.4 All Contract Personnel shall be expected to demonstrate a high level of commitment and motivation to work well as part of a team, to be measured by periodic individual appraisals undertaken by the Supplier.

Page 79 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
4.1.5 All Contract Personnel deployed against the Contract must meet the necessary standards of conduct and appearance as reasonably required by BT.
4.2 Individual Appraisals: The Supplier shall issue individual appraisals on its own forms, to measure the performance and progress of Contract Personnel. These forms shall be issued after the initial 6 months period and then again at 12 months, and subsequently at twelve monthly intervals. If the assignment is of less than 6 months, an appraisal shall be issued at the end of the Assignment. The format and content of the Supplier’s individual appraisal shall be approved and agreed with BT.

Page 80 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 4 APPENDIX 2 ANNEX 1
IN STRICTEST CONFIDENCE
CRIMINAL DISCLOSURE DECLARATION
         
NAME
       
 
 
 
   
 
       
ADDRESS
       
 
 
 
   
Have you ever been found guilty by a court or court martial of any offence or is there any case against you pending?
Yes o No o
IF YES — PLEASE PROVIDE DETAILS:-
SIGNED:
DATE

Page 81 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE

Page 82 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 5 — INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 83 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 6 — IT SERVICES
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 The Supplier shall provide a range of IT Services to BT, and to any BT programmes without restriction to group or division under this Contact. Supplier shall thus have the right to provide IT Services to, or for, all BT programmes. Specific requirements and terms of any engagement shall be detailed in individual Statement of Requirements or Work Packages that may be agreed from time to time during the Term of the Contract.”
1.2
             
Software Product Maintenance and Support   IT related Professional Services
-
  2nd and 3rd line Software support   -   3rd party software development services
-
  Applications support   -   Applications management
-
  Database administration   -   Business analysis
-
  Databuild   -   IT consultancy
-
  Helpdesk   -   IT programme management
-
  Software maintenance   -   IT project managements
 
      -   Systems integration
 
      -   Technical specialists
 
      -   Validation, Verification and testing (VV&T services)
1.3 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1.4 The Work shall be performed subject to BT’s Statement of Requirements and the Terms and Conditions of the Contract, including BT Generic Standards and BT Security Requirements.
2 ORDERING PROCESS
2.1 BT specific requirements for provision of IT Services under the Contract shall be detailed in individual Statement of Requirements produced by the BT project manager.
2.2 At BT’s request, the Supplier shall provide a formal quotation, in line with the overall Terms and Conditions of the Contract, for the provision of Services detailed in the individual Statement of Requirements. Such quotations shall bear a unique reference for identification purposes.

Pages 84 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2.3 For any time and materials (“T&M”) based RFQ’s, pricing information must be provided by the Supplier using the pricing template attached at Appendix 1 along with any supplementary information.
2.4 For any fixed price (“FP”) based RFQs, pricing information must be provided by the Supplier using the cost information template in Appendix 1.
2.5 Where the Supplier submits a quotation for a Requirement which falls outside of the maximum prices outlined in paragraph 4 above, the Supplier shall provide detailed reasons supported by detailed costings.
2.6 A request from BT for a quotation (RFQ) shall not constitute an offer by BT to enter into a Contract for provision of Services, but is an invitation to the Supplier to submit a proposal to BT.
2.7 The Supplier’s proposal in response to a RFQ shall constitute an offer to BT, which shall be open for acceptance by BT for a period of 90 days from the date of the proposal.
2.8 In the event that BT accepts an offer, BT shall formally notify the Supplier by issue of an individually numbered Purchase Order. No commitment shall be deemed to have been made by BT prior to the issue of a Purchase Order, duly authorised by BT Corporate Procurement Partners.
2.9 In the event that BT rejects an offer, then BT shall not have any liability for any costs incurred for work done by the Supplier in preparing a proposal in response to a RFQ.
2.10 Work carried out under an individual Purchase Order may be terminated in accordance with the Condition headed “Termination”. Termination of Work carried out under individual Purchase Orders shall not affect the status of Work carried out or to be carried out under other Purchase Orders let under the Contract.
2.11 The Work shall be performed subject to the BT Statement of Requirements and the terms and conditions of this Contract.
3 GENERIC CONTRACT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.1 BT’s project specific performance requirements shall be defined in the individual Work Package where required.
3.2 BT and the Supplier shall agree on Service Level Agreements (SLAs) in the Work Package which may provide for liquidated damages/remedies upon failure to comply with the SLAs as agreed to by the parties in the Work Package.

Pages 85 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
3.3 BT requires the Supplier to measure, document and report performance monthly
3.4 Persistent Failure by the Supplier to meet Performance Requirements or project specific SLA’s as stated in the Work Package, , shall result in the Supplier being in breach of Contract (but not necessarily material breach) and BT shall be entitled to recover Liquidated Damages in accordance with the Condition of Contract entitled Default and Liquidated Damages. Where BT contributes to any delay or failure of the SLA, project time-scales will be revised to take account of the impact of BT’s contribution to the delay or of the failure of the SLA. Liquidated Damages will then be recalculated to take into account BT’s contribution to the delay.
4 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION
In addition to the Performance Monitoring reports and Governance reporting, the Supplier shall provide the following information to the BT Commercial Contact on a monthly basis in the format advised by BT:
- Performance against budget — including total billed to date by project and job, balance outstanding against order value by project and job, value of any applicable discounts;
- Number of contractors compared to the Supplier’s FTE by project;
- Meetings with BT project managers and new prospects discussed;
- Resource utilisation — including total number of resource deployed by project;
- Churn of resource against BT projects
- Projects/Work in delay;
- Status reports on skill-sets register.
5 HOURS OF SERVICE
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Statement of Requirements or Purchase Order, the Supplier may provide the Services during the normal offshore working day.
5.2 Where there is an operational need identified in the Statement of Requirements for Work performed offshore to be performed according to UK Working Day hours this will be at no extra charge to BT.

Pages 86 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
6 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE LICENCE
The Supplier will provide generic hardware and all software required for performance of the Services subject to the terms of Supplier’s Hardware and Software Policy to be provided by Supplier and mutually agreed upon by BT and Supplier.
6.1 In the event, the Supplier does not have the relevant licences; the Supplier shall use reasonable endeavours to procure the relevant licences with immediate effect to enable them to discharge their obligation during the performance of the Services for BT. All cost sustained in procurement of these licences shall be borne by the Supplier being part of its obligation under this Clause, or as agreed in writing by the parties.
7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
7.1 The Supplier shall work to a Quality Management System that meets the requirement of BS/ISO9000 or equivalent, such as CMMiL3 or above. A body approved by any of the National Accreditation Councils must issue the certificate, if applicable.
7.2 BT requires its Suppliers to have recognised industry specific quality accreditation (e.g. SEI CMM, ISO TickIT. BS15000). The Supplier shall provide details of its current accreditation.
7.3 The Supplier will carry out and be able to supply evidence of periodic quality checks (at least quarterly) to ensure the consistency of delivery of the Supplies, and the provision of management information as agreed.
7.4 If the Supplier, having had at the Commencement Date a Quality Management System certified to comply with the requirements of BS/ISO9001 (EN 29001 or other equivalent) by an accredited certification body, ceases to maintain the certification, then the Supplier, for avoidance of doubt, shall be in breach of the Contract. (This shall also apply to any sub-contractors that may be used).
7.5 At the end of each Work Package the supplier will carry out and document an End of Stage assessment and, following live implementation, will contribute to the Post Implementation Review (PIR). Lessons learnt for both reviews must be applied to future work packages.

Pages 87 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
8 PRICING AND PRICING ARRANGEMENTS
8.1 In consideration of the Supplier undertaking the Work, BT shall pay the Supplier such amounts as specified in the Purchase Order.
8.2 For T&M based Work, the amount to be paid by BT for the Work shall be calculated in accordance with the day-rates, expenses and discount formula set out in the agreed Pricing Schedule.
8.3 For T&M based work, the Supplier’s quotation in response to a RFQ from BT shall map resource to be utilised for the Work to the Skills Framework for the Information Age (SFIA) skills categories and levels, including day-rates contained in the Pricing Schedule and the quantity of resource to be utilised for the Work.
8.4 For fixed price based work, the Supplier, on BT’s request shall provide adequate information as to allow BT to validate the quoted price, to ensure that the price for such fixed price work is fair and reasonable. The information that would be provided could include effort breakdown or a level of price breakdown, rates applied, price for third party components e.g. hardware, third party software, risk provisions etc. Any request for such information by BT shall be made prior to the award of work to the Supplier. For the avoidance of doubt, BT is not entitled to request information regarding Supplier’s internal cost structures and / or information related to the Supplier’s margins or information that attempts to achieve such result.
8.5 For the Supplier to accept entirely the necessity of this Contract to deliver value for money for BT whilst at the same time enabling a fair return to the Supplier. Supplier shall demonstrate value for money and the Supplier shall work closely with BT prior to Work Package and or Purchase Order award to develop an appropriate mechanism which may include one of the following: Benchmarking, SLA, Performance Scorecard or Partnership Scorecard according to Contract Performance Requirements, value for money model etc., and during the life of the Contract to report on performance against the chosen methodology
9 NOT USED
10 PRICE SATISFACTION
10.1 Where any Work is undertaken by the Supplier on a non-competitive basis, the Supplier undertakes to provide information in accordance with Appendix 1.
11 INTENTIONALLY DELETED

Pages 88 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
12 CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT
12.1 Maintenance and support contracts will target year on year price reductions through efficiency gains. The Supplier shall demonstrate and detail how this will be achieved for the following Financial Year 2 months prior to the beginning of the following Financial Year.
12.2 On an individual Work Package basis BT may require the Supplier to provide to BT a Performance Indicator (PI) for the ensuing year on or before the first anniversary of the commencement of any Contract, and on each successive anniversary for the duration of the Contract. The PI shall be a stretching, but achievable objective that represents an improvement over the Performance Target.
For each successive year for the duration of the Contract following the first anniversary of the commencement of the Contract, the Supplier’s actual achieved performance shall be calculated as an average of such performance in each component eight quarters) and where such performance so calculated exceeds the relevant Performance Target that Performance Target shall be amended to the actual achieved level.
13 EXIT TRANSITION CO-OPERATION
13.1 If the Contract is terminated by BT pursuant to Clause 5 (Performance Monitoring) above, or not renewed with the Supplier beyond the initial Term, and if required by BT, the Supplier shall co-operate fully with BT and with any third party nominated by BT, at no additional cost to BT, except for undisputed invoices, in facilitating the provision of Replacement Work. Such co-operation shall include, without limitation:
13.1.1 the supply by the Supplier of such Supplier’s Background Information as is reasonably necessary to enable Replacement Work to be provided in a similar manner to that in which Supplies had or should have been provided by the Supplier, subject to the confidentiality provisions of the Contract; and
13.1.2 the granting by the Supplier to BT or, at BT’s option, a third party, of a licence to use such Supplier’s Background Information solely in relation to the provision of Replacement Work for a period expiring five years after the date of termination (or part termination) of the Contract; and
13.1.3 the undertaking by the Supplier of reasonable endeavours to procure for BT or BT’s nominated contractor the grant or

Pages 89 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
transfer of all licences and permissions under third party Intellectual Property Rights which may from time to time be reasonably necessary for the provision of Replacement Work to the extent that such third party Intellectual Property Rights have been used in the provision of Supplies by the Supplier.
13.2 For the purpose of this clause (Transition Co-operation) “Supplier’s Background Information” shall mean all Information owned or controlled by the Supplier or companies in the same group (as defined by s.53 Companies Act 1989) as the Supplier.
13.3 To ensure a smooth transition at the end of the Contract, BT requires the Supplier to maintain Documentation relating to the processes and procedures used in the execution of the Contract for the Work for the lifetime of the Contract.
13.4 For the avoidance of doubt, such Documentation shall be subject to the Condition titled Intellectual Property of the Conditions of Contract schedule.
13.5 Where the Supplier is the gaining Supplier:
13.5.1 As part of any such transition, BT may require the gaining Supplier to act initially as the Prime Contractor and take full contractual responsibility for provision of the Work, prior to the losing Supplier being managed out.
13.5.2 The Supplier shall complete transition of the Work within 3 months of the commencement of the Work
13.5.3 Where the Supplier is transitioning Work from an incumbent supplier (this could be BT or another external supplier to BT), the Supplier shall detail the support requirements needed from the incumbent supplier to complete the transition. This should include but not be limited to: number and type of resource, period required, location, availability etc.
13.5.4 The gaining Supplier shall be responsible for the continuity of service and management of any resultant transition when gaining new Work either from BT or an existing 3rd party Supplier.
13.5.5 Transition of new Work shall be at the gaining Supplier’s risk and expense.
13.5.6 The gaining Supplier will be required to provide a top level plan which shall address the following areas:
- Key dates/timescales

Pages 90 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
- Documentation
- Sharing/release of information
13.6 Where the Supplier is the losing Supplier:
13.6.1 shall commit to working with BT’s gaining Supplier to ensure successful transition of Work in the event of them not being retained as BT’s Supplier for a specific area of Work.
13.7 Any transition related costs shall be subject to audit and validation by BT.
13.8 The Supplier agrees to vacate BT’s premises within a reasonable period and deliver to BT those BT assets in the Supplier’s custody.
13.9 The provisions of sub-clause 6.1. above shall survive the termination of the Contract.
14 EXIT COSTS
14.1 In some cases the Supplier may be required to transition Work to BT or another external supplier to BT. Where the existing contractual arrangement for the Work allows or does not prohibit exit charges, the Supplier shall include detailed exit costs and an exit strategy plan within their quote for each Work Package.
15 ACCEPTANCE
15.1 In this Condition:
“Acceptance Test(s)” means formal testing to determine if the Supplies satisfy the criteria for Acceptance for BT to Accept the Supplies or any part of them, including without limitation, any First Repeat Test or Second Repeat Test as defined in this Condition.
“Certificate of Service” means a certificate issued by BT in respect of Supplies or any part of the Supplies, which, although having failed to pass the Acceptance Tests, BT requires to be put into commercial service. “Commercial Service” shall be construed accordingly.
15.2 The Supplier shall provide BT with written Acceptance Test methodology in respect of the Supplies on or before [as agreed in Work Package and/or Purchase Order]. BT shall approve or reject such methodology within 14 days of receipt. If rejected, the Supplier shall

Pages 91 of 126


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
amend the methodology as necessary until approved by BT (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld).
15.3 Supplies shall not undergo any Acceptance Test until:
(a) Supplies have passed any required off-site tests;
(b) the Supplier can demonstrate to BT’s reasonable satisfaction following its own testing that the Supplies should pass the Acceptance Tests;
(c) BT has approved the Acceptance Test methodology; and
(d) any required inter-working is achieved and combinations of hardware and software have been fully integrated and proven as a system.
15.4 The Supplier shall give at least 14 days written notice to BT of Supplies being ready for Acceptance Tests.
15.5 Acceptance Tests shall take place in the presence of BT’s nominated representative(s).
15.6 If Supplies pass the Acceptance Tests, BT shall issue to the Supplier an Acceptance certificate, which shall, if Supplies are being tested severally, not constitute an admission that Supplies have been completed in every respect. The Acceptance procedure shall be repeated for each portion of the Supplies.
15.7 If any Supplies fail the Acceptance Test:
(a) BT shall notify the Supplier in writing accordingly within 10 days of completion of the tests, stating the reasons for the failure; and
(b) the Supplier shall promptly make such alterations to Supplies as are necessary to pass repeat Acceptance Tests within 10 days of such notice (“the First Repeat Test”); and
(c) if Supplies fail the First Repeat Test, the Supplier shall promptly make such further alterations to Supplies as are necessary to pass a further repeat Acceptance Test (“the Second Repeat Test”) within 10 days of notice of failure of the First Repeat Test.
15.8 If any Acceptance Test is not completed by the due date, or Supplies fail the Second Repeat Test, BT may (at its option):
Pages 92 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(a) bring Supplies into Commercial Service at any time and/or claim liquidated damages for delayed Supplies as set forth in the Work Package; or
(b) terminate the Contract from the date specified by written notice to the Supplier.
15.9 If any Acceptance Test is not completed by the due date or Supplies fail any Acceptance Test, BT shall, upon giving written notice to the Supplier, have access to Supplies for its own testing and evaluation purposes but shall take reasonable care not to hinder the Supplier in achieving Acceptance, although the Supplier shall be responsible for any delay.
15.10 If Supplies fail any Acceptance Test, BT may put them into Commercial Service and issue a Certificate of Service, which shall include a list of remaining portions of Supplies and all relevant deficiencies to be remedied by the Supplier as are then known to BT.
15.11 Supplies put into Commercial Service on any date:
(a) benefit from the provisions of the Condition headed ‘Warranty’ as if the period of such warranty had commenced on such date and had been extended by the period between such date and Acceptance of all Supplies; and
(b) shall be made accessible to the Supplier for remedial work to achieve Acceptance and be at the Supplier’s risk.
15.12 During Commercial Service, the Supplier shall, if required by BT, and at the Supplier’s own additional cost, work outside its normal working hours in order to remedy any deficiencies.
15.13 BT’s rights under this Condition are without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may have, and to any of the Supplier’s obligations.
Pages 93 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 6 APPENDIX 1 (PRICING)
1. IT SERVICES PRICING PRINCIPLES
The following principles shall be applied to prices quoted by the Supplier for IT Services provided under the Contract. In order to demonstrate their compliance with these principles, the Supplier will provide information to BT to support their quotation, as applicable.
1.1. COST TRANSPARENCY
The Supplier shall provide corporate level general financial information as follows:
1.1.1. Subject to the confidentiality provisions in this Contract the Supplier shall provide the following information at a corporate level for benchmarking purposes. This shall be provided to the extent of the publicly available information as published in Annual and quarterly financial statements.
ELEMENTS
Revenues
Gross Profit
Sales & Marketing Expenses
General and Administrative Exp
Research & Development costs
Amortizations Operating Income
(Note : Transparency / ensuring an appropriate price for individual projects is covered by Section 2.2)
1.1.2. All day rates shall be based on the Supplier’s identified standardised Cost Recovery Assumption.
For the avoidance of doubt, Cost Recovery Assumption is defined as the number of days assumed by the Supplier that they will need to charge for the resource to fully recover the cost of the resource, including pay, benefits, overheads and margin. The Cost Recovery Assumption makes allowance for all leave entitlement, including annual leave, public holidays and casual leave, plus any training and sick
Pages 94 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
absence, where the Supplier cannot charge the customer for the resource.
[***]
All T&M engagements shall use a common currency of Person-days of effort. Person-days of Effort shall mean the total number of days required to successfully deliver the Work Package, irrespective of the number of resource used, inclusive of any shift working or overtime.
1.2. VALUE FOR MONEY
For each proposal it presents the Supplier shall demonstrate the value of its offer to BT:
1.2.1. For fixed price (“FP”) based Work, BT may assess the value of the Supplier’s offer by benchmarking the Supplier’s quotation to a comparable T&M based price, [***] with an expectation that FP Work will be price beneficial to BT. In accordance with clause 8.4 in Schedule 6 the Supplier will cooperate with BT in providing sufficient information for BT to assess the value of the Supplier’s offer.
1.2.2. The Supplier shall co-operate with BT to provide world class pricing and value for money in accordance with the Condition titled Best Price in Schedule 6 of the Contract;
1.2.3. [***]
1.3. 90:10 PRINCIPLES
All projects will maximise off shore resource to provide the most cost effective pricing and explain the justification for on-shore resources at the time of, and as reflected in, the quote submission or Work Package.
1.3.1. For time and materials (“T&M”) based Work, the Work shall be based on an assumption that [***]% of the Supplier’s overall engagement on Work under the Contract, by resource numbers, shall be performed offshore ([***]). Exceptions to the [***] principles may be agreed by the parties on a case by case basis at the time of agreement of the applicable Service.
1.4. SHORT-TERM ONSHORE WORK
1.4.1. Where the Supplier cannot perform the work within the planned onshore resource allowance as agreed between the parties in a Work Order due to unplanned exigencies or emergency requirements, and required placement of resources for short period Onsite, [***]
Pages 95 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
1.4.2. The total cost for the onshore assignment shall not exceed the published onshore T&M rate of the resource for the duration of the assignment.
1.4.3. The Supplier shall be responsible for air travel and associated visa or work permit expenses
1.4.4. Short-term shall be defined as less than 1 month. Beyond 1 month, the resource allocations in the Work Order shall be modified through Change Control
1.5. All prices are to be in GB Pounds sterling and in line with Schedule 12
(Pricing)
1.6. YEAR ON YEAR COST REDUCTION
Maintenance and support contracts will target year on year price reductions through efficiency gains.
1.7 [***]
2. PRICING MODELS
BT may request the Supplier to provide a quotation based on one or more of the pricing models detailed below for any Work Package requirement.
The Supplier should provide a quote on the basis of the pricing model identified by BT, but may offer an alternative model for consideration by BT in addition to that requested by BT.
2.1. TIME AND MATERIALS BASED PRICING
2.1.1. The Supplier shall provide a rate card based on a standard definition of roles, mapped to the Skills for the Information Age (SFIA) matrix in terms of Category, Sub-Category, Skill and Level. The rate card shall detail day rates for all roles that may be provided by the Supplier under the terms of the Contract. The rate card shall be provided in the format shown in Table 1 below.
(For information on the Skills Framework for the Information Age (SFIA)
matrix please refer to the SFIA web-site at: http://www.SFIA.org.uk).
2.1.2. For T&M based pricing the Supplier’s quotation shall use the rates specified in Supplier’s Contract T&M rate card set out in Table 1 below. Such rates shall be the maximum rates that the Supplier may charge for T&M based Work under the Contract for the first Annual Period.
Pages 96 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2.1.2.1. For Go To Market opportunities, the T&M rate card shall be regarded as indicative and the actual rates shall be agreed on an opportunity basis.
2.1.3. For individual T&M based quotations for work packages defined by BT, the Supplier shall:
2.1.3.1. provide a maximum (“Capped”) price for complete performance of the Work as defined in the Work Package, excluding Change Control.
2.1.3.2. provide price build information to enable maximum price calculations for individual work packages; such information shall include the resource profile and cost for the Work, estimated business expenses, infrastructure charges (if applicable) and any specific chargeable items not included elsewhere;
2.1.3.3. provide pricing information in a standard T&M pricing template provided by BT;
2.1.3.4. provide pricing that ensure the overall engagement conforms to
[***] principles; subject to 1.3.
2.1.3.5. Provide a statement of the level of risk and flexibility, in percentage terms, that has been built into the Maximum price for the Work.
2.1.4. T&M based Work shall be charged only for the number of Person-days of Effort used in performance of the Work up to the maximum agreed Person-days of Effort for the Work Package. BT shall pay no more for the Work than the Capped Price estimated by the Supplier. Any change to the Capped Price for the Work shall be subject to review and prior authorisation by BT’s Commercial Contact via change control.
2.1.5. All T&M rates to be exclusive of VAT and Business Travel and Expenses, [***]
2.1.5.1. [***]
2.1.6. All day rates shall be based on the principle of a professional working day, assuming a normal 8 hour working day;
2.1.6.1. [***]
2.1.7. For the avoidance of doubt, Business Travel and Expenses does not include travel to and from the normal place of work;
Pages 97 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2.1.8. All Business Travel and Expenses shall be calculated in accordance with BT Policy for BT Business Travel and Expenses attached at Appendix 1;
2.1.9. Any onshore assignments for offshore resource of more than 3 months may be charged at onshore rates. [***]
2.1.10. The Supplier should clearly demonstrate how BT will benefit from any additional efficiency which is to be achieved, such as any economies of scale benefits that can be accrued from increase in volume of Work and resource provided, or revised scope of work.
2.1.11. Any T&M engagement is based on the team profile agreed with the BT Project Manager at the commencement of the Work. Unless the resource team had resource nominated as Key Personnel, the Supplier shall be responsible for maintaining the agreed team profile without increase cost to BT for the duration of the Work irrespective of any grade increase of the individuals providing the Work. In the event of renewal of the Work Package, no increase in grade of the roles within the team profile shall be permitted without prior agreement of the BT Project Manager.
2.1.12. BT shall expect the supplier to provide resource onshore for any hot housing associated with a 90 day development cycle. Such resource to be deployed in accordance with the Short-term Onshore Work principles [***].
2.1.13. In the event that the hothouse goes beyond [***] as a result of the Supplier’s inability to deliver BT’s requirements BT shall not be charged for the additional time [***].
2.1.14. In addition to this, the Air fare expenses and initial travel to Hot house location may be charged as expenses up to a maximum cap of [***] per person. Any higher amounts if incurred shall be charged with prior approval from BT.
2.2. FIXED PRICE
Where the Supplier provides a Fixed Price (“FP”) quotation for a Work Package, the following shall apply:
2.2.1. For multi-year FP engagements, payments shall be made monthly in arrears;
2.2.2. For short-term FP engagements, payments shall be made in arrears against agreed deliverables;
2.2.3. All prices are to be fixed in Pounds sterling, and in line with Schedule 12 (Pricing)
Pages 98 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
2.2.4. Where the FP proposal covers a multi-year engagement, each price shall be detailed as shown in Fig. 1
                     
                    TOTAL
FP   Q1   Q2   Q3   Q4   P.A.
YEAR 1
  L   L   L   L   L
YEAR 2
  L   L   L   L   L
YEAR 3
  L   L   L   L   L
TOTAL
                   
2.2.5. Any items or services not included in the Fixed Price must be clearly identified, and pricing information detailed separately.
2.2.6. The Supplier shall provide sufficient data with each FP proposal for benchmarking purposes, to demonstrate adherence to the pricing principles defined in section 1 of this Schedule. Such information shall include:
2.2.6.1.1. total effort (in number of Person-days of Effort)
2.2.6.1.2. resource profile of team (in terms of numbers and roles)
2.2.6.1.3. risk/contingency assumptions included within the total number of days effort
2.2.6.1.4. offshore:onshore ratio of resource
2.2.6.1.5. Project Plan, Milestones, quality gates and Acceptance Criteria
2.2.6.1.6. A price breakdown including the following as applicable:
- Resource element
- Non-resource element
- Infrastructure element
- Risk margin
- Other elements
Pages 99 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
Table 1. [***]
Pages 100 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
BT POLICY FOR BT BUSINESS TRAVEL AND EXPENSES
GUIDELINES FOR CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL
The provisions of this policy and any information relating to it, e.g. rates and charges, are strictly confidential and subject to the confidentiality conditions of the Contract.
1. TRAVEL
The cost effectiveness and appropriateness of making the journey by air, sea, rail, or road should be considered.
Air
For journeys by air, STANDARD/ECONOMY CLASS SHOULD BE USED.
For journeys with carriers in Africa and for travel within Central and South America, travel should be first class where available.
The policy above sets out the class of travel to be used. Exceptionally where it is considered that a higher class of travel is appropriate, for example where it is operationally essential and the business need determines it is cost effective, this may be authorised by the BT Project Manager.
Rail & Ferry
For journeys by rail, STANDARD CLASS should normally be used. Exceptionally on ‘InterCity’ routes where a journey is being made at peak travelling time and is of at least two hours duration for each individual journey, the BT Project Manager may authorise first class travel in advance if it will provide significantly greater privacy and quiet for people working on the train.
First Class travel may also be authorised when:
- an overnight Sleeper is the most cost effective mode of transport and is as an alternative to an overnight stay
- upgrading during the journey is appropriate e.g. during transport difficulties, because of changes in travel plans and / or business needs or when standard class accommodation is full. Reasonable judgement should be made at the time
- special tickets are available which are at the same price or cheaper than standard class.
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 101 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
- where the two hour journey criterion is not met but a person is joining a BT colleague, who is authorised to travel first class, to work on the train.
The cost of necessary seat reservations will be reimbursed.
For ferry travel advantage should be taken of multiple tickets where they are available.
Road
The shortest most practical route must be used for all journeys. Deviations from the route to pick up or drop off authorised passengers may be claimed. In addition to the appropriate rate of mileage, garaging, parking fees and tolls will be reimbursed. Receipts should be obtained wherever possible. Driving and parking fines and penalties will not be reimbursed.
Mileage Rates
Mileage may only be claimed for travel in connection with BT business specific to the Contract. [***]
Exceptionally, and only with prior line manager authorisation, higher rate mileage may be claimed for short journeys of less than 30 miles return. In these instances the following mileage rates will apply:
[***]
Hire Cars
Hire cars should be used only in connection with BT business specific to the Contract. Vehicles are not to be used for private purposes. However incidental private use is allowed e.g. to obtain a meal whilst working away from home. The business mileage fuel costs and hire charges incurred will be reimbursed.
Generally only vehicles up to 1.4 litres capacity should normally be hired. Vehicles with a greater capacity may only be hired where a justified business need is identified e.g. there are three or more passengers or significant luggage or equipment is to be carried or a particularly long motorway journey is involved.
Taxis
Taxis should only be used exceptionally, where due to the time of travel, nature of journey, personal safety considerations or the carriage of heavy luggage, public transport does not provide a reasonable option. To avoid surcharges and waiting time, taxis should not normally be pre-booked. Receipts should be obtained in all instances.
2. OVERNIGHT ACCOMMODATION
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 102 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
The actual, reasonable receipted costs of hotel accommodation, breakfast and evening meal (table d’hote, hotel restaurant or equivalent) may be claimed. Personal expenditure such as bar bills, videos and newspapers will not be reimbursed.
For longer term stays, consideration should be given to more cost effective arrangements e.g. rented accommodation. In such cases, the principle of reimbursement of reasonable expenditure applies. Reimbursement may cover costs such as rent, council tax, utility charges and appropriate meals out.
3. OTHER EXPENSES
All other expenses including but not limited to the purchase of equipment or software, hospitality expenditure or any form of expenditure not directly incurred by the contractor must be claimed using the appropriate BT internal process.
4. AUDITING OF EXPENSES
The Supplier shall make available their full reconciliated monthly expense statements within 8 weeks of the end of the month in which such expenses have been incurred.
Evidence of expenses incurred for all amounts, mandatory for greater than L5, shall be made available for BT’s inspection.
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 103 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
SCHEDULE 6 APPENDIX 2 WORK PACKAGE TEMPLATE
Contains Guidance notes on putting together a Work Package. The sections highlighted pink are mandatory for completion.
CONTRACT NO: [                      ]
SUPPLIER QUOTATION REFERENCE: [                      ]
[TITLE] (the “PROJECT”)
1. DEFINITIONS
[Please insert here any additional definitions used for the purposes of the Work Package. Those definitions set out in the Contract shall continue to apply.]
2. PROJECT BACKGROUND
[Provide a brief overview of the Project. This enables someone unfamiliar with the engagement to understand the context]
3. DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF SERVICES
3.1 TO BE COMPLETED BY BT [REFER TO STATEMENT OF REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT IF PROVIDED SEPARATELY]
[Provide here full details of the Services (as that term is defined in the Contract) to be performed by the Supplier.
The Services must be described in enough detail so that someone unfamiliar with the Project could understand what both parties’ obligations are.]
3.1.1 HOURS OF SERVICE
[BT should identify the Hours of Service including any week-end or Bank Holiday requirements (Indian and UK).]
3.1.2 SHIFT PATTERNS
[Shift patterns to be detailed as appropriate.
The BT Project team should include a high level process flowchart as appropriate.]
3.2 TO BE COMPLETED BY THE SUPPLIER AS PART OF THEIR RESPONSE.
3.2.1 UTILISATION OF SUPPLIER’S BACKGROUND INFORMATION
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 104 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
[Supplier must set out details of the Supplier’s Background Information that the Supplier believes it will utilise during the performance of the Services (and production of the Services/Deliverables) under this Work Package. In the event that the Supplier becomes aware, during the course of the Work Package, that additional pieces of Supplier’s Background Information will be used in the provision of the Services/Deliverables the Supplier must draw these to BT’s attention upon delivery of the Deliverables in question.]
3.2.2 TRANSFER OF DATA
In the event that the Services include cross-border data flows. Please note that:
(i) The Supplier must advise BT’s Commercial Contact in writing, in advance, of the manner by which the Supplier intends to store or process BT Personal Data (Condition                                           );
(ii) This is particularly important if any of the BT Personal Data is to be exported outside the European Economic Area (Condition                                           ), as defined in the Contract.                                           must notify BT in advance, in the relevant Work Package, of [Suppliers] intention to export BT Personal Data outside the European Economic Area;
(iii) BT must give its prior written consent to the exportation of BT Personal Data (i.e. any BT data, not just sensitive personal data) outside the European Economic Area (Condition                                                                )). Such consent must be confirmed in writing by BT prior to commencement of any Services through the execution of Appendix A as part of this Work Package.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Please note that in the event of cross-border data flows the parties shall need to sign up to and agree to be bound by the EU Model Clauses at Schedule 3 to the Contract
[If this Work Package is likely to include Services that result in cross-border data flows please contact Group Legal Procurement Team for guidance.]
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 105 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
4. DELIVERABLES AND TRAINING IN DELIVERABLES
4.1 SUPPLIER DELIVERABLES
[Provide full details of the Services (as that term is defined in the Contract) (if any) and Software (as that term is defined in the Contract) (if any) to be delivered by the Supplier as part of the Services. If there are no deliverables please state “No Deliverables/Software will be provided by the Supplier under this Work Package”. It should be specified in the Work Package whether the Supplier is primarily responsible for Deliverable and where BT is primarily responsible, e.g. where the Supplier’s role has been to “assist” or “support” BT.]
[If training in the Deliverable(s) is to be performed by the Supplier as part of the Services, then detail it here. If not applicable put “No training in the Deliverables will be supplied by the Supplier under this Work Package.”]
4.2 BT DELIVERABLES
[Provide full details of the deliverables (if any) and software (if any) to be delivered by BT as part of the Services that the Supplier’s Services are dependent upon. Also include details of BT and/or third party deliverables and software in Section 15 (BT Obligations).]
5. BT PROVIDED ITEMS
[Please insert details of any Equipment (as such term is defined in the Contract) that the Supplier is receiving from BT (including BT Supplied Items), documentation e.g. process documents, customer data, scripts etc.]
[Please also insert details of any Third party software that the Supplier is receiving from BT.]
[In addition please include details of any Work Package specific training that BT will provide the Supplier including duration, people numbers etc.]
6. SUPPLIER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT
[Please insert details of any Equipment (as defined in the Contract) the Supplier is providing to BT]
7. MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 106 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
[If Maintenance and support of Deliverables is to be performed by the Supplier as part of the Services then detail here, if not applicable then put, “No Maintenance or Support for Deliverables created under this Work Package is provided by the Supplier under this Work Package.”]
8. BT SYSTEMS
[You will need to ensure that BT has adequate LEAD TIME for it to provide all necessary Authorisation and related written consents regarding connection to BT Systems, prior to Project commencement. This is likely to take at least a week. Check with BT Project Manager on the security procedure to be followed to obtain Authorisation and continue to have Access. Include the BT Security Contact in these discussions.]
The Supplier must at all times comply with the BT Security Policy in force at the time of the Work Package. BT must promptly supply this to the Supplier. The Supplier may decline to proceed with a Project if compliance with the BT Security Policy is, in the Supplier’s opinion, not practical or feasible.
(Please note that the BT Security Policy may require the parties to execute an Interconnect Agreement prior to connecting to BT Systems.)
The Supplier must obtain prior written consent from the BT Security Contact prior to connecting any equipment not supplied by BT to any BT LAN port, e.g. when connecting Supplier laptops to a BT LAN port.
The Supplier must NOT commence work until Authorisation is granted. If you have any queries regarding the process to be followed to obtain Authorisation please contact the Group Legal Procurement Team.
Include in the Work Package a full list of BT Systems that will be used by Contract Personnel (ie [Supplier] personnel and subcontractors) during the Project. Please note that this must include ANY connection to BT Systems, for example in order to print or receive e-mail. If you are unclear about what should be included in the list of BT Systems please raise this with the BT Security Contact and obtain advice in writing.
9. NETWORK AND IT REQUIREMENTS
[Include any IT requirements including any bandwidth requirements and specific disaster requirements.]
10. TIME TABLE
[If the Services are to be provided within a mutually agreed time then detail the timetable for the performance of the Services (and, if applicable, dates for delivery of Deliverables). There should be a start date and there may or may not be a target completion date.
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 107 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
Where appropriate a formal project plan should be developed with the Supplier and appropriate remedies agreed for failure to meet agreed time-scales.]
11. SITE
Services relating to this Work Package shall be carried out at the following site(s):
BT or Supplier to insert details of where the Supplier will perform the Services and if applicable deliver any Deliverables.
[This may be left blank for the Supplier to present its recommendations but must be completed prior to final agreement and placement of the Work Package].
12. ACCEPTANCE
[Acceptance procedures should be inserted, and the process the parties will undertake to determine whether the criteria have been met if they have been agreed in advance of work commencing under the Work Package.
[Acceptance criteria and procedures need to be specified where the Supplier will receive deliverables from third parties and/or BT.]
13. PERSONNEL
13.1 SKILL SET REQUIREMENTS
[BT should identify the specific skills required to perform the Services including any formal qualifications and / or accreditation requirements.]
13.2 CONTACT DETAILS
BT’s Commercial Contact will be [                      ]
BT’s Programme Lead/point of escalation will be [                      ] (if applicable)
BT Project Manager will be [                      ]
BT’s Security Contact will be [                      ]
The Supplier’s Work Package Contact will be [                      ]
The Supplier’s Programme Lead/point of escalation will be [                      ] (if applicable)
13.3 KEY PERSONNEL
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 108 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
The Personnel identified below are key to the Services required and are classified as Key Personnel (to be agreed between the Parties) as described in the Contract.
- BT Key Personnel
- [List]
- Supplier Key Personnel
- [List]
14. REPORTING
[Detail here the specific reporting requirements e.g. timescales, deliverables, SLA/KPI’s etc., and the frequency at which the Work Package representatives are to meet including any project management arrangements.]
15. CHARGES
[Detail here the pricing matrix and methodology against which the Supplier is required to submit prices for Services and how this is calculated. Include details of what is included in the Price and anything that is specifically excluded. Note that all costs exclude VAT.]
16. BT OBLIGATIONS
[Specify any particular obligations on BT’s part i.e. what the Supplier is dependent upon. Include details of BT and/or third party deliverables and software.]
17. RISKS AND ASSUMPTIONS
[List all descriptions and conditions which may have a material impact upon the Supplier’s ability to meet its obligations.]
18. QUALITY STANDARDS & ASSURANCE, AND CODES OF PRACTICE
[BT to include any Work Package specific quality standards, codes of practice etc.]
19. PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
[Work Package specific Service Levels (SLA’s) and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s) to be identified here. Service Credits shall normally be applicable to KPI’s. Consider “risk and reward” schemes as appropriate to drive performance.]
20. ADDITIONAL
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 109 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
[Please insert here any additional points that are not covered above including any additional variations to the Contract.]
21. WORK PACKAGE PRICE
[ALL PRICING INFORMATION TO BE PRESENTED IN LINE WITH THE CONTRACT PRICING SCHEDULE, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED]
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 110 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
SCHEDULE 6 APPENDIX 2 WORK PACKAGE TEMPLATE
APPENDIX A [ONLY REQUIRED WHERE PERSONAL DATA BEING TRANSFERRED OUTSIDE THE EEA
Under the terms of the Contract and the Work Package hereof, the Supplier has requested BT’s consent to [subcontracting/offshoring] certain services to
[                      ] who are located at [                      ]. The parties have worked together to ensure that data protection and IT Security are acceptable before commencing.
The parties have, in relation to various data protection and security matters concerning the sub-contracting/offshoring of these services, reached agreement and now wish to confirm the terms on which BT provides its consent.
AND IT IS AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
WITH EFFECT FROM EFFECTIVE DATE OF THE WORK PACKAGE HEREOF, THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL FORM A BINDING PART OF THE WORK PACKAGE AND COMPLEMENT CLAUSE 3.2 ABOVE.
a) Consent
BT hereby consents under Clause 3.2 of the Work Package [Title of the Project] above to the services as described in [Appendix___/Clause 4 above] (“the Work Package Services) to this Work Package and provided under the ContracT being subcontracted/offshored to [                      ] and located in [India].
The parties acknowledge and agree that certain personal data which forms part of the personal data described in Condition with the heading “Protection of Personal Data” of the Contract is processed in connection with these Work Package Services (“Data”) and will be transferred to [                      ] located outside the EEA. Notwithstanding that the Data will remain stored and hosted in the United Kingdom, the parties further acknowledge and agree that the Eighth Data Protection Principle under the Data Protection Act 1998 is relevant to the processing of the Data. Further the parties have agreed to be bound by the terms of the Commission Decision of 27th December 2001 on standard contractual clauses for the transfer of personal data to processors established in third countries, under Directive 95/46/EC as evidenced in Schedule 3 of the Contract. These standard contractual clauses have been replicated and signed by both parties and form Annex 1 to this Work Package. BT reserves the right to substitute terms and conditions relating to the transfer of personal data to processors established outside of the European Economic Area if, and by agreement of the parties, (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), such terms are commercially more acceptable to the parties and provide the same level of protection for personal data.
B) OBLIGATIONS OF THE SUPPLIER
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 111 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
The Supplier acknowledges that BT is the data controller of the Data for the purposes of the Data Protection Legislation.
The provisions relating to confidentiality in Condition [                      ] of the Contract shall apply in relation to the Supplier’s processing of the Data. In particular, the Data shall not without the prior written consent of BT, be disclosed or transferred to any person other than to [                      ] or their personnel who have a valid reason for viewing or holding the Data.
The Supplier undertakes to procure that all such personnel in [India] who will be viewing or who will have access to the Data in the course of providing services to BT will enter into a legally binding individual confidentiality declaration with the Supplier before commencing work in relation to the services.
Prior to personnel being given access to Data, the Supplier will provide appropriate training to all personnel who will be dealing with or processing Data in relation to the relevant obligations under the Data Protection Legislation and security and confidentiality procedures including any security and confidentiality procedures reasonably requested by BT for the protection of Data and will provide refresher training when reasonably necessary.
C) DATA PROTECTION PROVISIONS
i. BT, as the data controller for the purposes of the Data Protection Act, taking into account the contractual obligations imposed on the Supplier by the Contract and this Work Package Agreement, the technical and organisational security measures which are in place and the other circumstances relating to the Work Package Services confirms that it considers that an adequate level of protection for the Data and for the rights of data subjects is in place.
ii. The Supplier agrees to ensure that all such technical and organisational security measures as set out in Annex [B] are maintained throughout the duration of the term of the Contract and Work Package Agreement except as such arrangements are varied by agreement between the Parties. Accordingly, the Parties agree that any transfer of Data will be compliant with Data Protection Act.
iii. BT may suspend or terminate its consent and this Work Package for a serious breach or serious non-compliance with Data Protection legislation in connection with this consent. If either Party becomes aware of any breach of or non-compliance with the Data Protection legislation in connection with the Sub-Contracted Services that Party shall promptly inform the other Party and the Parties shall, as soon as reasonably practicable, conduct a review of the matter and implement any changes in processes or procedures established by the review
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 112 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
SCHEDULE 6 APPENDIX 2 WORK PACKAGE TEMPLATE
APPENDIX A
ANNEX 1
EU MODEL CLAUSES
PART 1
MANDATORY: TO BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE PARTIES
DATA EXPORTER
The data exporter is British Telecommunications plc
DATA IMPORTER
The data importer is                                                               
DATA SUBJECTS
The personal data transferred concern the following categories of data subjects:
CATEGORIES OF DATA
The personal data transferred concern the following categories of data:
(ARROW)
SPECIAL CATEGORIES OF DATA (IF APPROPRIATE)
No data classified as Sensitive Personal Data will be processed outside the EEA.
PROCESSING OPERATIONS
The personal data transferred will be subject to the following basic processing activities:
                     
DATA EXPORTER       DATA IMPORTER    
 
                   
Name:
          Name        
 
 
 
         
 
   
 
                   
             
Authorised signature       Authorised signature    
 
                   
DATE:
          DATE:        
 
 
 
         
 
   
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 113 of 126

 


 

‘PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SUBJECT TO CONTRACT
PART 2
MANDATORY: TO BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED BY THE PARTIES.
Description of the technical and organisational security measures implemented by the data importer in accordance with Clauses 4(d) and 5(c) (Schedule 3):
Generic measures for each service line in Annex 1 Part 1 [1 through 6]
                     
Operational Organisational Measures                
 
                   
Technical and Security Measures                
 
                   
DATA EXPORTER       DATA IMPORTER    
 
                   
Name:
          Name        
 
 
 
         
 
   
 
                   
             
Authorised signature       Authorised signature    
 
                   
DATE:
          DATE:        
 
 
 
         
 
   
IN CONFIDENCE
Page 114 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
SCHEDULE 7 — INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Page 115 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 8 — CHANGE CONTROL PROCEDURE
1. PRINCIPLES
(a) If at any time either party sees a need to change the Services that party may request or recommend such change only in accordance with the Change Control Procedure.
(b) Neither BT nor the Supplier shall unreasonably withhold its agreement to any change provided that BT shall not be obliged to agree to any change increasing the charges or requiring BT to incur material expenditure.
(c) Until such time as a change is made in accordance with the Change Control Procedure, the Supplier shall, unless otherwise agreed in writing, continue to supply the Services as if the request or recommendation had not been made.
(d) Any discussions which may take place between BT and the Supplier in connection with a request or recommendation before the authorisation of a resultant change to the Services shall be without prejudice to the rights of either party.
(e) Any work undertaken by the Supplier, its sub-contractors or agents which has not been authorised in advance by a change to the Services and which has not been otherwise agreed in accordance with the provision of paragraph 1(c) shall be undertaken entirely at the expense and liability of the Supplier.
2. PROCEDURES
(a) Discussion between BT and the Supplier concerning a change to the Services shall result in any one of the following:
(i) a request to change the Services by BT; or
(ii) no further action being taken;
(iii) a recommendation to change the Services by the Supplier.
(b) Where a written request for an amendment is received from BT, the Supplier shall immediately on receipt issue a written acknowledgement to BT and, unless otherwise agreed, submit a Change Control Note (CCN) to BT within three weeks of the date of the request.
(c) A recommendation to amend by the Supplier shall be submitted as a CCN direct to BT at the time of such recommendation.
(d) Each CCN shall contain:
(i) the title of the change;
Page 116 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(ii) the originator and date of the request or recommendation for the change;
(iii) the reason for the change;
(iv) full details of the change including any specifications;
(v) the price, if any, of the change;
(vi) a timetable for implementation together with any proposals for acceptance of the change;
(vii) a schedule of payments if appropriate;
(viii) details of the likely impact, if any, of the change on other aspects of the Services including but not limited to:
(A) the term of the Contract;
(B) the personnel to be provided;
(C) the charges;
(D) the payment profile;
(E) the documentation to be provided;
(F) the training to be provided;
(G) service levels;
(H) working arrangements; and
(I) other contractual issues;
(ix) the date of expiry of validity of the CCN; and
(x) provision for signature by BT and the Supplier.
(e) For each CCN submitted BT shall, within the period of the validity of the CCN:
(i) allocate a sequential number to the CCN;
(ii) evaluate the CCN and, as appropriate:
(A) request further information;
(B) approve the CCN; or
(C) notify the Supplier of the rejection of the CCN; and
Page 117 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
(iii) arrange for two copies of an approved CCN to be signed by or on behalf of BT and the Supplier.
(f) A CCN signed by both parties shall constitute an amendment to this Contract pursuant to condition 22 headed “Variations”.
Page 118 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 9 — CONFIDENTIALITY AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT NOTE: This form must be completed by all non-BT people who undertake Work for BT before they have access to BT information or BT computer systems.
You may, as a supplier or as an employee or subcontractor of a supplier to BT, have access to BT information or BT computer systems.
BT requires you:
- to keep all BT information (whether or not it is marked “NOT TO BE SHOWN OUTSIDE BT”, “INTERNAL”, “IN CONFIDENCE”, or “IN STRICTEST CONFIDENCE”) confidential and not to disclose it, unless you first have BT’s written permission;
- if you have access to BT customer or personal information, to comply with the provisions of the Data Protection Act 1998;
- to access BT computer systems and BT electronic information only if you have been authorised to do so. Unauthorised access may result in your being prosecuted under the Computer Misuse Act 1990;
- to access and use BT computer systems and BT information only as is necessary to do your job properly;
- to read and understand BT Security Requirement and Security Policy;
- to comply with other BT instructions and security policies that may be notified from time to time; and
- not to connect any equipment not supplied by BT to any BT LAN port.
If you are in any doubt as to these requirements or the policies of BT Group Security, further advice and information can be obtained from your BT contact.
PERSONAL DECLARATION
I have read and understand the above requirements and agree to be bound by them.
Signed Date:
 
Print full name and home address:
Name:
Address:
Page 119 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
SCHEDULE 10 — GENERIC STANDARDS
The latest issues are attached as follows:
- BT Generic Standard 11 Safety Management Issue 7.2
- BT Generic Standard 13 Environmental Impact Issue 9
- BT Generic Standard 18 Sourcing with Human Dignity Standard Issue 2
1 CONTRACT RESPONSE
To each attached Generic Standard the Supplier is required to make a declaration of “Compliant”, “Partially compliant” or “Non-compliant” as appropriate.
This declaration shall be followed by a concise supporting statement describing the way in which the Supplier complies, or why the Supplier does not and identifying methods and tools used.
Compliance with the attached Generic Standards does not confer immunity from legal obligations. The Supplier should note that BT reserves the right to validate the information provided.
2 TABLE OF COMPLIANCE
             
    Compliant   Partially Compliant   Non-compliant
Generic Standard 11
  (X)        
Generic Standard 13
  (X)        
Generic Standard 18
      (X)    
3 BT GENERIC STANDARD 11 FOR COMPLETION
4 BT GENERIC STANDARDS 13 AND 18 FOR ACCESS AND COMPLETION
On the Contract Commencement date the Supplier shall access the following URL’s and complete the following two questionnaires:
https://secure.selling2bt.bt.com/ext/html/gs13/
http://www.selling2bt.com/html/working/humandignity/question.asp
Page 120 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 406 OF THE SECURITIES ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
The Supplier must complete the questionnaires within a two month time period and ensure that the file is emailed as the instructions indicate.
Page 121 of 126

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
AMENDMENT number 1 dated 1 st February 2008
TO
CONTRACT number 678650 (‘Contract’)
     
Between
  (1) British Telecommunications plc (‘BT’) and
 
  (2) Virtusa UK Limited (‘the Consultant’)
BT and the Consultant agree that:
  the Contract is amended as set out below;
  the value of the Contract remains unchanged and
  all other Contract provisions remain unchanged.
Amendment details:
Payment Terms Change from [***] days to [***] days.
Condition 55.2 of contract 678650 will be superseded by the following:
55.2 BT will pay due Invoices submitted in accordance with this condition within [***] days of the later of either date of the invoice or the date upon which the invoice (including electronic copy of the invoices) is received by BT, All payments shall be made in pounds sterling.
     
SIGNED for and on behalf of BT
  SIGNED for and on behalf of the Supplier
 
   
Signed /s/ Liam Callaway
  Signed /s/ Paul Greenan
 
   
Name Liam Callaway
  Name Paul Greenan
 
   
Position Buyer — IT Services
  Position: Financial Controller

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
AMENDMENT number 2 dated 27 th March 2008
TO
CONTRACT number 678650 (‘Contract’)
     
Between
  (1) British Telecommunications plc (‘BT’) and
 
  (2) Virtusa UK Limited (‘the Consultant’)
BT and the Consultant agree that:
  the Contract is amended as set out below; and
  the estimated value of the Contract remains unchanged; and
  all other Contract provisions remain unchanged.
Amendment details:
Discount Structures: Minimums; Targets
Whereas; BT and Supplier have entered into a Work Package, a new Schedule has been agreed to Contract 678650 “BT Training TM SOW ver2008-02-14v.7” herein after referred to as Schedule 11 pursuant to which the Supplier will or has provided resources to undergo training, on delivery processes, domain and technologies of relevance to BT through 31 March 2008;
  1.   With respect to the Schedule 11, the parties hereby agree to the following:
  a.   [***].
 
  b.   [***] under and in accordance with Schedule 6, Appendix 1 (Pricing) condition 1.7 Discount Structures; Minimums, Targets of the terms of Contract 678650, during the period of 1 April 2007 through 31 March 2008.
 
  c.   [***].
  2.   Schedules to this Amendment
  a.   Schedule 11 — BT Training TM SOW ver2008-02-14v.7
  3.   Capitalized terms used herein but not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Contract.
 
  4.   Except as other wise modified herein, all terms of the Contract remain in full force and effect.
 
  5.   The parties have executed this Amendment by their authorized signatories as of the date first written above.

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
     
SIGNED for and on behalf of BT
  SIGNED for and on behalf of the Supplier
 
   
Signed /s/ Abbi Hewitt
  Signed /s/ Paul Greenan
 
   
Name Abbi Hewitt
  Name Paul Greenan
 
   
Position Buyer
  Position Financial Controller

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
AMENDMENT NO. 03 TO CONTRACT #678650
Whereas; British Telecommunications plc (registered in England and Wales under Company Number: 1800000) whose registered office is 81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ (“ BT ”) and Virtusa UK Limited (registered in England under Company Number 05640127 whose registered office is 1 Callaghan Square Cardiff CF10 5BT (“the Supplier ”) entered into a Contract for the Provision of IT Services to IT dated as of 29 March 2007 No. 678650 (the “ Contract ”);
Whereas; BT and Supplier now seek to amend the Contract as further set forth herein;
NOW THEREFORE, for valuable consideration, the sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged and confirmed by both parties hereto, the parties agree as follows:
  1.   Capitalized terms used herein but not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Contract.
 
  2.   Additional Definitions: For purposes of this Amendment, “ Qualifying Business ” shall mean: with respect to the first, second and third Annual Periods of the Amendment Term, [***] of all Eligible Annual Fees with respect to such period, and for the fourth Annual Period of the Amendment Term, [***] of all Eligible Annual Fees. For the avoidance of doubt, spend with Supplier under the terms herein that is contracted through a third party on behalf of BT shall contribute to “Qualifying Business”.
 
  3.   Term. The term of this Amendment shall begin on April 1, 2008 (“ Effective Date ”) and shall continue until 31 March 2012 (the “ Amendment Term ”).
 
  4.   Qualifying Business Fee Commitment.
  a.   BT intends to engage Supplier to perform Qualifying Business under Work Packages that are entered into from time to time by the parties for services to be performed during the Amendment Term. In exchange for BT’s commitment hereunder to spend a minimum of [***] in service fees (excluding taxes and other pass through expenses like travel and other reimbursable expenses) related to Qualifying Business under the terms herein during the Amendment Term, Supplier is willing to extend certain discounts on service fees billed for Qualifying Business and make certain other discount concessions to the Contract as further set forth herein.
 
  b.   Supplier and BT will enter into additional Work Packages for Qualifying Business, subject to the terms herein. Each Work Package will include without limitation, the terms customarily set forth in a Work Package, including assumptions, deliverables, allocation of responsibilities and other customary terms.
  5.   FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENT AND DISCOUNT STRUCTURE
  a.   BT has agreed to a minimum spend of [***] in service fees [***], during the Amendment Term (“ Total Committed QBF Spend ”) (QBF as defined in Section 5(b)(i)) on Qualifying Business with Supplier in exchange for certain discounts applied by Supplier as further set forth herein.
 
  b.   In exchange for the Total QBF Committed Spend,
  (i)   For all service fees (excluding taxes and other pass through expenses like travel and other reimbursable expenses) for Qualifying Business
Page 1 of 4

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
      (“ Qualifying Business Fees ” or “ QBF ”) charged under each Work Package (and designated by the parties as Qualifying Business), Supplier shall [***] in effect under the Agreement at the time of the Work Package, whether for time and materials work or fixed price engagements, for all Qualifying Business Fees of up to an aggregate amount equal to the percentages of Eligible Annual Fees in any fiscal quarter as specified in paragraph 2 above (“ Qualifying Business Fee Cap ”); provided that
  a.   if BT’s spend for Qualifying Business with Supplier falls below [***] in any Annual Period before BT has fulfilled its Total QBF Committed Spend (measured from the Effective Date through such Annual Period), BT shall refund the Pre-Paid Discount with respect to such Annual Period, based on the difference between the discount on [***] and discount of [***] applied against the actual Qualifying Business Fees for such Annual Period; and
 
  b.   if BT does not achieve the Total QBF Committed Spend hereunder at the expiration of the Amendment Term, BT shall refund the difference between the pre-paid discount of [***] and the actual amount of discount that BT earned as a result of its Qualifying Business Fees hereunder, to the extent not already refunded to Supplier.
      For the avoidance of doubt, if BT is required to refund any Pre-Paid Discount per the terms above, BT will not lose the right to earn the aggregate Pre-Paid Discount refunded, subject to the terms herein.
 
      BT shall pay all such refunds within [***] days of expiration of the Annual Period or Amendment Term as the case may be.
 
      Supplier shall measure the amount of Pre-Paid Discount earned by BT in each fiscal quarter based on the aggregate amount of Qualifying Business Fees in such quarter multiplied by the [***] discount as stated in Section 5(b)(i), and Supplier shall deduct from the Pre-Paid Discount such earned amounts on a quarterly basis. To the extent BT earns in excess of the Pre-Paid Discount during the Amendment Term, Supplier shall continue to measure the amount of Qualifying Business Fees each fiscal quarter until the termination of the applicable Annual Period. Within [***] days of the end of such Annual Period in which BT has exceeded the Pre-Paid Discount Amount and any applicable Annual Period thereafter during the Amendment Term, Supplier will then issue to BT a credit under the Contract (as amended hereby) in an amount equal to the value of the sum of Qualifying Business Fees billed to BT with an invoice date during such Annual Period multiplied by the [***] discount as stated above (“ QBF Credit Sum ”). Suppler will issue such credit against monthly invoices issued by Supplier and agreed with BT in the periods immediately following the applicable Annual Period. Upon expiration or termination of the Contract where the parties do not renew the Contract, to the extent of any remaining QBF Credit Sum, Supplier shall promptly pay to BT any remaining QBF Credit Sum in respect of the final Annual Period (or part thereof).
Page 2 of 4

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
  (ii)   Supplier shall pre-pay the aggregate discount hereunder on Qualifying Business Fees, based on the Total QBF Committed Spend of [***], of [***] to BT (the “ Pre-Paid Discount ”) no later than March 31, 2008; provided that such Pre-Paid Discount shall be refundable to Supplier on a pro-rata basis, to the extent that such Pre-Paid Discount is not earned hereunder by BT under the terms herein.
 
  (iii)   All Qualifying Business Fees (up to the Qualifying Business Fee Cap) billed hereunder by Supplier with an invoice date during each Annual Period shall be applied and included in the calculation of Eligible Annual Fees and Annual Total Volume Discount for the applicable Annual Period under the Contract. Further, the calculation of Qualifying Business Fees billed hereunder shall be subject to the terms and conditions in the Contract (as amended hereby) as applied to Eligible Annual Fees (including Section 1.7.2 (a), (b) and (c) thereof). By way of example only, if [***] of Qualifying Business Fees were invoiced to BT during an Annual Period under a Work Package for Qualifying Business, [***] would be counted as Eligible Annual Fees under the Contract, but no taxes or any reimbursable expenses would be included in the calculation of Qualifying Business Fee or Eligible Annual Fees.
 
  (iv)   Subject to the terms herein, service fees billed under time and materials and fixed price engagements shall all be Qualifying Business Fees hereunder.
 
  (v)   Invoice Schedule: All fees invoiced under Work Packages are non-cancellable and non-refundable, except as otherwise stated herein.
  (c)  (i) In addition, The Discount Table in Section 1.7.2 of the Contract is hereby deleted and replaced with the following:
Minimum Commitment of Eligible Annual Fees Target Eligible Annual Fees and
Annual Total Volume Discount Rate
    For the avoidance of doubt, all examples in Section 1.7.2 of the Contract shall be correspondingly modified by the amended discount levels and numbers in this Amendment, but the manner and application of the discount remains unchanged.
  (ii)   [***].
  6.   Except as other wise modified herein, all terms of the Contract remain in full force and effect.
Page 3 of 4

 


 

PORTIONS OF THIS EXHIBIT WERE OMITTED AND HAVE BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION FOR CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24b-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT; [***] DENOTES OMISSIONS.
IN CONFIDENCE
The parties have executed this Amendment by their authorized signatories as of the date first written above.
             
SIGNED for and on behalf of SUPPLIER   SIGNED for and on behalf of BT
 
           
Virtusa UK Limited        
 
           
Signature
  /s/ Paul Greenan   Signature   /s/ David Cole
 
           
 
           
Name
  Paul Greenan   Name   David Cole
 
           
Position
Company
  Financial Controller   Position
Company
  Senior Procurement Manager
Page 4 of 4

 


 

AMENDMENT number 004 dated 31st March 2008
TO
CONTRACT number 678650 (‘Contract’)
     
Between
  (1) British Telecommunications plc (‘ BT’) and
 
 
  (2) Virtusa UK Limited (‘the Supplier’)
BT and the Supplier agree that:
  the Contract is amended as set out below;
  the estimated value of the Contract remains unchanged; and
  all other Contract provisions remain unchanged.
Amendment Details:
1. All defined terms, unless otherwise defined in this Amendment, shall have the meanings given them in the Contract.
2. The Definitions section of the Contract shall be amended so that the definition of “Work Package” shall read as follows:
“Work Package” means a written request for Services, in the form attached hereto as Schedule 6, issued by any BT Group Company to the Supplier pursuant to which the Supplier is to provide Services to such BT Group Company in accordance with the specifications set forth therein indicated in such request which has been accepted by both parties as evidenced as follows:
Each party may create binding Work Packages, and amendments or change requests to such Work Packages, by the electronic approval of documents by e-mail as follows:
2.1 Work Packages :
  2.1.1   a “Work Package” shall consist of an electronic document submitted to BT by the Supplier which contains:
 
       (i)   a Supplier Quotation Reference
Number (i.e. VIR_BTGS_CMP_029_V3);
  2.1.2   a Work Package shall be deemed binding and countersigned upon BT’s issuance of a Purchase Order which references the Supplier Quotation Reference number.
 
  2.1.3   All Work Package terms and conditions shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract dated as of 29 th March 2007, contract number 678650, by and between BT and Virtusa UK Limited (“Virtusa”). Other than any specific terms and conditions agreed by both parties in the Work Package.

 


 

  2.2   Amendments or Change Requests to Work Packages :
  2.2.1   a “Work Package Amendment” shall consist of an amendment electronic document submitted to BT by the Supplier which references:
 
      (i)   a Supplier Quotation Reference Number (i.e.
VIR_BTGS_CMP_029_V3);
 
  2.2.2   a Work Package shall be deemed binding and countersigned upon BT’s Issuance of a Purchase Order which references the Supplier Quotation Reference number.
 
  2.2.3   All Work Package terms and conditions shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract dated as of 29 th March 2007, contract number 678650, by and between BT and Virtusa UK Limited (“Virtusa”). Other than any specific terms and conditions agreed by both parties in the Work Package.
3.   Except as specifically modified or amended by this Amendment, the terms and conditions of the Contract shall remain in full force and effect. In the event of any conflict between the terms and conditions of this Amendment and the Contract, the terms and conditions of this Amendment shall take precedence over the Contract.
 
4.   Capitalized terms used herein but not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Contract.
 
5.   Except as other wise modified herein, all terns of the Contract remain in full force and effect.
 
6.   The parties have executed this Amendment try their authorised signatories as of the date first written above.
                     
SIGNED for and on behalf of BT       SIGNED for and on behalf of the Supplier    
 
                   
Signed
  /s/ Abbi Hewett
 
      Signed   /s/ Paul Greenan 31/03/08
 
   
 
                   
Name
  Abbi Hewett       Name   Paul Greenan    
 
                   
Position
  Buyer       Position   Financial Controller    

 

Exhibit 10.8
AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT
     THIS AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT is made as of September 29, 2006, by and between VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation, having its chief executive office at 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (the “Borrower”), and CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, a Massachusetts chartered bank having its head office at 28 State Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (“Citizens” or the “Lender”).
     The Borrower has requested the Lender to extend credit in the form of loans and letters of credit, and the Lender is willing to make loans to the Borrower and is willing to issue Letters of Credit, in each case on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth herein.
     In consideration of the premises and for other goad and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:
SECTION I.
DEFINITIONS
     1.1. Definitions
     All capitalized terms used in this Agreement, in the Note, in the other Loan Documents or in any certificate, report or other document made or delivered pursuant to this Agreement (unless otherwise defined therein) shall have the meanings assigned to them below:
      Accounts Receivable and Accounts. All rights of the Borrower to payment of a monetary obligation (i) for property that has been or is to be sold, leased, licensed, assigned, or otherwise disposed of, (ii) for services rendered or to be rendered, (iii) for a secondary obligation incurred or to be incurred, or (iv) arising out of the use of a credit or charge card or information contained on or for use with the card; and all sums of money and other Proceeds due or becoming due thereon, all notes, bills, drafts, acceptances, instruments, documents and other debts, obligations and liabilities, in whatever form, owing to the Borrower with respect thereto, all guarantees and security therefor, and the Borrowers rights pertaining to and interests in such property, including the right of stoppage in transit, replevin or reclamation; all chattel paper; all amounts due from Affiliates of the Borrower; all insurance proceeds; all other rights and claims to the payment of money, under contracts or otherwise; and all other property constituting “accounts” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code,
      Affiliate. With reference to any Person, (i) any director, officer or employee of that Person, (ii) any other Person controlling, controlled by or under direct or indirect common control of that Person, (iii) any other Person directly or indirectly holding 10.0% or more of any class of the capital stock or other equity interests (including options, warrants, convertible securities and similar rights) of that Person and (iv) any other Person 10.0% more of any class of

1


 

whose capital stock or other equity interests (including options, warrants, convertible securities and similar rights) is held directly or indirectly by that Person.
      Agreement. This Credit Agreement, including the Exhibits and Schedules hereto, as the same may be supplemented, amended or restated from time to time.
      Assignee. Sec Section 9.1.
      Borrower. See Preamble.
      Borrower’s Accountants. KPMG LLP, or such other independent certified public accountants as are selected by the Borrower and are reasonably acceptable to the Lender.
      Borrowing Base. As at the date of any determination thereof, an amount equal to (a) 75.0% of the unpaid net amount of all Eligible Accounts, minus (b) FX Reserves.
      Borrowing Base Report. A report signed by any Responsible Officer and in substantially the form of Exhibit E hereto.
      Business Day. Any day, other than a Saturday, Sunday or legal holiday, on which banks in Boston, Massachusetts are open for the conduct of a substantial part of their commercial banking business.
      Capital Expenditures. Without duplication, any expenditure for fixed or capital assets, leasehold improvements, capital leases, installment purchases of machinery and equipment, acquisitions of real estate and other similar expenditures including (i) in the ease of a purchase, the entire purchase price, whether or not paid during the fiscal period in question, (ii) in the case of a capital lease, the capitalized amount (as determined under GAAP) of the obligations under such lease to pay rent and other amounts, and (iii) expenditures respect to any construction in progress account of the Borrower.
      Closing Date. The first date on which the conditions set forth in Sections 3.1 and 3.2 have been satisfied and any Loans are to be made hereunder.
      Code. The Internal Revenue Code of 1986 and the rules and regulations thereunder, collectively, as the same may from time to time be supplemented or amended and remain in effect.
      Collateral. All of the property, rights and interests of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries that are or are intended to be subject to the security interests and liens created by the Security Documents.
      Commitment Fee. See Section 2.5.
      Consolidated Current Liabilities. The aggregate amount of Indebtedness of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries that may properly be classified as current liabilities in accordance with

2


 

GAAP and in any event including, without limitation, any direct or indirect indebtedness and other liabilities of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries that are payable on demand or within one (1) year from the creation thereof:
      Consolidated Net Income. For any fiscal period, the consolidated net income of’ the Borrower and its Subsidiaries for such period, as determined in accordance with GAAP, except that in no event shall such consolidated net income include: (i) any gain or loss arising from any write-up of assets, except to the extent inclusion thereof shall be approved in writing by the Lender; (ii) earnings of any Subsidiary accrued prior to the date it became a Subsidiary; (iii) any extraordinary or nonrecurring gains; (iv) any deferred or other credit representing any excess of the equity of any Subsidiary at the date of acquisition thereof over the amount invested in such Subsidiary; (v) the net earnings of any business entity (other than a Subsidiary) in which the Borrower or any Subsidiary has an ownership interest, except to the extent such net earnings shall have actually been received by the Borrower or such Subsidiary in the form of cash distributions; (vi) the proceeds of any life insurance policy; and (vii) any reversal of any contingency reserve, except to the extent that provision for such contingency reserve shall be made from income arising during such period.
      Consolidated Tangible Net Worth. At any date as of which the amount thereof shall be determined, the consolidated total assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, minus (a) Consolidated Total Liabilities, and minus (b) the sum of any amounts attributable to (i) the book value, net of applicable reserves, of all intangible assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, including, without limitation, goodwill, trademarks, copyrights, patents and any similar rights, and unamortized debt discount and expense, (ii) all reserves not already deducted from assets or included in Consolidated Total Liabilities, (iii) any write-up in the book value of assets resulting from any revaluation thereof subsequent to the date of the Audited Financial Statement, (iv) the value of any minority interests in Subsidiaries, (v) intercompany accounts with Subsidiaries and Affiliates (including receivables due from Subsidiaries and Affiliates and loans or advances to employees), (vi) the value, if any, attributable to any capital stock or other equity interests of the Borrower or any Subsidiary held in treasury, and (vii) the value, if any, attributable to any notes or subscriptions receivable due from equity holders in respect of capital stock or other equity interests.
      Consolidated Total Liabilities. At any date as of which the amount thereof shall be determined, all obligations that should, in accordance with GAAP, be classified as liabilities on the consolidated balance sheet of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, including in any event all Indebtedness.
      Contra Customer. Any customer or other Person with whom the Borrower has a contract or agreement of any kind (including an account payable) and in respect of which there is an Account included in Eligible Accounts.
      Default. An Event of Default or any event or condition that, but for the requirement that time elapse or notice be given, or both, would constitute an Event of Default.
      Drawdown Date. The Business Day on which any Loan is made or is to be made.

3


 

      Eligible Account(s) . An Account Receivable which:
     (a) Is not unpaid 90 or more days after invoice date and is not more than 60 days past due under the original terms of sale;
     (b) Arose in the ordinary course of business of the Borrower as a result of either (i) services which have been performed for the account debtor or (ii) the absolute sale of goods which have been shipped to the account debtor (and not on a bill-and-hold, guaranteed sale, sale-or-return, sale-on-assignment, sale-on-approval, consignment or other repurchase or return basis);
     (c) Is the legal, valid and binding obligation of the account debtor thereunder is assignable, is owned by the Borrower free and clear of all Encumbrances (except in favor of the Lender) and is subject to a valid, perfected first security interest of the Lender (and if the account debtor is the United States of America or any agency or instrumentality thereof, the right to payment has been assigned to the Lender in compliance with the Assignment of Claims Act of 1940, as amended) and is not evidenced by a promissory note or other instrument;
     (d) Has not been materially reduced and is not subject to material reduction, as against the Borrower, its agents or the Lender, by any offset, counterclaim, adjustment, credit, allowance or other defense and as to which there is no (and no basis for any) return, rejection, loss or damage of or to the goods or services giving rise thereto, or any request for credit or adjustments known to the Borrower; provided, however, that if an Account Receivable, otherwise meeting the definition of Eligible Account, has been materially reduced or is subject to material reduction solely because of a failure of the Borrower to timely meet contract milestones and for no other reason (i.e. “retainage”) or because of a warranty claim and for no other reason, such Account Receivable shall be an Eligible Account, to the extent it has not been so materially reduced or is not subject to material reduction;
     (e) Is not in dispute or uncollectible for any reason, including, without limitation, return, rejection, repossession, loss of or damage to the goods or services giving rise thereto or other dispute, arty bankruptcy, insolvency, adverse credit rating or other financial difficulty of the account debtor, or any impediment to the assertion of a claim or commencement of an action against the account debtor (including as a consequence of the failure of the Borrower to be qualified or licensed in any jurisdiction where such qualification or licensing is required), all as determined by the Lender in its sole discretion;
     (f) Is not owing from any Affiliate of the Borrower;
     (g) Is owing from an account debtor located in the United States, or, if not located in the United States, whose Accounts Receivable are covered by credit insurance satisfactory to the Lender in its sole discretion or supported by a standby letter of credit in favor of the Lender satisfactory to the Lender in its sole discretion;
     (h) Is owing from an account debtor at least 75.0% of whose accounts payable owing to the Borrower are Eligible Accounts;

4


 

     (i) Is not owing from a Person who is the account debtor on more than 35.0% of all Eligible Accounts, unless consented to by the Lender in writing; provided, that the foregoing limitation shall not apply to account debtors (i) located in the United States with public debt issued and outstanding rated BBB- or better by Standard & Poor’s, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., and/or Bbb3 or better by Moody’s Investor Services Inc. or (ii) if not located in the United States, whose Accounts Receivable are covered by credit insurance satisfactory to the Lender in its sole discretion or supported by a standby letter of credit in favor of the Lender satisfactory to the Lender in its sole discretion;
     (j) If owing from any Contra Customer, will be eligible only to the extent it exceeds the amount of the Borrower’s accounts payable, or other indebtedness permitted hereunder that is payable, to such Contra Customer; and
     (k) Has not been designated by the Lender in its reasonable discretion by notice to the Borrower as unacceptable for any reason.
      Encumbrances. See Section 7.3.
      Environmental Laws. Any and all applicable federal, state and local environmental, health or safety statutes, laws, regulations, rules and ordinances (whether now existing or hereafter enacted or promulgated), and all applicable judicial, administrative and regulatory decrees, judgments and orders, including common law rulings and determinations, relating to injury to, or the protection of real or personal property or human health or the environment, including, without limitation, all requirements pertaining to reporting, licensing, permitting, investigation, remediation and removal of emissions, discharges, releases or threatened releases of Hazardous Materials into the environment or relating to the manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, disposal, transport or handling of such Hazardous Materials.
      ERISA. The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and the rules and regulations thereunder, collectively, as the same may from time to time be supplemented or amended and remain in effect.
      ERISA Affiliate. Any trade or business, whether or not incorporated, that is treated as a single employer with the Borrower under Section 41 4(b) (c), (m) or (o) of the Code and Section 4001(a) (14) of ERISA.
      ERISA Event. (a) Any “reportable event,” as defined in Section 4043 of ERISA or the regulations issued thereunder, with respect to a Plan unless the 30-day notice requirement with respect to such event has been waived by the PBGC; (b) the adoption of any amendment to a Plan that would require the provision of security pursuant to Section 401(a)(29) of the Code or Section 307 of ERISA; (c) the existence with respect to any Plan of an “accumulated finding deficiency” (as defined in Section 412 of the Code or Section 302 of ERISA, whether or not waived; (d) the filing pursuant to Section 412(d) of the Code or Section 303(d) of ERISA of an application for a waiver of the minimum funding standard with respect to any Plan; (e) the

5


 

incurrence of any liability under Title IV of ERISA with respect to the termination of any Plan or the withdrawal or partial withdrawal of the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates from any Plan or Multiemployer Plan; (f) the receipt by the Borrower of any ERISA Affiliate from the PBGC or a plan administrator or any notice relating to the intention to terminate any Plan or Plans or to appoint a trustee to administer any Plan; (g) the receipt by the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate of any notice concerning the imposition of Withdrawal Liability (as defined in Part I of Subtitle E of Title IV of ERISA) with respect to any Multiemployer Plan or a determination that a Multiemployer Plan is, or is expected to be, insolvent or in reorganization, within the meaning of Title IV of ERISA; (ii) the occurrence of a “prohibited transaction” with respect to which the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries is a “disqualified person” (within the meaning of Section 4975 of the Code) or with respect to which the Borrower or any such Subsidiary could otherwise be liable; and (i) any other event or condition with respect to a Plan or Multiemployer Plan that could reasonably be expected to result in liability of the Borrower.
      Event of Default. Any event described in Section 8.1.
      FX Documents. Any and all documents entered into by the Borrower in connection with FX Transactions.
      FX Reserves. At anytime of determination of the Borrowing Base, an amount equal to 15.0% of the face amount (in United States Dollars) of all foreign exchange contracts entered into in connection with FX Transactions.
      FX Transactions. Any transactions arranged or facilitated by Lender on behalf of Borrower or its Subsidiaries involving the purchase or sale of foreign currencies either on a current or deferred basis.
      GAAP. Generally accepted accounting principles, consistently applied.
      Guarantees. As applied to any Person (a “guarantor”), all guarantees, endorsements and other contingent or surety obligations with respect to Indebtedness or other obligations of any other Person (the “primary obligor”), whether or not reflected on the consolidated balance sheet of the guarantor, including any obligation of the guarantor, direct or indirect, (a) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment of such Indebtedness or other obligation or to purchase (or to advance or supply funds for the purchase of) any security for the payment thereof, (b) to purchase or lease property, securities or services for the purpose of assuring the owner of such Indebtedness or other obligation of the payment thereof, (c) to maintain working capital, equity capital or any other financial statement condition or liquidity of the primary obligor so as to enable the primary obligor to pay such Indebtedness or other obligation or (d) as an account party in respect of any letter of credit or letter of guaranty issued to support such Indebtedness or other obligation.
      Hazardous Materials. Any substance (i) the presence of which requires or may hereafter require notification, investigation, removal or remediation under any Environmental Law; (ii) which is or becomes defined as a “hazardous waste”, “hazardous material” or “hazardous substance” or “pollutant” or “contaminant” under any present or future Environmental Law or

6


 

amendments thereto including, without limitation, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (42 U.S.C. Section 9601 et seq.) and any applicable local statutes and the regulations promulgated thereunder; (iii) which is toxic, explosive, corrosive, flammable, infectious, radioactive, carcinogenic, mutagenic or otherwise hazardous and which is or becomes regulated pursuant to any Environmental Law by any governmental authority, agency, department, commission, board, agency or instrumentality of the United States, any applicable state of the United States, or any political subdivision thereof, or (iv) without limitation, which contains gasoline, diesel fuel or other petroleum products, asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (“PCB’s”).
      Indebtedness. As applied to the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, without duplication, (i) all obligations for borrowed money or other extensions of credit whether secured or unsecured, absolute or contingent, including, without limitation, unmatured reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit or guarantees issued for the account of or on behalf of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries and all obligations representing the deferred purchase price of property, other than accounts payable arising in the ordinary course of business, (ii) all obligations evidenced by bonds, notes, debentures or other similar instruments, (iii) all obligations secured by any mortgage, pledge, security interest or other lien on property owned or acquired by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries whether or not the obligations secured thereby shall have been assumed, (iv) that portion of all obligations arising under leases that is required to be capitalized on the consolidated balance sheet of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, (v) all Guarantees, (vi) all obligations that are immediately due and payable out of the proceeds of or production from property now or hereafter owned or acquired by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, and (vii) all other obligations which, in accordance with GAAP, would be included as a liability on the consolidated balance sheet of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, but excluding anything in the nature of capital stock, capital surplus and retained earnings.
      Audited Financial Statement. See Section 4.6.
      Interest Expense. For any fiscal period, the consolidated interest expense (including imputed interest and capitalized lease obligations) and amortized debt discount on indebtedness of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries for such period.
      Investment. As applied to the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, the purchase or acquisition of any share of capital stock, partnership interest, evidence of indebtedness or other equity security of any other Person (including any Subsidiary), any loan, advance or extension of credit (excluding Accounts Receivable arising in the ordinary course of business) to, or contribution to the capital of, any other Person (including any Subsidiary), any real estate held for sale or investment, any securities or commodities futures contracts held, any other investment in any other Person (including any Subsidiary), and the making of any commitment or acquisition of any option to make an Investment.
      Lease. That certain lease, dated as of June, 2000, between the Borrower and W9/TIB Real Estate Limited Partnership in respect of the premises occupied by the Borrower in Westborough, Massachusetts, as amended to date by the First Amendment dated as of November 2000 and Second Amendment and Extension of Lease dated as of December 30, 2003.

7


 

      Lease Letters of Credit. Any Letters of Credit issued for the purpose of securing the Borrower’s obligations under the Lease, including, without limitation, any issued prior to the date hereof.
      Lender. See Preamble.
      Letter of Credit Applications. Applications for Letters of Credit in such form as may be required by the Lender from time to time which are executed and delivered by the Borrower to the Lender pursuant to Section 2A, as the same may be amended or supplemented from time to time.
      Letter of Credit Fee. See Section 2.5.
      Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement. See Section 2A.1(b).
      Letter of Credit Sublimit. The sum of $1,500,000.00.
      Letters of Credit. See Section 2A.1(a).
      Loan Documents. This Agreement, the Note, the Letters of Credit, the Letter of Credit Applications, the Security Documents and the FX Documents, together with any agreements, instruments or documents now or hereafter executed and delivered pursuant to or in connection with any of the foregoing.
      Loans. The loans made or to be made by the Lender to the Borrower pursuant to Section II of this Agreement, including Revolving Credit Loans and unpaid Reimbursement Obligations.
      Maximum Drawing Amount. The maximum aggregate amount from time to time that beneficiaries may draw under outstanding Letters of Credit.
      Multiemployer Plan. Any plan which is a Multiemployer Plan as defined in Section 4001(a) (3) of ERISA.
      Note Record. Any internal record, including a computer record, maintained by the Lender with respect to any Loan.
      Note. See Section 2.2(a).
      Notice of Borrowing. The notice, substantially in the form of Exhibit B hereto, to be given by the Borrower to the Lender to request a Revolving Credit Loan.
      Obligations. The aggregate outstanding principal balance of and interest (and premium. if any) on the Loans (including, without limitation, interest accruing at the then applicable rate provided herein after the maturity of the Loans and interest accruing at the then applicable rate provided herein after the filing of any petition in bankruptcy, or the commencement of any

8


 

insolvency, reorganization or like proceeding, relating to the Borrower, whether or not a claim for post-filing or post-petition interest is allowed in such proceeding) and all other obligations of the Borrower to the Lender of every kind and description pursuant to or in connection with the Loan Documents and FX Transactions, deposit accounts, cash management accounts and services, hedging transactions, interest rate caps, collars and similar interest rate protection products, and all other banking products and services, direct or indirect, absolute or contingent, primary or secondary, due or to become due, now existing or hereafter arising, regardless of how they arise or by what agreement or instrument, if any, in each case whether on account of principal interest, premium, reimbursement obligations, fees, indemnities, coats, expenses or otherwise (including, without limitation, all fees and disbursements of counsel that are required to be paid by the Borrower pursuant to any of the Loan Documents), and including obligations to perform acts and refrain from taking action as well as obligations to pay money.
      Participant. See Section 9.2.
      PBGC. The Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation or any entity succeeding to any or all of its functions under ERISA.
      Pension Plan. Any Plan which is an “employee pension benefit plan” (as defined in ERISA).
      Permitted Encumbrances. See Section 7.3.
      Person. Any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, trust, unincorporated association, business or other legal entity, and any government or governmental agency or political subdivision thereof.
      Plan. Any “employee pension benefit plan” or “employee welfare benefit plan” (each as defined in Section 3 of ERISA) maintained by the Borrower or any Subsidiary.
      Pledge Agreement. That certain Pledge Agreement dated the date hereof pursuant to which Borrower shall pledge to Lender the capital stock of its subsidiary, Virtusa Securities Corporation.
      Prime Rate. The rate of interest announced from time to time by the Lender at its head office as its “Prime Rate”. The Prime Rate is a reference rate and does not necessarily represent the lowest or best rate being charged to any customer. Any change in the Prime Rate shall be effective from and including the effective date of such change.
      Prohibited Transaction. Any “prohibited transaction” within the meaning of Section 406 of ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code.
      Qualified Investments. As applied to the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, Investments in (1) notes, bonds or other obligations of the United States of America or any agency thereof that as to principal, and interest constitute direct obligations of or are guaranteed by the United States of America and that have maturity dates not more than one year from the date of acquisition, (ii)

9


 

certificates of deposit, demand deposit accounts or other deposit instruments or accounts maintained in the ordinary course of business (x) with Silicon Valley Bank, (y) with banks or trust companies organized. under the laws of the United States or any state thereof that have capital and surplus of at least $500,000,000.00 which certificates of deposit and other deposit instruments, if not payable on demand, have maturities of not more than 180 days from the date of acquisition or (z) with respect to deposit accounts for the purpose of funding ordinary course payroll obligations to the Borrower’s or its Subsidiaries’ overseas employees, with banks or trust companies organized under the laws of India or Sri Lanka known by the Borrower to be reputable for such purposes, subject to the limitation set forth in Section 6.2(b), (iii) commercial paper that, as of the date of acquisition, has the highest credit rating obtainable from Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. or Standard & Poor’s, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. or their successors, and in each case maturing not more than 270 days from the date of acquisition, and (iv) any repurchase agreement secured by any one or more of the foregoing.
      Reimbursement Obligation. The Obligation of the Borrower to reimburse the Lender on account of any drawing under any Letter of Credit as provided in Section 2A.2
      Responsible Officer. The chief financial officer of the Borrower and any other officer of the Borrower designated by the chief financial officer to sign Borrowing Base Reports and Notices of Borrowing.
      Restricted Payment. Any dividend, distribution, loan, advance, guaranty, extension of credit or other payment (whether in cash, securities or other property) to or for the benefit of any Person who holds an equity interest in the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, whether or not such interest is evidenced by a security, and any other payment, whether in cash, securities or other property, on account of the purchase, redemption, retirement, acquisition, cancellation or termination of any capital stock of the Borrower or any of its subsidiaries, whether now or hereafter outstanding, or of any options, warrants or similar rights to purchase such capital stock or any security convertible into or exchangeable for such capital stock.
      Revolving Credit Commitment. The maximum dollar amount of credit which the Lender has agreed to loan to the Borrower as Revolving Credit Loans or make available to the Borrower pursuant to Letters of Credit upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement, initially $3,000,000.00, as the Lender’s Revolving Credit Commitment may be modified pursuant hereto and in effect from time to time. A portion of the Revolving Credit Commitment up to the Letter of Credit Sublimit shall be available to Borrower for issuance of Letters of Credit.
      Revolving Credit Loans. See Section 2.1(a).
      Revolving Credit Maturity Date. September 30, 2007.
      Revolving Credit Outstandings. At any time, the outstanding principal balance of Revolving Credit Loans.

10


 

      Security Documents. A security agreement, a negative pledge agreement with respect to intellectual property of the Borrower and the Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement the Pledge Agreement, and any subsequent pledge or security agreements granted by Borrower to Lender, each in favor of the Lender to secure Obligations, in each case as amended and/or restated and in effect from time to time, and any additional documents evidencing or perfecting the Lender’s lien on the Collateral.
      Subsidiary. With respect to any Person, any corporation, association, joint stock company, business trust, partnership, limited liability company or other similar organization of which more than 50.0% of the ordinary voting power for the election of a majority of the members of the board of directors or other governing body of such entity is held or controlled by such Person or a Subsidiary of such Person; or any other such organization the management of which is directly or indirectly controlled by such Person or a Subsidiary of such Person through the exercise of voting power or otherwise; or any joint venture, whether incorporated or not, in which such Person has more than a 50.0% ownership interest.
      Total Revolving Credit Outstandings. At any time, the sum of (i) The aggregate outstanding principal balance of Revolving Credit Loans and (ii) The Maximum Drawing Amount of Letters of Credit at such time.
     1.2. Rules of Interpretation.
     (a) All terms of an accounting or financial character used herein but not defined herein shall have the meanings assigned thereto by GAAP, as in effect from time to time, and all calculations for the purposes of Section VI hereof shall be made in accordance with GAAP; provided that if any time after the date hereof there shall occur any change in respect of GAAP from that used in the preparation of the audited financial statements referred to in Section 4.6(a) in a manner that would have a material effect on any matter which is material to Section VI, the Borrower and the Lender will, within 10 Business Days after notice from the Lender or the Borrower, as the case may be to that effect, and continue in good faith negotiations with a view towards making appropriate amendments to the provisions hereof acceptable to the Lender to reflect as narrowly possible the effect on Section VI as in effect on the date hereof; provided, further, that until such notice shall have been withdrawn or the relevant provisions amended in accordance herewith, Section VI shall be interpreted on the basis of GAAP as in effect and applied immediately before such change shall have become effective.
     (b) Except as otherwise specifically provided herein, reference to any document or agreement shall include such document or agreement as amended modified or supplemented and in effect from time to time in accordance with its terms and the terms of this Agreement.
     (c) The singular includes the plural and the plural includes the singular. Whenever the context may require, any pronoun shall include the corresponding masculine, feminine and neuter forms.
     (d) A reference to any Person includes its permitted successors and permitted assigns,
     (e) The words “include”, “includes” and “including” are not limiting.

11


 

     (f) The words “herein”, “hereof’, “hereunder” and words of like import shall refer to this Agreement as a whole and not to any particular section or subdivision of this Agreement.
     (g) All terms not specifically defined herein or by GAAP that arc defined in the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, shall have the meanings assigned to them in such Uniform Commercial Code.
SECTION II
DESCRIPTION OF CREDIT
     2.1. Revolving Credit Loans.
     (a) Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement, and in reliance upon the representations, warranties and covenants of the Borrower herein, the Lender agrees to make revolving credit loans (the “Revolving Credit Loans”) to the Borrower at the Borrower’s request from time to time from and after the Closing Date and prior to the Revolving Credit Maturity Date, provided that Total Revolving Credit Outstandings (after giving effect to all requested Revolving Credit Loans and Letters of Credit) shall not at any time exceed the lesser of (i) the Borrowing Base and (ii) the Revolving Credit Commitment. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the Borrower may borrow, repay, prepay and reborrow amounts, up to the limits imposed by this Section 2.1, from time to time between the Closing Date and the Revolving Credit Maturity Date upon request given to the Lender pursuant to Section 2.3. Each request for a Revolving Credit Loan hereunder shall constitute a representation and warranty by the Borrower that the conditions set forth in Sections 3.1 and 3.2 have been satisfied as of the date of such request.
     (b) The Revolving Credit Commitment shall terminate at 5:00 p.m. Boston time on the Revolving Credit Maturity Date.
     2.2. The Note.
     (a) The Revolving Credit Loans shall be evidenced by a promissory note in the form of Exhibit A hereto, dated as of the Closing Date (the “Note”).
     (b) The Borrower irrevocably authorizes the Lender to make or cause to be made, at or about the time of the Drawdown Date of any Loan or at the time of receipt of any payment of principal on the Note, an appropriate notation on its Note Record reflecting (as the case may be) the making of such Loan or the receipt of such payment. The outstanding amount of the Loans set forth on the Note Record shall be prima facie evidence of the principal amount thereof owing and unpaid to the Lender, but the failure to record, or any error in so recording, any such amount on the Lender’s Note Record shall not limit or otherwise affect the obligations of the Borrower hereunder or under the Note to make payments of principal of or interest on the Note when due.

12


 

     2.3. Notice and Manner of Borrowing. Whenever the Borrower desires to obtain a Revolving Credit Loan hereunder, the Borrower shall give the Lender a telephonic notice promptly confirmed by a written Notice of Borrowing, which notices shall be irrevocable and which must be received no later than 2:00 p.m. Boston time on the date the requested Revolving Credit Loan is to be made. Such Notice of Borrowing shall specify the effective date and amount of the Revolving Credit Loan. If the written confirmation of any telephonic notification differs in any material respect from the action taken by the Lender, the records of the Lender shall control absent manifest error. If the Lender receives a Notice of Borrowing after the time specified in subsection (a) above, such Notice shall not be effective.
     2.4. Interest Rates and Payment of Interest.
     (a) Each Revolving Credit Loan shall bear interest on the outstanding principal amount thereof at a rate per annum equal to the Prime Rate minus 0.25%, which rate shall change contemporaneously with any change in the Prime Rate. Such interest shall be payable monthly in arrears on the first Business Day of each month.
     (b) If a Default shall occur, then at the option of the Lender (i) the unpaid balance of Loans shall bear interest, to the extent permitted by law, compounded daily at an interest rate equal to 2.0% per annum above the interest rate applicable to each such Loan in effect on the day such Default occurs, until such Default is cured or waived, and (ii) the Borrower shall pay to the Lender a fee (in addition to the Letter of Credit Fee) equal to 1.0% per annum of the Maximum Drawing Amount of all Letters of Credit outstanding during the period from the occurrence of such Default until such Default is cured or waived.
     (c) All agreements between the Borrower and the Lender are hereby expressly limited so that in no contingency or event whatsoever, whether by reason of acceleration of maturity of the Obligations or otherwise, shall the amount paid or agreed to be paid to the Lender for the use or the forbearance of the Obligations exceed the maximum permissible under applicable law. As used in this Section 2.4(c), the term “applicable law” shall mean the law of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts in effect as of the date hereof provided, however, that in the event there is a change in the law which results in a higher permissible rate of interest, then the Loan Documents shall be governed by such new law as of its effective date. In this regard, it is expressly agreed that it is the intent of Borrower and the Lender in the execution, delivery and acceptance of the Loan Documents to contract in strict compliance with the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts from time to time in effect. If, under or from. any circumstances whatsoever, fulfillment of any provision of any of the Loan Documents at the time of performance of such provision shall be due, shall involve transcending the limit of such validity prescribed by applicable law, then the obligation, to be fulfilled shall automatically be reduced to the limits of such validity, and if under or from any circumstances whatsoever the Lenders should ever receive as interest an amount which would exceed the highest lawful rate, such amount which would be excessive interest shall be applied to the reduction of the principal balance of the Obligations and not to payment of interest. This provision shall control every other provision of all Loan Documents.

13


 

     2.5. Fees and Charges.
     (a) The Borrower shall pay to the Lender an annual commitment fee (the “Commitment Fee”), computed on a daily basis and payable quarterly in arrears on the first Business Day of each quarter, equal to (i) the excess of (x) the Revolving Credit Commitment at the time (without giving effect to any Letters of Credit or requested Letters of Credit) over (y) Revolving Credit Outstandings from time to time, multiplied by (ii) 0.1667%.
     (b) The Borrower shall pay to the Lender a fee (the “Letter of Credit Fee”) at a rate per annum equal to (i) the face amount of each outstanding Letter of Credit multiplied by (ii) 1.25% with respect to Letters of Credit which are not expressly cash-secured. The Letter of Credit Fee shall be 1.0% per annum with respect to any Letters of Credit which are expressly and fully secured by a pledge of cash on deposit with Citizens. The Letter of Credit Fee shall be paid quarterly in arrears on the first Business Day of each quarter. The Borrower shall also pay to the Lender on demand standard documentation charges for the issuance of each Letter of Credit and the amount of any taxes, fees, charges or other costs and expenses whatsoever incurred by the Lender in connection with any Letter of Credit.
     (c) Without limiting any of the Lender’s other rights hereunder or by law, if any Loan or any portion thereof or any interest thereon or any other amount payable hereunder or under any other Loan Document is not paid within ten days after its due date, the Borrower shall pay to the Lender on demand a late payment charge equal to 5.0% of the amount of the payment due.
     (d) The Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge to its Note Record or to any deposit account which the Borrower may maintain with the Lender the interest, fees, charges, taxes and expenses provided for in this Agreement the other Loan Documents or any other document executed or delivered in connection herewith or therewith.
     2.6. Payments and Prepayments of the Loans
     (a) On the Revolving Credit Maturity Date, the Borrower shall pay in full the unpaid principal balance of all outstanding Revolving Credit Loans, together with all unpaid interest thereon and all fees and other amounts due with respect thereto,
     (b) Revolving Credit Loans may be prepaid at any time, without premium or penalty. Any such notice of prepayment shall be irrevocable. Prepayments of Revolving Credit Loans may be reborrowed to the extent provided in Section 2.1.
     (c) If at any time Revolving Credit Outstandings exceed the lesser of (i) the Borrowing Base and (ii) the Revolving Credit Commitment, the Borrower shall immediately pay the amount of any such excess to the Lender for application to the Revolving Credit Loans.
     2.7. Method of Payments
     (a) All payments by the Borrower hereunder and under any of the other Loan Documents shall be made in lawful money of the United States at the Lender’s head office or at such other location that the Lender may from time to time designate, in each case in immediately available funds, and shall he deemed to have been made only when made in compliance with this Section.

14


 

All such payments shall be made without set-off or counterclaim and free and clear of and without deduction for any taxes, levies, imposts, duties, charges, fees, deductions, withholdings, compulsory loans, restrictions or conditions of any nature now or hereafter imposed or levied by any jurisdiction or any political subdivision thereof or taxing or other authority therein unless the Borrower is compelled by law to make such deduction or withholding. If any such obligation is imposed upon the Borrower with respect to any amount payable by it hereunder or under any of the other Loan Documents, the Borrower will pay to the Lender such additional amount in United States Dollars as shall be necessary to enable the Lender to receive the same net amount which the Lender would have received on such clue date had no such obligation been imposed upon the Borrower, The Borrower will deliver promptly to the Lender certificates or other valid vouchers or other evidence of payment reasonably satisfactory to the Lender for all taxes or other charges deducted from or paid with respect to payments made by the Borrower hereunder or under such other Loan Document, The Lender may, and the Borrower hereby authorizes the Lender to, debit the amount of any payment not made by such time to the demand deposit accounts of the Borrower with the Lender or to its Note Record.
     (b) If the Revolving Credit Commitment shall have been terminated or the Obligations shall have been declared immediately due and payable pursuant to Section 8.2 all funds received from or on behalf of the Borrower (including as proceeds of Collateral) by the Lender in respect of Obligations, shall be applied by the Lender in the following manner and order: (i) first, to reimburse the Lender for any amounts payable pursuant to Sections 10.2 and 11.3 hereof; (ii) second, to the payment of Commitment Fees, Letter of Credit Fees and any other fees payable hereunder; (iii) third, to the payment of interest due on the Loans and the Reimbursement Obligations; (iv) fourth, to the payment of the outstanding principal balance of the Loans and the Reimbursement Obligations, pro rata to the outstanding principal balance of each, and to provide the Lender with cash collateral for any issued and outstanding Letters of Credit in an amount determined by Lender to be necessary to secure such Obligations; (v) fifth, to the payment of any other Obligations payable by the Borrower, pro rata to the outstanding principal balance of each; and (vi) any remaining funds shall be paid to whoever shall be entitled thereto or as a court of competent jurisdiction shall direct.
     2.8. Computation of Interest and Fees; Due Date. Interest and all fees payable hereunder shall be computed daily on the basis of a year of 360 days and paid for the actual number of days for which due. If the due date for any payment of principal is extended by operation of law, interest shall be payable for such extended time. If any payment required by this Agreement becomes due on a day that is not a Business Day such payment may be made on the next succeeding Business Day, and such extension shall be included in computing interest and fees in connection with such payment.
     2.9. Increased Costs. In case any change made after the Closing Date in any law, regulation, treaty or official directive or the interpretation or application thereof by any court or by any governmental authority charged with the administration thereof or the compliance with any guideline or request of any central bank or other governmental authority (whether or not having the force of law):

15


 

     (a) Subjects the Lender to any tax with respect to payments of principal or interest or any other amounts payable hereunder by the Borrower or otherwise with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby (except for taxes on the overall net income of the Lender imposed by the United States of America or any political subdivision thereof), or
     (b) Imposes, modifies or deems applicable any deposit insurance, reserve, special deposit or similar requirement against assets held by, or deposits in or for the account of, or loans by, the Lender, or
     (c) Imposes upon the Lender any other condition with respect to its obligations or performance under this Agreement or in respect of any Letter of Credit, and the result of any of the foregoing is to increase the cost to the Lender, reduce the income receivable by the Lender or impose any expense upon the Lender with respect to any Loans or its obligations under this Agreement or in respect of any Letter of Credit, the Lender shall notify the Borrower thereof. The Borrower agrees to pay to the Lender the amount of such increase in cost, reduction in income or additional expense as and when such cost, reduction or expense is incurred or determined, upon presentation by the Lender of a statement in the amount and setting forth in reasonable detail the Lender’s calculation thereof and the assumptions upon which such calculation was based, which statement shall be deemed true and correct absent manifest error.
     2.10. Capital Requirements. If after the date hereof the Lender determines that (i) the adoption of or change in any law, rule, regulation or guideline regarding capital requirements for banks or bank holding companies, or any change in the interpretation or application thereof (by any governmental authority charged with the administration thereof or (ii) compliance by the Lender or its parent bank holding company with any guideline, request or directive of any such entity regarding capital adequacy (whether or not having the force of law), has the effect of reducing the return on the Lender’s or such holding company’s capital as a consequence of the Lender’s Revolving Credit Commitment to make Loans hereunder or its obligations in respect of any Letter of Credit to a level below that which the Lender or such holding company could have achieved but for such adoption, change or compliance (taking into consideration the Lender’s or such holding company’s then existing policies with respect to capital adequacy and assuming the full utilization of such entity’s capital) by any amount deemed by the Lender to be material, then the Lender shall notify the Borrower thereof. The Borrower agrees to pay to the Lender the amount of such reduction of return on capital as and when such reduction is determined, payable within 90 days after presentation by the Lender of a statement in the amount and setting forth in reasonable detail the Lender’s calculation thereof and the assumptions upon which such calculation was based (which statement shall be deemed true and correct absent manifest error) unless within such 90 day period the Borrower shall have prepaid in full all Obligations to the Lender, in which event no amount shall be payable to the Lender under this Section. In determining such amount, the Lender may use any reasonable averaging and attribution methods.

16


 

SECTION 2A
LETTERS OF CREDIT
     2A.1 Issuance.
     (a) Upon the terms and subject to the conditions hereof, the Lender, in reliance upon the representations and warranties of the Borrower contained herein, agrees to issue letters of credit (the “Letters of Credit”) prior to the Revolving Credit Maturity Date for the account of the Borrower in such form as may be requested from time to time by the Borrower and agreed to by the Lender, provided that the Maximum Drawing Amount of all Letters of Credit shall not at any time exceed the Letter of Credit Sublimit (after giving effect to all requested Letters of Credit) and the sum of the outstanding amount of Revolving Credit Loans and the Maximum Drawing Amount of all Letters of Credit shall not at any time exceed the Revolving Credit Commitment; provided, further that no Letter of Credit shall have an expiration date later than the Maturity Date (unless extended beyond such date by the Lender in its sole discretion).
     (b)  The Borrower has executed and delivered to the Lender a letter of credit pledge agreement, dated June 8, 2004 (the “Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement”), in connection with a letter of credit issued in connection with the Lease (the “Lease Letter of Credit”) and has delivered to the Lender cash collateral under the Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement equal to 100% of the Maximum Drawing Amount under such Lease Letter(s) of Credit . The Lease Letter of Credit shall not be deemed to be issued under the Revolving Credit Commitment or Letter of Credit Sublimit. At least three (3) Business Days prior to the proposed issuance date of any other Letter of Credit, the Borrower shall deliver to the Lender (i) a Letter of Credit Application setting forth the Maximum Drawing Amount of all Letters of Credit (including the requested Letter Of Credit, but excluding the Lease Letter of Credit), the requested language of the requested Letter of Credit (which shall be reasonably acceptable to Lender) and such other information as the Lender shall require, and (ii) if the Letter of Credit is to be secured by cash collateral, a designation of cash collateral under the Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement equal to 100.0% of the Maximum Drawing Amount of the requested Letter of Credit. Each request for the issuance of a Letter of Credit hereunder shall constitute a representation and warranty by the Borrower that the conditions set forth in Sections 3.1 and 3.2 have been satisfied as of the date of such request.
     2A.2 Reimbursement Obligation of the Borrower . In order to induce the Lender to issue, extend and renew each Letter of Credit, the Borrower hereby agrees to reimburse or pay to the Lender, with respect to each Letter of Credit issued, extended or renewed by the Lender hereunder on each date that any draft presented under any Letter of Credit is honored by the Lender or the Lender otherwise makes payment with respect thereto, the Borrower shall pay (i) the amount paid by the Lender under or with respect to such Letter of Credit, and (ii) the amount of any taxes, fees, charges or other costs and expenses whatsoever (including standard documentation charges for the issuance of each Letter of Credit) incurred by the Lender in connection with any payment made by the Lender under, or with respect to, such Letter of Credit. Interest on any and all amounts remaining unpaid by the Borrower under this Section 2A2 at any time from the date such amounts become due and payable (whether as stated in this Section 2A.2, by acceleration or otherwise) until payment in full (whether before or after judgment) shall be payable to the Lender on demand at a rate per annum equal to 2.0% above the interest rate applicable to Revolving Credit Loans at the time in the absence of an Event of Default.

17


 

     2A.3 Letter of Credit Payments. If any draft shall be presented or other demand for payment shall be made under any Letter of Credit, the Lender shall notify the Borrower of the date and amount of the draft presented or demand for payment and of the date and time when it expects to pay such draft or honor such demand for payment. The responsibility of the Lender to the Borrower shall be only to determine that the documents (including each draft) delivered under each Letter of Credit in connection with such presentment shall be in conformity in all material respects with such Letter of Credit. Any unpaid Reimbursement Obligations with respect to Letters of Credit shall be deemed to be Revolving Credit Loans and shall be charged to Borrower’s Loan account.
     2A.4 Obligations Absolute
     (a) The Borrower’s Reimbursement Obligations shall be absolute and unconditional under any and all circumstances and irrespective of the occurrence of any Default or Event of Default or any condition precedent whatsoever or any set-off; counterclaim or defense to payment which the Borrower may have or have had against the Lender or any beneficiary of a Letter of Credit. The Borrower further agrees that the Lender shall not be responsible for, and the Borrower’s Reimbursement Obligations shall not be affected by, among other things, the validity or genuineness of documents or of any endorsements thereon, even if such documents should in fact prove to be in any or all respects invalid, fraudulent or forged, or any dispute between or among the Borrower, the beneficiary of any Letter of Credit or any financing institution or other party to which any Letter of Credit may be transferred or any claims or defenses whatsoever of the Borrower, against the beneficiary of any Letter of Credit or any such transferee.
     (b) The Lender shall not be liable for any error, omission, interruption or delay in transmission, dispatch or delivery of any message or advice, however transmitted, in connection with any Letter of Credit. The Borrower agrees that any action taken or omitted by the Lender under or in connection with each Letter of Credit and the related drafts and documents, if done in good faith, shall be binding upon the Borrower and shall not result in any liability on the part of the Lender to the Borrower.
     2A.5 Reliance by the Lender. To the extent not inconsistent with Section 2A.4, the Lender shall be entitled to rely on and shall be fully protected in relying upon, any Letter of Credit, draft, writing, resolution, notice, consent, certificate, affidavit, letter, electronic facsimile transmission, cablegram, telegram, telecopy, telex or teletype message, statement, order or other document believed by it to be genuine and correct and to have been signed, sent or made by the proper Person or Persons and upon advice and statements of legal counsel, independent accountants and other experts selected by the Lender.
SECTION III
CONDITIONS OF LOANS AND LETTERS OF CREDIT
     3.1. Conditions Precedent to Initial Loans. The obligation of the Lender to make the initial Loans and to issue the initial Letter of Credit is subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions precedent on or prior to the Closing Date:

18


 

     (a) The Lender shall have received the following agreements, documents, certificates and opinions in form and substance satisfactory to the Lender and duly executed and delivered by the parties thereto:
     (i) This Agreement;
     (ii) The Note, substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto;
     (iii) The Security Documents;
     (iv) a UCC-l Financing Statement covering the Collateral;
     (v) UCC-3 Termination Statements to terminate Encumbrances (other than Permitted Encumbrances) of Persons ether than the Lender of record against the Collateral;
     (vi) Certificates of insurance or insurance binders evidencing compliance with Section 5.3 hereof and the applicable provisions of the Security Documents;
     (vii) Borrowing Base Report as of the Closing Date;
     (viii) A certificate of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Borrower with respect to resolutions of its Board of Directors or other authorized Committee thereof, authorizing the execution and delivery of the Loan Documents and identifying the officer(s) authorized to execute, deliver and take all other actions required under this Agreement, and providing specimen signatures of such officer(s);
     (ix) The Certificate of Incorporation of the Borrower and all amendments and supplements thereto, as flied in the office of the Secretary of State of its jurisdiction of formation, certified by said Secretary of State as being a true and correct copy thereof;
     (x) The By-laws of the Borrower and all amendments and supplements thereto, certified by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Borrower as being a true and correct copy thereof;
     (xi) A certificate of the Secretary of State of the Borrower’s jurisdiction of incorporation as to legal existence and good standing of the Borrower in such state;
     (xii) A certificate of the Secretaries of State of each state in which the Borrower is doing business as to the due qualification and good standing of the Borrower as a foreign, corporation in such states;
     (xiii) An opinion addressed to the Lender from Goodwin, Procter, LLP , counsel to the Borrower;
     (xiv) A certificate of the chief financial officer of the Borrower as to the solvency of the Borrower, the accuracy of the Borrower’s representations and warranties and such other matters as the Lender may request;

19


 

     (xv) A report in substantially the form of Exhibit D hereto signed on behalf of the Borrower by its chief financial officer with respect to the financial statements required to be delivered pursuant to Section 4.6; and
     (xvi) Such other documents, instruments, opinions and certificates, and completion of such other matters, as the Lender may reasonably deem necessary or appropriate.
     (b) No litigation, arbitration, proceeding or investigation shall be pending or threatened which questions the validity or legality of the transactions contemplated by any Loan Document or seeks a restraining order, injunction or damages in connection therewith, or which, in the judgment of the Lender, might adversely affect the transactions contemplated hereby or might have a materially adverse affect on the assets, business financial condition or prospects of the Borrower.
     (c) All necessary filings and recordings against the Collateral shall have been completed and the Lender’s liens on the Collateral shall have been perfected, as contemplated by the Security Documents.
     (d) The Borrower shall have paid to the Lender all fees to be paid hereunder on or prior to the Closing Date.
     3.2. Conditions Precedent to all Loans and Letters of Credit. The obligation of the Lender to make any Loan, including the initial Loan, and to issue any Letter of Credit is further subject to the following conditions:
     (a) Receipt by the Lender of a Borrowing Base Report, together with an Accounts Receivable aging report and such other information regarding Accounts Receivable as the Lender may require, all in form and substance satisfactory to the Lender, and the Notice of Borrowing with respect to any Revolving Credit Loan or the Letter of Credit Application and Agreement with respect to any Letter of Credit;
     (b) The Borrower shall have satisfied the conditions set forth in Sections 2.1 and 2A.l hereof;
     (c) The outstanding Loans and Letters of Credit do not and, after giving effect to any requested Loan or Letter of Credit, will not exceed the limitations set forth in Sections 2.1 and 2A.1(a) hereof;
     (d) The representations and warranties contained in Section IV shall be true and accurate in all material respects on and as of the date of such Notice of Borrowing or Letter of Credit Application and on the effective date of the making of each Loan or issuance of each Letter of Credit as though made at and as of each such date (except to the extent that such representations and warranties expressly relate to an earlier date);

20


 

     (e) No Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing at the time of and immediately after the making of such requested Loan or the issuance of such requested Letter of Credit;
     (f) The resolutions referred to in Section 3.1 shall remain in full force and effect; and
     (g) No change shall have occurred in any law or regulation or interpretation thereof that, in the reasonable opinion of counsel for the Lender, would make it illegal or against the policy of any governmental agency or authority for the Lender to make Revolving Credit Loans hereunder or to issue Letters of Credit hereunder (as the case may be).
     The making of each Loan and the issuance of each Letter of Credit shall be deemed to be a representation and warranty by the Borrower on the date of the making of such Loan or the issuance of such Letter of Credit as to the accuracy of the facts referred to in subsection (c) of this Section 3.2 and of the satisfaction of all of the conditions set forth in this Section 3.2.
SECTION IV.
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES
     In order to induce the Lender to enter into this Agreement and to make Loans and to issue Letters of Credit hereunder, the Borrower represents and warrants to the Lender that except as set forth on Exhibit C attached hereto:
     4.1. Organization; Qualification; Business.
     (a) Each of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries (all of which are listed in Exhibit C attached hereto) (i) is a corporation duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of formation, (ii) has all requisite power to own its property and conduct its business as now conducted and as presently contemplated and (iii) is duly qualified and in good standing as a foreign corporation and is duly authorized to do business in each jurisdiction (all of which are listed on Exhibit C attached hereto) where the nature of its properties or business requires such qualification, except where the failure to be so qualified would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition, assets or properties of the Borrower or of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole.
     (b) Since the date of the Audited Financial Statement, the Borrower has continued to engage in substantially the same business as that in which it was then engaged and is engaged in no unrelated business.
     4.2. Corporate Authority; No Conflicts. The execution, delivery and performance of the Loan Documents and the transactions contemplated thereby are within the power and authority of’ the Borrower and have been authorized by all necessary corporate proceedings, and do not and will not (a) contravene any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or By-Laws of the Borrower or any law, rule or regulation applicable to the Borrower, (b) contravene any provision of, or constitute an event of default or event that, but for the requirement that time

21


 

elapse or notice be given, or both, would constitute an event of default under, any other agreement, instrument, order or undertaking binding on the Borrower, or (c) result in or require the imposition of any Encumbrance on any of the properties, assets or rights of the Borrower, except in favor of the Lender.
     4.3. Valid Obligations. The Loan Documents and all of their respective terms and provisions are the legal, valid and binding obligations of the Borrower, enforceable in accordance with their respective terms except as limited by bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, moratorium or other laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally, and except as the remedy of specific performance or of injunctive relief is subject to the discretion of the court before which any proceeding therefore may be brought. The Security Documents have effectively created in favor of the Lender legal, valid and enforceable security interests in the Collateral and such security interests are fully perfected first priority security interests.
     4.4. Consents or Approvals. The execution, delivery and performance of the Loan Documents and the transactions contemplated herein do not require any approval or consent of, or filing or registration with, any governmental or other agency or authority, or any other Person (including without limitation any lessor or lessee of Borrower’s properties), except under or as contemplated by the Security Documents.
     4.5. Title to Properties; Absence of Encumbrances. Each of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries has good and marketable title to all of the properties, assets and rights of every name and nature now purported to be owned by it, and good and valid leasehold title to all of the properties, assets and rights of every name and nature now purported to be leased by it, including, without limitation, such properties, assets and rights as are reflected in the Audited Financial Statements (except such properties, assets or rights as have been disposed of in the ordinary course of business since the date thereof), free from all Encumbrances except Permitted Encumbrances, and free from all defects of title that might materially adversely affect such properties, assets or rights, or Borrower’s or its Subsidiaries’ operations conducted with respect thereto, taken as a whole. All material leases under which Borrower or its Subsidiaries is the lessor or lessee are in full force and effect and there are no existing defaults or events that with the giving of notice or passage of time or both could ripen into defaults, by the Borrower or, to the Borrower’s knowledge, the lessor thereunder. No third parties possess any rights with respect to any of Borrower’s or its Subsidiaries owned or, to the Borrower’s knowledge, leased properties, the exercise of which would have a material adverse effect on the Borrower or its Subsidiaries or their respective operations, taken as a whole. All real property owned or leased by the Borrower (other than short-term residential rentals) is described in Exhibit C hereto.
     4.6. Financial Statements; Indebtedness,
     (a) The Borrower has furnished to the Lender its audited consolidated financial statements for the years ended March 31, 2006, March 31, 2005 and March 31, 2004 (the “Audited Financial Statement”). All such financial statements are prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods specified and present fairly the financial position of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries as of such dates and the results of the

22


 

operations of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries for such periods in all material respects. The Borrower has also furnished to the Lender its pro forma consolidated balance sheet as of August 31, 2006 and projections of its future consolidated results of operations, all of which were reasonable when made and continue to be reasonable at the date hereof.
     (b) At the date hereof, the Borrower has no Indebtedness or other material liabilities, debts or obligations, whether accrued, absolute, contingent or otherwise, and whether due or to become due, including, but not limited to, liabilities or obligations on account of taxes or other governmental charges, that are not set forth on the Audited Financial Statement, on Exhibit C hereto or accrued in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practices since the date of the Audited Financial Statement.
     4.7. Changes. Since the date of the Audited Financial Statement, there have been no changes in the assets, liabilities, financial, condition, business or prospects of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries (including as a result of any applicable law or governmental regulation, ruling or policy) other than changes in the ordinary course of business, the effect of which has not, in the aggregate, been materially adverse to the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole.
     4.8. Solvency. The Borrower has and, after giving effect to the Loans, will have, assets (both tangible and intangible) having a fair saleable value in excess of the amount required to pay the probable liability on its then-existing debts (whether matured or unmatured, liquidated or unliquidated, fixed or contingent); the Borrower has and will have access to adequate capital for the conduct of its business and the discharge of its debts incurred in connection therewith as such debts mature; the Borrower was not insolvent immediately prior to the making of the Loans and immediately after giving effect thereto, the Borrower will not be insolvent.
     4.9. Defaults. As of the date of this Agreement, no Default exists.
     4.10. Taxes. The Borrower and its Subsidiaries have filed all federal, state and other tax returns required to be filed, and all taxes, assessments and other governmental charges due from any of them have been fully paid, except for such taxes, assessments or charges that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and with respect to which (a) adequate reserves have been established and are being maintained in accordance with GAAP and (b) no lien has been filed to secure such taxes, assessments or charges. All such contests at the date hereof are described on Exhibit C hereto. The Borrower and its Subsidiaries have not executed any waiver that would have the effect of extending the applicable statute of limitations in respect of tax liabilities. The federal and state income tax returns of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries have not been audited or, to the best of the Borrower’s knowledge, otherwise examined by any federal or state taxing authority. The Borrower and its Subsidiaries have established on their books reserves adequate for the payment of all federal, state and other tax liabilities.
     4.11. Litigation. There is no litigation, arbitration, proceeding or investigation pending, or, to the knowledge of the Borrower’s or any Subsidiary’s officers, threatened, against the Borrower or any Subsidiary that, if adversely determined, may reasonably be expected to result in a material judgment not fully covered by insurance, may reasonably be expected to result in a

23


 

forfeiture of all or any substantial part of the property of the Borrower or its Subsidiaries, or may reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the assets, business or prospects of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole.
     4.12. Subsidiaries. All the Subsidiaries of the Borrower are listed on Exhibit C hereto. The Borrower (or any Subsidiary, if applicable) is the owner, free and clear of all Encumbrances, of all of the issued and outstanding stock or other equity interest of each Subsidiary. All shares of such stock or other equity interest held by the Borrower have been validly issued and are fully paid and nonassessable, and no rights to subscribe to any additional shares have been granted, and no options, warrants or similar rights are outstanding
     4.13. Investment Company Act. Neither the Borrower nor any of its Subsidiaries is subject to regulation under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
     4.14. Compliance. The Borrower has all necessary permits, approvals, authorizations, consents, variances, licenses, franchises, registrations and other rights and privileges (including patents, trademarks, trade names and copyrights) to allow it to own and operate its business and properties without any violation of laws, regulations, authorizations and orders of public authorities (including without limitation Environmental Laws) or the rights of others, except to the extent that any such violation would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operation of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole. The Borrower and each Subsidiary are duly authorized, qualified and licensed under, and the Borrower, its Subsidiaries and all real properties owned or leased by them are in compliance with, all applicable laws, regulations, authorizations and orders of public authorities, including, without limitation, Environmental Laws, except to the extent that any such failure to be so authorized, qualified, licensed or in compliance would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operation of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole. The Borrower and each Subsidiary have performed all obligations required to be performed by it under, and is not in default under or in violation of its Certificate of Incorporation or By-laws or any other agreement, lease, mortgage, note, bond, indenture license or other instrument or undertaking to which it is a party or by which any of it or any of its properties are bound, except for violations none of which, either individually or in the aggregate, would have any material adverse effect on the business, condition (financial or otherwise) or assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole.
     4.15. ERISA. The Borrower and its ERISA Affiliates are in compliance in all material respects with ERISA and the provisions of the Code and the regulations and published interpretations thereunder applicable to the Plans. No ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur, including by reason of the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement that when taken together with all other such ERISA Events, could reasonably be expected to result in material liability to the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates. None of the Plans had any “unfunded benefit liabilities” (within the meaning of Section 4001(a)(18) of ERISA) as of the last annual valuation dates applicable thereto.

24


 

     4.16. Environmental Matters.
     (a) The Borrower and each of its Subsidiaries are in compliance with the terms and conditions of all permits, licenses and authorizations required under any Environmental Law, and are also in compliance with all applicable orders, decrees, judgments and injunctions, issued, entered, promulgated or approved under any Environmental Law, except to the extent failure to comply would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operations of the Borrower and it Subsidiaries.
     (b) No written notice, notification, demand, request for information, citation, summons or order has been issued and is outstanding, no complaint has been filed, no penalty has been assessed and no investigation or review is pending or, to the best of the Borrower’s knowledge, threatened by any governmental or other entity (i) with respect to any alleged failure by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries to have any permit, license or authorization required in connection with the conduct of its business or to comply with any Environmental Laws, except to the extent such failure would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operations of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries or (ii) regarding the presence of any Hazardous Material at, on or under any property now or previously owned, or, to the Borrower’s knowledge, leased or used, by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or any other location to which Hazardous Materials generated or used by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries from such property had been transported or which they have been disposed of.
     (c) No material oral or written notification of a release of a Hazardous Material has been filed by or on behalf of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and no property now or previously owned, or, to the Borrowers knowledge, leased or used, by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries is listed or, to the best of the Borrower’s knowledge, proposed for listing on the National Priorities List under the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, as amended, or on any similar state list of sites requiring investigation or clean-up.
     (d) There are no Encumbrances arising under or pursuant to any Environmental Law on any of the real property or properties owned, or, to the Borrower’s knowledge, leased or used, by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and no governmental actions have been taken or, to the best of the Borrower’s knowledge, are in process which could subject any of such properties to such liens or Encumbrances or, as a result of which the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries would be required to place any notice or restriction relating to the presence of Hazardous Materials at any property owned by it in any deed to such property.
     (e) Neither the Borrower nor any of its Subsidiaries nor, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, any previous owner, tenant, occupant or user of any property owned by the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries has (i) engaged in or permitted any operations or activities upon or any use or occupancy of any owned, leased or used property, or any portion thereof, for the handling, manufacture, treatment, storage, use, generation, release, discharge, refining, dumping or disposal of any Hazardous Materials on, under, in or about such property, except to the extent commonly used in day-to-day operations of such property and in such case only in compliance in all material respects with all Environmental Laws, or (ii) transported any Hazardous Materials to, from or across such property except to the extent commonly used in day-to-day operations of such property and, in such case, in compliance in all material respects with, all Environmental

25


 

Laws; nor to the best knowledge of the Borrower have any Hazardous Materials migrated from other properties upon, about or beneath such property, nor, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, are any Hazardous Materials presently constructed, deposited, stored or otherwise located on, under, in or about such property except to the extent commonly used in day-to-day operations of such property and, in such case, in compliance in all material respects with all Environmental Laws.
     4.17. Restrictions on the Borrower . The Borrower is not party to or bound by any contract, agreement or instrument, nor subject to any charter or other corporate restriction which will, under current or foreseeable conditions, materially and adversely affect the business, property, assets, operations or conditions, financial or otherwise of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.
     4.18. Labor Relations . There is (i) no unfair labor practice complaint pending against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, threatened, before the National Labor Relations Board, and no grievance or arbitration proceeding arising out of or under any collective bargaining agreement is so pending against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, threatened, except for such complaints, grievances and arbitration proceedings which, if adversely decided, would not have a material and adverse effect on the condition (financial or otherwise), properties, business or results of operations of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, (ii) no strike, labor dispute, slowdown or stoppage pending against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries or, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, threatened against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, except for any such labor action as would not have a material and adverse effect on the condition (financial or otherwise) properties, business or results of operations of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and (iii) to the best knowledge of the Borrower, no union representation question exists with respect to the employees of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, no union organizing activities are taking place, except for any such question or activities as would not have a material and adverse effect on the condition (financial or otherwise), properties, business or results of operations of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries.
     4.19. Trade Relations . There exists no actual or, to the best knowledge of the Borrower, threatened termination, cancellation or limitation of, or any material modification or change in, the business relationship between the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries and any customer or any group of customers whose purchases, individually or in the aggregate; are material to the business of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, or with any material vendor, except in each case, where the same could not reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition, assets or properties of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole.
     4.20. Margin Rules . The Borrower does not own or have any present intention of purchasing or carrying, and no portion of any Loan shall be used for purchasing or carrying, any “margin security” or “margin stock” as such terms are used in Regulations T, U or X of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.

26


 

     4.21. Disclosure . No representation or warranty made by the Borrower in any Loan Document and no document or information furnished to the Lender by or on behalf of or at the request of the Borrower in connection with any of the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents contains any untrue statement of a material fact or omits to state any material fact necessary in order to make the statements contained therein not misleading in light of the circumstances in which they are made.
SECTION V
AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS
     The Borrower covenants that so long as any Loan, Letter of Credit or other Obligation remains outstanding or the Lender has any obligation to lend or to issue any Letter of Credit hereunder:
     5.1. Financial Statements . The Borrower shall furnish to the Lender:
     (a) As soon as available to the Borrower, but in any event within 120 days after the end of each fiscal year commencing with the fiscal year ending March 31, 2007, the Borrower’s consolidated and consolidating balance sheets as of the end of such fiscal year and related consolidated and consolidating statements of income, retained earnings and cash flow for such year, prepared in accordance with GAAP and audited and certified without qualification by the Borrower’s Accountants in the case of such consolidated statements, and certified by the chief financial officer of the Borrower in the case of such consolidating statements; and, concurrently with such financial statements, a copy of the Borrower’s Accountants management report.;
     (b) As soon as available to the Borrower, but in any event within 45 days after the end of each fiscal quarter, the Borrower’s consolidated and consolidating balance sheets as of the end of and related consolidated and consolidating statements of income, retained earnings and cash flow for, the fiscal quarter then ended and the portion of the year then ended prepared in accordance with GAAP and certified by the chief financial officer of the Borrower, except for lack of footnotes and subject to normal, recurring year-end adjustments that shall not in the aggregate be material in amount;
     (c) Concurrently with the delivery of each financial statement pursuant to subsections (a) and (b) of this Section 5.1, a covenant compliance report in substantially the form of Exhibit D hereto signed on behalf of the Borrower by its chief financial officer;
     (d) Deleted;
     (e) So long as any Loan is outstanding, as soon as available, but in any event within 20 days after the end of each month, and so long as no Loan is outstanding, as soon as available, but in any event within 30 days after the end of each fiscal quarter, a Borrowing Base Report, together with an Accounts Receivable aging report and such other information regarding Accounts Receivable as the Lender may require;

27


 

     (f) As soon as available to the Borrower, but in any event within 90 days after the beginning of each fiscal year, the Borrower’s projections for such fiscal year, prepared on a quarterly basis and including consolidated balance sheets and statements of income, retained earnings and cash flows;
     (g) Promptly after the receipt thereof by the Borrower, copies of any reports (including any so-called management letters) submitted to the Borrower by independent public accountants in connection with any annual or interim review of the accounts of’ the Borrower made by such accountants;
     (h)Deleted; and
     (i) From time to time, such other financial data and information about the Borrower or its Subsidiaries as the Lender may reasonably request.
     5.2. Conduct of Business . The Borrower and each of its Subsidiaries shall:
     (a) Duly observe and comply in all material respects with all laws, regulations, decrees, orders, judgments and valid requirements of any governmental authorities applicable to its corporate existence, rights and franchises, to the conduct of its business and to its property and assets (including without limitation all Environmental Laws and ERISA), and shall maintain and keep in full force and effect and comply in all material respects with all licenses and permits necessary to the proper conduct of its business, except where the failure to comply in any instance would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operations of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole; and
     (b) Maintain their existence (except to the extent permitted pursuant to Section 7.4) and remain or engage substantially in the same business as that in which they are now engaged and in no unrelated business.
     5.3 Maintenance and Insurance .
     (a) The Borrower and each of its Subsidiaries shall maintain their properties in good repair, working order and condition, ordinary wear and tear and damage by fire or other casualty excepted, as required for the normal conduct of their business.
     (b) The Borrower and each of its Subsidiaries shall at all times maintain liability and casualty insurance on its properties (including all Collateral) with financially sound and reputable insurers in such amounts and with such coverages, endorsements, deductibles and expiration dates as the officers of the Borrower in the exercise of their reasonable judgment deem to be adequate, as are customary in the industry for companies of established reputation engaged in the same or similar business and owning or operating similar properties and as shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Lender. The Lender shall be named as loss payee only with respect to any insurance policy in Borrower’s name, additional insured and/or mortgagee under such insurance as the Lender shall require from time to time, and the Borrower shall provide to the Lender lass payable endorsements in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Lender. In addition, the Lender shall be given thirty (30) days advance notice of any cancellation

28


 

of insurance. In the event of failure to provide and maintain insurance as herein provided, the Lender may, at its option, provide such insurance and charge the amount thereof to the Borrower as a Revolving Credit Loan. The Borrower shall furnish to the Lender certificates or other evidence satisfactory to the Lender of compliance with the foregoing insurance provisions. The Lender shall not, by the fact of approving, disapproving or accepting any such insurance, incur any liability for the form or legal sufficiency of insurance contracts, solvency of insurance companies or payment of law suits, and the Borrower hereby expressly assumes full responsibility therefore and liability, if any, thereunder.
     5.4 Taxes . The Borrower shall pay or cause to be paid all taxes, assessments or governmental charges on or against it or any of its Subsidiaries or its or their properties on or prior to the time when they become due; except for any tax, assessment or charge that is being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and with respect to which adequate reserves have been established and are being maintained in accordance with GAAP if no Encumbrance shall have been flied to secure such tax, assessment or charge.
     5.5. Inspection . The Borrower shall permit the Lender and its designees, at any reasonable time and at reasonable intervals of time, and upon reasonable notice (or if a Default shall have occurred and is continuing, at any time and without prior notice), to (i) visit and inspect the United States properties of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, (ii) examine and make copies of and take abstracts from the United States books and records of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, and (iii) discuss the affairs, finances, and accounts of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries with their appropriate officers, employees and independent accountants, all at the expense of the Borrower. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Borrower will permit reviews, at least once annually (and semi-annually until such time as Borrower has provided audited fiscal financial statements to Lender as required pursuant to Section 5.1 of this Agreement) and during any period in which Loans have remained outstanding for at least thirty (30) days, of the United States books and records of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries to be carried out at the Borrower’s expense by commercial finance examiners (whether employed by the Lender or by third parties) designated by the Lender. The Borrower shall also permit the Lender to arrange for verification of Accounts Receivable, under reasonable procedures, directly with any account debtors or by other methods.
     5.6. Maintenance of Books and Records . The Borrower shall keep adequate books and records of account, in which true and complete entries will be made reflecting all of its and its Subsidiaries’ business and financial transactions in accordance with GAAP and applicable law.
     5.7. Use of Proceeds .
     (a) The Borrower will use the proceeds of Revolving Credit Loans solely for the working capital needs of the Borrower, including the payment of the costs and expenses of the transactions contemplated hereby.
     (b) No portion of any Loan shall be used for the “purpose of purchasing or carrying” any “margin stock” or “margin security” as such terms are used in Regulations T, U and X of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, or otherwise in violation of such regulations.

29


 

     5.8. Further Assurances . At any time and from time to time the Borrower shall execute and deliver such further documents and take such further action as may reasonably be requested by the Lender to affect the purposes of the Loan Documents.
     5.9. Notification Requirements . The Borrower shall furnish to the Lender:
     (a) Promptly upon becoming aware of the existence of any condition or event that constitutes a Default, written notice thereof specifying the nature and duration, thereof and the action being or proposed to be taken with respect thereto;
     (b) Promptly upon becoming aware of any litigation or of any investigative proceedings by a governmental agency or authority commenced or threatened against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries of which they have notice, the outcome of which would or might have a materially adverse effect on the assets, business or prospects of the Borrower alone or the Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, written notice thereof and the action being or proposed to be taken with respect thereto; and
     (c) Promptly after any occurrence or after becoming aware of any condition affecting the Borrower or any Subsidiary which might constitute a material adverse change in or which might have a material adverse effect on the business, properties or condition (financial or otherwise) of the Borrower alone or the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, written notice thereof.
     5.10. ERISA Compliance and Reports .
     (a) Each Plan shall comply in all material respects with ERISA and the Code, except to the extent failure to comply in any instance would not have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operations of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole.
     (b) With respect to any Plan, the Borrower shall, or shall cause its ERISA Affiliates to furnish to the Lender promptly as soon as possible and in any event within 10 days after the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates knows that any ERISA Event has occurred or expected to occur, a statement of the chief financial officer of the Borrower describing such ERISA Event, including copies of any notice concerning such ERISA Event received from the PBGC, a plan administrator, or from a Multiemployer Plan sponsor, and the action, if any, the Borrower or such ERISA Affiliate proposes to take with respect thereto promptly after the adoption of any Pension Plan, the Borrower shall notify the Lender of such adoption.
     5.11. Environmental Compliance .
     (a) The Borrower and its Subsidiaries will comply in all material respects with all applicable Environmental Laws in all jurisdictions in which any of them operates now or in the future, and the Borrower and its Subsidiaries will comply in all material respects with all such Environmental Laws that may in the future be applicable to the Borrower’s or any Subsidiary’s business, properties and assets.

30


 

     (b) If the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall (i) receive notice that any material violation of any Environmental Law may have been committed or is about to be committed by the Borrower or any Subsidiary, (ii) receive notice that any administrative or judicial complaint or order has been filed or is about to be filed against the Borrower or any Subsidiary alleging a material violation of any Environmental Law requiring the Borrower or any Subsidiary to take any action in connection with the release of Hazardous Materials into the environment, (iii) receive any notice from a federal, state or local government agency or private party alleging that the Borrower or any Subsidiary may be liable or responsible for any material amount of costs associated with a response to or cleanup of a release of Hazardous Materials into the environment or any damages caused thereby, (iv) become aware of any investigative action or proceedings by a governmental agency or authority commenced or threatened against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries regarding any potential violation of Environmental Laws or any spill, release, discharge or disposal of any Hazardous Material or (v) notify any governmental agency or authority regarding any potential violation of Environmental Laws or any spill, release, discharge or disposal of any Hazardous Material by the Borrower or any Subsidiary, the Borrower shall promptly notify the Lender thereof (together with a copy of any such notice) and of any action being or proposed to be taken with respect thereto and thereafter shall continue to furnish to the Lender all further notices, demands, reports and other information regarding the foregoing.
     5.12. Loss or Depreciation of Collateral . The Borrower shall, notify the Lender promptly of the occurrence at any time of the following events if, individually or in the aggregate, the amount involved in connection with such events exceeds $750,000.00: (i) rejection or return of any goods or services giving rise to an Eligible Account to the extent such rejection or return is not in the ordinary course of business, (ii) repossession, loss of or damage to any goods giving rise to any Eligible Account; (iii) any request by an account debtor for credit, adjustment, set off or counterclaim of or with respect to an Eligible Account; (iv) any adjustment by the Borrower of the amount owing on an Eligible Account; (v) any goods, services or other dispute; (vi) any material delay in the Borrower’s performance of any of its obligations to any customer if the Borrower has an Eligible Account with such customer; and (vii) any other material event affecting Eligible Accounts or the value or amount thereof, including without limitation any event which would result in an Eligible Account no longer qualifying as an Eligible Account.
     5.13. Operating Accounts . Borrower shall continue to use Lender as the primary depository bank for the Borrower’s United States-based operating accounts.
SECTION VI
FINANCIAL COVENANTS
     The Borrower covenants that so long as any Loan, Letter of Credit or other Obligation remains outstanding, or the Lender has any obligation to make any Loan or issue any Letter of Credit hereunder:
     6.1. Consolidated Tangible Net Worth . The Borrower shall at all times maintain a Consolidated Tangible Net Worth of not less than (a) $45,000,000.00 as of March 31, 2006, and

31


 

(b) for each fiscal quarter thereafter, an amount equal to (i) the amount of Consolidated Tangible Net Worth required to be maintained for the preceding fiscal quarter, plus (ii) 50.0% of Consolidated Net Income for such preceding fiscal quarter (for purposes of this clause (ii), only positive Consolidated Net Income shall be included and any net losses shall be disregarded).
     6.2. Cash Requirements .
     (a) The Borrower and Virtusa Securities Corporation shall at all times maintain aggregate cash and cash equivalents in United States based accounts, or otherwise on hand in the United States, of not less than $10,000,000.00, net of any outstanding Loans or Reimbursement Obligations.
     (b) The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall at all times maintain cash and cash equivalents including both foreign-based accounts and United States-based accounts of at least $15,000,000.00.
     (c) The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall not at any time hold cash and cash equivalents in foreign-based accounts, or otherwise on hand outside the United States, in excess of $20,000,000.00.
     6.3 Maximum Net Loss . The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall not incur (i) a consolidated net loss in an amount greater than $1,250,000.00 (plus FAS123R charges) in any fiscal quarter, or (ii) a consolidated net loss in any two consecutive fiscal quarters.
     6.4. Capital Expenditures . The Borrower shall not make aggregate Capital Expenditures equal to or in excess of $7,500,000.00 during the fiscal year ending March 31, 2007 or any fiscal year thereafter.
SECTION VII
NEGATIVE COVENANTS
     The Borrower covenants that so long as any Loan, Letter of Credit or other Obligation remains outstanding or the Lender has any obligation to make any Loan or to issue any Letter of Credit hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Lender:
     7.1. Indebtedness . Neither Borrower nor Virtusa Securities Corporation shall create, incur, assume, guarantee or be or remain liable with respect to any Indebtedness other than the following:
     (a) Obligations;
     (b) Indebtedness existing as of the date of this Agreement and disclosed on Exhibit C hereto but not any increase in the principal amounts thereof nor any renewals or refinancings thereof;

32


 

     (c) Indebtedness for taxes, assessments or governmental charges to the extent that payment therefore shall at the time not be required to be made in accordance with Section 5.4;
     (d) Current trade liabilities on open account for the purchase price of services, materials and supplies incurred by the Borrower in the ordinary course of business (not as a result of borrowing), so long as all of such open account Indebtedness shall be promptly paid and discharged when due or in conformity with customary trade terms and practices, except for any such open account Indebtedness which is being contested in good faith by the Borrower, as to which adequate reserves required by GAAP have been established and are being maintained and as to which no Encumbrance has been placed on any property of the Borrower;
     (e) Intentionally Omitted;
     (f) Other Indebtedness incurred in the ordinary course of business and renewals and refinancings thereof, provided that such Indebtedness does not exceed $1,000,000.00 in the aggregate at any time outstanding; and
     (g) Guarantees permitted under Section 7.2 hereof.
     7.2. Contingent Liabilities . Neither the Borrower nor Virtusa Securities Corporation shall create, incur, assume, guarantee or be or remain liable with respect to any Guarantees other than (i) Guarantees existing on the date of this Agreement and disclosed on Exhibit C hereto, (ii) Guarantees resulting from the endorsement of negotiable instruments for deposit or collection in the ordinary course of business, (iii) Guarantees in an amount not to exceed $1,000,000.00 in the aggregate at any time outstanding, and (iv) Guarantees of employee loans and obligations in an amount not to exceed $1,000,000.00 in the aggregate at any time outstanding.
     7.3. Encumbrances . Neither the Borrower nor Virtusa Securities Corporation shall create, incur, assume or suffer to exist any mortgage, pledge, security interest, lien or other charge or encumbrance of any kind, including the lien or retained security title of a conditional vendor, upon or with respect to any of its property or assets (“Encumbrances”), or assign or otherwise convey any right to receive income, including the sale or discount of Accounts Receivable with or without recourse, except the following (“Permitted Encumbrances”):
     (a) Encumbrances in favor of the Lender to secure Obligations;
     (b) Encumbrances existing as of the date of this Agreement and disclosed in Exhibit C hereto;
     (c) Intentionally Omitted;
     (d) Encumbrances securing Indebtedness to the extent such Indebtedness is permitted by Section 7.1(f);
     (e) Liens for taxes, fees, assessments and other governmental charges to the extent that payment of the same may be postponed or is not required in accordance with the provisions of Section 5.4;

33


 

     (f) Landlords’ and lessors’ liens in respect of rent not in default or liens in respect of pledges or deposits under workmen’s compensation, unemployment insurance, social security laws, or similar legislation (other than ERISA) or in connection with appeal and similar bonds incidental to litigation; mechanics’, warehouseman’s, laborers’ and materialmen’s and similar liens, if the obligations secured by such liens are not then delinquent; liens securing the performance of bids, tenders, contracts (other than for the payment of money); and liens securing statutory obligations or surety, indemnity, performance or other similar bonds incidental to the conduct of the borrower’s or a Subsidiary’s business in the ordinary course and that do not in the aggregate materially detract from the value of its property or materially impair the use thereof in the operation of its business;
     (g) Judgment liens securing judgments that (i) are not fully covered by insurance, and (ii) shall not have been in existence for a period longer than 30 days after the creation thereof or, if a stay of execution shall have been obtained, for a period longer than 30 days after the expiration of such stay;
     (h) Rights of lessors under capital leases to the extent such capital leases are permitted hereunder;
     (i) Easements, rights of way, restrictions and other similar charges or Encumbrances relating to real property and not interfering in a material way with the ordinary conduct of the Borrower’s business; and
     (j) Liens constituting a renewal, extension or replacement of any Permitted Encumbrance.
     7.4. Merger: Purchase. Sale or Lease of Assets; Reorganization; Liquidation .
     (a) The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall not:
          (i) Acquire the capital stock or other equity interests or all or substantially all of the assets of another Person, whether or not involving a merger or consolidation with such other Person, unless (w) such other Person is in substantially the same field of business as the Borrower and substantially all of the assets acquired in such acquisition are used or useful to the business of the Borrower by the Borrower, (x) the total purchase price far any single acquisition does not exceed $4,000,000.00 (unless a greater amount is consented to by the Lender), (y) if a merger, the Borrower or one of its Subsidiaries is the survivor of such merger and (z) both immediately before and after giving effect to such acquisition, no Default shall exist;
          (ii) Merge or consolidate into or with any other Person, or commence a reorganization, other than (x) a merger of any Subsidiary with and into the Borrower, with the Borrower as the survivor of such merger, (y) a merger or consolidation into or with another Person, or a reorganization, in each case, where the holders of more than 50.0% of the ordinary voting power for the election of a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Borrower prior to such transaction retain such power after the transaction, or (z) a merger permitted by Section 7.4(a)(i) above; or

34


 

          (iii) Liquidate or dissolve, except that any wholly-owned Subsidiary may liquidate or dissolve.
     (b) The Borrower shall not sell, lease (as lessor) or otherwise dispose of any assets or properties, other than sales of Qualified investments and inventory and obsolete or worn out equipment, in each case in the ordinary course of business and consistent with past practices.
     7.5. Subsidiaries . The Borrower shall not permit any of its Subsidiaries to issue any additional shares of its capital stock or other equity securities, any options therefore or any securities convertible thereto, other than to the Borrower. Neither the Borrower nor any of its Subsidiaries shall sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of the capital stock or other equity securities of a Subsidiary, except to the Borrower or any of its wholly-owned subsidiaries.
     7.6. Restricted Payments . The Borrower shall not pay, make, declare or authorize any Restricted Payment other than:
     (a) Compensation paid to employees, officers and directors in the ordinary course of business and consistent with prudent business practices;
     (b) Dividends payable solely in common stock;
     (c) Dividends paid by any Subsidiary to the Borrower; and
     (d) Redemptions of shares of capital stock of the Borrower which are “restricted securities” (as defined in Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933) in an amount not to exceed 5.0% of the aggregate total voting stock of the Borrower issued and outstanding on a fully diluted basis.
     7.7. Investments; Purchases of Assets . The Borrower shall not make or maintain any Investments or purchase or otherwise acquire any material amount of assets other than:
     (a) Investments existing on the date hereof in Subsidiaries;
     (b) Qualified Investments;
     (c) Capital Expenditures to the extent permitted by Section 6.4;
     (d) Normal trade credit extended in the ordinary course of business and consistent with prudent business practice;
     (e) Advances to employees for business related expenses to be incurred in the ordinary course of business and consistent with past practices in an amount not to exceed $500,000.00 in the aggregate outstanding at any one time, provided that advances to any single employee shall not exceed $50,000.00 in the aggregate;

35


 

     (f) Investments in any Subsidiary of the Borrower in the ordinary course of business or any other investment in a Subsidiary which does not exceed $10,000,000 in the aggregate; and
     (g) Loans to any Person (including employees) not in the ordinary course of business not to exceed $300,000.00 in the aggregate outstanding at any one time.
     7.8. ERISA Compliance . Neither the Borrower nor any of its ERISA Affiliates nor any Plan shall (i) engage in any Prohibited Transaction which would have a material adverse effect on the business, financial condition or operations of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole, (ii) incur any “accumulated funding deficiency” (within the meaning of Section 412(a) of the Code and Section 302 of ERISA), whether or not waived, (iii) permit to exist any material amount of “unfunded benefit liabilities” (within the meaning of Section 4001.(a)(1 8) of ERISA), (iv) terminate any Pension Plan in a manner which could result in the imposition of a lien on any property of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, (v) fail to make any required contribution to any Multiemployer Plan or (vi) completely or partially withdraw from a Multiemployer Plan if such complete or partial withdrawal will result in any material withdrawal liability under Title IV of ERISA.
     7.9. Transactions with Affiliates . Except as otherwise provided herein, the Borrower will not directly or indirectly, enter into any purchase, sale, lease or other transaction with any Affiliate except (i) transactions in the ordinary course of business on terms that are no less favorable to the Borrower than those which might be obtained at the time in a comparable arm’s length transaction with any Person who is not an Affiliate, including without limitation, any transfer pricing, service fee or similar agreements between or among Borrower and its Affiliates, (ii) employment contracts with senior management of the Borrower entered into in the ordinary course of business and consistent with prudent business practices and (iii) for the avoidance of doubt, transactions relating to Restricted Payments permitted under Section 7.6. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Borrower will not directly or indirectly, pay any management, consulting, overhead, indemnity, guarantee or other similar fee or charge to any Affiliate; and
     7.10. Fiscal Year . The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall not change their March 31 fiscal year ends without the prior written consent of the Lender.
SECTION VIII
DEFAULTS
     8.1. Events of Default . There shall be an Event of Default hereunder if any of the following events occurs:
     (a) The Borrower or any Subsidiary shall fail to pay any principal of any Loan, any Reimbursement Obligation or any interest, fees or other amounts owing by it under any Loan Document or in respect of any Obligation when the same shall become due and payable, whether at maturity or at any accelerated date of maturity or at any other date fixed for payment; or

36


 

     (b) The Borrower or any Subsidiary shall fail to perform or comply with any term., covenant or agreement applicable to it contained in Sections 5.1,5.2(b), 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.9, 5.11, 6 and 7 of this Agreement; or
     (c) The Borrower or any Subsidiary shall fail to perform or comply with any term, covenant or agreement applicable to it (other than as specified in subsections 8,1(a) or (b) hereof) contained in this Agreement or any other Loan Document and such default shall continue for ten (10) Business Days; or
     (d) Any representation or warranty of the Borrower made in this Agreement or any other Loan Document or in any certificate, notice or other writing delivered hereunder or thereunder shall prove to have been false in any material respect upon the date when made or deemed to have been made; or
     (e) The Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries shall fail to pay when due (after any applicable period of grace) any amount payable (i) under any Indebtedness exceeding $500,000.00 in principal amount or (ii) under any agreement for the use a real or personal property requiring aggregate payments in excess of $500,000.00 in any twelve month period, or fail to observe or perform any term, covenant or agreement evidencing or securing such indebtedness or relating to such agreement for the use of real or personal property; or
     (f) The Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries shall (i) apply for or consent to the appointment of or the taking of possession by, a receiver, custodian, trustee, liquidator or similar official of itself or of all or a substantial part of its property, (ii) be generally not paying its debts as such debts become due, (iii) make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, (iv) commence a voluntary case under the United States Bankruptcy Code (as now or hereafter in effect), (v) take any action or commence any case or proceeding under any law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, winding-up or composition or adjustment of debts, or any other law providing for the relief of debtors, (vi) fail to contest in a timely or appropriate manner, or acquiesce in writing to, any petition filed against it in an involuntary case under the United States Bankruptcy Code or other law, or (vii) take any corporate action for the purpose of effecting any of the foregoing; or
     (g) A proceeding or case shall be commenced against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries, without the application or consent of such Borrower or such Subsidiary in any court of competent jurisdiction, seeking (i) the liquidation, reorganization, dissolution, winding up, or composition or readjustment of its debts, (ii) the appointment of a trustee, receiver, custodian, liquidator or the like of it or of all or any substantial part of its assets, or (iii) similar relief in respect of it, under any law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, winding-up or composition or adjustment of debts or any other law providing for the relief of debtors, and such proceeding or case shall continue undismissed, or unstayed and in effect, for a period of 30 days; or an order for relief shall be entered in an involuntary case under the Federal Bankruptcy Code, against the Borrower or such Subsidiary; or action under the laws of the jurisdiction of incorporation or organization of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries similar to any of the foregoing shall be taken with respect to the Borrower or such Subsidiary and shall continue unstayed and in effect for a period of 45 days; or

37


 

     (h) A judgment or order for the payment of money shall be entered against the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries by any court, or a warrant of attachment or execution or similar process shall be issued or levied against property of the Borrower or such Subsidiary, that in the aggregate exceeds $500,000.00 in value, the payment of which is not fully covered by insurance in excess of any deductibles not exceeding $50,000.00 in the aggregate, and such judgment, order, warrant or process shall continue undischarged or unstayed for 30 days; or
     (i) There shall occur a cessation of a substantial. part of the business of the Borrower for a period which materially adversely affects Borrower’s capacity to continue its business on a profitable basis; or the Borrower shall suffer the loss or revocation of any material license or permit now held or hereafter acquired which is necessary to the continued or lawful operation of its business; or Borrower shall be enjoined, restrained or in any other way prevented by a court, governmental or administrative order from conducting all or any material part of its business; or
     (j) The Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate shall fail to pay when due any material amount that they shall have become liable to pay to the PBGC or to a Plan under Title IV of ERISA, unless such liability is being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings, the Borrower or the ERISA Affiliate, as the case may be, has established and is maintaining adequate reserves in accordance with GAAP and no lien shall have been filed to secure such liability; or the PBGC shall institute proceedings under Title IV of ERISA to terminate or to cause a trustee to be appointed to administer any such Plan or Plans; or a condition shall exist by reason of which the PBGC would be entitled to obtain a decree adjudicating that any such Plan or Plans must be terminated; or
     (k) Any of the Loan Documents shall be canceled, terminated, revoked or rescinded otherwise than in accordance with the express terms thereof or with the express prior written agreement, consent or approval of the Lender, or any action at law or in equity or other legal proceeding to cancel, revoke or rescind any Loan Document shall be commenced by or on behalf of the Borrower, or any court or other governmental or regulatory authority or agency of competent jurisdiction shall make a determination that, or shall issue a judgment, order, decree or ruling to the effect that, any one or mare of the Loan Documents is illegal, invalid or unenforceable in accordance with the terms thereof, or any Encumbrance in favor of the Lender created under any of the Loan Documents shall at any time (other than by reason of the Lender relinquishing such Encumbrance) cease in any material respect to constitute a valid and, to the extent applicable, perfected Encumbrance on any material portion of the Collateral.
     8.2 Remedies . Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default described in subsections 8.1(f) and (g), immediately and automatically, and upon the occurrence of any other Event of Default, at any time thereafter while such Event of Default is continuing, at the option of the Lender and upon the Lender’s declaration:
     (a) The obligation of the Lender to make any further Loans and to issue any Letters of Credit hereunder shall terminate;

38


 

     (b) The unpaid principal amount of the Loans together with accrued interest, all Reimbursement Obligations and all other Obligations shall become immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, protest or further notice of any kind, all of which are hereby expressly waived;
     (c) The Borrower shall immediately pledge to Lender cash collateral in an amount determined by Lender to be sufficient to fully secure any Obligations of Borrower to Lender with respect to any issued Letters of Credit; and
     (d) The Lender may exercise any and all rights it has under this Agreement, the other Loan Documents or at law or in equity, and proceed to protect and enforce its rights by any action at law or in equity or by any other appropriate proceeding.
     No remedy conferred upon the Lender in the Loan Documents is intended to be exclusive of any other remedy, and each and every remedy shall be cumulative and shall be in addition to every other remedy given hereunder or now or hereafter existing at law or in equity or by statute or by any other provision of law. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing or of any of the terms and provisions of any of the Security Documents, if and when the Lender exercises remedies under the Security Documents with respect to Collateral, the Lender may, in its sole discretion, determine which items and types of Collateral to dispose of and in what order and may dispose of Collateral in any order the Lender shall select in its sole discretion, and the Borrower consents to the foregoing and waives all rights of marshalling with respect to all Collateral.
SECTION IX
ASSIGNMENT AND PARTICIPATJON
     9.1. Assignment .
     (a) Citizens shall have the right to assign at any time any portion of its Commitment hereunder and its interests in the risk relating to any Loans to other banks or financial institutions (each an “Assignee”) and to furnish from time to time to prospective Assignees copies of the Loan Documents and any information concerning the Borrower in its possession, provided that if no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, each Assignee which is not an Affiliate of Citizens or a Federal Reserve Bank shall be subject to prior approval by the Borrower (such approval not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed). Each Assignee shall execute and deliver to Citizens and the Borrower a joinder agreement. Upon the execution and delivery of such joinder agreement, (a) such Assignee shall, on the date and to the extent provided in such joinder agreement, become a “Lender” party to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents for all purposes of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents and shall have all rights and obligations of a “Lender” with a Commitment as set forth in such joinder agreement, and Citizens shall, on the date and to the extent provided in such joinder agreement, be released prospectively from its obligations hereunder and under the other Loan Documents to a corresponding extent (and, in the case of an assignment covering all of the remaining portion of Citizens’ rights and obligations under this Agreement, Citizens shall cease

39


 

to be a party hereto but shall continue to be entitled to the benefits of Section 10.3 and to any fees accrued for its account hereunder and not yet paid); (b) the assigning Lender, if it holds the Note, shall promptly surrender the Note to the Borrower for cancellation, provided that if Citizens has retained any Commitment, the Borrower shall execute and deliver to Citizens a new Note in the amount of its retained Commitment; (c) the Borrower shall issue to such Assignee a Note in the amount of such Assignee’s Commitment, dated the Closing Date or such other date as may be specified by such Assignee and otherwise completed in substantially the form of Exhibit A (d) this Agreement shall be deemed appropriately amended to reflect (i) the status of such Assignee as a party hereto and (ii) the status and rights of the Lender hereunder; and (e) the Borrower shall take such action as Citizens may reasonably request to perfect any security interests or mortgages in favor of the Lender, including any Assignee which becomes a party to this Agreement.
     (b) If the Assignee, or any Participant pursuant to Section 9.2 hereof; is organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than the United States or any state thereof: such Assignee shall execute and deliver to the Borrower, simultaneously with or prior to such Assignee’s execution and delivery of the counterpart joinder described above in Section 9.1(a), and such Participant shall execute and deliver to the Lender granting the participation, a United Stares Internal Revenue Service Form W 8EC1 or W 8BEN (or any successor form), appropriately completed, wherein such Assignee or Participant claims entitlement to complete exemption from United States Federal Withholding Tax on all interest payments hereunder and all fees payable pursuant to any of the Loan Documents, The Borrower shall not be required to pay any increased amount to any Assignee or other Lender on account of taxes to the extent such taxes would not have been payable if the Assignee or Participant had furnished one of the Forms referenced in this Section 9.1(b) unless the failure to furnish such a Form results from (i) a condition or event affecting the Borrower or an act or failure to act of the Borrower or (ii) the adoption of or change in any law, rule, regulation or guideline affecting such Assignee or Participant occurring (x) after the date on which any such Assignee executes and delivers the counterpart joinder, or (y) after the date such Assignee shall otherwise comply with the provisions of Section 9.1(a), or (z) after the date a Participant is granted its participation.
     (c) The Lender may at any time pledge all or any portion of its rights under the Loan Documents, including any portion of the Note, to any of the twelve (12) Federal Reserve Banks organized under Section 4 of the Federal Reserve Act, 12 U.S.C. Section 341. No such pledge or any enforcement thereof shall release the Lender from its obligations under any of the Loan Documents.
     9.2. Participations . The Lender shall have the right at any time and from time to time, without the consent of or notice to the Borrower, to grant participations to one or more banks or other financial institutions (each a “Participant”) in all or any part of any Loans and Letter of Credit Participations owing to the Lender and the Note held by the Lender, and shall have the right to furnish from time to time to prospective Participants copies of the Loan Documents and any information concerning the Borrower in its possession. The Lender shall retain the sole right to approve, without the consent of any Participant, any amendment, modification or waiver of any provision of the Loan Documents, provided that the documents evidencing any such participation may provide that, except with the consent of such Participant, the Lender will not

40


 

consent to (a) the reduction in or forgiveness of the stated principal of or rate of interest on or commitment fee with respect to the portion of any Loan subject to such participation, (b) the extension or postponement of any stated date fixed for payment of principal or interest or commitment fee with respect to the portion of any Loan subject to such participation, (a) the waiver or reduction of any right to indemnification o the Lender hereunder, or (d) except as otherwise permitted hereunder, the release of any Collateral. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no participation shall operate to increase the total Commitments hereunder or otherwise alter the substantive terms of this Agreement. In the event of any such sale by the Lender of participating interests to a Participant, the Lender’s obligations under this Agreement shall remain unchanged, the Lender shall remain solely responsible for the performance thereof; the Lender shall remain the holder of such Note for all purposes under this Agreement and the Borrower shall continue to deal solely and directly with the Lender in connection with the Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement.
SECTION X.
GENERAL
     10.1. Notices . Unless otherwise specified herein, all notices hereunder to any party hereto shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given when delivered by hand, or when sent by electronic facsimile transmission, or on the first Business Day after delivery to any overnight delivery service, freight pre-paid, or five (5) days after being sent by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and addressed to such party at its address indicated below:
If to the Borrower, at
2000 West Park Drive
Westborough, Massachusetts 01581
Attention: Chief Financial Officer
Facsimile: (508) 366-9901
with a copy (which shall not constitute notice) to:
Goodwin Procter
Exchange Place
Boston, Massachusetts 02109
Attention: John J. Egan III, PC.
Facsimile: (617)                     
If to the Lender, at
53 State Street, 8 th Floor
Boston, Massachusetts 02109
Attention: Sharon Stone
Facsimile: (617) 742-9548

41


 

with a copy (which shall not constitute notice) to:
Bartlett Hackett Feinberg, P.C.
155 Federal Street
Boston, Massachusetts 02110
Attention: John L. Hackett, Esq.
Facsimile: (617) 422-0200
or at any other address specified by such parry in writing.
     10.2. Expenses . Whether or not the transactions contemplated herein shall be consummated, the Borrower promises to reimburse the Lender for all reasonable out-of-pocket fees and disbursements (including all reasonable attorneys’ fees and collateral evaluation costs) incurred or expended in connection with the preparation, filing or recording, interpretation or administration of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, or any amendment, modification, approval, consent or waiver hereof or thereof, or in connection with the enforcement of any Obligations, the exercise, preservation or enforcement of any rights, remedies or options of the Lender or the satisfaction of any Obligations, or in connection with any litigation, proceeding or dispute in any way related to the credit hereunder, including, without limitation, fees and disbursements of outside legal counsel and the allocated costs of in house legal counsel, accounting, consulting, brokerage or other similar professional fees or expenses; all fees, charges (including the Lender’s per diem charges) and expenses relating to any inspections, appraisals or examinations conducted in connection with the Loans or any Collateral; and all costs and expenses relating to any attempt to inspect, verify, protect, preserve, restore, collect, sell, liquidate or otherwise dispose of or realize upon the Collateral, The amount of all such costs and expenses shall, until paid, bear interest at the rate applicable to Revolving Credit Loans and shall be an Obligation secured by the Collateral. The Borrower will pay any taxes (including any interest and penalties in respect thereof), other than the Lender’s federal and state income taxes, payable on or with respect to the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents (the Borrower hereby agreeing to indemnify the Lender with respect thereto).
     10.3. Indemnification . The Borrower agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Lender, as well as its respective shareholders, directors, officers, agents, attorneys, subsidiaries and affiliates, from and against all damages, losses, settlement payments, obligations, liabilities, claims, suits, penalties, assessments, citations, directives, demands, judgments, actions or causes of action, whether statutorily created or under the common law, all reasonable costs and expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable fees and disbursements of attorneys, experts and consultants) and all other liabilities whatsoever (including, without limitation, liabilities under Environmental Laws) which shall at any time or times be incurred, suffered, sustained or required to be paid by any such indemnified Person (except any of the foregoing which result from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of the indemnified Person) on account of or in relation to or any way in connection with any of the arrangements or transactions contemplated by, associated with or ancillary to this Agreement, the other Loan Documents or any other documents executed or delivered in connection herewith or therewith, all as the same may be amended from time to time, or with respect to any Letters of Credit, whether or not all or part of

42


 

the transactions contemplated by, associated with or ancillary to this Agreement, any of the other Loan Documents or any such other documents are ultimately consummated. In any investigation, proceeding or litigation, or the preparation therefore, the Lender shall select its own counsel and, in addition to the foregoing indemnity, the Borrower agrees to pay promptly the reasonable fees and expenses of such counsel. In the event of the commencement of any such proceeding or litigation, the Borrower shall be entitled to participate in such proceeding or litigation with counsel of its choice at its own expense, provided that such counsel shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Lender. The Borrower authorizes the Lender to charge any deposit account or Note Record which it may maintain with any of them for any of the foregoing. The covenants of this Section 10.3 shall survive payment or satisfaction of payment of all amounts owing with respect to the Note, any other Loan Document or any other Obligation.
     10.4. Survival of Covenants. Etc . All covenants, agreements, representations and warranties made herein, in the other Loan Documents or in any documents or other papers delivered by or on behalf of the Borrower pursuant hereto or thereto shall be deemed to have been relied upon by the Lender, notwithstanding any investigation heretofore or hereafter made by it, and shall survive the making by the Lender of the Loans as herein contemplated and the termination of the Commitment, and shall continue in full force and effect so long as any Obligation remains outstanding and unpaid or the Lender has any obligation to make any Loans hereunder or has any obligation to issue any Letter of Credit. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the provisions of Sections 10.2 and 10.3 shall continue in full force and effect after the payment in full of all Obligations. All statements contained in any certificate or other writing delivered by or on behalf of the Borrower pursuant hereto or the other Loan Documents or in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby shall constitute representations and warranties by the Borrower hereunder.
     10.5. Set-Off . Regardless of the adequacy of any Collateral or other means of obtaining repayment of the Obligations, any deposits, balances or other sums credited by or due from the head office of the Lender or any of its branch offices to the Borrower may, at any time and from time to time without notice to the Borrower or compliance with any other condition precedent now or hereafter imposed by statute, rule of law, or otherwise (all of which are hereby expressly waived) be set off, appropriated, and applied by the Lender against any and all Obligations of the Borrower in such manner as the head office of the Lender or any of its branch offices in its sole discretion may determine, and the Borrower hereby grants the Lender a continuing security interest in such deposits, balances or other sums for the payment and performance of all such Obligations.
     ANY AND ALL RIGHTS TO REQUIRE THE LENDER TO EXERCISE ITS RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY OTHER COLLATERAL, WHICH SECURES THE OBLIGATIONS, PRIOR TO EXERCISING ITS RIGHTS OF SETOFF WITH RESPECT TO SUCH DEPOSITS, BALANCES, OTHER SUMS AND PROPERTY OF THE BORROWER ARE HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVED.
     10.6. No Waivers . No failure or delay by the Lender in exercising any right, power or privilege hereunder, under the Note or under any other Loan Document shall operate as a waiver

43


 

thereof; nor shall any single or partial exercise thereof preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. No waiver shall extend to or affect any Obligation not expressly waived or impair any right consequent thereon. No course of dealing or omission on the part of the Lender in exercising any right shall operate as a waiver thereof or otherwise be prejudicial thereto. No notice to or demand upon the Borrower shall entitle the Borrower to other or further notice or demand in similar or other circumstances. The rights and remedies herein and in the Note and the other Loan Documents are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies otherwise provided by agreement or law.
     10.7. Amendments, Waivers, etc . Neither this Agreement nor the Note nor any other Loan Document nor any provision hereof or thereof may be amended, waived, discharged or terminated except by a written instrument signed by the Lender and also, in the case of amendments, by the Borrower.
     10.8. Binding Effect of Agreement . This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Borrower, the Lender and their respective successors and assignees provided that the Borrower may not assign or transfer its rights or obligations hereunder.
     10.9. Lost Note, Etc . Upon receipt of an affidavit of an officer of the Lender as to the loss, theft, destruction or mutilation of the Note or any Security Document which is not a public record and, in the case of any such loss, theft, destruction or mutilation, upon cancellation of such Note or Security Deposit, if available, the Borrower will issue, in lieu thereof, a replacement Note or other Security Document in the same principal amount thereof and otherwise of like tenor.
     10.10. Captions; Counterparts . The captions in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only and shall not define or limit the provisions hereof. This Agreement and any amendment hereof may be executed in several counterparts and by each party on a separate counterpart, each of which when so executed and delivered shall be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one instrument. In proving this Agreement it shall not be necessary to produce or account for mare than one such counterpart signed by the party against whom enforcement is sought.
     10.11. Entire Agreement. Etc . The Loan Documents and any other documents executed in connection herewith or therewith express the entire understanding of the parties with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby and supersede all prior agreements with respect to the subject matter hereof.
     10.12. Waiver of Jury Trial . EACH OF THE BORROWER, THE LENDER HEREBY WAIVES ITS RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL WITH RESPECT TO ANY ACTION OR CLAIM ARISING OUT OF ANY DISPUTE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, THE NOTES OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS, ANY RIGHTS OR OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER OR THEREUNDER OR THE PERFORMANCE OF SUCH RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OR ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS (WHETHER VERBAL OR WRITTEN) OR ACTIONS OF ANY PARTY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE

44


 

OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS OR ACTIONS OF THE LENDER RELATING TO THE ADMIMSTRATION OR ENFORCEMENT OF THE LOANS AND THE LOAN DOCUMENTS, AND AGREES THAT IT WILL NOT SEEK TO CONSOLIDATE ANY SUCH ACTION WITH ANY OTHER ACTION IN WHICH A JURY TRIAL CANNOT BE OR HAS NOT BEEN WAIVED. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, EACH OF THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER HEREBY WAIVES ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER IN ANY LITIGATION REFERRED TO IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCE ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES OTHER THAN, OR IN ADDITION TO, ACTUAL DAMAGES. THE BORROWER (a) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF THE LENDER HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT THE LENDER WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVERS AND (b) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE LENDER HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT AND THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS TO WHICH EACH IS A PARTY BECAUSE OF, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE BORROWER’S WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS CONTAINED HEREIN.
     10.13. Governing Law; Jurisdiction; Venue . THIS AGREEMENT AND EACH OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS ARE CONTRACTS UNDER THE LAWS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS AND SHALL FOR ALL PURPOSES BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF SAID COMMONWEALTH (EXCLUDING THE LAWS APPLICABLE TO CONFLICTS OR CHOICE OF LAW). THE BORROWER CONSENTS TO THE JURISDICTION OF ANY OF THE FEDERAL OR STATE COURTS LOCATED IN SUFFOLK COUNTY IN THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS TN CONNECTION WITH ANY SUIT TO ENFORCE THE RIGHTS OF THE LENDER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS AND CONSENTS TO SERVICE OP PROCESS IN ANY SUCH SUIT BEING MADE UPON THE BORROWER BY MAIL AT THE BORROWER’S ADDRESS SET FORTH HEREIN. THE BORROWER IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY OBJECTION IN WHICH IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE TO THE LAYING OF VENUE OF ANY SUCH ACTION BROUGHT IN THE COURTS REFERRED TO IN THIS SECTION AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVES AND AGREES NOT TO PLEAD OR CLAIM IN ANY SUCH ACTION THAT SUCH ACTION HAS BEEN BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM.
     10.14 Severability . The provisions of this Agreement are severable and if any one clause or provision hereof shall be held invalid or unenforceable in whole or in part in any jurisdiction, then such invalidity or unenforceability shall affect only such clause or provision, or part thereof, in such jurisdiction, and shall not in any manner affect such clause or provision in any other jurisdiction, or any other clause or provision of this Agreement in any jurisdiction.
     10.15. Amendment and Restatement . This Agreement has been given by Borrower to Bank to amend and restate the terms of a certain Credit Agreement dated June 23,2004 between Borrower and Citizens (the “Original Agreement”). The Borrower does not intend for the amendment and restatement of the Original Agreement by this Agreement to constitute, nor shall

45


 

it be deemed to constitute, a novation or extinguishment of the obligations of Borrower evidenced by the Original Agreement and this Agreement shall in no event impair, limit, reduce or otherwise discharge the liability of Borrower under the Original Agreement provided that the Bank and the Borrower hereby agree that from and after the date hereof all such liability shall be evidenced by and governed by the terms of this Agreement.

46


 

          IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have duly executed this Credit Agreement under seal as of’ the date first above written.
                 
WITNESS       VIRTUSA CORPORATION    
 
               
/s/ Charles Speicher
 
Charles Speicher
      By:   /s/ Kris Canekeratne
 
Chairman and Chief
   
Corporate Controller
          Executive Officer    
 
               
        CITIZENS BANK    
 
               
 
 
      By:   /s/ Sharon A. Stone
 
Sharon A. Stone
   
 
          Senior Vice President    

47


 

AMENDED AND RESTATED
REVOLVING CREDIT NOTE
$3,000,000.00   September 29, 2006
     FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned (the “Borrower”) absolutely and unconditionally promises to pay to the order of CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS (“Payee”) at 53 State Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02109:
     (a) on the Revolving Credit Maturity Date, the principal amount of THREE MILLION DOLLARS ($3,000,000.00) or, if less, the aggregate unpaid principal amount of Revolving Credit Loans and Reimbursement Obligations owing to the Payee pursuant to the Credit Agreement of even date herewith, as amended or supplemented from time to time (the “Credit Agreement”), by and among the Borrower and the Payee; and
     (b) interest on the principal balance hereof from time to time outstanding from the date hereof through and including the date on which such principal amount is paid in full, at the times and at the rates provided in the Credit Agreement.
     This Note evidences borrowings under, is subject to the terms and conditions of and has been issued by the Borrower in accordance with the terms of the Credit Agreement and is the Note referred to therein. The Payee and any holder hereof is entitled to the benefits and subject to the conditions of the Credit Agreement and may enforce the agreements of the Borrower contained therein, and any holder hereof may exercise the respective remedies provided for thereby or otherwise available in respect thereof, all in accordance with the respective terms thereof, This Note is secured by the Security Documents described in the Credit Agreement.
     All capitalized terms used in this Note and not otherwise defined herein shall have the same meanings herein as in the Credit Agreement.
     The Borrower has the right in certain circumstances and the obligation under certain other circumstances to repay or prepay the whole or part of the principal of this Note on the terms and conditions specified in the Agreement.
     If any Event of Default shall occur, the entire unpaid principal amount at’ this Note and all of the unpaid interest accrued thereon may become or be declared due and payable in the manner and with the effect provided in the Credit Agreement.
     The Borrower and every endorser and guarantor of this Note or the obligation represented hereby waive presentment, demand, notice, protest and all other demands and notice in connection with the delivery, acceptance, performance, default or enforcement of this Note, assent to any extension or postponement of the time of payment or any other indulgence, to any substitution, exchange or release of collateral and to the addition or release of any other party or Person primarily or secondarily liable.

1


 

     This Note shall be deemed to take effect as a sealed instrument under the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and for au purposes shall be construed in accordance with such laws (without regard to conflicts of laws rules).
     This Note has been given by Borrower to Bank to amend and restate the terms of a certain Revolving Credit Note dated as of June 23, 2004 by Borrower to Lender (the “Original Note”). The Borrower does not intend for the amendment and restatement of the Original Note by this Note to constitute, nor shall it be deemed to constitute, a novation or extinguishment of the obligations of Borrower evidenced by the Original Note and this Note shall in no event impair, limit, reduce or otherwise discharge the liability of Borrower under the Original Note provided that the Bank and the Borrower hereby agree that from and after the date hereof all such liability shall be evidenced by and governed by the terms of this Note
     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Borrower has caused this Note to be signed under seal by its duly authorized officer as of the day and year first above written.
                 
WITNESS       VIRTUSA CORPORATION    
 
               
/s/ Paul D. Tutun
 
      By:   /s/ Thomas Holler
 
   

2


 

AMENDED AND RESTATED SECURITY AGREEMENT
     This AMENDED AND RESTATED SECURITY AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is made as of September 29, 2006 and is given to amend and restate the terms and conditions of and to confirm the grant of security interest granted by VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Delaware and having its chief executive office at 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (the “Borrower”), to CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, a Massachusetts bank having a banking office at 28 State Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (the “Lender”) in that certain Security agreement dated June 23, 2004 (the “Original Agreement”).
     The Borrower has requested the Lender to enter into a certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement of even date herewith (as the same may be amended, modified, supplemented, extended or restated from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”) and to make loans and other credits to the Borrower upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth therein.
     Lender has required as a condition precedent to its entering the Credit Agreement that the Borrower execute and deliver this Agreement and to grant the security interests referenced herein and confirm its grant of security interests made in the Original Agreement.
     In order to induce the Lender to enter into the Credit Agreement and to make or continue to make available to the Borrower loans and other extensions of credit upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth therein, and in consideration thereof, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the Borrower agrees as follows:
     Section 1. Definitions . All capitalized terms used herein or in any certificate, report or other document delivered pursuant hereto shall have the meanings assigned to them below or in the Credit Agreement (unless otherwise defined). Except as otherwise defined, terms defined in the Uniform Commercial Code and used herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Uniform Commercial Code; provided, however, that the term “instrument” shall be such term as defined in Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code rather than Article 3 of the Uniform Commercial Code.
      Accounts . All rights of the Borrower to payment of monetary obligation (i) for property that has been or is to be sold, leased, licensed, assigned, or otherwise disposed of, (ii) for services rendered or to be rendered, (iii) for a secondary obligation incurred or to be incurred, or (iv) arising out of the use of credit or charge card or information contained on or for use with the card; and all sums of money and other proceeds due or becoming due thereon, all notes, bills, drafts, acceptances, instruments, documents and other debts, obligations and liabilities, in whatever form, owing to the Borrower’s rights pertaining to and interest in such property, including the right of stoppage in transit, replevin or reclamation; all chattel paper; all amounts due from Affiliates of the Borrower; all insurance proceeds; all other rights and claims to the payment of money, under contracts or otherwise; and all other property constituting “accounts” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code.

1


 

      Collateral . All personal and fixture property belonging to the Borrower or in which the Borrower has any rights, of every kind and description, tangible and intangible, whether now owned or existing or hereafter arising or acquired; including, without limitation, all Accounts, Equipment, General Intangibles, Inventory and Investment Property, together with all goods, instruments (including promissory notes) documents of title, policies and certificates of insurance, commercial tort claims, chattel paper (whether tangible or electronic), deposit accounts, letter of credit rights (whether or not the letter of credit is evidenced by a writing) and other property owned by the Borrower or in which the Borrower has an interest and including, without limitation, any cash that is now or may hereafter be in the possession, custody, or control of the Lender or its participants or assigns for any purpose; any and all additions, substitutions, replacements and accessions to foregoing and all supporting obligations relating to the forgoing; and all Proceeds and Property and products of any of the foregoing; but excluding all Intellectual Property.
      Encumbrance . Any mortgage, pledge, security interest, lien or other charge or encumbrance of any kind or nature (including, without limitation, the lien or retained security title of a conditional vendor) upon or with respect to any property.
      Equipment . All machinery, equipment, and fixtures, furniture, furnishings, trade fixtures, specialty tools and parts, motor vehicles and materials handling equipment of the Borrower, together with the Borrower’s interest in, and right to, any and all manuals, computer programs, data bases and other materials relating to the use, operation or structure of any of the foregoing; and all other property constituting ‘equipment’ as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code.
      General Intangibles . Except for the Intellectual Property, all rights of the Borrower under contracts to enjoy performance by others or to be entitled to enjoy rights granted by others, including without limitation any licenses; all payment intangibles; all obligations and indebtedness of any kind (other than Accounts) owning to the Borrower from whatever source arising; all contract rights; all rights of the Borrower as a bailor; all tax refunds; all right, title and interest of the Borrower in and to all software, documents, books, records, files and other information (on whatever medium recorded, and including without limitation computer programs, tapes, discs, punch cards, data processing software and related property and rights) maintained by the Borrower that reflect the conduct of the Borrower’s business, such as financial records, marketing and sales records, research and development records, and design, engineering and manufacturing records; all rights under service bureau service contracts; all computer data and the concepts and ideas on which said data is based; all data bases, all customer lists, and all other property constituting “general tangibles” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code.
      Intellectual Property . All of the following, to the extent owned by (and not licensed to) the Borrower (i) United States and foreign patents, patent applications and statutory invention registrations, including reissues, divisions, continuations, substitutions, renewals, continuations

2


 

in part, extensions and reexaminations thereof, and all improvements thereto, (ii) software, databases, copyrightable works, websites, copyrights (registered, renewed or otherwise) and registrations, renewals and applications for registration or renewal thereof, (iii) trademarks, trademark applications, service marks, service mark applications, trade dress, logos, slogans, symbols, trade names, internet domain names, brand names, product names, fictitious names, corporate names, and other source identifiers and all reissues, extensions and renewals thereof and the goodwill of the business symbolized thereby and associated therewith, (iv) trade secrets, know-how, technology, inventions and discoveries and (v) any and all right, title, and interest in and to the foregoing, including the right to sue for past, present, and future infringement, in all of such cases (i) through (v), whether used, held for use, supported, maintained, marketed or otherwise.
      Inventory . All goods, merchandise and other personal property (including warehouse receipts and other negotiable and non-negotiable documents of title covering any such property) of the Borrower that are held for sale, lease or other disposition or to be furnished under contracts of service (or that are so furnished), or for display or demonstration, or leased or consigned, or that are raw materials, piece goods, work-in-process, finished goods or supplies or other materials used or consumed or to be used or consumed in the Borrower’s business, whether in transit or in the possession of the Borrower or another, including without limitation all goods covered by purchase orders and contracts with suppliers and all goods billed and held by suppliers and goods located on the premises of any carriers, forwarding agents, truckers, warehousemen, vendors, selling agents or other third parties; all plans, drawings, diagrams, schematics, assembly and display materials relating to any of the foregoing; and all other property constituting “inventory” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code.
      Investment Property . All the securities (whether certificated or uncertificated) of the Borrower, including without limitation all stocks, bonds Treasury bills, certificates of deposits, mutual or money market fun shares, security entitlements, securities accounts, commodity contracts and commodity accounts; and all sums due or to become due on any of the foregoing, and all securities, instruments or other property purchased or acquired as a result of the investment and reinvestment thereof as hereinafter provided, and all other property constituting “investment property” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code; excluding any capital stock, or other equity interests of any Subsidiary of the Borrower.
      Perfection Certificate . A certificate signed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A .
      Proceeds . All proceeds received of and all other profits, rentals and receipts, in whatever form, or arising from any Collateral, including whatever is received or acquired upon the sale, lease, exchange, assignment, licensing or other disposition of any Collateral; whatever is received, collected on or distributed on account of any Collateral; all rights arising out of any Collateral; all claims arising out of the loss, nonconformity, interference with the use of defects or infringement of rights in, or damage to or destruction of, any Collateral; any insurance payable by reason of the loss a damage or nonconformity of, defects or infringement of rights in, or damage to or destruction of, any Collateral; any unearned premiums with respect to policies of insurance in respect of any Collateral; and condemnation or requisition payments with respect to

3


 

any Collateral; and all other property constituting “proceeds” as such term is defined in the Uniform Commercial Code; in each chase whether now or existing or hereafter arising.
      Secured Obligations . All obligations of the Borrower under or in respect of the Loan Documents.
      Security Interests The security interests and liens granted pursuant to Section 2 hereof, as well as all other security interests created or assigned as additional security for the Secured Obligations pursuant to this Agreement.
      Uniform Commercial Code The Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, provided, that if by reason of mandatory provisions of law, perfection, or the effect of perfection or non-perfection, of the Security Interests of any Collateral is governed by the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in a jurisdiction other than Massachusetts, “Uniform Commercial Code” means the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in such other jurisdiction for the purposes of the provisions hereof relating to such perfection or effect of perfection or non-perfection, as the case may be.
     Section 2. Grant .
          (a) To secure the full and punctual payment and performance of the Secured Obligations, the Borrower hereby assigns and pledges to the Lender all of its rights, title and interest in, and grants to the Lender a continuing security interest in, the Collateral of the Borrower. The Security Interests are granted as security only and shall not subject the Lender to, or transfer to the Lender or in any way affect or modify, any obligation or liability of the Borrower with respect to any of the Collateral, or any transaction in connection therewith.
          (b) Upon the execution of this Agreement, and from time to time thereafter, the Borrower shall deliver to the Lender such Uniform Commercial Code financing statements, assignments, continuation statements, amendments, instruments and notices and assignments under the Assignment of Claims Act of 1940, as amended (collectively, the “ Perfection Documents ”), as may be reasonably required for the Lender to perfect its Security Interest in all Collateral. Any such financing statements, continuation statements or amendments may be prepared and filed by the Lender at any time in any jurisdiction.
     Section 3. Representations, Warranties, and Covenants . The Borrower hereby makes the following representations and warranties, and agrees to the following covenants, each of which representations, warranties and covenants shall be continuing and in force so long as this Agreement is in effect:
     3.1 Name; Location; Changes .
          (a) The name of the Borrower set forth in Section 1(a) of the Perfection Certificate is the true and correct legal name of the Borrower, and except as otherwise disclosed to the Lender in the Perfection Certificate, the Borrower has not done business as or used any other name.

4


 

          (b) The state of organization of the Borrower set forth in section 1(d) of the Perfection Certificate is the true and correct state of organization of the Borrower and the Borrower is duly organized and in good standing in such state on the date hereof.
          (c) The address of the Borrower set forth in Section 2(a) of the Perfection Certificate is the Borrower’s chief executive office and the place where its business records are kept. Except as disclosed on the Perfection Certificate, all tangible Collateral of the Borrower other than Investment Property is located at such chief executive office, and except as disclosed on the Perfection Certificate, such Collateral has remained located at its current location for the four consecutive months immediately prior to the date hereof.
          (d) The Borrower will not change its name, identity or organizational structure, nature, or jurisdiction or organization, or chief executive office or place where its business records are kept, or move any tangible Collateral (other than Investment Property) to a location other than those set forth in the Perfection Certificate, or merge into or consolidate with any other entity, unless permitted under the Credit Agreement and unless the Borrower shall have given the Lender at least 30 days’ prior written notice thereof and the Borrower shall have delivered to the Lender or authorized Lender to file such new Uniform Commercial Code financing statements or other documentation as may be necessary or required by the Lender to ensure the continued perfection and priority of the Security Interests.
          (e) The Borrower delivered a Perfection Certificate to the Lender with the Original Agreement. All information set forth in such Perfection Certificate is true and correct in all material respects. The Borrower agrees to supplement the Perfection Certificate promptly after obtaining information which would require a correction.
          3.2. Ownership of Collateral; Absence of Liens and Restrictions . The Borrower is, and in the case of property acquired after the date hereof, will be, the sole legal and equitable owner of the Collateral, holding good and marketable title to the same free and clean of all Encumbrances except for the Security Interests and Permitted Encumbrances, and has good right and legal authority to assign, deliver, and create a security interest in such Collateral in the manner herein contemplated. The Collateral is genuine and is what it is purported to be. The Collateral is not subject to any restriction that would prohibit or restrict the assignment, delivery or creation of the security interests contemplated hereunder.
          3.3 First Priority Security Interest . This Agreement creates a valid and continuing lien on and security interest in the Collateral, and upon the filing of Uniform Commercial Code financing statements in the appropriate offices for the locations of Collateral listed in the Borrower’s Perfection Certificate, the Security Interests will be perfected (except to the extent a security interest may not be perfected by filing under the Uniform Commercial Code), prior to all other Encumbrances other than as disclosed in the Credit Agreement as Permitted Encumbrances, and is enforceable as such against creditors of the Borrower, any owner of the real property where any of the Collateral is located, any purchaser of such real property and any present or future creditor obtaining a lien on such real property.

5


 

          3.4 No Conflicts . Neither the Borrower nor any of its predecessors has performed any acts or is bound by any agreements which might prevent the lender from enforcing the Security Interest or any of the terms of this Agreement or which would limit the Lender in any such enforcement. Except as specifically disclosed in the Perfection Certificate, no financing statement under the Uniform Commercial Code of any state or other instrument evidencing a lien that names the Borrower as debtor is on file in any jurisdiction and the Borrower has not signed any such document or any agreement authorizing the filing of any such financing statement or instrument.
          3.5 Sales and Further Encumbrances . The Borrower will not sell, grant, assign or transfer any interest in, or permit to exist any Encumbrances on, any of the Collateral, except the Security Interests as permitted by the Credit Agreement.
          3.6 Fixture Conflicts: Required Waivers . The Borrower intends, to the extent not inconsistent with applicable law, that the Collateral shall remain personal property of the Borrower and shall not be deemed to be a fixture irrespective of the manner and its attachment to any real estate. The Borrower will deliver to the Lender such disclaimers, waivers or other documents as the Lender may request to confirm the foregoing, executed by each person having an interest in such real estate.
          3.7 Validity of Accounts . Each Account constituting Collateral is and, to the best of the Borrower’s knowledge, shall be a valid, legal and binding obligation of the party purported to be obligated thereon, enforceable in accordance with its terms and free of material set-offs, defenses or counterclaims. The Borrower has no knowledge of any fact that would materially impair the validity or collectibility of any of the Accounts constituting Collateral.
          3.8 Inspection; Verification of Accounts . The Borrower shall keep complete and accurate books and records relating to the Collateral, and upon request of the Lender shall stamp or otherwise mark such books and records in such manner as the Lender may reasonably request in order to reflect the Security Interest. The Borrower will allow the Lender and its designees to examine, inspect and make extracts from or copies of the Borrower’s books and records, inspect the Collateral and arrange for verification of Accounts constituting Collateral directly with any account debtors or by other methods, upon reasonable notice and under reasonable procedures established by the Lender after consultation with the Borrower.
          3.9 Collection and Delivery of Proceeds; Lockboxes .
          (a) The Borrowers will diligently collect all of its Accounts constituting Collateral until the Lender exercises its rights to collecting the Accounts pursuant to this Agreement. After the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, all Proceeds of Accounts, Inventory and other Collateral received by the Borrower, whether in the form of wire or ACH transfers, cash, checks, notes, or other instruments, shall be held in trust for the Lender and, upon request of the Lender, shall be delivered daily to the Lender, without commingling, in the identical form received (properly endorsed or assigned where required to enable the Lender to collect the same), for application to the Secured Obligations. If any Accounts are at any time evidenced by tangible chattel paper, promissory notes, trade

6


 

acceptances or other instruments, the Borrower will promptly deliver the same to the Lender appropriately endorsed to the Lender’s order and, regardless of the form of such endorsement, the Borrower hereby waives presentment, demand, notice of dishonor, protest, notice of protest, and all other notices with respect thereto.
          (b) The Borrower shall, at the request of the Lender at any time, notify account debtors, and the Lender may itself, after the occurrence and during the continuance of a Default notify account debtors directly, of the Security Interest of the Lender in any Account and that payment thereof is to be made directly to the Lender for application to the Secured Obligations.
          3.10 Insurance . The Borrower shall at all times maintain liability and casualty insurance on the Collateral with financially sound and reputable insurers in such amounts and with such coverages, endorsements, deductibles and expiration dates as the officers of the Borrower in the exercise of their reasonable judgment deem to be adequate, as are customary in the industry for companies of established reputation engaged in the same or similar business and owning or operating similar properties and as shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Lender. The Lender shall be named as loss payee, additional insured and/or mortgagee under such insurance as the Lender shall require from time to time, and the Borrower shall provide to the Lender lender’s loss payable endorsements in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Lender. In addition, the Lender shall be given thirty (30) days advance notice of any cancellation of insurance. In the event of failure to provide and maintain insurance as herein provided, the Lender may, at its option, provide such insurance and charge the amount thereof to the Borrower as a Revolving Credit Loan. The Borrower shall furnish to the Lender certificates or other evidence satisfactory to the Lender of compliance with the foregoing insurance provisions. The Lender shall not, by the fact of approving, disapproving or accepting any such insurance, incur any liability for the form or legal sufficiency of insurance contracts, solvency of insurance companies or payment of lawsuits, and the Borrower hereby expressly assumes full responsibility therefor and liability, if any, thereunder.
          3.11 Maintenance and Use Payment of Taxes . The Borrower will preserve, protect and keep the Collateral in good order and repair, ordinary wear and tear and damage by fire or other casualty excepted, will not use the same in violation of law or any policy of insurance thereon, and will pay promptly when due all taxes and assessments on such Collateral or on its use or operation, except as otherwise permitted by the Credit Agreement.
          3.12 General Intangibles . The Borrower will use such measures as are appropriate to preserve its rights in its General Intangibles constituting Collateral.
          3.13 Investment Property . Until the occurrence and continuance of an Event of Default hereunder, the Borrower shall retain the right to vote any of the Investment Property constituting Collateral in a manner not inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement and the Credit Agreement. If the Borrower, as registered holder of such Investment Property, receives (i) any dividend, or other distribution in cash or other property in connection with the liquidation or dissolution of the issuer of such Investment Property, or in connection with the redemption or payment of such Investment Property, or (ii) any stock certificate, option or right, or other distribution, whether as an addition to, in substitution of, or in exchange for, such Investment

7


 

Property, or otherwise, the Borrower agrees to accept the same in trust for the Lender and to deliver the same forthwith to the Lender or its designee, in the exact form received, with the Borrower’s endorsement or reassignment when necessary, to be held by the Lender as Collateral. After the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, upon request of the Lender, the Borrower will (i) deliver all of its Investment Property constituting Collateral and represented by certificates, including without limitation all stock of its Subsidiaries, to the Lender to hold pursuant to the terms of this Agreement (ii) register in the name of the Lender or its designee any uncertificated Investment Property constituting Collateral or the Lender’s security interest therein on the books maintained by or on behalf of the issuer thereof or the depository therefore and (iii) do all things necessary or desirable, as determined by the Lender, to transfer control over any Investment Property to the Lender including, but not limited to, registering the Lender as the holder of the securities entitlement or commodities contract as appropriate, and entering into any control agreement, in form designated by the Lender, pursuant to which the securities intermediary shall agree that it will comply with the entitlement orders originated by the Lender without further consent of the Borrower, and entering into any control agreement, in form designated by the Lender, pursuant to which the commodity intermediary shall agree that it will apply any value distributed on account of any commodity contract as direct by the Lender without further consent by the Borrower.
          3.14 Electronic Chattel Paper and Transferable Records : For any interest in an electronic chattel paper or any “transferable record,” as that term is defined in Section 201 of the federal electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, or in Section 16 of the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act as in effect in any jurisdiction applicable to the Borrower, any Collateral or any transaction contemplated hereby, the Borrower shall take such action as the Lender may reasonably request to vest in the Lender control under Section 9-105 of the Uniform Commercial Code of such electronic chattel paper or control under Section 201 of the Federal Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act or, as the case may be, Section 16 of the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act of such transferable record. The Lender agrees that it will arrange, pursuant to procedures satisfactory to the Lender, so long as such procedures will not result in the Lender’s loss of control, for the Borrower to make alterations to the electronic chattel paper or transferable record permitted under Section 9-105 of the Uniform Commercial Code or, as the case may be, Section 201 of the Federal Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act or Section 16 of the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act for a party in control to make without loss of control, unless an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing or would occur after taking into account any action by the Borrower with respect to such electronic chattel paper or transferable record.
          3.15 Bailments, Etc . If any Collateral is at any time in the possession or control of any warehouseman, bailee or any of the Borrower’s agents or processors, the Borrower shall, upon request of the Lender, (i) notify such warehouseman, bailee, agent or processor of the Security Interest and instruct such warehouseman, bailee, agent or processor to hold all such Collateral for the Lender’s account subject to the Lender’s instructions, (ii) arrange for such warehouseman, bailee, agent or processor to authenticate a record acknowledging that it holds possession of the Collateral for the Lender’s benefit, (iii) deliver any negotiable warehouse receipt, bill of lading or other document of title issued with regard to the Collateral to the Lender appropriately endorsed to the Lender’s order, and (iv) arrange for the issuance in the name of the

8


 

Lender, in form reasonably satisfactory to the Lender, any nonnegotiable document of title covering such Collateral.
          3.16 Assignment of Claims Act . If at any time any Accounts of the Borrower arise from contracts with the United States of America or any department, agency or instrumentality thereof, the Borrower shall execute all assignments and take all steps reasonably requested by the Lender in order that all monies due to become due thereunder will be assigned and paid to the Lender under the Assignment of Claims Act of 1940.
          3.17 Notes and Instruments . If at any time any amount payable under or in connection with any of the Collateral is evidenced by any promissory note or other instrument, such note or instrument shall be promptly delivered to the Lender, duly endorsed in a manner satisfactory to the Lender.
          3.18 Further Assurances . Upon the reasonable request of the Lender, and the sole expense of the Borrower, the Borrower will promptly execute and deliver such further instruments and documents and take such further actions as the Lender may deem desirable to obtain the full benefits of this Agreement and of the rights and powers herein granted, including, without limitation, filing of any financing statement, continuation statement, amendment or notice under the Uniform Commercial Code or other applicable law. The Borrower authorizes the Lender to file such financing statements without the signature of the Borrower to the extent permitted by applicable law, and to file a copy this Agreement in lieu of a financing statement, and to take any and all actions required by any earlier versions of the Uniform Commercial Code or by other law, as applicable in any relevant Uniform Commercial Code jurisdiction, or by other laws applicable in any foreign jurisdiction. The Borrower shall provide the Lender with any information the Lender shall reasonably request in connection with the foregoing, including, without limitation, the type and jurisdiction of organization of the Borrower, and any organizational identification number issued to the Borrower. The Borrower shall also take all actions requested by the Lender in order to insure the continued perfection and priority of the Lender’s security interest in any of the Collateral and of the preservation of its rights therein.
     Section 4. Notices and Reports Pertaining to Collateral . The Borrower will, with respect to the Collateral:
          (a) promptly furnish to the Lender, from time to time upon request, reports in form and detail reasonably satisfactory to the Lender;
          (b) promptly notify the Lender of any Encumbrance (except Permitted Encumbrances) asserted against the Collateral, including any attachment, levy, execution or other legal process levied against any of the Collateral, and of any information received by the Borrower relating to the Collateral, including the Accounts, the account debtors, or other persons obligated in connection therewith, that may in any way adversely affect the value of the Collateral as a whole or the rights and remedies of the Lender with respect thereto;
          (c) promptly notify the Lender when it obtains knowledge of actual or imminent bankruptcy or other insolvency proceeding of any material account debtor or issuer of Investment property;

9


 

          (d) concurrently with the reports required to be furnished under subsection (a), and immediately if material in amount, notify the lender of any return or adjustment, rejection, repossession, or loss or damage of or to merchandise represented by Accounts and of any credit, adjustment, or dispute arising in connection with the goods or services represented by Accounts or constituting Inventory;
          (e) promptly after the Borrower establishes any Account with the United States of America or any department, agency or instrumentality thereof, notify the Lender thereof;
          (f) promptly upon acquiring any commercial tort claim, notify the Lender in a writing signed by the Borrower, of the details thereof and grant to the Lender in such writing a security interest therein and in all the Proceeds thereof, such writing to be in form and substance satisfactory to the lender; and
          (g) promptly upon receipt of any letter of credit issued to the Borrower as beneficiary thereunder or upon acquiring an interest in any electronic chattel paper or any “transferable record,” as that term is defined in section 201 of the Federal Electronic Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, or in Section 16 of the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act, notify the Lender thereof.
Section 5. Lender’s Rights and Remedies in General .
          (a) So long as any Event of Default shall have occurred and is continuing: (i)the Lender may, at its option, without notice or demand, cause all of the Secured Obligations to become immediately due and payable and take immediate possession of the Collateral, and for that purpose the Lender may, so far as the Borrower can give authority therefore, enter upon any premises on which any of the Collateral is situated and remove the same therefrom or remain on such premises and in possession of such Collateral for purposes of conducting a sale or enforcing the rights of the Lender; (ii) the Borrower will, upon demand, assemble the Collateral, and make it available to the Lender at a place and time designated by the Lender that is reasonably convenient to both parties; (iii) the Lender may collect and receive all income and Proceeds in respect to any Collateral and exercise all rights of the Borrower with respect thereto; (iv) the Lender may sell, lease or otherwise dispose of any Collateral at a public or private sale, with or without having such Collateral at the place of sale, and upon such terms and in such manner as the Lender may determine, and the Lender may purchase any Collateral at any such sale. Unless such Collateral threatens to decline rapidly in value or is of the type customarily sold on a recognized market, the Lender shall send to the Borrower prior written notice (which, if given with in ten (10) days of any sale, shall be deemed to be reasonable) of the time and place of any public sale of such Collateral or of the time after which any private sale or other disposition thereof is to be made. The Borrower agrees that upon any such sale such Collateral shall be held by the purchaser free from all claims or rights of every kind and nature, including any equity of redemption or similar rights, and all such equity of redemption and similar rights are hereby expressly waived and released by the Borrower. In the event any consent, approval or

10


 

authorization of any governmental agency is necessary to effectuate any such sale, the Borrower shall execute all applications or other instruments as may be required; and (v) in any jurisdiction where the enforcement of its rights hereunder is sought, the Lender shall have, in addition to all other rights and remedies, the rights and remedies of a secured party under the Uniform Commercial Code and other applicable law.
          (b) The Lender may perform any covenant or agreement of the Borrower contained herein that the Borrower has failed to perform and in so doing the Lender may expend such sums as it may reasonably deem advisable in the performance thereof, including, without limitation, the payment of any taxes or insurance premiums, payment to obtain a release of Encumbrance or potential Encumbrance, expenditures made in defending against any adverse claim and all other expenditures which the Lender may make for the protection of Collateral or which it may be compelled to make by operation of law. All such sums and amounts so expended shall be repaid by the Borrower upon demand, shall constitute additional Secured Obligations and shall bear interest from the date said amounts are expended at the rate per annum provided in the Credit Agreement to be paid on Revolving Credit Loans after the occurrence of an Event of Default. No such performance of any covenant or agreement by the Lender on behalf of the Borrower, and no such advance or expenditure therefore, shall relieve the Borrower of any Event of Default under the terms of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents
          (c) Prior to any disposition of Collateral pursuant to this Agreement the Lender may, at its option, cause any of the Collateral to be repaired or reconditioned (but not upgraded unless mutually agreed) in such manner and to the extent as to make it saleable.
          (d) The Lender is hereby granted a license or other right to use, without charge, the Borrower’s labels, patents, copyrights, right of use of any name, trade secrets, trade names, trademarks, and advertising matter, or any property of a similar nature, relating to the Collateral, in completing production of, advertising for sale and selling any Collateral; and the Borrower’s rights under all licenses and all franchise agreements shall inure to the Lender’s benefit.
          (e) The Borrower recognizes that the Lender may be unable to effect a public sale of all or a part of the Investment Property by reason of certain prohibitions contained in the Securities Act of 1933 (as amended from time to time, the “ Securities Act ”) or the securities laws of various states (the “ Blue Sky Laws ”), but may be compelled to resort to one or more private sales to a restricted group of purchasers who will be obligated to agree, among other things, to acquire the Investment Property for their own account, for investment and not with a view to the distribution or resale thereof. The Borrower acknowledges that private sales so made may be at prices and upon other terms less favorable to the seller than if the Investment Property were sold at public sales. The Borrower agrees that the Lender has no obligation to delay sale of any of the Investment Property for the period of time necessary to permit the Investment Property to be registered for public sale under the Securities Act or the Blue Sky Laws, and that private sales made under the foregoing circumstances shall be deemed to have been made in a commercially reasonable manner.
          (f) The Lender shall be entitled to retain and to apply the Proceeds of any disposition of the Collateral, first, to its reasonable expenses provided for herein, including

11


 

attorneys’ fees and other legal expenses incurred by it in connection therewith; and second, to the payment of the Secured Obligations in such order of priority as the Lender shall determine. Any surplus remaining after such application shall be paid to the Borrower or to whomever may be legally entitled thereto, provided that in no event shall the Borrower be credited with any part of the Proceeds of the disposition of the Collateral until such Proceeds shall have been received in cash from the Lender. The Borrower shall remain liable for any deficiency.
          (g) The Borrower hereby appoints to the Lender and each of the Lender’s designees or agents as attorney-in-fact of the Borrower, irrevocably and with power of substitution, with full authority in the name of the Borrower, the Lender or otherwise, for sole use and benefit of the Lender, but at the Borrower’s expense, so long as an Event of Default is continuing, to take any and all of the actions specified above in this Section and elsewhere in this Agreement. This power of attorney is a power coupled with an interest and shall be irrevocable for so long as any of the Secured Obligations remain outstanding.
          Section 6. Lender’s Rights and Remedies with Respect to Collateral . The Lender may, at its option, at any time and from time to time after the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, without notice to or demand on the Borrower, take the following actions with respect to the Collateral:
          (a) with respect to any Accounts (i) demand, collect, and receipt of any amounts relating thereto, as the Lender may determine; (ii) commence and prosecute any actions in any court for the purposes of collection any such Accounts and enforcing any other rights in respect thereof, (iii) defend, settle, or compromise any action brought and, in connection therewith, give such discharges or releases as the Lender may deem appropriate; (iv) receive, open and dispose of mail addressed to the Borrower and endorse checks, notes, drafts, acceptances, money orders, bills of lading, warehouse receipts or other instruments or documents evidencing payment, shipment or storage of the goods giving rise to such Accounts or securing or relating to such Accounts, on behalf of and in the name of the Borrower; and (v) sell, assign, transfer, make any agreement in respect of, or otherwise deal with or exercise rights in respect of, any such Accounts or the goods or services which have given rise thereto, as fully and completely as though the Lender were the absolute owner there of for all purposes;
          (b) with respect to any Equipment and Inventory (i) make, adjust and settle claims under any insurance policy related thereto and place and pay for appropriate insurance thereon; (iii) make repairs or provide maintenance with respect thereto; and (iv) pay any necessary filing fees and any taxes arising as a consequence of any such filing. The Lender shall not thereby relieve the Borrower of its obligation to make such expenditures; and
          (c) with respect to any Investment Property (i) transfer it at any time to Lender, or to its nominee, and receive the income thereon and hold the same as Collateral hereunder or apply it to any matured Secured Obligations; and (ii) demand, sue for, collect or make any compromise or settlement it deems desirable.
          Except as otherwise provided herein, the Lender shall have no duty as to the collection or protection of any Collateral nor as to the preservation of any rights pertaining thereto, beyond the safe custody of any Collateral in its possession.

12


 

          Section 7. Set-Off . Regardless of the adequacy of any Collateral or other means of obtaining repayment of the Secured Obligations, any deposits, balances or other sums credited by or due from the head office of the Lender or any of its branch offices to the Borrower and any property of the Borrower now or hereafter in the possession, custody, safekeeping or control of the Lender or in transit to the Lender may, at any time and from time to time after the occurrence of an Event of Default, without notice to the Borrower or compliance with any other condition precedent now or hereafter imposed by statute, rule of law, or otherwise (all of which are hereby expressly waived) be set -off, appropriated and applied by the Lender against any and all Secured Obligations of the Borrower in such manner as the head office of the Lender or any of its branch offices in its sole discretion may determine, and the Borrower hereby grants the Lender a continuing security interest in such deposits, balances, other sums and property for the payment and performance of all such Secured Obligations. ANY AND ALL RIGHTS TO REQUIRE THE LENDER TO EXERCIS ITS RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WITH RESPECT TO ANY OTHER COLLATERAL WHICH SECURES THE SECURED OBLIGATIONS PRIOR TO EXERCISING ITS RIGHTS OF SETOFF WITH RESPECT TO SUCH DEPOSITS, BALANCES, OTHER SUMS AND PROPERTY OF THE BORROWER ARE HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVED.
          Section 8. Waivers . The Borrower waives presentment, demand, notice, protest, notice of acceptance of this Agreement, notice of any loans made, credit or other extensions granted, Collateral received or delivered and any other action taken in reliance hereon and all other demands and notices of any description, except for such demands and notices as are expressly required to be provided to the Borrower under this Agreement or any other Loan Document. The Borrower waives, to the fullest extent permitted by law, the benefit of all appraisement, valuation, stay, extension and redemption laws now or hereafter in force and all rights of marshaling in the event of any sale or disposition of any of the Collateral with respect to both the Secured Obligations and any Collateral. The Borrower assents to any extension or postponement of the time of payment or any other forgiveness or indulgence, to any substitution, exchange or release of Collateral, to the addition or release of any party or person primarily or secondarily liable, to the acceptance of partial payment thereon and the settlement, compromise or adjustment of any thereof, all in such manner and at such time or times as the Lender may deem advisable. The Lender may exercise its rights with respect to the Collateral without resorting, or regard, to other collateral or sources of reimbursement for Secured Obligations. The Lender shall not be deemed to have waived any of its rights with respect to the Secured Obligations or the Collateral unless such waiver is in writing and signed by Lender. No delay or omission on part of the Lender in exercising any right and no course of dealing shall operate as a waiver of such right or any other right. A waiver on any one occasion shall not bar or waive the exercise of any right on any future occasion. All rights and remedies of the Lender in the Secured Obligations or the Collateral, whether evidenced hereby or by any other instrument or papers, are cumulative and not exclusive of any remedies provided by law or any other agreement, and may be exercised separately or concurrently.
          Section 9. Notices . All notices, approvals, request, demands and other communications hereunder shall be given in accordance with Section 10.1 of Credit Agreement.

13


 

          Section 10. Successors and Assigns. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Borrower and its successors and assigns, and shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Lender and its successor and assigns; provided that the Borrower may not assign or transfer its rights or obligations hereunder. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing sentence, the Lender may, in the manner and to the extent set forth in the Credit Agreement, assign or otherwise transfer any agreement or any note held by it evidencing, securing or otherwise executed in connection with the Secured Obligations, or sell participations in any interest therein, to any other person or entity, and such other person or entity shall thereupon become vested, to the extent set forth in agreement evidencing such assignment, transfer or participation, with all the rights in respect thereof granted to the Lender herein.
          Section 11. Governing Law; Jurisdiction; Venue. THIS AGREEMENT IS A CONTRACT UNDER THE LAW OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS AND SHALL FOR ALL PURPOSES BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF SAID COMMONWEALTH (EXCLUDING THE LAWS APPLICABLE TO CONFLICTS OR CHOICE OF LAW). THE BORROWER HEREBY CONSENTS AND AGREES THAT THE SUPERIOR COURT OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS, SITTING IN SUFFOLK COUNTY, OR, AT THE LENDER’S OPTION, THE UNITED STATES DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, SITTING IN BOSTON, SHALL HAVE EXCLUSIVE JURISDICTION TO HEAR AND DETERMINE ANY SUIT TO ENFORCE THE RIGHTS OF THE LENDER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AND ANY CLAIMS OR DISPUTES BETWEEN THE BORROWER, ON THE ONE HAND, AND THE LENDER, ON THE OTHER HAND, PERTAINING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT. THE BORROWER EXPRESSLY SUBMITS AND CONSENTS IN ADVANCE TO SUCH JURISDICTION IN ANY ACTION OR SUIT COMMENCED IN ANY SUCH COURT AND CONSENTS TO SERVICE OF PROCESS IN ANY SUIT BEING MADE UPON THE BORROWER BY MAIL AT THE ADDRESS SET FORTH IN SECTION 10.1 OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT. THE BORROWER IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY OBJECTION WHICH IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE THE LAYING OF VENUE OF ANY SUCH ACTION BROUGHT IN THE COURTS REFERRED TO IN THIS SECTION AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVED AND AGREES NOT TO PLEAD OR CLAIM ANY SUCH ACTION THAT SUCH ACTION HAS BEEN BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM.
          Section 12. Waiver of Jury Trial. THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARILY AND INTENTIONALLY WAIVE THEIR RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL WITH RESPECT TO ANY ACTION OR CLAIM ARISING OUT OF ANY DISPUTE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, ANY RIGHTS OR SECURED OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER, THE PERFORMANCE OF SUCH RIGHTS AND SECURED OBLIGATIONS OR ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS (WHTHER VERBAL OR WRITTEN) OR ACTIONS OF ANY PARTY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITAION, ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS OR ACTIONS OF THE LENDER RELATING TO THE ADMINISTRATION OR ENFORCEMENT OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND AGREES THAT

14


 

          IT WILL NOT SEEK TO CONSOLIDATE ANY SUCH ACTION WITH ANY OTHER ACTION IN WHICH A JURY TRIAL CAN NOT BE OR HAS NOT BEEN WAIVED. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER HEREBY WAIVE ANY RIGHT THEY MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER IN ANY LITIGATION REFERRED TO TN THE PRECEDING SENTENCE ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES OTHER THAN, OR IN ADDITION TO, ACTUAL DAMAGES. THE BORROWER (a) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF THE LENDER HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT THE LENDER WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVERS AND (b) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE LENDER HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BECAUSE OF, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE BORROWER’S WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS CONTAINED HEREIN.
          Section 13. General. This Agreement may not be amended or modified except by a writing signed by each of the Borrower and the Lender. This Agreement and any amendment hereof may be executed in several counterparts and by each party on a separate counterpart, each of which when so executed and delivered shall be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one instrument. Section headings are for convenience of reference only and are not a part of this Agreement. In the event that any Collateral or any deposit or other sum due from or credited by the Lender is held or stands in the name of the borrower and another or others jointly, the Lender may deal with the same for all purposes as if it belonged to or stood in the name of the Borrower alone.

15


 

     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Borrower has caused this Agreement to be duly executed as an instrument under seal as of the date first written above.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:   /s/ Charles Speicher    
    Charles Speicher   
    Corporate Controller   
 
ACCEPTED AS OF THE
DATE FIRST ABOVE WRITTEN
CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS
         
By:
  /s/ Sharon A. Stone    
 
 
 
Sharon A. Stone
   
 
  Senior Vice President    

16


 

NEGATIVE PLEDGE AGREEMENT
     THIS NEGATIVE PLEDGE AGREEMENT (this “Agreement”) is made this 29 day of September, 2006 by VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Delaware and having its chief executive office at 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (the “Borrower”), in favor CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, a Massachusetts bank having a banking office at 28 State Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 (the “Lender”).
     The Borrower has requested that the Lender enter into a certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement with Borrower of even date herewith (as the same may be amended, modified, supplemented, extended or restated from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”) and that Lender agree to make loans and other credits to the Borrower upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth therein.
     Lender has required that Borrower enter into this Agreement as a condition precedent to Lender’s entering into the Credit Agreement.
     In order to induce the Lender to enter into the Credit Agreement and to make or continue to make loans and other credits available to the Borrower upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth therein, and in consideration thereof, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the Borrower agrees as follows:
     Section 1. Definitions. All capitalized terms used herein or in any certificate, report or other document delivered pursuant hereto shall have the meanings assigned to them below or in the Credit Agreement (unless otherwise defined).
      Intellectual Property. All of the following, to the extent owned by (and not licensed to) the Borrower: (i) United States and foreign patents, patent applications and statutory invention registrations, including reissues, divisions, continuations, substitutions, renewals, continuations in part, extensions and reexaminations thereof, and all improvements thereto, (ii) software, database, copyrightable works, websites, copyrights (registered, renewed or otherwise) and registrations, renewals and applications for registration or renewal thereof, (iii) trademarks, trademark applications, service marks, service mark applications, trade dress, logos, slogans, symbols, trade names, internet domain names, brand names, product names, fictitious names, corporate names, and other source identifiers and all reissues, extensions and renewals thereof, and goodwill of the business symbolized thereby and associated therewith, (iv) trade secrets, know-how, technology, inventions and discoveries, and (v) any and all right, title, and interest in and to the foregoing, including the right to sue for past, present and future infringement, in all of such cases (i) through (v), whether used, held for use, supported, maintained, marketed or otherwise.
     Section 2. Negative Pledge. The Borrower hereby covenants that it shall not create, incur, assume or suffer to exist any Encumbrance, other than Permitted Encumbrances, or any other negative pledge, on or with respect to the Intellectual Property. The Borrower further

1


 

covenants and agrees that it shall not sell, transfer, assign or otherwise alienate the Intellectual Property, other than for fair consideration in the ordinary course of Borrower’s business, without the prior written consent of Lender.
     Section 3. Notices. All notices, approvals, requests, demands and other communications hereunder shall be given in accordance with Section 10.1 of the Credit Agreement.
     Section 4. Governing Law: Jurisdiction; Venue. THIS AGREEMENT IS A CONTRACT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS AND SHALL FOR ALL PURPOSES BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF SAID COMMONWEALTH (EXCLUDING THE LAWS APPLICABLE TO CONFLICTS OR CHOICE OF LAW). THE BORROWER HEREBY CONSENTS AND AGREES THAT THE SUPERIOR COURT OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS, SITTING IN SUFFOLK COUNTY, OR AT THE LENDER’S OPTION, THE UNITED STATES DISTRICT COURT FOR THE DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, SITTING IN BOSTON, SHALL HAVE EXCLUSIVE JURIDRICTION TO HEAR AND DETERMINE ANY SUIT TO ENFORCE THE RIGHTS OF THE LENDER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AND ANY CLAIMS OR DISPUTES BETWEEN THE BORROWER, ON THE ONE HAND, AND THE LENDER, ON THE OTHER HAND, PERTAINING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT. THE BORROWER EXPRESSLY SUBMITS AND CONSENTS IN ADVANCE TO SUCH JURISDICTION IN ANY ACTION OR SUIT COMMENCED IN ANY SUCH COURT AND CONSENTS TO SERVICE OF THE PROCESS IN ANY SUCH SUIT BEING MADE UPON THE BORROWER BY MAIL AT THE ADDRESS SET FORTH IN SECTION 10.1 OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT. THE BORROWER IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY OBJECTION WHICH IT MAY NOW OR HEREAFTER HAVE TO THE LAYING OF THE VENUE OF ANY SUCH ACTION BROUGHT IN THE COURT REFERRED TO IN THE SECTION AND IRREVOCABLY WAIVES AND AGREES NOT TO PLEAD OR CLAIM IN ANY SUCH ACTION SUCH ACTION HAS BEEN BROUGHT IN AN INCONVENIENT FORUM.
     Section 5. Waiver of Jury Trail. THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER HEREBY KNOWINGLY, VOLUNTARY AND INTENTIONALLY WAIVE THEIR RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL WITH RESPECT TO ANY ACTION OR CLAIM ARISING OUT OF ANY DISPUTE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, ANY RIGHTS OR OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER, THE PERFORMANCE OF SUCH RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OR ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS (WHETHER VERBAL OR WRITTEN) OR ACTIONS OF ANY PARTY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY COURSE OF CONDUCT, COURSE OF DEALINGS, STATEMENTS OR ACTIONS OF THE LENDER RELATING TO THE ADMINISTRATION OR ENFORCEMENT OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND AGREES THAT IT WILL NOT SEEK TO CONSOLIDATE ANY SUCH ACTION WITH ANY OTHER ACTION IN WHICH A JURY TRIAL CAN NOT BE OR HAS NOT BEEN WAIVED. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, THE BORROWER AND THE LENDER HEREBY WAIVE ANY RIGHT THEY MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER IN ANY LITIGATION REFERRED TO IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCE ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

2


 

PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES OTHER THAN, OR IN ADDITION TO, ACTUAL DAMAGES. THE BORROWER (a) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF THE LENDER HAS REPRESENTED EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT THE LENDER WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVERS AND (b) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE LENDER HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BECAUSE OF, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE BORROWER’S WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS CONTAINED HEREIN.
Section 6. General. This Agreement may not be amended or modified expect by a writing signed by each of the Borrower and Lender. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Borrower and its successors and assigns, and shall be shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Lender and its successors and assigns; provided that the Borrower may not assign or transfer its rights or obligations hereunder. This Agreement and any amendment hereof may be executed in several counterparts and by each party on a separate counterpart, each of which when executed and delivered shall be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one agreement. Section headings are for convenience of reference only and are not a part of this Agreement. In the event that any deposit or sum due from or credited by the Lender is held or stands in the name of the Borrower and another or others jointly, the Lender may deal with the same for all purposes as if it belonged to or stood in the name of the Borrower alone.
     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Borrower has caused this Agreement to be duly executed as an instrument under seal as of the date first written above.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:   /s/ Kris Canekeratne    
    Kris Canekeratne   
    Chairman and Chief Executive Officer   
 
ACCEPTED AS OF THE
DATE FIRST ABOVE WRITTEN
CITIZENS BANK OF MASSCHUSETTS
         
By:
  /s/ Sharon A. Stone    
 
 
 
Sharon A. Stone
   
 
  Senior Vice President    

3


 

FIRST AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT
     This First Amendment (this “Amendment”) is made as of September 30, 2007 to that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29, 2006 (the “Credit Agreement”) between CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, now known as RBS CITIZENS, N.A. (“Bank”) and VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation with an address of 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (“Borrower”). Capitalized terms used and not defined in this Amendment shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Credit Agreement.
RECITALS
     Borrower has requested that Bank agree to extend the Revolving Credit Maturity Date through December 31, 2007 and that Bank agree to eliminate the annual field examination of Borrower’s books and records.
     Bank is amenable to so extending the Revolving Credit Maturity Date and so amending the Credit Agreement, but only on the terms and conditions set forth in the Credit Agreement as amended hereby.
AGREEMENT
     In consideration of the foregoing, of the undertakings of Borrower and Bank herein and for other good and valuable consideration, receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
1. All references in the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents to Bank shall be deemed to mean RBS CITIZENS, N.A.
2. Effective September 30, 2007, the definition of the term “Revolving Credit Maturity Date” contained in Section 1.1 of the Credit Agreement is deleted and replaced with the following text:
     “ Revolving Credit Maturity Date . December 31, 2007.”
3. Section 5.5 of the Credit Agreement is hereby deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:
     “5.5. Inspection. On the request of Lender from time to time, Borrower shall permit the Lender and its designees, at reasonable times and intervals of time, and upon reasonable written notice, to (i) visit and inspect the United States properties of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, (ii) examine and make copies of and take abstracts from the United States books and records of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, (iii) verify Accounts Receivables using its customary practices and procedures, and (iv) discuss the affairs, finances, and accounts of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries with their appropriate officers, employees and independent accountants, all at the

1


 

expense of the Borrower. In the absence of an existing Event of Default, any such examination shall be at Lender’s expense, and during the continuance of an Event of Default such examination shall be at Borrower’s expense.”
4. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A , Borrower represents and warrants that all of the representations and warranties made by Borrower in the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents are and continue to be true and correct on the date hereof, except to the extent that any of such representations and warranties relate by their terms solely to a date prior to date of this Amendment. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A , Borrower hereby ratifies and confirms all of its covenants and agreements contained in the Credit Agreement and represents that it is not aware of any default of any of the terms and provisions of the Credit Agreement.
5. Borrower further represents and warrants that this Amendment is its valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, except as may be affected by bankruptcy and other similar laws of general application affecting the rights and remedies of creditors.
6. Borrower shall promptly execute and deliver such further documents, instruments and agreements and take such further action as Bank may reasonably request, in its sole discretion, to effect the purposes of this Amendment and the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, including, but not limited to the execution and delivery of all documents necessary or reasonably required by Bank to ensure that Bank has perfected liens on all assets of Borrower to the extent originally provided under the Credit Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Borrower hereby appoints any officer or agent of Bank as Borrower’s true and lawful attorney in fact, with power of substitution to endorse the name of Borrower or any of their officers or agents in such regard, exercisable by Bank during the continuance of an Event of Default.
7. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Amendment, nothing in this Amendment shall extend to or affect in any way any of the Obligations or any of the rights and remedies of Bank arising under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, and Bank shall not be deemed to have waived any or all of such rights and remedies with respect to any Event of Default or event or condition which, with notice or the lapse of time, would become an Event of a Default and which, upon Borrower’s execution and delivery of this Amendment, might otherwise exist or which might hereafter occur.
8. By execution of this Amendment, Borrower acknowledges and confirms that it does not, as of the date of this Amendment, have any offsets, defenses or claims against Bank or any of its officers, agents, directors or employees whether asserted or unasserted to the Obligations.
9. To the extent possible and except for the specific changes to the Credit Agreement effected hereby, this Amendment shall be construed to be consistent with the provisions of the Credit Agreement. In the event of any inconsistency between the provisions of this Amendment and any other document (including, without limitation, any Loan Document), instrument, or

2


 

agreement entered into by and between Bank and Borrower, the provisions of this Amendment shall govern and control. This Amendment shall be binding upon Bank and Borrower, and their representatives, successors, and assigns, and shall inure to the benefit of Bank and Borrower and their respective successors and assigns. This Amendment and all documents, instruments, and agreements executed in connection herewith incorporate all of the discussions and negotiations between Borrower and Bank, either expressed or implied, concerning the matters included herein and in such other documents, instruments and agreements, any statute, custom, or usage to the contrary notwithstanding. No such discussions or negotiations shall limit, modify, or otherwise affect the provisions hereof. No modification, amendment, or waiver of any provision of this Amendment, or any provision of any other document, instrument, or agreement between any Borrower and Bank shall be effective unless executed in writing by the party to be charged with such modification, amendment, or waiver.
10. Borrower acknowledges and agrees that it shall promptly pay to Bank the full amount of all reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of Bank incurred by Bank in preparation and documentation of this Amendment and all documents ancillary hereto or incurred by Bank after the date of this Amendment in connection with administration of the Obligations or enforcement of any rights of Bank under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents or otherwise in respect of any of the Obligations.
11. If any clause or provision of this Amendment is determined to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under any present or future law by the final judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Amendment will not be affected thereby. It is the intention of the parties that if any such provision is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, there will be added in lieu thereof an enforceable provision as similar in terms to such provision as is possible, and that such added provision will be legal, valid and enforceable.
12. This Amendment is delivered to Bank in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and it is the desire and intention of the parties that this Amendment and the Loan Documents be in all respects interpreted according to the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Borrower specifically and irrevocably consents to the personal and subject matter, jurisdiction and venue of any court of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts sitting in the counties of Suffolk or Middlesex or in the District Court of the United States for the District of Massachusetts with respect to all matters concerning this Amendment or the Loan Documents or the enforcement of any of the foregoing.
13. This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original document, but all of which will constitute a single document. This Amendment will not be binding on or constitute evidence of a contract between the parties until such time as a counterpart of this document has been executed by each of the parties and delivered to Bank.

3


 

WITNESS our hands and seals effective as of September 30, 2007.
             
WITNESS (to all)   BORROWER:    
    VIRTUSA CORPORATION    
 
           
/s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
  By:  /s/ Thomas R. Holler   [SEAL]
 
           
    duly authorized    
    Thomas R. Holler    
    Executive VP & CFO    
 
           
 
  BANK:        
    RBS CITIZENS, N.A.    
 
           
/s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
  By:  /s/ Victoria Lazzell    
 
           
    Victoria Lazzell, Senior Vice President    

4


 

EXHIBIT A
Disclosure Schedule to First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement

5


 

SECOND AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT
This Second Amendment (this “Amendment”) is made as of December 31,2007 to that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29,2006, as previously amended by First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of September 30,2007 (the “Credit Agreement”) between CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, now known as RBS CITIZENS, N.A. (“Bank”) and VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation with an address of 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (“Borrower”). Capitalized terms used and not defined in this Amendment shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Credit Agreement.
RECITALS
Borrower has requested that Bank agree to extend the Revolving Credit Maturity Date through March 31, 2008 and that Bank agree to eliminate the pledge of the capital stock of its subsidiary, Virtusa Securities Corporation.
Bank is amenable to so extending the Revolving Credit Maturity Date and so amending the Credit Agreement, but only on the terms and conditions set forth in the Credit Agreement as amended hereby.
AGREEMENT
In consideration of the foregoing, of the undertakings of Borrower and Bank herein and for other good and valuable consideration, receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
1. Effective December 31, 2007, the definition of the term “Revolving Credit Maturity Date”
contained in Section 1.1 of the Credit Agreement is deleted and replaced with the following text:
     “ Revolving Credit Maturity Date . March 31, 2008.”
2. Effective December 31, 2007, the definition of the term “Security Documents” contained in
Section 1.1 of the Credit Agreement is deleted and replaced with the following text:
      “Security Documents. A security agreement, a negative pledge agreement with respect to intellectual property of the Borrower and the Letter of Credit Pledge Agreement, and any subsequent pledge or security agreements granted by Borrower to Lender, each in favor of the Lender to secure Obligations, in each case as amended and/or restated and in effect from time to time, and any additional documents evidencing or perfecting the Lender’s lien on the Collateral.”
3. Borrower and Bank hereby agree that the Pledge Agreement shall be cancelled and of no further force and effect as of December 31,2007. Bank shall cancel and return the Pledge Agreement to Borrower promptly after the date of this Amendment.

1


 

4. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A, Borrower represents and warrants that all of the representations and warranties made by Borrower in the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents are and continue to be true and correct on the date hereof, except to the extent that any of such representations and warranties relate by their terms solely to a date prior to date of this Amendment. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A, Borrower hereby ratifies and confirms all of its covenants and agreements contained in the Credit Agreement and represents that it is not aware of any default of any of the terms and provisions of the Credit Agreement.
5. Borrower further represents and warrants that this Amendment is its valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, except as may be affected by bankruptcy and other similar laws of general application affecting the rights and remedies of creditors.
6. Borrower shall promptly execute and deliver such further documents, instruments and agreements and take such further action as Bank may reasonably request, in its sole discretion, to effect the purposes of this Amendment and the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, including, but not limited to the execution and delivery of all documents necessary or reasonably required by Bank to ensure that Bank has perfected liens on all assets of Borrower to the extent originally provided under the Credit Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Borrower hereby appoints any officer or agent of Bank as Borrower’s true and lawful attorney in fact, with power of substitution to endorse the name of Borrower or any of their officers or agents in such regard, exercisable by Bank during the continuance of an Event of Default.
7. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Amendment, nothing in this Amendment shall extend to or affect in any way any of the Obligations or any of the rights and remedies of Bank arising under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, and Bank shall not be deemed to have waived any or all of such rights and remedies with respect to any Event of Default or event or condition which, with notice or the lapse of time, would become an Event of a Default and which, upon Borrower’s execution and delivery of this Amendment, might otherwise exist or which might hereafter occur.
8. By execution of this Amendment, Borrower acknowledges and confirms that it does not, as of the date of this Amendment, have any offsets, defenses or claims against Bank or any of its officers, agents, directors or employees whether asserted or unasserted to the Obligations.
9. To the extent possible and except for the specific changes to the Credit Agreement effected hereby, this Amendment shall be construed to be consistent with the provisions of the Credit Agreement. In the event of any inconsistency between the provisions of this Amendment and any other document (including, without limitation, any Loan Document), instrument, or agreement entered into by and between Bank and Borrower, the provisions of this Amendment shall govern and control. This Amendment shall be binding upon Bank and Borrower, and their representatives, successors, and assigns, and shall inure to the benefit of Bank and Borrower and

2


 

their respective successors and assigns. This Amendment and all documents, instruments, and agreements executed in connection herewith incorporate all of the discussions and negotiations between Borrower and Bank, either expressed or implied, concerning the matters included herein and in such other documents, instruments and agreements, any statute, custom, or usage to the contrary notwithstanding. No such discussions or negotiations shall limit, modify, or otherwise affect the provisions hereof. No modification, amendment, or waiver of any provision of this Amendment, or any provision of any other document, instrument, or agreement between any Borrower and Bank shall be effective unless executed in writing by the party to be charged with such modification, amendment, or waiver.
10. Borrower acknowledges and agrees that it shall promptly pay to Bank the full amount of all reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of Bank incurred by Bank in preparation and documentation of this Amendment and all documents ancillary hereto or incurred by Bank after the date of this Amendment in connection with administration of the Obligations or enforcement of any rights of Bank under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents or otherwise in respect of any of the Obligations.
11. If any clause or provision of this Amendment is determined to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under any present or future law by the final judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Amendment will not be affected thereby. It is the intention of the parties that if any such provision is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, there will be added in lieu thereof an enforceable provision as similar in terms to such provision as is possible, and that such added provision will be legal, valid and enforceable.
12. This Amendment is delivered to Bank in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and it is the desire and intention of the parties that this Amendment and the Loan Documents be in all respects interpreted according to the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Borrower specifically and irrevocably consents to the personal and subject matter, jurisdiction and venue of any court of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts sitting in the counties of Suffolk or Middlesex or in the District Court of the United States for the District of Massachusetts with respect to all matters concerning this Amendment or the Loan Documents or the enforcement of any of the foregoing.
13. This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original document, but all of which will constitute a single document. This Amendment will not be binding on or constitute evidence of a contract between the parties until such time as a counterpart of this document has been executed by each of the parties and delivered to Bank.

3


 

WITNESS our hands and seals effective as of December 31, 2007.
             
WITNESS (to all)   BORROWER:    
    VIRTUSA CORPORATION    
 
           
/s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
  By:  /s/ [ILLEGIBLE]    
 
 
 
   
[ILLEGIBLE]   duly authorized VP & General Course    
[ILLEGIBLE]
           
 
           
 
  BANK:        
    RBS CITIZENS, N.A.    
 
           
/s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
  By:   /s/ Victoria Lazzell    
 
 
 
   
    Victoria Lazzell, Senior Vice President    

4


 

EXHIBIT A
Disclosure Schedule to Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement

5


 

THIRD AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT
This Third Amendment (this “Amendment”) is made as of February 7, 2008 to that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29, 2006, as previously amended by First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of September 30, 2007 and Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of December 31, 2007 (the “Credit Agreement”) between CITIZENS BANK OF MASSACHUSETTS, now known as RBS CITIZENS, N.A. (“Bank”) and VIRTUSA CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation with an address of 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (“Borrower”). Capitalized terms used and not defined in this Amendment shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Credit Agreement.
RECITALS
Borrower has requested that Bank consent to the pledging by Borrower or Virtusa Securities Corporation of up to $5,000,000.00 in cash and securities to J. P. Morgan Chase & Co. in connection with certain foreign exchange accommodations for the benefit of Borrower and its affiliates. Pursuant to Section 7.3 of the Credit Agreement, Borrower and Virtusa Securities Corporation may not grant a security interest in their personal property without the consent of Bank.
Bank is willing to consent to such pledge, and has issued a consent letter regarding such transaction dated January 28, 2008 in the form of Exhibit A , conditioned upon certain amendments to the Credit Agreement as further set forth herein.
AGREEMENT
In consideration of the foregoing, of the undertakings of Borrower and Bank herein and for other good and valuable consideration, receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
1. Sections 6.2(a) and 6.2(b) of the Credit Agreement are hereby deleted in their entirety and are replaced with the following provisions:
     “(a) The Borrower and Virtusa Securities Corporation shall at all times maintain aggregate unpledged and unrestricted cash and cash equivalents in United States-based accounts, or otherwise on hand in the United States, of not less than $10,000,000.00, net of any outstanding Loans or Reimbursement Obligations.
     (b) The Borrower and its Subsidiaries shall at all times maintain aggregate unpledged and unrestricted cash and cash equivalents, including both foreign-based accounts and United States-based accounts of at least $15,000,000.00.”

1


 

2. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit B, Borrower represents and warrants that all of the representations and warranties made by Borrower in the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents are and continue to be true and correct on the date hereof, except to the extent that any of such representations and warranties relate by their terms solely to a date prior to date of this Amendment. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit B, Borrower hereby ratifies and confirms all of its covenants and agreements contained in the Credit Agreement and represents that it is not aware of any default of any of the terms and provisions of the Credit Agreement.
3. Borrower further represents and warrants that this Amendment is its valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, except as may be affected by bankruptcy and other similar laws of general application affecting the rights and remedies of creditors.
4. Borrower shall promptly execute and deliver such further documents, instruments and agreements and take such further action as Bank may reasonably request, in its sole discretion, to effect the purposes of this Amendment and the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, including, but not limited to the execution and delivery of all documents necessary or reasonably required by Bank to ensure that Bank has perfected liens on all assets of Borrower to the extent originally provided under the Credit Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Borrower hereby appoints any officer or agent of Bank as Borrower’s true and lawful attorney in fact, with power of substitution to endorse the name of Borrower or any of their officers or agents in such regard, exercisable by Bank during the continuance of an Event of Default.
5. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Amendment, nothing in this Amendment shall extend to or affect in any way any of the Obligations or any of the rights and remedies of Bank arising under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, and Bank shall not be deemed to have waived any or all of such rights and remedies with respect to any Event of Default or event or condition which, with notice or the lapse of time, would become an Event of a Default and which, upon Borrower’s execution and delivery of this Amendment, might otherwise exist or which might hereafter occur.
6. By execution of this Amendment, Borrower acknowledges and confirms that it does not, as of the date of this Amendment, have any offsets, defenses or claims against Bank or any of its officers, agents, directors or employees whether asserted or unasserted to the Obligations.
7. To the extent possible and except for the specific changes to the Credit Agreement effected hereby, this Amendment shall be construed to be consistent with the provisions of the Credit Agreement. In the event of any inconsistency between the provisions of this Amendment and any other document (including, without limitation, any Loan Document), instrument, or agreement entered into by and between Bank and Borrower, the provisions of this Amendment shall govern and control. This Amendment shall be binding upon Bank and Borrower, and their representatives, successors, and assigns, and shall inure to the benefit of Bank and Borrower and their respective successors and assigns. This Amendment and all documents, instruments, and agreements executed in connection herewith incorporate all of the discussions and negotiations

2


 

between Borrower and Bank, either expressed or implied, concerning the matters included herein and in such other documents, instruments and agreements, any statute, custom, or usage to the contrary notwithstanding. No such discussions or negotiations shall limit, modify, or otherwise affect the provisions hereof. No modification, amendment, or waiver of any provision of this Amendment, or any provision of any other document, instrument, or agreement between any Borrower and Bank shall be effective unless executed in writing by the party to be charged with such modification, amendment, or waiver.
8. Borrower acknowledges and agrees that it shall promptly pay to Bank the full amount of all reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of Bank incurred by Bank in preparation and documentation of this Amendment and all documents ancillary hereto or incurred by Bank after the date of this Amendment in connection with administration of the Obligations or enforcement of any rights of Bank under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents or otherwise in respect of any of the Obligations.
9. If any clause or provision of this Amendment is determined to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under any present or future law by the final judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Amendment will not be affected thereby. It is the intention of the parties that if any such provision is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, there will be added in lieu thereof an enforceable provision as similar in terms to such provision as is possible, and that such added provision will be legal, valid and enforceable.
10. This Amendment is delivered to Bank in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and it is the desire and intention of the parties that this Amendment and the Loan Documents be in all respects interpreted according to the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Borrower specifically and irrevocably consents to the personal and subject matter, jurisdiction and venue of any court of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts sitting in the counties of Suffolk or Middlesex or in the District Court of the United States for the District of Massachusetts with respect to all matters concerning this Amendment or the Loan Documents or the enforcement of any of the foregoing.
11. This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original document, but all of which will constitute a single document. This Amendment will not be binding on or constitute evidence of a contract between the parties until such time as a counterpart of this document has been executed by each of the parties and delivered to Bank.

3


 

WITNESS our hands and seals effective as of January 28, 2008.
             
WITNESS (to all)       BORROWER:
        VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
           
(ILLEGIBLE)
      By:   /s/ (ILLEGIBLE)
 
           
(ILLEGIBLE)       duly authorized
 
           
        BANK:
        RBS CITIZENS, N.A.
 
           
(ILLEGIBLE)
      By   /s/ (ILLEGIBLE)
 
           
        Victoria Lazzell, Senior Vice President

4


 

EXHIBIT A
CONSENT LETTER
Attach copy of fully signed letter dated January 28, 2008

5


 

     
(CITIZENS BANK LOGO)
  Victoria P. Lazzell
Senior Vice President
28 January 2008
  Technology Banking Division
 
  Citizens Bank of Massachusetts
 
  53 State Street. 8 th Floor
Paul D. Tutun, Esq.
  Boston, MA 02109
Vice President and General Counsel
  Phone 617-994-7124 Fax 617-742-9548
Virtusa Corporation
  Victoria lazzell@ citizens bank.com
2000 West Park Drive
   
Westborough, MA 01581
   
Dear Mr. Tutun,
Reference is made to the loans and all loan documents, as have been amended from time to time, including the Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29, 2006 (“Credit Agreement’’), the First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 30, 2007 and Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated December 31, 2007, by and between Virtusa Corporation (“Borrower”), a Delaware corporation with an address of 2000 West Park Drive Westborough, MA 01581 and RBS Citizens, National Association, (“Bank”).
Borrower has requested that Lender provide its consent to a proposed transaction (“Transaction”) with JPMorgan Chase & Co. (“JP Morgan”} whereby Virtusa Corporation or Virtusa Securities Corporation will pledge up to $5 million of its cash balances to JPMorgan to facilitate various foreign exchange transactions for the benefit of Borrower and its related entities. This transaction violates Section 7.3 of the Credit Agreement.
Please be advised that Lender hereby consents to the Transaction. Lender hereby gives this consent solely for the Transaction described above and does not waive or consent to any other violations of the Credit Agreement Additionally, Lender’s consent is subject to Borrower’s agreement, as evidenced by its signature below, to execute an amendment within 5 business days to Section 6.2 (a) and 6.2 (b) of the Credit Agreement to exclude all cash balances restricted by this Transaction from the calculation of its cash requirements. All other terms of the Credit Agreement, as amended, remain in full force and effect.
Sincerely,
(SIGNATURE)
Agreed:
Virtusa Corporation
         
By:
  (ILLEGIBLE)    
 
 
 
   
Name:
  (ILLEGIBLE)    
 
 
 
   
Date:
  Jan 28, 2008    
 
 
 
   

 


 

EXHIBIT B
Disclosure Schedule to Third Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement

6


 

FOURTH AMENDMENT TO AMENDED AND RESTATED CREDIT AGREEMENT
This Fourth Amendment (this “Amendment”) is made as of March 31, 2008 to that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated September 29, 2006, as previously amended by First Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of September 30, 2007, Second Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of December 30, 2007, and Third Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement dated as of February 7, 2008 (the “Credit Agreement”) between RBS CITIZENS, N.A., successor by merger to Citizens Bank of Massachusetts (“Bank”) and VIRTUS A CORPORATION, a Delaware corporation with an address of 2000 West Park Drive, Westborough, Massachusetts 01581 (“Borrower”). Capitalized terms used and not defined in this Amendment shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Credit Agreement.
RECITALS
Borrower has requested that Bank agree to extend the Revolving Credit Maturity Date through September 30, 2008.
Bank is amenable to so extending the Revolving Credit Maturity Date, but only on the terms and conditions set forth in the Credit Agreement as amended hereby.
AGREEMENT
In consideration of the foregoing, of the undertakings of Borrower and Bank herein and for other good and valuable consideration, receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:
     1. Effective March 31, 2008, the definitions of the terms “ FX Reserves ” and “Revolving Credit Maturity Date” contained in Section 1.1 of the Credit Agreement are deleted and replaced with the following definitions:
     “‘ FX Reseryes ’ means, at any time of determination of the Borrowing Base, an amount equal to 15.0% (or such other percentage as Lender may determine is appropriate for the respective currencies of such contracts at such time) of the face amount (in US Dollars) of all foreign exchange contracts entered into in connection with FX Transactions.
      ‘Revolving Credit Maturity Date.’ September 30, 2008.”
2. The following definition is hereby added to Section 1.1 of the Credit Agreement in appropriate alphabetical order:
     “‘ Hedging Contracts ’ means, interest rate swap agreements, interest rate cap agreements and interest rate collar agreements, or any other agreements or arrangements entered into between the Borrower and the Bank and designed to protect the Borrower against fluctuations in interest rates or currency exchange rates.”

1


 

3. Section 2.7(b) of the Credit Agreement is hereby deleted in its entirety and is replaced with the following text:
     “(b) If the Revolving Credit Commitment shall have been terminated or the Obligations shall have been declared immediately due and payable pursuant to Section 8.2, all funds received from or on behalf of the Borrower (including as proceeds of Collateral) by the Lender in respect of Obligations, shall be applied by the Lender in the following manner and order: (i) first, to reimburse the Lender for any amounts payable pursuant to Sections 10.2 and 11.3 hereof; (ii) second, to the payment of Commitment Fees, Letter of Credit Fees and any other fees payable hereunder; (iii) third, to the payment of interest due on the Loans and the Reimbursement Obligations; (iv) fourth, to the payment of the outstanding principal balance of the Loans and the Reimbursement Obligations, pro rata to the outstanding principal balance of each, and to pay any breakage costs and fees associated with Hedging Contracts, and to provide the Lender with cash collateral for any issued and outstanding Letters of Credit, Lender’s exposure on Hedging Contracts and Lender’s exposure on FX Transactions in an amount determined by Lender to be necessary to secure such Obligations; (v) fifth, to the payment of any other Obligations payable by the Borrower, pro rata to the outstanding principal balance of each; and (vi) any remaining funds shall be paid to whoever shall be entitled thereto or as a court of competent jurisdiction shall direct. In the event that funds received are not adequate to provide the Lender with cash collateral for all issued and outstanding Letters of Credit and Lender’s exposure on FX Transactions, Borrower shall immediately deposit with Lender cash collateral determined by Lender to be necessary to secure such Obligations,”.
4. Section 8.2(c) of the Credit Agreement is hereby deleted in its entirety and is replaced with the following text:
     “(c) The Borrower shall immediately pledge to Lender cash collateral in an amount determined by Lender to be sufficient to fully secure any Obligations of Borrower to Lender with respect to (1) any issued Letters of Credit and (2) Lender’s exposure on FX Transactions; and”
5. All references to Bank or to Citizens Bank of Massachusetts in the Credit Agreement and any of the documents, instruments and agreements shall be deemed to be mean and refer to RBS CITIZENS, N.A.
6. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A, Borrower represents and warrants that all of the representations and warranties made by Borrower in the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents are and continue to be true and correct on the date hereof, except to the extent that any of such representations and warranties relate by their terms solely to a date prior to date of this Amendment. Except as set forth on the disclosure schedule attached hereto as Exhibit A, Borrower hereby ratifies and confirms all of its covenants and agreements contained in the Credit Agreement and represents that it is not aware of any default of any of the terms and provisions of the Credit Agreement.

2


 

7. Borrower further represents and warrants that this Amendment is its valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, except as may be affected by bankruptcy and other similar laws of general application affecting the rights and remedies of creditors.
8. Borrower shall promptly execute and deliver such further documents, instruments and agreements and take such further action as Bank may reasonably request, in its sole discretion, to effect the purposes of this Amendment and the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, including, but not limited to the execution and delivery of all documents necessary or reasonably required by Bank to ensure that Bank has perfected liens on all assets of Borrower to the extent originally provided under the Credit Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Borrower hereby appoints any officer or agent of Bank as Borrower’s true and lawful attorney in fact, with power of substitution to endorse the name of Borrower or any of their officers or agents in such regard, exercisable by Bank during the continuance of an Event of Default.
9. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Amendment, nothing in this Amendment shall extend to or affect in any way any of the Obligations or any of the rights and remedies of Bank arising under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents, and Bank shall not be deemed to have waived any or all of such rights and remedies with respect to any Event of Default or event or condition which, with notice or the lapse of time, would become an Event of a Default and which, upon Borrower’s execution and delivery of this Amendment, might otherwise exist or which might hereafter occur.
10. By execution of this Amendment, Borrower acknowledges and confirms that it does not, as of the date of this Amendment, have any offsets, defenses or claims against Bank or any of its officers, agents, directors or employees whether asserted or unassorted to the Obligations.
11. To the extent possible and except for the specific changes to the Credit Agreement effected hereby, this Amendment shall be construed to be consistent with the provisions of the Credit Agreement. In the event of any inconsistency between the provisions of this Amendment and any other document (including, without limitation, any Loan Document), instrument, or agreement entered into by and between Bank and Borrower, the provisions of this Amendment shall govern and control. This Amendment shall be binding upon Bank and Borrower, and their representatives, successors, and assigns, and shall inure to the benefit of Bank and Borrower and their respective successors and assigns. This Amendment and all documents, instruments, and agreements executed in connection herewith incorporate all of the discussions and negotiations between Borrower and Bank, either expressed or implied, concerning the matters included herein and in such other documents, instruments and agreements, any statute, custom, or usage to the contrary notwithstanding. No such discussions or negotiations shall limit, modify, or otherwise affect the provisions hereof. No modification, amendment, or waiver of any provision of this Amendment, or any provision of any other document, instrument, or agreement between any Borrower and Bank shall be effective unless executed in writing by the party to be charged with such modification, amendment, or waiver.

3


 

12. Borrower acknowledges and agrees that it shall promptly pay to Bank the full amount of all reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses of Bank incurred by Bank in preparation and documentation of this Amendment and all documents ancillary hereto or incurred by Bank after the date of this Amendment in connection with administration of the Obligations or enforcement of any rights of Bank under the Credit Agreement and other Loan Documents or otherwise in respect of any of the Obligations.
13. If any clause or provision of this Amendment is determined to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable under any present or future law by the final judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Amendment will not be affected thereby. It is the intention of the parties that if any such provision is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, there will be added in lieu thereof an enforceable provision as similar in terms to such provision as is possible, and that such added provision will be legal, valid and enforceable.
14. This Amendment is delivered to Bank in The Commonwealth of Massachusetts and it is the desire and intention of the parties that this Amendment and the Loan Documents be in all respects interpreted according to the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Borrower specifically and irrevocably consents to the personal and subject matter, jurisdiction and venue of any court of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts sitting in the counties of Suffolk or Middlesex or in the District Court of the United States for the District of Massachusetts with respect to all matters concerning this Amendment or the Loan Documents or the enforcement of any of the foregoing.
15. This Amendment may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original document, but all of which will constitute a single document. This Amendment will not be binding on or constitute evidence of a contract between the parties until such time as a counterpart of this document has been executed by each of the parties and delivered to Bank.

4


 

EXHIBIT A
     Disclosure Schedule to Fourth Amendment to Amended and Restated Credit Agreement
The Company’s Subsidiaries are the following:
Virtusa Securities Corporation
Virtusa UK Limited
Virtusa (India) Private Limited
Virtusa (Sri Lanka) Private Limited
Virtusa International, B.V (Dutch company)
Virtusa Consulting Services Private Limited (Hyderabad, India)
Virtusa Software Services Private Limited (Chennai, India)

5


 

     WITNESS our hands and seals effective as of March 31, 2008.
                 
WITNESS (to all)       BORROWER:    
        VIRTUSA CORPORATION    
 
               
[ILLEGIBLE]
 
      By:   /s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
 
  (SEAL)
        duly authorized  
 
             
        BANK:  
        RBS CITIZENS, N.A.    
 
               
[ILLEGIBLE]
 
      By:   /s/ [ILLEGIBLE]
 
   
        Victoria Lazzell, Senior Vice President    

6

EXHIBIT 10.15
VIRTUSA CORPORATION
2007 STOCK OPTION AND INCENTIVE PLAN
SECTION 1.   GENERAL PURPOSE OF THE PLAN; DEFINITIONS
     The name of the plan is the Virtusa Corporation 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan (the “Plan”). The purpose of the Plan is to encourage and enable the officers, employees, Non-Employee Directors and other key persons (including consultants and prospective employees) of Virtusa Corporation (the “Company”) and its Subsidiaries upon whose judgment, initiative and efforts the Company largely depends for the successful conduct of its business to acquire a proprietary interest in the Company. It is anticipated that providing such persons with a direct stake in the Company’s welfare will assure a closer identification of their interests with those of the Company and its stockholders, thereby stimulating their efforts on the Company’s behalf and strengthening their desire to remain with the Company.
     The following terms shall be defined as set forth below:
      “Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the rules and regulations thereunder.
      “Administrator” means either the Board or the compensation committee of the Board or a similar committee performing the functions of the compensation committee and which is comprised of not less than two Non-Employee Directors who are independent.
      “Award” or “Awards,” except where referring to a particular category of grant under the Plan, shall include Incentive Stock Options, Non-Qualified Stock Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, Deferred Stock Awards, Restricted Stock Awards, Unrestricted Stock Awards, Cash-based Awards and Dividend Equivalent Rights.
      “Award Agreement” means a written or electronic agreement setting forth the terms and provisions applicable to an Award granted under the Plan. Each Award Agreement is subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan.
      “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.
      “Cash-based Award” means an Award entitling the recipient to receive a cash-denominated payment.
      “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and any successor Code, and related rules, regulations and interpretations.
      “Covered Employee” means an employee who is a “Covered Employee” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code.
      “Deferred Stock Award” means an Award of phantom stock units to a grantee.

1


 

      “Dividend Equivalent Right” means an Award entitling the grantee to receive credits based on cash dividends that would have been paid on the shares of Stock specified in the Dividend Equivalent Right (or other award to which it relates) if such shares had been issued to and held by the grantee.
      “Effective Date” means the date on which the Plan is approved by stockholders as set forth in Section 19.
      “Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations thereunder.
      “Fair Market Value” of the Stock on any given date means the fair market value of the Stock determined in good faith by the Administrator; provided, however, that if the Stock is admitted to quotation on the National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotation System (“NASDAQ”), NASDAQ Global Market or another national securities exchange, the determination shall be made by reference to market quotations. If there are no market quotations for such date, the determination shall be made by reference to the last date preceding such date for which there are market quotations, provided further, however, that if the date for which Fair Market Value is determined is the first day when trading prices for the Stock are reported on a national securities exchange, the Fair Market Value shall be the “Price to the Public” (or equivalent) set forth on the cover page for the final prospectus relating to the Company’s Initial Public Offering.
      “Incentive Stock Option” means any Stock Option designated and qualified as an “incentive stock option” as defined in Section 422 of the Code.
      “Initial Public Offering” means the consummation of the first fully underwritten, firm commitment public offering pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Act covering the offer and sale by the Company of its equity securities, or such other event as a result of or following which the Stock shall be publicly held.
      “Non-Employee Director” means a member of the Board who is not also an employee of the Company or any Subsidiary.
      “Non-Qualified Stock Option” means any Stock Option that is not an Incentive Stock Option.
      “Option” or “Stock Option” means any option to purchase shares of Stock granted pursuant to Section 5.
      “Restricted Stock Award” means an Award entitling the recipient to acquire, at such purchase price (which may be zero) as determined by the Administrator, shares of Stock subject to such restrictions and conditions as the Administrator may determine at the time of grant.
      “Sale Event” shall mean (i) the sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company on a consolidated basis to an unrelated person or entity, (ii) a merger, reorganization or consolidation in which the outstanding shares of Stock are converted into or exchanged for securities of the successor entity and the holders of the Company’s outstanding voting power

2


 

immediately prior to such transaction do not own a majority of the outstanding voting power of the successor entity immediately upon completion of such transaction, or (iii) the sale of all of the Stock of the Company to an unrelated person or entity.
     " Sale Price ” means the value as determined by the Administrator of the consideration payable, or otherwise to be received by stockholders, per share of Stock pursuant to a Sale Event.
      “Section 409A” means Section 409A of the Code and the regulations and other guidance promulgated thereunder.
      “Stock” means the Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company, subject to adjustments pursuant to Section 3.
      “Stock Appreciation Right” means an Award entitling the recipient to receive shares of Stock having a value equal to the excess of the Fair Market Value of the Stock on the date of exercise over the exercise price of the Stock Appreciation Right multiplied by the number of shares of Stock with respect to which the Stock Appreciation Right shall have been exercised.
      “Subsidiary” means any corporation or other entity (other than the Company) in which the Company has at least a 50 percent interest, either directly or indirectly.
      “Ten Percent Owner” means an employee who owns or is deemed to own (by reason of the attribution rules of Section 424(d) of the Code) more than 10 percent of the combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any parent or subsidiary corporation.
      “Unrestricted Stock Award” means an Award of shares of Stock free of any restrictions.
SECTION 2.   ADMINISTRATION OF PLAN; ADMINISTRATOR AUTHORITY TO SELECT GRANTEES AND DETERMINE AWARDS
     (a)  Administration of Plan . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator.
     (b)  Powers of Administrator . The Administrator shall have the power and authority to grant Awards consistent with the terms of the Plan, including the power and authority:
          (i) to select the individuals to whom Awards may from time to time be granted;
          (ii) to determine the time or times of grant, and the extent, if any, of Incentive Stock Options, Non-Qualified Stock Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, Restricted Stock Awards, Deferred Stock Awards, Unrestricted Stock Awards, Cash-based Awards and Dividend Equivalent Rights, or any combination of the foregoing, granted to any one or more grantees;
          (iii) to determine the number of shares of Stock to be covered by any Award;
          (iv) to determine and modify from time to time the terms and conditions, including restrictions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, of any Award, which terms and

3


 

conditions may differ among individual Awards and grantees, and to approve the form of written instruments evidencing the Awards;
          (v) to accelerate at any time the exercisability or vesting of all or any portion of any Award;
          (vi) subject to the provisions of Section 5(a)(ii), to extend at any time the period in which Stock Options may be exercised; and
          (vii) at any time to adopt, alter and repeal such rules, guidelines and practices for administration of the Plan and for its own acts and proceedings as it shall deem advisable; to interpret the terms and provisions of the Plan and any Award (including related written instruments); to make all determinations it deems advisable for the administration of the Plan; to decide all disputes arising in connection with the Plan; and to otherwise supervise the administration of the Plan.
     All decisions and interpretations of the Administrator shall be binding on all persons, including the Company and Plan grantees.
     (c)  Delegation of Authority to Grant Options . Intentionally Deleted.
     (d)  Award Agreement . Awards under the Plan shall be evidenced by Award Agreements that set forth the terms, conditions and limitations for each Award which may include, without limitation, the term of an Award, the provisions applicable in the event employment or service terminates, and the Company’s authority to unilaterally or bilaterally amend, modify, suspend, cancel or rescind an Award.
     (e)  Indemnification . Neither the Board nor the Administrator, nor any member of either or any delegate thereof, shall be liable for any act, omission, interpretation, construction or determination made in good faith in connection with the Plan, and the members of the Board and the Administrator (and any delegate thereof) shall be entitled in all cases to indemnification and reimbursement by the Company in respect of any claim, loss, damage or expense (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees) arising or resulting therefrom to the fullest extent permitted by law and/or under the Company’s articles or bylaws or any directors’ and officers’ liability insurance coverage which may be in effect from time to time and/or any indemnification agreement between such individual and the Company.
     (f)  Foreign Award Recipients . Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, in order to comply with the laws in other countries in which the Company and its Subsidiaries operate or have employees or other individuals eligible for Awards, the Administrator, in its sole discretion, shall have the power and authority to: (i) determine which Subsidiaries shall be covered by the Plan; (ii) determine which individuals outside the United States are eligible to participate in the Plan; (iii) modify the terms and conditions of any Award granted to individuals outside the United States to comply with applicable foreign laws; (iv) establish subplans and modify exercise procedures and other terms and procedures, to the extent the Administrator determines such actions to be necessary or advisable (and such subplans and/or modifications shall be attached to this Plan as appendices); provided, however, that no such subplans and/or modifications shall increase the share limitations contained in Section 3(a)

4


 

hereof; and (v) take any action, before or after an Award is made, that the Administrator determines to be necessary or advisable to obtain approval or comply with any local governmental regulatory exemptions or approvals. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Administrator may not take any actions hereunder, and no Awards shall be granted, that would violate the Exchange Act or any other applicable United States securities law, the Code, or any other applicable United States governing statute or law.
SECTION 3.   STOCK ISSUABLE UNDER THE PLAN; MERGERS; SUBSTITUTION
     (a)  Stock Issuable . The maximum number of shares of Stock reserved and available for issuance under the Plan shall be the sum of (i) 2,600,000 shares, (ii) the number of Shares under the Company’s Amended and Restated 2000 Stock Option Plan and 2005 Stock Appreciation Rights Plan (together, the “Prior Plans”) which are not needed to fulfill the Company’s obligations for awards issued under the Prior Plans as a result of forfeiture, expiration, cancellation, termination or net issuances of awards thereunder, and (iii) on April 1, 2008 and on each April 1 thereafter, an additional number of shares equal to the lower of (A) two and nine tenths percent (2.9%) of the outstanding number of shares of Stock on the immediately preceding March 31, or (B) such lower number of shares of Stock as may be determined by the Board of Directors, in each case subject to adjustment as provided in Section 3(b). For purposes of this limitation, the shares of Stock underlying any Awards that are forfeited, canceled, held back upon exercise of an Option or settlement of an Award to cover the exercise price or tax withholding, reacquired by the Company prior to vesting, satisfied without the issuance of Stock or otherwise terminated (other than by exercise) (including any such Awards under the Prior Plans) shall be added back to the shares of Stock available for issuance under the Plan. Subject to such overall limitations, shares of Stock may be issued up to such maximum number pursuant to any type or types of Award; provided, however, that (i) Incentive Stock Options may be granted with respect to no more than 2,600,000 shares, plus on each April 1, starting April 1, 2008, an additional number of shares equal to the lesser of (A) two and nine tenths percent (2.9%) of the outstanding number of shares of Stock on the immediately preceding March 31 and (B) 2,600,000 shares of Stock and (ii) Stock Options or Stock Appreciation Rights with respect to no more than 3,000,000 shares of Stock may be granted to any one individual grantee during any one calendar year period. The shares available for issuance under the Plan may be authorized but unissued shares of Stock or shares of Stock reacquired by the Company.
     (b)  Changes in Stock . Subject to Section 3(c) hereof, if, as a result of any reorganization, recapitalization, reclassification, stock dividend, stock split, reverse stock split or other similar change in the Company’s capital stock, the outstanding shares of Stock are increased or decreased or are exchanged for a different number or kind of shares or other securities of the Company, or additional shares or new or different shares or other securities of the Company or other non-cash assets are distributed with respect to such shares of Stock or other securities, or, if, as a result of any merger or consolidation, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, the outstanding shares of Stock are converted into or exchanged for securities of the Company or any successor entity (or a parent or subsidiary thereof), the Administrator shall make an appropriate or proportionate adjustment in (i) the maximum number of shares reserved for issuance under the Plan, (ii) the number of Stock Options or Stock Appreciation Rights that can be granted to any one individual grantee, (iii) the number and kind of shares or other securities subject to any then outstanding Awards under the Plan, (iv) the

5


 

repurchase price, if any, per share subject to each outstanding Restricted Stock Award and (v) the price for each share subject to any then outstanding Stock Options and Stock Appreciation Rights under the Plan, without changing the aggregate exercise price (i.e., the exercise price multiplied by the number of Stock Options and Stock Appreciation Rights) as to which such Stock Options and Stock Appreciation Rights remain exercisable. The Administrator shall also make equitable or proportionate adjustments in the number of shares subject to outstanding Awards and the exercise price and the terms of outstanding Awards to take into consideration cash dividends paid other than in the ordinary course or any other extraordinary corporate event. The adjustment by the Administrator shall be final, binding and conclusive. No fractional shares of Stock shall be issued under the Plan resulting from any such adjustment, but the Administrator in its discretion may make a cash payment in lieu of fractional shares.
     (c)  Mergers and Other Transactions . Except as the Administrator may otherwise specify with respect to particular Awards in the relevant Award documentation, in the case of and subject to the consummation of a Sale Event, all Options and Stock Appreciation Rights that are not exercisable immediately prior to the effective time of the Sale Event shall become fully exercisable as of the effective time of the Sale Event, all other Awards with time-based vesting, conditions or restrictions shall become fully vested and nonforfeitable as of the effective time of the Sale Event and all Awards with conditions and restrictions relating to the attainment of performance goals may become vested and nonforfeitable in connection with a Sale Event in the Administrator’s discretion, unless, in any case, the parties to the Sale Event agree that Awards will be assumed or continued by the successor entity. Upon the effective time of the Sale Event, the Plan and all outstanding Awards granted hereunder shall terminate, unless provision is made in connection with the Sale Event in the sole discretion of the parties thereto for the assumption or continuation of Awards theretofore granted by the successor entity, or the substitution of such Awards with new Awards of the successor entity or parent thereof, with appropriate adjustment as to the number and kind of shares and, if appropriate, the per share exercise prices, as such parties shall agree (after taking into account any acceleration hereunder). In the event of such termination, (i) the Company shall have the option (in its sole discretion) to make or provide for a cash payment to the grantees holding Options and Stock Appreciation Rights, in exchange for the cancellation thereof, in an amount equal to the difference between (A) the Sale Price multiplied by the number of shares of Stock subject to outstanding Options and Stock Appreciation Rights (to the extent then exercisable (after taking into account any acceleration hereunder) at prices not in excess of the Sale Price) and (B) the aggregate exercise price of all such outstanding Options and Stock Appreciation Rights; or (ii) each grantee shall be permitted, within a specified period of time prior to the consummation of the Sale Event as determined by the Administrator, to exercise all outstanding Options and Stock Appreciation Rights held by such grantee.
     (d)  Substitute Awards . The Administrator may grant Awards under the Plan in substitution for stock and stock based awards held by employees, directors or other key persons of another corporation in connection with the merger or consolidation of the employing corporation with the Company or a Subsidiary or the acquisition by the Company or a Subsidiary of property or stock of the employing corporation. The Administrator may direct that the substitute awards be granted on such terms and conditions as the Administrator considers appropriate in the circumstances. Any substitute Awards granted under the Plan shall not count against the share limitation set forth in Section 3(a).

6


 

SECTION 4. ELIGIBILITY
     Grantees under the Plan will be such full or part-time officers and other employees, Non-Employee Directors and key persons (including consultants and prospective employees) of the Company and its Subsidiaries as are selected from time to time by the Administrator in its sole discretion.
SECTION 5. STOCK OPTIONS
     Any Stock Option granted under the Plan shall be in such form as the Administrator may from time to time approve.
     Stock Options granted under the Plan may be either Incentive Stock Options or Non-Qualified Stock Options. Incentive Stock Options may be granted only to employees of the Company or any Subsidiary that is a “subsidiary corporation” within the meaning of Section 424(f) of the Code. To the extent that any Option does not qualify as an Incentive Stock Option, it shall be deemed a Non-Qualified Stock Option.
     (a)  Stock Options Granted to Employees and Key Persons . The Administrator in its discretion may grant Stock Options to eligible employees and key persons of the Company or any Subsidiary. Stock Options granted pursuant to this Section 5(a) shall be subject to the following terms and conditions and shall contain such additional terms and conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Administrator shall deem desirable. If the Administrator so determines, Stock Options may be granted in lieu of cash compensation at the optionee’s election, subject to such terms and conditions as the Administrator may establish.
          (i) Exercise Price . The exercise price per share for the Stock covered by a Stock Option granted pursuant to this Section 5(a) shall be determined by the Administrator at the time of grant but shall not be less than 100 percent of the Fair Market Value on the date of grant. In the case of an Incentive Stock Option that is granted to a Ten Percent Owner, the option price of such Incentive Stock Option shall be not less than 110 percent of the Fair Market Value on the grant date.
          (ii) Option Term . The term of each Stock Option shall be fixed by the Administrator, but no Stock Option shall be exercisable more than ten years after the date the Stock Option is granted. In the case of an Incentive Stock Option that is granted to a Ten Percent Owner, the term of such Stock Option shall be no more than five years from the date of grant.
          (iii) Exercisability; Rights of a Stockholder . Stock Options shall become exercisable at such time or times, whether or not in installments, as shall be determined by the Administrator at or after the grant date. The Administrator may at any time accelerate the exercisability of all or any portion of any Stock Option. An optionee shall have the rights of a stockholder only as to shares acquired upon the exercise of a Stock Option and not as to unexercised Stock Options.
          (iv) Method of Exercise . Stock Options may be exercised in whole or in part, by giving written notice of exercise to the Company, specifying the number of shares to be

7


 

purchased. Payment of the purchase price may be made by one or more of the following methods to the extent provided in the Option Award Agreement:
          (A) In cash, by certified or bank check or other instrument acceptable to the Administrator;
          (B) Through the delivery (or attestation to the ownership) of shares of Stock that have been purchased by the optionee on the open market or that are beneficially owned by the optionee and are not then subject to restrictions under any Company plan. Such surrendered shares shall be valued at Fair Market Value on the exercise date. To the extent required to avoid variable accounting treatment under FAS 123R or other applicable accounting rules, such surrendered shares shall have been owned by the optionee for at least six months; or
          (C) By the optionee delivering to the Company a properly executed exercise notice together with irrevocable instructions to a broker to promptly deliver to the Company cash or a check payable and acceptable to the Company for the purchase price; provided that in the event the optionee chooses to pay the purchase price as so provided, the optionee and the broker shall comply with such procedures and enter into such agreements of indemnity and other agreements as the Administrator shall prescribe as a condition of such payment procedure.
Payment instruments will be received subject to collection. The transfer to the optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent of the shares of Stock to be purchased pursuant to the exercise of a Stock Option will be contingent upon receipt from the optionee (or a purchaser acting in his stead in accordance with the provisions of the Stock Option) by the Company of the full purchase price for such shares and the fulfillment of any other requirements contained in the Option Award Agreement or applicable provisions of laws (including the satisfaction of any withholding taxes that the Company is obligated to withhold with respect to the optionee). In the event an optionee chooses to pay the purchase price by previously-owned shares of Stock through the attestation method, the number of shares of Stock transferred to the optionee upon the exercise of the Stock Option shall be net of the number of shares attested to. In the event that the Company establishes, for itself or using the services of a third party, an automated system for the exercise of Stock Options, such as a system using an internet website or interactive voice response, then the paperless exercise of Stock Options may be permitted through the use of such an automated system.
          (v) Annual Limit on Incentive Stock Options . To the extent required for “incentive stock option” treatment under Section 422 of the Code, the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the time of grant) of the shares of Stock with respect to which Incentive Stock Options granted under this Plan and any other plan of the Company or its parent and subsidiary corporations become exercisable for the first time by an optionee during any calendar year shall not exceed $100,000. To the extent that any Stock Option exceeds this limit, it shall constitute a Non-Qualified Stock Option.
     (b)  Stock Options Granted to Non-Employee Directors . The Administrator in its discretion may grant Non-Qualified Stock Options to Non-Employee Directors. Any such grant

8


 

may vary among individual Non-Employee Directors. Non-Qualified Stock Options granted pursuant to this Section 5(b) shall be subject to the following terms and conditions and shall contain such additional terms and conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Administrator shall deem desirable. If the Administrator so determines, Non-Qualified Stock Options may be granted in lieu of cash compensation at the optionee’s election, subject to such terms and conditions as the Administrator may establish.
          (i) Exercise Price . The exercise price per share for the Stock covered by a Stock Option granted under this Section 5(b) shall be equal to the Fair Market Value of the Stock on the date the Stock Option is granted.
          (ii) Exercise; Termination .
          (A) Options shall become exercisable at such time or times, whether or not in installments, as shall be determined by the Administrator at or after the grant date. The Administrator may at any time accelerate the exercisability of all or any portion of any Stock Option. An Option issued under this Section 5(b) shall not be exercisable after the expiration of ten years from the date of grant.
          (B) Options granted under this Section 5(b) may be exercised only by written notice to the Company specifying the number of shares to be purchased. Payment of the full purchase price of the shares to be purchased may be made by one or more of the methods specified in Section 5(a)(iv). An optionee shall have the rights of a stockholder only as to shares acquired upon the exercise of a Stock Option and not as to unexercised Stock Options.
SECTION 6.   STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS
     (a)  Exercise Price of Stock Appreciation Rights . The exercise price of a Stock Appreciation Right shall not be less than 100 percent of the Fair Market Value of the Stock on the date of grant (or more than the Stock Option exercise price per share, if the Stock Appreciation Right was granted in tandem with a Stock Option).
     (b)  Grant and Exercise of Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted by the Administrator in tandem with, or independently of, any Stock Option granted pursuant to Section 5 of the Plan. In the case of a Stock Appreciation Right granted in tandem with a Non-Qualified Stock Option, such Stock Appreciation Right may be granted either at or after the time of the grant of such Option. In the case of a Stock Appreciation Right granted in tandem with an Incentive Stock Option, such Stock Appreciation Right may be granted only at the time of the grant of the Option.
     A Stock Appreciation Right or applicable portion thereof granted in tandem with a Stock Option shall terminate and no longer be exercisable upon the termination or exercise of the related Option.
     (c)  Terms and Conditions of Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights shall be subject to such terms and conditions as shall be determined from time to time by the Administrator, subject to the following:

9


 

          (i) Stock Appreciation Rights granted in tandem with Options shall be exercisable at such time or times and to the extent that the related Stock Options shall be exercisable.
          (ii) Upon exercise of a Stock Appreciation Right, the applicable portion of any related Option shall be surrendered.
          (iii) Stock Appreciation Rights may have a term of no more than ten years.
SECTION 7.   RESTRICTED STOCK AWARDS
     (a)  Nature of Restricted Stock Awards . The Administrator shall determine the restrictions and conditions applicable to each Restricted Stock Award at the time of grant. Conditions may be based on continuing employment (or other service relationship) and/or achievement of pre-established performance goals and objectives. The grant of a Restricted Stock Award is contingent on the grantee executing the Restricted Stock Award Agreement. The terms and conditions of each such Award Agreement shall be determined by the Administrator, and such terms and conditions may differ among individual Awards and grantees.
     (b)  Rights as a Stockholder . Upon execution of the Restricted Stock Award Agreement and payment of any applicable purchase price, a grantee shall have the rights of a stockholder with respect to the voting of the Restricted Stock, subject to such conditions contained in the Restricted Stock Award Agreement. Unless the Administrator shall otherwise determine, (i) uncertificated Restricted Stock shall be accompanied by a notation on the records of the Company or the transfer agent to the effect that they are subject to forfeiture until such Restricted Stock are vested as provided in Section 7(d) below, and (ii) certificated Restricted Stock shall remain in the possession of the Company until such Restricted Stock is vested as provided in Section 7(d) below, and the grantee shall be required, as a condition of the grant, to deliver to the Company such instruments of transfer as the Administrator may prescribe.
     (c)  Restrictions . Restricted Stock may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged or otherwise encumbered or disposed of except as specifically provided herein or in the Restricted Stock Award Agreement. Except as may otherwise be provided by the Administrator either in the Award Agreement or, subject to Section 16 below, in writing after the Award Agreement is issued, if any, if a grantee’s employment (or other service relationship) with the Company and its Subsidiaries terminates for any reason, any Restricted Stock that has not vested at the time of termination shall automatically and without any requirement of notice to such grantee from or other action by or on behalf of, the Company be deemed to have been reacquired by the Company at its original purchase price (if any) from such grantee or such grantee’s legal representative simultaneously with such termination of employment (or other service relationship), and thereafter shall cease to represent any ownership of the Company by the grantee or rights of the grantee as a stockholder. Following such deemed reacquisition of unvested Restricted Stock that are represented by physical certificates, a grantee shall surrender such certificates to the Company upon request without consideration.
     (d)  Vesting of Restricted Stock . The Administrator at the time of grant shall specify the date or dates and/or the attainment of pre-established performance goals, objectives and other

10


 

conditions on which the non-transferability of the Restricted Stock and the Company’s right of repurchase or forfeiture shall lapse. Subsequent to such date or dates and/or the attainment of such pre-established performance goals, objectives and other conditions, the shares on which all restrictions have lapsed shall no longer be Restricted Stock and shall be deemed “vested.” Except as may otherwise be provided by the Administrator either in the Award Agreement or, subject to Section 16 below, in writing after the Award Agreement is issued, a grantee’s rights in any shares of Restricted Stock that have not vested shall automatically terminate upon the grantee’s termination of employment (or other service relationship) with the Company and its Subsidiaries and such shares shall be subject to the provisions of Section 7(c) above.
SECTION 8.   DEFERRED STOCK AWARDS
     (a)  Nature of Deferred Stock Awards . The Administrator shall determine the restrictions and conditions applicable to each Deferred Stock Award at the time of grant. Conditions may be based on continuing employment (or other service relationship) and/or achievement of pre-established performance goals and objectives. The grant of a Deferred Stock Award is contingent on the grantee executing the Deferred Stock Award Agreement. The terms and conditions of each such Award Agreement shall be determined by the Administrator, and such terms and conditions may differ among individual Awards and grantees. At the end of the deferral period, the Deferred Stock Award, to the extent vested, shall be settled in the form of shares of Stock.
     (b)  Election to Receive Deferred Stock Awards in Lieu of Compensation . The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, permit a grantee to elect to receive a portion of future cash compensation otherwise due to such grantee in the form of a Deferred Stock Award. Any such election shall be made in writing and shall be delivered to the Company no later than the date specified by the Administrator and in accordance with Section 409A and such other rules and procedures established by the Administrator. Any such future cash compensation that the grantee elects to defer shall be converted to a fixed number of phantom stock units based on the Fair Market Value of Stock on the date the compensation would otherwise have been paid to the grantee if such payment had not been deferred as provided herein. The Administrator shall have the sole right to determine whether and under what circumstances to permit such elections and to impose such limitations and other terms and conditions thereon as the Administrator deems appropriate.
     (c)  Rights as a Stockholder . A grantee shall have the rights as a stockholder only as to shares of Stock acquired by the grantee upon settlement of a Deferred Stock Award; provided, however, that the grantee may be credited with Dividend Equivalent Rights with respect to the phantom stock units underlying his Deferred Stock Award, subject to such terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine.
     (d)  Termination . Except as may otherwise be provided by the Administrator either in the Award Agreement or, subject to Section 16 below, in writing after the Award Agreement is issued, a grantee’s right in all Deferred Stock Awards that have not vested shall automatically terminate upon the grantee’s termination of employment (or cessation of service relationship) with the Company and its Subsidiaries for any reason.

11


 

SECTION 9.   UNRESTRICTED STOCK AWARDS
     Grant or Sale of Unrestricted Stock. The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, grant (or sell at par value or such higher purchase price determined by the Administrator) an Unrestricted Stock Award under the Plan. Unrestricted Stock Awards may be granted in respect of past services or other valid consideration, or in lieu of cash compensation due to such grantee.
SECTION 10.   CASH-BASED AWARDS
     (a) Grant of Cash-based Awards. The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, grant Cash-based Awards to any grantee in such number or amount and upon such terms, and subject to such conditions, as the Administrator shall determine at the time of grant. The Administrator shall determine the maximum duration of the Cash-based Award, the amount of cash to which the Cash-based Award pertains, the conditions upon which the Cash-based Award shall become vested or payable, and such other provisions as the Administrator shall determine. Each Cash-based Award shall specify a cash-denominated payment amount, formula or payment ranges as determined by the Administrator. Payment, if any, with respect to a Cash-based Award shall be made in accordance with the terms of the Award and may be made in cash or in shares of Stock, as the Administrator determines.
SECTION 11.   DIVIDEND EQUIVALENT RIGHTS
     (a)  Dividend Equivalent Rights . A Dividend Equivalent Right may be granted hereunder to any grantee as a component of another Award or as a freestanding award. The terms and conditions of Dividend Equivalent Rights shall be specified in the Award Agreement. Dividend equivalents credited to the holder of a Dividend Equivalent Right may be paid currently or may be deemed to be reinvested in additional shares of Stock, which may thereafter accrue additional equivalents. Any such reinvestment shall be at Fair Market Value on the date of reinvestment or such other price as may then apply under a dividend reinvestment plan sponsored by the Company, if any. Dividend Equivalent Rights may be settled in cash or shares of Stock or a combination thereof, in a single installment or installments. A Dividend Equivalent Right granted as a component of another Award may provide that such Dividend Equivalent Right shall be settled upon exercise, settlement, or payment of, or lapse of restrictions on, such other Award, and that such Dividend Equivalent Right shall expire or be forfeited or annulled under the same conditions as such other Award. A Dividend Equivalent Right granted as a component of another Award may also contain terms and conditions different from such other Award.
     (b)  Interest Equivalents . Any Award under this Plan that is settled in whole or in part in cash on a deferred basis may provide in the grant for interest equivalents to be credited with respect to such cash payment. Interest equivalents may be compounded and shall be paid upon such terms and conditions as may be specified by the grant.
     (c)  Termination . Except as may otherwise be provided by the Administrator either in the Award Agreement or, subject to Section 16 below, in writing after the Award Agreement is issued, a grantee’s rights in all Dividend Equivalent Rights or interest equivalents granted as a component of another Award that has not vested shall automatically terminate upon the grantee’s

12


 

termination of employment (or cessation of service relationship) with the Company and its Subsidiaries for any reason.
SECTION 12.   TRANSFERABILITY OF AWARDS
     (a)  Transferability . Except as provided in Section 12(b) below, during a grantee’s lifetime, his or her Awards shall be exercisable only by the grantee, or by the grantee’s legal representative or guardian in the event of the grantee’s incapacity. No Awards shall be sold, assigned, transferred or otherwise encumbered or disposed of by a grantee other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution. No Awards shall be subject, in whole or in part, to attachment, execution, or levy of any kind, and any purported transfer in violation hereof shall be null and void.
     (b)  Administrator Action . Notwithstanding Section 12(a), the Administrator, in its discretion, may provide either in the Award Agreement regarding a given Award or by subsequent written approval that the grantee (who is an employee or director) may transfer his or her Awards (other than any Incentive Stock Options) to his or her immediate family members, to trusts for the benefit of such family members, or to partnerships in which such family members are the only partners, provided that the transferee agrees in writing with the Company to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Plan and the applicable Award.
     (c)  Family Member . For purposes of Section 12(b), “family member” shall mean a grantee’s child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, former spouse, sibling, niece, nephew, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, or sister-in-law, including adoptive relationships, any person sharing the grantee’s household (other than a tenant of the grantee), a trust in which these persons (or the grantee) have more than 50 percent of the beneficial interest, a foundation in which these persons (or the grantee) control the management of assets, and any other entity in which these persons (or the grantee) own more than 50 percent of the voting interests.
     (d)  Designation of Beneficiary . Each grantee to whom an Award has been made under the Plan may designate a beneficiary or beneficiaries to exercise any Award or receive any payment under any Award payable on or after the grantee’s death. Any such designation shall be on a form provided for that purpose by the Administrator and shall not be effective until received by the Administrator. If no beneficiary has been designated by a deceased grantee, or if the designated beneficiaries have predeceased the grantee, the beneficiary shall be the grantee’s estate.
SECTION 13.   TAX WITHHOLDING
     (a)  Payment by Grantee . Each grantee shall, no later than the date as of which the value of an Award or of any Stock or other amounts received thereunder first becomes includable in the gross income of the grantee for Federal income tax purposes, pay to the Company, or make arrangements satisfactory to the Administrator regarding payment of, any Federal, state, or local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld by the Company with respect to such income. The Company and its Subsidiaries shall, to the extent permitted by law, have the right to deduct any such taxes from any payment of any kind otherwise due to the

13


 

grantee. The Company’s obligation to deliver evidence of book entry (or stock certificates) to any grantee is subject to and conditioned on tax withholding obligations being satisfied by the grantee.
     (b)  Payment in Stock . Subject to approval by the Administrator, a grantee may elect to have the Company’s minimum required tax withholding obligation satisfied, in whole or in part, by authorizing the Company to withhold from shares of Stock to be issued pursuant to any Award a number of shares with an aggregate Fair Market Value (as of the date the withholding is effected) that would satisfy the withholding amount due.
  SECTION 14. ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO NONQUALIFIED DEFERRED COMPENSATION UNDER SECTION 409A .
     In the event any Stock Option or Stock Appreciation Right under the Plan is materially modified and deemed a new grant at a time when the Fair Market Value exceeds the exercise price, or any other Award is otherwise determined to constitute “nonqualified deferred compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A (a “409A Award”), the following additional conditions shall apply and shall supersede any contrary provisions of this Plan or the terms of any agreement relating to such 409A Award.
     (a)  Exercise and Distribution . Except as provided in Section 14(b) hereof, no 409A Award shall be exercisable or distributable earlier than upon one of the following:
          (i) Specified Time . A specified time or a fixed schedule set forth in the written instrument evidencing the 409A Award.
          (ii) Separation from Service . Separation from service (within the meaning of Section 409A) by the 409A Award grantee; provided, however, that if the 409A Award grantee is a “key employee” (as defined in Section 416(i) of the Code without regard to paragraph (5) thereof) and any of the Company’s Stock is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, exercise or distribution under this Section 14(a)(ii) may not be made before the date that is six months after the date of separation from service.
          (iii) Death . The date of death of the 409A Award grantee.
          (iv) Disability . The date the 409A Award grantee becomes disabled (within the meaning of Section 14(c)(ii) hereof).
          (v) Unforeseeable Emergency . The occurrence of an unforeseeable emergency (within the meaning of Section 14(c)(iii) hereof), but only if the net value (after payment of the exercise price) of the number of shares of Stock that become issuable does not exceed the amounts necessary to satisfy such emergency plus amounts necessary to pay taxes reasonably anticipated as a result of the exercise, after taking into account the extent to which the emergency is or may be relieved through reimbursement or compensation by insurance or otherwise or by liquidation of the grantee’s other assets (to the extent such liquidation would not itself cause severe financial hardship).

14


 

          (vi) Change in Control Event . The occurrence of a Change in Control Event (within the meaning of Section 14(c)(i) hereof), including the Company’s discretionary exercise of the right to accelerate vesting of such grant upon a Change in Control Event or to terminate the Plan or any 409A Award granted hereunder within 12 months of the Change in Control Event.
     (b)  No Acceleration . A 409A Award may not be accelerated or exercised prior to the time specified in Section 14(a) hereof, except in the case of one of the following events:
          (i) Domestic Relations Order . The 409A Award may permit the acceleration of the exercise or distribution time or schedule to an individual other than the grantee as may be necessary to comply with the terms of a domestic relations order (as defined in Section 414(p)(1)(B) of the Code).
          (ii) Conflicts of Interest . The 409A Award may permit the acceleration of the exercise or distribution time or schedule as may be necessary to comply with the terms of a certificate of divestiture (as defined in Section 1043(b)(2) of the Code).
          (iii) Change in Control Event . The Administrator may exercise the discretionary right to accelerate the vesting of such 409A Award upon a Change in Control Event or to terminate the Plan or any 409A Award granted thereunder within 12 months of the Change in Control Event and cancel the 409A Award for compensation.
     (c)  Definitions . Solely for purposes of this Section 14 and not for other purposes of the Plan, the following terms shall be defined as set forth below:
          (i) “Change in Control Event” means the occurrence of a change in the ownership of the Company, a change in effective control of the Company, or a change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the Company (as defined in Section 1.409A-3(g) of the proposed regulations promulgated under Section 409A by the Department of the Treasury on September 29, 2005 or any subsequent guidance).
          (ii) “Disabled” means a grantee who (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Company or its Subsidiaries.
          (iii) “Unforeseeable Emergency” means a severe financial hardship to the grantee resulting from an illness or accident of the grantee, the grantee’s spouse, or a dependent (as defined in Section 152(a) of the Code) of the grantee, loss of the grantee’s property due to casualty, or similar extraordinary and unforeseeable circumstances arising as a result of events beyond the control of the grantee.

15


 

SECTION 15.   TRANSFER, LEAVE OF ABSENCE, ETC .
     For purposes of the Plan, the following events shall not be deemed a termination of employment:
     (a) a transfer to the employment of the Company from a Subsidiary or from the Company to a Subsidiary, or from one Subsidiary to another; or
     (b) an approved leave of absence for military service or sickness, or for any other purpose approved by the Company, if the employee’s right to re-employment is guaranteed either by a statute or by contract or under the policy pursuant to which the leave of absence was granted or if the Administrator otherwise so provides in writing.
SECTION 16.   AMENDMENTS AND TERMINATION
     The Board may, at any time, amend or discontinue the Plan and the Administrator may, at any time, amend or cancel any outstanding Award for the purpose of satisfying changes in law or for any other lawful purpose, but no such action shall adversely affect rights under any outstanding Award without the holder’s consent unless otherwise required by, or necessary to comply with, applicable law. Except as provided in Section 3(b) or 3(c), in no event may the Administrator exercise its discretion to reduce the exercise price of outstanding Stock Options or Stock Appreciation Rights or effect repricing through cancellation and re-grants. Any material Plan amendments (other than amendments that curtail the scope of the Plan), including any Plan amendments that (i) increase the number of shares reserved for issuance under the Plan, (ii) expand the type of Awards available under, materially expand the eligibility to participate in, or materially extend the term of, the Plan, or (iii) materially change the method of determining Fair Market Value, shall be subject to approval by the Company stockholders entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders. In addition, to the extent determined by the Administrator to be required by the Code to ensure that Incentive Stock Options granted under the Plan are qualified under Section 422 of the Code or to ensure that compensation earned under Awards qualifies as performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Code, Plan amendments shall be subject to approval by the Company stockholders entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders. Nothing in this Section 16 shall limit the Administrator’s authority to take any action permitted pursuant to Section 3(c).
SECTION 17.   STATUS OF PLAN
     With respect to the portion of any Award that has not been exercised and any payments in cash, Stock or other consideration not received by a grantee, a grantee shall have no rights greater than those of a general creditor of the Company unless the Administrator shall otherwise expressly determine in connection with any Award or Awards. In its sole discretion, the Administrator may authorize the creation of trusts or other arrangements to meet the Company’s obligations to deliver Stock or make payments with respect to Awards hereunder, provided that the existence of such trusts or other arrangements is consistent with the foregoing sentence.

16


 

SECTION 18.   GENERAL PROVISIONS
     (a)  No Distribution . The Administrator may require each person acquiring Stock pursuant to an Award to represent to and agree with the Company in writing that such person is acquiring the shares without a view to distribution thereof.
     (b)  Delivery of Stock Certificates . Stock certificates to grantees under this Plan shall be deemed delivered for all purposes when the Company or a stock transfer agent of the Company shall have mailed such certificates in the United States mail, addressed to the grantee, at the grantee’s last known address on file with the Company. Uncertificated Stock shall be deemed delivered for all purposes when the Company or a Stock transfer agent of the Company shall have given to the grantee by electronic mail (with proof of receipt) or by United States mail, addressed to the grantee, at the grantee’s last known address on file with the Company, notice of issuance and recorded the issuance in its records (which may include electronic “book entry” records). Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Company shall not be required to issue or deliver any certificates evidencing shares of Stock pursuant to the exercise of any Award, unless and until the Board has determined, with advice of counsel (to the extent the Board deems such advice necessary or advisable), that the issuance and delivery of such certificates is in compliance with all applicable laws, regulations of governmental authorities and, if applicable, the requirements of any exchange on which the shares of Stock are listed, quoted or traded. All Stock certificates delivered pursuant to the Plan shall be subject to any stop-transfer orders and other restrictions as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to comply with federal, state or foreign jurisdiction, securities or other laws, rules and quotation system on which the Stock is listed, quoted or traded. The Administrator may place legends on any Stock certificate to reference restrictions applicable to the Stock. In addition to the terms and conditions provided herein, the Board may require that an individual make such reasonable covenants, agreements, and representations as the Board, in its discretion, deems necessary or advisable in order to comply with any such laws, regulations, or requirements. The Administrator shall have the right to require any individual to comply with any timing or other restrictions with respect to the settlement or exercise of any Award, including a window-period limitation, as may be imposed in the discretion of the Administrator.
     (c)  Stockholder Rights . Until Stock is deemed delivered in accordance with Section 18(b), no right to vote or receive dividends or any other rights of a stockholder will exist with respect to shares of Stock to be issued in connection with an Award, notwithstanding the exercise of a Stock Option or any other action by the grantee with respect to an Award.
     (d)  Other Compensation Arrangements; No Employment Rights . Nothing contained in this Plan shall prevent the Board from adopting other or additional compensation arrangements, including trusts, and such arrangements may be either generally applicable or applicable only in specific cases. The adoption of this Plan and the grant of Awards do not confer upon any employee any right to continued employment with the Company or any Subsidiary.
     (e)  Trading Policy Restrictions . Option exercises and other Awards under the Plan shall be subject to such Company’s insider trading policy and procedures, as in effect from time to time.

17


 

     (f)  Forfeiture of Awards under Sarbanes-Oxley Act . If the Company is required to prepare an accounting restatement due to the material noncompliance of the Company, as a result of misconduct, with any financial reporting requirement under the securities laws, then any grantee who is one of the individuals subject to automatic forfeiture under Section 304 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 shall reimburse the Company for the amount of any Award received by such individual under the Plan during the 12-month period following the first public issuance or filing with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission, as the case may be, of the financial document embodying such financial reporting requirement.
SECTION 19.   EFFECTIVE DATE OF PLAN
     This Plan shall become effective upon approval by the holders of a majority of the votes cast at a meeting of stockholders at which a quorum is present or pursuant to written consent. No grants of Stock Options and other Awards may be made hereunder after the tenth anniversary of the Effective Date and no grants of Incentive Stock Options may be made hereunder after the tenth anniversary of the date the Plan is approved by the Board.
SECTION 20.   GOVERNING LAW
     This Plan and all Awards and actions taken thereunder shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, applied without regard to conflict of law principles.
DATE APPROVED BY BOARD OF DIRECTORS: May 14, 2007
DATE APPROVED BY STOCKHOLDERS: May 22, 2007

18


 

INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT
UNDER THE VIRTUSA CORPORATION
2007 STOCK OPTION AND INCENTIVE PLAN
         
Name of Optionee:
       
 
       
No. of Option Shares:
       
 
       
Option Exercise Price per Share: $
       
 
       
    [FMV on Grant Date (110% of FMV if a 10% owner)]
Grant Date:
       
 
       
Expiration Date:
       
 
       
    [up to 10 years (5 if a 10% owner)]
     Pursuant to the Virtusa Corporation 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan as amended through the date hereof (the “Plan”), Virtusa Corporation (the “Company”) hereby grants to the Optionee named above an option (the “Stock Option”) to purchase on or prior to the Expiration Date specified above all or part of the number of shares of Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share (the “Stock”), of the Company specified above at the Option Exercise Price per Share specified above subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein and in the Plan.
     1.  Exercisability Schedule . No portion of this Stock Option may be exercised until such portion shall have become exercisable. Except as set forth below, and subject to the discretion of the Administrator (as defined in Section 2 of the Plan) to accelerate the exercisability schedule hereunder, this Stock Option shall be exercisable with respect to the following number of Option Shares on the dates indicated:
                 
Incremental Number of        
Option Shares Exercisable*       Exercisability Date
 
               
 
      (___%)        
 
               
 
               
 
      (___%)        
 
               
 
               
 
      (___%)        
 
               
 
               
 
      (___%)        
 
               
 
*   Max. of $100,000 per yr.
     Once exercisable, this Stock Option shall continue to be exercisable at any time or times prior to the close of business on the Expiration Date, subject to the provisions hereof and of the Plan.

 


 

2. Manner of Exercise .
          (a) The Optionee may exercise this Stock Option only in the following manner: from time to time on or prior to the Expiration Date of this Stock Option, the Optionee may give written notice to the Administrator of his or her election to purchase some or all of the Option Shares purchasable at the time of such notice. This notice shall specify the number of Option Shares to be purchased.
     Payment of the purchase price for the Option Shares may be made by one or more of the following methods: (i) in cash, by certified or bank check or other instrument acceptable to the Administrator; (ii) through the delivery (or attestation to the ownership) of shares of Stock that have been purchased by the Optionee on the open market or that are beneficially owned by the Optionee and are not then subject to any restrictions under any Company plan and that otherwise satisfy any holding periods as may be required by the Administrator; (iii) by the Optionee delivering to the Company a properly executed exercise notice together with irrevocable instructions to a broker to promptly deliver to the Company cash or a check payable and acceptable to the Company to pay the option purchase price, provided that in the event the Optionee chooses to pay the option purchase price as so provided, the Optionee and the broker shall comply with such procedures and enter into such agreements of indemnity and other agreements as the Administrator shall prescribe as a condition of such payment procedure; or (iv) a combination of (i), (ii) and (iii) above. Payment instruments will be received subject to collection.
     The transfer to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent of the Option Shares will be contingent upon (i) the Company’s receipt from the Optionee of the full purchase price for the Option Shares, as set forth above, (ii) the fulfillment of any other requirements contained herein or in the Plan or in any other agreement or provision of laws, and (iii) the receipt by the Company of any agreement, statement or other evidence that the Company may require to satisfy itself that the issuance of Stock to be purchased pursuant to the exercise of Stock Options under the Plan and any subsequent resale of the shares of Stock will be in compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In the event the Optionee chooses to pay the purchase price by previously-owned shares of Stock through the attestation method, the number of shares of Stock transferred to the Optionee upon the exercise of the Stock Option shall be net of the shares attested to.
          (b) The shares of Stock purchased upon exercise of this Stock Option shall be transferred to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent upon compliance to the satisfaction of the Administrator with all requirements under applicable laws or regulations in connection with such issuance and with the requirements hereof and of the Plan. The determination of the Administrator as to such compliance shall be final and binding on the Optionee. The Optionee shall not be deemed to be the holder of, or to have any of the rights of a holder with respect to, any shares of Stock subject to this Stock Option unless and until this Stock Option shall have been exercised pursuant to the terms hereof, the Company or the transfer agent shall have transferred the shares to the Optionee, and the Optionee’s name shall have been entered as the stockholder of record on the books of the Company. Thereupon, the Optionee shall have full voting, dividend and other ownership rights with respect to such shares of Stock.

2


 

          (c) The minimum number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option may be exercised at any one time shall be 100 shares, unless the number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option is being exercised is the total number of shares subject to exercise under this Stock Option at the time.
          (d) Notwithstanding any other provision hereof or of the Plan, no portion of this Stock Option shall be exercisable after the Expiration Date hereof.
     3.  Termination of Employment . If the Optionee’s employment by the Company or a Subsidiary (as defined in the Plan) is terminated, the period within which to exercise the Stock Option may be subject to earlier termination as set forth below.
          (a) Termination Due to Death . If the Optionee’s employment terminates by reason of the Optionee’s death, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may thereafter be exercised by the Optionee’s legal representative or legatee for a period of 12 months from the date of death or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.
          (b) Termination Due to Disability . If the Optionee’s employment terminates by reason of the Optionee’s disability (as determined by the Administrator), any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may thereafter be exercised by the Optionee for a period of 12 months from the date of termination or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.
          (c) Termination for Cause . If the Optionee’s employment terminates for Cause, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date shall terminate immediately and be of no further force and effect. For purposes hereof, “Cause” shall mean, unless otherwise provided in an employment agreement between the Company and the Optionee, a determination by the Administrator that the Optionee shall be dismissed as a result of (i) any material breach by the Optionee of any agreement between the Optionee and the Company; (ii) the conviction of, indictment for or plea of nolo contendere by the Optionee to a felony or a crime involving moral turpitude; or (iii) any material misconduct or willful and deliberate non-performance (other than by reason of disability) by the Optionee of the Optionee’s duties to the Company.
          (d) Other Termination . If the Optionee’s employment terminates for any reason other than the Optionee’s death, the Optionee’s disability, or Cause, and unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may be exercised, to the extent exercisable on the date of termination, for a period of three months from the date of termination or until the Expiration Date, if earlier. Any portion of this Stock Option that is not exercisable on the date of termination shall terminate immediately and be of no further force or effect.
     The Administrator’s determination of the reason for termination of the Optionee’s employment shall be conclusive and binding on the Optionee and his or her representatives or legatees.
     4.  Incorporation of Plan . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Stock Option shall be subject to and governed by all the terms and conditions of the Plan, including the powers of the Administrator set forth in Section 2(b) of the Plan and the powers of the Administrator under Section 16 of the Plan to amend or cancel this Stock Option if required

3


 

by, or necessary to comply with, applicable law. Capitalized terms in this Agreement shall have the meaning specified in the Plan, unless a different meaning is specified herein.
     5.  Transferability . This Agreement is personal to the Optionee, is non-assignable and is not transferable in any manner, by operation of law or otherwise, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Stock Option is exercisable, during the Optionee’s lifetime, only by the Optionee, and thereafter, only by the Optionee’s legal representative or legatee.
     6.  Status of the Stock Option . This Stock Option is intended to qualify as an “incentive stock option” under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), but the Company does not represent or warrant that this Stock Option qualifies as such. The Optionee should consult with his or her own tax advisors regarding the tax effects of this Stock Option and the requirements necessary to obtain favorable income tax treatment under Section 422 of the Code, including, but not limited to, holding period requirements. To the extent any portion of this Stock Option does not so qualify as an “incentive stock option,” such portion shall be deemed to be a non-qualified stock option. If the Optionee intends to dispose or does dispose (whether by sale, gift, transfer or otherwise) of any Option Shares within the one-year period beginning on the date after the transfer of such shares to him or her, or within the two-year period beginning on the day after the grant of this Stock Option, he or she will so notify the Company within 30 days after such disposition.
     7.  Tax Withholding . The Optionee shall, not later than the date as of which the exercise of this Stock Option becomes a taxable event for Federal income tax purposes, pay to the Company or make arrangements satisfactory to the Administrator for payment of any Federal, state, and local taxes required by law to be withheld on account of such taxable event. The Optionee may elect to have the minimum required tax withholding obligation satisfied, in whole or in part, by authorizing the Company to withhold from shares of Stock to be issued a number of shares of Stock with an aggregate Fair Market Value that would satisfy the withholding amount due.
     8.  No Obligation to Continue Employment . Neither the Company nor any Subsidiary is obligated by or as a result of the Plan or this Agreement to continue the Optionee in employment and neither the Plan nor this Agreement shall interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate the employment of the Optionee at any time.

4


 

     9.  Notices . Notices hereunder shall be mailed or delivered to the Company at its principal place of business and shall be mailed or delivered to the Optionee at the address on file with the Company or, in either case, at such other address as one party may subsequently furnish to the other party in writing.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:      
    Title:   
       
 
The foregoing Agreement is hereby accepted and the terms and conditions thereof hereby agreed to by the undersigned.
             
Dated:
           
 
           
 
          Optionee’s Signature
 
           
 
          Optionee’s name and address:
 
           
 
           
 
           
 
           
 
           
 
           

5


 

NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT
FOR COMPANY EMPLOYEES
UNDER THE VIRTUSA CORPORATION
2007 STOCK OPTION AND INCENTIVE PLAN
     Pursuant to the Virtusa Corporation 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan as amended through the date hereof (the “ Plan ”), Virtusa Corporation, a Delaware corporation (together with its successors, the “ Company ”) hereby grants to the person named (the “ Optionee ” or (“ Grantee ”) in the Notice of Grant of Stock Option (the “ Notice ”) which is either attached hereto or provided electronically to the Optionee, a non-qualified stock option (the “ Stock Option ”) to purchase on or prior to the Expiration Date (as defined in the Notice) all or part of the number of shares of Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share (the “ Option Shares ”) of the Company specified in the Notice (under Number of Option Shares) at the Exercise Price per Share specified in the Notice, subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, the Notice and in the Plan, including the adjustment provision thereof. All capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise defined shall have the respective meanings set forth in the Notice and the Plan (as applicable). This Stock Option is not intended to be an “incentive stock option” under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
     1.  Exercisability Schedule . No portion of this Stock Option may be exercised until such portion shall have become exercisable. Except as set forth herein, and subject to the discretion of the Administrator (as defined in Section 2 of the Plan) to accelerate the exercisability schedule hereunder, this Stock Option shall be exercisable with respect to the number of Option Shares and on the dates as set forth in the Notice. Once exercisable, this Stock Option shall continue to be exercisable at any time or times prior to the close of business on the Expiration Date, subject to the provisions hereof, the Notice (including vesting provisions) and of the Plan.
     2.  Manner of Exercise .
          (a) The Optionee may exercise this Stock Option only in the following manner: from time to time on or prior to the Expiration Date of this Stock Option, the Optionee may give written notice to the Administrator of his or her election to purchase some or all of the Option Shares purchasable at the time of such notice. This notice shall specify the number of Option Shares to be purchased.
     Payment of the purchase price for the Option Shares may be made by one or more of the following methods: (i) in cash, by certified or bank check or other instrument acceptable to the Administrator; (ii) through the delivery (or attestation to the ownership) of shares of Stock that have been purchased by the Optionee on the open market or that are beneficially owned by the Optionee and are not then subject to any restrictions under any Company plan and that otherwise satisfy any holding periods as may be required by the Administrator; (iii) by the Optionee delivering to the Company a properly executed exercise notice together with irrevocable instructions to a broker to promptly deliver to the Company cash or a check payable and acceptable to the Company to pay the option purchase price, provided that in the event the Optionee chooses to pay the option purchase price as so provided, the Optionee and the broker shall comply with such procedures and enter into such agreements of indemnity and other

 


 

agreements as the Administrator shall prescribe as a condition of such payment procedure; or (iv) a combination of (i), (ii) and (iii) above. Payment instruments will be received subject to collection.
     The transfer to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent of the Option Shares will be contingent upon (i) the Company’s receipt from the Optionee of the full purchase price for the Option Shares, as set forth above, (ii) the fulfillment of any other requirements contained herein or in the Plan or in any other agreement or provision of laws, and (iii) the receipt by the Company of any agreement, statement or other evidence that the Company may require to satisfy itself that the issuance of Stock to be purchased pursuant to the exercise of Stock Options under the Plan and any subsequent resale of the shares of Stock will be in compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In the event the Optionee chooses to pay the purchase price by previously-owned shares of Stock through the attestation method, the number of shares of Stock transferred to the Optionee upon the exercise of the Stock Option shall be net of the Shares attested to.
          (b) The shares of Stock purchased upon exercise of this Stock Option shall be transferred to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent upon compliance to the satisfaction of the Administrator with all requirements under applicable laws or regulations in connection with such issuance and with the requirements hereof and of the Plan. The determination of the Administrator as to such compliance shall be final and binding on the Optionee. The Optionee shall not be deemed to be the holder of, or to have any of the rights of a holder with respect to, any shares of Stock subject to this Stock Option unless and until this Stock Option shall have been exercised pursuant to the terms hereof, the Company or the transfer agent shall have transferred the shares to the Optionee, and the Optionee’s name shall have been entered as the stockholder of record on the books of the Company. Thereupon, the Optionee shall have full voting, dividend and other ownership rights with respect to such shares of Stock.
          (c) The minimum number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option may be exercised at any one time shall be 100 shares, unless the number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option is being exercised is the total number of shares subject to exercise under this Stock Option at the time.
          (d) Notwithstanding any other provision hereof or of the Plan, no portion of this Stock Option shall be exercisable after the Expiration Date hereof.
     3.  Termination of Employment . If the Optionee’s employment by the Company or a Subsidiary (as defined in the Plan) is terminated, the period within which to exercise the Stock Option may be subject to earlier termination as set forth below.
          (a) Termination Due to Death . If the Optionee’s employment terminates by reason of the Optionee’s death, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may thereafter be exercised by the Optionee’s legal representative or legatee for a period of 12 months from the date of death or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.
          (b) Termination Due to Disability . If the Optionee’s employment terminates by reason of the Optionee’s disability (as determined by the Administrator), any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may thereafter be exercised by the Optionee for a period of 12 months from the date of termination or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.

2


 

          (c) Termination for Cause . If the Optionee’s employment terminates for Cause, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date shall terminate immediately and be of no further force and effect. For purposes hereof, “Cause” shall mean, unless otherwise provided in an employment agreement between the Company and the Optionee, a determination by the Administrator that the Optionee shall be dismissed as a result of (i) any material breach by the Optionee of any agreement between the Optionee and the Company; (ii) the conviction of, indictment for or plea of nolo contendere by the Optionee to a felony or a crime involving moral turpitude; or (iii) any material misconduct or willful and deliberate non-performance (other than by reason of disability) by the Optionee of the Optionee’s duties to the Company.
          (d) Other Termination . If the Optionee’s employment terminates for any reason other than the Optionee’s death, the Optionee’s disability or Cause, and unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may be exercised, to the extent exercisable on the date of termination, for a period of three months from the date of termination or until the Expiration Date, if earlier. Any portion of this Stock Option that is not exercisable on the date of termination shall terminate immediately and be of no further force or effect.
     The Administrator’s determination of the reason for termination of the Optionee’s employment shall be conclusive and binding on the Optionee and his or her representatives or legatees.
     4.  Incorporation of Plan . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Stock Option shall be subject to and governed by all the terms and conditions of the Plan, including the powers of the Administrator set forth in Section 2(b) of the Plan and the powers of the Administrator under Section 16 of the Plan to amend or cancel this Stock Option if required by, or necessary to comply with, applicable law. Capitalized terms in this Agreement shall have the meaning specified in the Plan, unless a different meaning is specified herein. The Board may, at any time, amend or discontinue the Plan and the Administrator may, at any time, amend or cancel any outstanding Award for the purpose of satisfying changes in law or for any other lawful purpose, but no such action shall adversely affect rights under any outstanding Award without the holder’s consent.
     5.  Transferability . This Agreement is personal to the Optionee, is non-assignable and is not transferable in any manner, by operation of law or otherwise, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Stock Option is exercisable, during the Optionee’s lifetime, only by the Optionee, and thereafter, only by the Optionee’s legal representative or legatee.
     6.  Tax Withholding . The Optionee shall, not later than the date as of which the exercise of this Stock Option becomes a taxable event for Federal income tax purposes, pay to the Company or make arrangements satisfactory to the Administrator for payment of any Federal, state, and local taxes required by law to be withheld on account of such taxable event. The Optionee may elect to have the minimum required tax withholding obligation satisfied, in whole or in part, by authorizing the Company to withhold from shares of Stock to be issued a number of shares of Stock with an aggregate Fair Market Value that would satisfy the withholding amount due.

3


 

     7.  No Obligation to Continue Employment . Neither the Company nor any Subsidiary is obligated by or as a result of the Plan or this Agreement to continue the Optionee in employment and neither the Plan nor this Agreement shall interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate the employment of the Optionee at any time.
     8.  Notices . Notices hereunder shall be mailed or delivered to the Company at its principal place of business and shall be mailed or delivered to the Optionee at the address on file with the Company or, in either case, at such other address as one party may subsequently furnish to the other party in writing.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:   /s/ Thomas R Holler    
    THOMAS R. HOLLER    
    EVP, Finance & CFO   
 

4


 

NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT
FOR NON-EMPLOYEE DIRECTORS
UNDER THE VIRTUSA CORPORATION
2007 STOCK OPTION AND INCENTIVE PLAN
     Pursuant to the Virtusa Corporation 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan as amended through the date hereof (the “ Plan ”), Virtusa Corporation, a Delaware corporation (together with its successors, the “ Company ”) hereby grants to the person named (the “ Optionee ” or (“ Grantee ”) in the Notice of Grant of Stock Option (the “ Notice ”) which is either attached hereto or provided electronically to the Optionee, a non-qualified stock option (the “ Stock Option ”) to purchase on or prior to the Expiration Date (as defined in the Notice) all or part of the number of shares of Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share (the “ Option Shares ”) of the Company specified in the Notice (under Number of Option Shares) at the Exercise Price per Share specified in the Notice, subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, the Notice and in the Plan, including the adjustment provision thereof. All capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise defined shall have the respective meanings set forth in the Notice and the Plan (as applicable). This Stock Option is not intended to be an “incentive stock option” under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
     1.  Exercisability Schedule . No portion of this Stock Option may be exercised until such portion shall have become exercisable. Except as set forth herein, and subject to the discretion of the Administrator (as defined in Section 2 of the Plan) to accelerate the exercisability schedule hereunder, this Stock Option shall be exercisable with respect to the number of Option Shares and on the dates as set forth in the Notice.
     In the case of and subject to the consummation of a Sale Event, the Optionee shall be entitled to a twelve (12) month acceleration of all unvested Option Shares so that the shares that would have vested in the one-year period following such Sale Event become immediately vested and the remaining unvested Option Shares would continue to vest quarterly but on a schedule that would be twelve (12) months earlier than had the Sale Event not transpired. Once exercisable, this Stock Option shall continue to be exercisable at any time or times prior to the close of business on the Expiration Date, subject to the provisions hereof and of the Plan.
     2.  Manner of Exercise .
          (a) The Optionee may exercise this Stock Option only in the following manner: from time to time on or prior to the Expiration Date of this Stock Option, the Optionee may give written notice to the Administrator of his or her election to purchase some or all of the Option Shares purchasable at the time of such notice. This notice shall specify the number of Option Shares to be purchased.
     Payment of the purchase price for the Option Shares may be made by one or more of the following methods: (i) in cash, by certified or bank check or other instrument acceptable to the Administrator; (ii) through the delivery (or attestation to the ownership) of shares of Stock that


 

have been purchased by the Optionee on the open market or that are beneficially owned by the Optionee and are not then subject to any restrictions under any Company plan and that otherwise satisfy any holding periods as may be required by the Administrator; (iii) by the Optionee delivering to the Company a properly executed exercise notice together with irrevocable instructions to a broker to promptly deliver to the Company cash or a check payable and acceptable to the Company to pay the option purchase price, provided that in the event the Optionee chooses to pay the option purchase price as so provided, the Optionee and the broker shall comply with such procedures and enter into such agreements of indemnity and other agreements as the Administrator shall prescribe as a condition of such payment procedure; or (iv) a combination of (i), (ii) and (iii) above. Payment instruments will be received subject to collection.
     The transfer to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent of the Option Shares will be contingent upon (i) the Company’s receipt from the Optionee of the full purchase price for the Option Shares, as set forth above, (ii) the fulfillment of any other requirements contained herein or in the Plan or in any other agreement or provision of laws, and (iii) the receipt by the Company of any agreement, statement or other evidence that the Company may require to satisfy itself that the issuance of Stock to be purchased pursuant to the exercise of Stock Options under the Plan and any subsequent resale of the shares of Stock will be in compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In the event the Optionee chooses to pay the purchase price by previously-owned shares of Stock through the attestation method, the number of shares of Stock transferred to the Optionee upon the exercise of the Stock Option shall be net of the Shares attested to.
          (b) The shares of Stock purchased upon exercise of this Stock Option shall be transferred to the Optionee on the records of the Company or of the transfer agent upon compliance to the satisfaction of the Administrator with all requirements under applicable laws or regulations in connection with such transfer and with the requirements hereof and of the Plan. The determination of the Administrator as to such compliance shall be final and binding on the Optionee. The Optionee shall not be deemed to be the holder of, or to have any of the rights of a holder with respect to, any shares of Stock subject to this Stock Option unless and until this Stock Option shall have been exercised pursuant to the terms hereof, the Company or the transfer agent shall have transferred the shares to the Optionee, and the Optionee’s name shall have been entered as the stockholder of record on the books of the Company. Thereupon, the Optionee shall have full voting, dividend and other ownership rights with respect to such shares of Stock.
          (c) The minimum number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option may be exercised at any one time shall be 100 shares, unless the number of shares with respect to which this Stock Option is being exercised is the total number of shares subject to exercise under this Stock Option at the time.
          (d) Notwithstanding any other provision hereof or of the Plan, no portion of this Stock Option shall be exercisable after the Expiration Date hereof.
     3.  Termination as Director . If the Optionee ceases to be a Director of the Company, the period within which to exercise the Stock Option may be subject to earlier termination as set forth below.

2


 

          (a) Termination by Reason of Death . If the Optionee ceases to be a Director by reason of the Optionee’s death, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may be exercised by his or her legal representative or legatee for a period of 12 months from the date of death or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.
          (b) Other Termination . If the Optionee ceases to be a Director for any reason other than the Optionee’s death, any portion of this Stock Option outstanding on such date may be exercised for a period of six months from the date of termination or until the Expiration Date, if earlier.
     4.  Incorporation of Plan . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Stock Option shall be subject to and governed by all the terms and conditions of the Plan, including the powers of the Administrator set forth in Section 2(b) of the Plan and the powers of the Administrator under Section 16 of the Plan to amend or cancel this Stock Option if required by, or necessary to comply with, applicable law. Capitalized terms in this Agreement shall have the meaning specified in the Plan, unless a different meaning is specified herein.
     5.  Transferability . This Agreement is personal to the Optionee, is non-assignable and is not transferable in any manner, by operation of law or otherwise, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Stock Option is exercisable, during the Optionee’s lifetime, only by the Optionee, and thereafter, only by the Optionee’s legal representative or legatee.
     6.  No Obligation to Continue as a Director . Neither the Plan nor this Stock Option confers upon the Optionee any rights with respect to continuance as a Director.
     7.  Notices . Notices hereunder shall be mailed or delivered to the Company at its principal place of business and shall be mailed or delivered to the Optionee at the address on file with the Company or, in either case, at such other address as one party may subsequently furnish to the other party in writing.
     8.  Amendment . Pursuant to Section 18 of the Plan, the Administrator may at any time amend or cancel any outstanding portion of this Stock Option, but no such action may be taken that adversely affects the Optionee’s rights under this Agreement without the Optionee’s consent.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:   /s/ Thomas R Holler    
    THOMAS R. HOLLER    
    EVP Finance & CFO   
 

3


 

RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD AGREEMENT
UNDER THE VIRTUSA CORPORATION
2007 STOCK OPTION AND INCENTIVE PLAN
Pursuant to the Virtusa Corporation 2007 Stock Option and Incentive Plan as amended through the date hereof (the “ Plan ”), Virtusa Corporation, a Delaware corporation (together with its successors, the “ Company ”) hereby grants to the person named (the “ Grantee ”) in the Notice of Grant of Restricted Stock Award (the “ Notice ”) which is either attached hereto or provided electronically to the Grantee, a Restricted Stock Award (a “ Restricted Stock Award ”). The Grantee shall receive the number of shares of Common Stock, par value $0.01 per share (the “ Stock ”) of the Company specified in the Notice, subject to the restrictions and conditions set forth herein, the Notice and in the Plan including the adjustment provision thereof. The Company acknowledges the receipt from the Grantee of an amount equal to the aggregate par value for the Stock in the form of cash, services or other appropriate consideration. All capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise defined shall have the respective meanings set forth in the Notice and the Plan (as applicable).
     1.  Acceptance of Award . The Grantee shall accept this Restricted Stock Award by (i) signing and delivering to the Company a copy of the Notice (or otherwise accepting by electronic approval in compliance with the Company’s electronic acceptance process), and (ii) delivering to the Company a stock power endorsed in blank. The shares of Restricted Stock granted hereunder shall be issued and held by the Company’s transfer agent in book entry form, and the Grantee’s name shall be entered as the stockholder of record on the books of the Company. The Grantee shall have all the rights of a stockholder with respect to such shares, including voting and dividend rights, subject, however, to the restrictions and conditions specified in Paragraph 2 below, the Plan and the Notice. .
     2.  Restrictions and Conditions .
          (a) Any book entries for the shares of Restricted Stock granted herein shall bear an appropriate legend, as determined by the Administrator in its sole discretion, to the effect that such shares are subject to restrictions as set forth herein and in the Plan.
          (b) Shares of Restricted Stock granted herein may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged or otherwise encumbered or disposed of by the Grantee prior to vesting.
          (c) If the Grantee’s employment with the Company and its Subsidiaries is voluntarily or involuntarily terminated for any reason (including death) and Grantee’s service relationship with the Company and its Subsidiaries is terminated, prior to vesting of shares of Restricted Stock granted herein, all shares of Restricted Stock not vested as of such date shall immediately and automatically be forfeited and returned to the Company.
     3.  Vesting of Restricted Stock . The restrictions and conditions in Paragraph 2 of this Agreement shall lapse on the Vesting Date or Dates specified in the Notice so long as the Grantee remains an employee of the Company or a Subsidiary on such Dates or otherwise

 


 

maintains a service relationship with the Company or its Subsidiaries. If a series of Vesting Dates is specified, then the restrictions and conditions in Paragraph 2 shall lapse only with respect to the number of shares of Restricted Stock specified as vested on such date. Subsequent to such Vesting Date or Dates, the shares of Stock on which all restrictions and conditions have lapsed shall no longer be deemed Restricted Stock. The Administrator may at any time accelerate the vesting schedule specified in this Paragraph 3.
     4.  Dividends . Dividends on shares of Restricted Stock shall be paid currently to the Grantee.
     5.  Incorporation of Plan . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Agreement shall be subject to and governed by all the terms and conditions of the Plan, including the powers of the Administrator set forth in Section 2(b) of the Plan and the powers of the Administrator under Section 16 of the Plan to amend or cancel this Restricted Stock Award if required by, or necessary to comply with, applicable law. Capitalized terms in this Agreement shall have the meaning specified in the Plan, unless a different meaning is specified herein.
     6.  Transferability . This Agreement is personal to the Grantee, is non-assignable and is not transferable in any manner, by operation of law or otherwise, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution.
     7.  Tax Withholding . The Grantee shall, not later than the date as of which the receipt of this Restricted Stock Award becomes a taxable event for Federal income tax purposes, pay to the Company or make arrangements satisfactory to the Administrator for payment of any Federal, state, and local taxes required by law to be withheld on account of such taxable event. Except in the case where an election is made pursuant to Paragraph 8 below, unless the Grantee makes arrangements satisfactory to the Administrator for the payment of the applicable Federal, state, and local taxes required by law to be withheld on account of such taxable event by the date of the taxable event, the Grantee shall and hereby does authorize the full settlement and satisfaction of the minimum tax withholding obligation in whole or, to the extent not settled and satisfied in full prior to or on such taxable event, in part, by authorizing the Company to withhold from shares of Stock to be issued or released by the transfer agent a number of shares of Stock with an aggregate Fair Market Value that would satisfy the withholding amount due; provided such arrangement is satisfactory to the Administrator.
     8.  Election Under Section 83(b) . The Grantee and the Company hereby agree that the Grantee may, within 30 days following the acceptance of this Restricted Stock Award as provided in Paragraph 1 hereof, file with the Internal Revenue Service and the Company an election under Section 83(b) of the Internal Revenue Code. In the event the Grantee makes such an election, he or she agrees to provide a copy of the election to the Company.
     9.  No Obligation to Continue Employment . Neither the Company nor any Subsidiary is obligated by or as a result of the Plan or this Agreement to continue the Grantee in employment and neither the Plan nor this Agreement shall interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate the employment of the Grantee at any time.

2


 

     10.  Notices . Notices hereunder shall be mailed or delivered to the Company at its principal place of business and shall be mailed or delivered to the Grantee at the address on file with the Company or, in either case, at such other address as one party may subsequently furnish to the other party in writing.
         
  VIRTUSA CORPORATION
 
 
  By:   /s/ Thomas R Holler    
    THOMAS R. HOLLER    
    EVP, Finance & CFO   
 

3

EXHIBIT 10.22
SUDATH PERERA ASSOCIATES
Attorney-at-Law & Notary Public
No. 51, Kassapa Road
Colombo 5.
PRIOR REGISTRATION: Vide Schedule
LEASE AGREEMENT
NO: 438
THIS INDENTURE OF LEASE made and entered into at Colombo in the Republic of Sri Lanka on this Seventeenth (17th ) day of May Two Thousand and Seven (2007)
      BY AND BETWEEN
ORION DEVELOPMENT PVT LTD a Company duly incorporated in Sri Lanka under the Companies Act No. 17 of 1982 bearing Company Registration No N(PVS) 49516 and having its Registered Office at No 752 Baseline Road Colombo 09 in the Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka (hereinafter referred to as “the Lessor” which term or expression as herein used shall where the context so requires or admits mean and include the said ORION DEVELOPMENT PVT LTD and its Successor or Successors and assigns) ONE PART
AND
VIRTUSA (PRIVATE) LIMITED a Company duly incorporated in the said Republic of Sri Lanka under the Companies Act No 17 of 1982 and having its Registered Office at No 117 Trans Asia Commercial Complex Sir Chittampalam A. Gardiner Mawatha Colombo 2 in the said Republic of Sri Lanka (hereinafter referred to as “the Lessee” which term or expression as herein used shall where the context so requires or admits mean and include the said VIRTUSA (PRIVATE) LIMITED and its Successor or Successors and assigns in tide) of the Other Part.
WHEREAS CEYLON SYNTHETIC TEXTILE MILLS LIMTED is seised and possessed of or otherwise well and sufficiently entitled to all that allotment of land buildings and Premises marked LOT A in said plan No. 1187 dated 27 th 29 th March 1985 and 01 st and 15 th April 1985 morefully described in the First schedule hereto bearing Assessment No. 752
(part of)


 

2

(part of) situated along Baseline Road together with the rights of way and other rights over the road reservations marked Lot 2 Lot 4 Lot 7 in plan No. 873 dated 06 th April 1964 made by S.Singanayagan Licensed Surveyor morefully described in the Second Schedule hereto.
AND WHEREAS the said CEYLON SYNTHETIC TEXTILE MILLS LIMITED entered in to a Lease Agreement bearing No 595 dated 30 th March 2007 attested by U.S.N.P.Perera Notary Public Colombo with the Lessor which is a 100% own subsidiary Company of the said CEYLON SYNTHETIC TEXTILE MILLS LIMITED for a period of THIRTY (30) years commencing from 15 th March 2007 and ending on 14 th March 2037 for IT related business all that allotment of land buildings and Premise bearing Assessment No 752 standing on the said land marked LOT A morefully described in the First Schedule hereto together with the right to use the road reservations marked Lot 2 Lot 4 Lot 7 according to said plan No. 873 morefully described in the Second Schedule hereto.
And the said Lot A in said plan No. 1187 according to a more recent survey plan bearing No. 1969 dated 27 th and 29 th March 1985 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor is depicted as LOT X and is morefully described in the First Schedule hereto.
AND WHEREAS the Lessor under and by virtue of clause 5 (3) of the said Lease Agreement bearing No. 595 is permitted to sublease the said land and premises morefully described in the First Schedule hereto or any part of portion thereof and the Lessor has agreed with the Lessee to sublease to the lessee the allotment of land buildings and premises marked as X1 and XI1 as shown in the sketch plan dated 19 th April 2007 coloured in green and attached to and forming part and parcel of these presents containing an aggregate area of Seventy Eight Thousand one hundred and Seventy Five Square feet (78,175 sq.ft.) inclusive of the proposed mezzanine floor together with the parking area marked as X2 as shown in the sketch plan coloured in orange and containing in extent of Twenty Eight Thousand Square Feet (28,000 sq.ft) together with the rights of way other rights over the common access marked as X10 as shown in the sketch plan coloured in yellow and over Lots 24 and 7 on the said plan No. 873 and the other rights in the Second Schedule hereto fully described (herein after called and referred to as the demised premises) for a period of Five years and Three and a half (3 1/2) months commencing on the 1 st day of July 2007 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2012 at the monthly rental and subject to the terms and conditions hereinafter set out and contained.
1.   NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH that for and in consideration of a sum of RUPEES NINETY FIVE MILLION TWO HUNDRED AND FORTY THREE THOUSAND THREE HUNDRED (Rs.95,243,300/-) being rental deposit payment which shall be held by the Lessor as an interest free refundable deposit to be refunded to the Lessee as herein provided after deducting therefrom all monies due and /or damages if any caused to the demised premises and/or the fixtures and fittings therein or thereto belonging
Whereof/-


 

3

    whereof and 30% of the said interest free refundable deposit amounting to RUPEES TWENTY EIGHT MILLION FIVE HUNDRED AND SEVENTY TWO THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED AND NINETY (Rs.28,572,990/-) of lawful money of Sri Lanka shall be paid by the Lessee to the Lessor at the execution of these presents (the receipt whereof the Lessor doth hereby admit and acknowledge) and 50% of the said interest free refundable deposit amounting to RUPEES FORTY SEVEN MILLION SIX HUNDRED AND TWENTY ONE THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED AND FIFTY (Rs.47,621,650/-) shall be paid by the Lessee to the Lessor as per the clause 6 (14) stated hereof and the final balance 20% of the said interest free refundable deposit of RUPEES NINETEEN MILLION FORTY EIGHT THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED AND SIXTY (Rs.19,048,660/-) shall be paid after completion of all renovations to be carried out within the rent free period of Three and a half (3 1 / 2 ) months in terms of this agreement and in consideration of the covenants provisions and agreements hereinafter contained on the part and on behalf of the Lessee to be observed and performed the Lessor doth hereby let lease and demise unto the Lessee the demised premises together with all and singular the rights and privileges easements servitudes and appurtenances whatsoever to the demised premises belonging or used and enjoyed therewith or reputed or known as part and parcel thereof.
 
2.   TO HOLD the said demised premises unto and to the use of the Lessee for the term or period of Five (05) Years and Three and a half (3 1 / 2 ) months commencing from the First (01st) day of July Two Thousand and Seven (2007) and ending on the Fourteenth (14 th ) day of October in the year Two Thousand and Twelve (2012)
 
3.   YIELDING and PAYING therefore unto the said Lessor the sum of RUPEES FOUR HUNDRED AND SEVENTY FIVE MILLION SIX HUNDRED AND FIFTY NINE THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED AND NINETY SIX (Rs.475,659,196/-) (Excluding Government Tax) being the aggregate lease rental for the entire term of Five years and Five months hereby created of lawful money of Sri Lanka to be paid by the Lessee to the Lessor as follows:
 
(1)   The period of Three and a half (3 1 / 2 ) months commencing from the First (1 st ) day of July Two Thousand and Seven (2007) and ending on the Fourteenth (14 th ) day of October Two thousand and Seven (2007) shall be free of the payment of lease rental
 
(2)   The monthly rental of a sum of Rupees Seven Million Two Hundred and Seventy Thousand Two Hundred and Seventy Five (Rs.7, 270,275/-) plus Value added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) on the monthly rental to be paid on or before the Twentieth (20 th ) day of each and every month commencing from the 15 th day of October 2007 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2008.
(3) The monthly/-


 

4

(3)   The monthly rental of a sum of Rupees Seven Million Two Hundred and Seventy Thousand Two Hundred and Seventy Five (Rs.7,270,275/-) plus Value added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) on the monthly rental to be paid on or before the Twentieth (20 th ) day of each and every month commencing from the 15 th day of October 2008 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2009
 
(4)   The monthly rental of a sum of Rupees Eight Million Seventy Thousand and Five (Rs. 8,070,005/-) plus Value added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) on the monthly rental to be paid on or before the tenth Twentieth (20 th ) day of each and every month commencing from the 15 th day of October 2009 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2010.
 
(5)   The monthly rental of a sum of Rupees Eight Million Seventy Thousand and Five (Rs. 8,070,005/-) plus Value added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) on the monthly rental to be paid on or before the tenth Twentieth (20 th ) day of each and every month commencing from the 15 th day of October 2010 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2011.
 
(6)   The monthly rental of a sum of Rupees Eight Million Nine Hundred and Fifty Seven Thousand Seven Hundred and Six (Rs.8,957,706/-) plus Value Added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) shall be set off against the said deposit of 50% set forth in clause 1 hereof at the rate of Rs. 3,968,471 per month and the balance of Rs. 4,989,235 plus Value Added Tax (or the relevant tax at the time) shall be paid as balance monthly rental per month commencing from the 15 th day of October 2011 and ending on the 14 th day of October 2012
 
4.   AND the Lessee to the intent and its obligations shall continue throughout the term hereby created doth hereby covenant with the Lessor as follows:-
 
01.   To pay regularly and punctually the monthly lease rental as aforesaid to the Lessor at Colombo
 
02.   To pay regularly and punctually at the time of setting the monthly lease rental plus the Tax or the relevant tax at the time as aforesaid to the Lessor at Colombo
03.To pay/-
             
CRION DEVELOPMENT (PVT) LIMITED    
        Virtusa (Private) Limited
[-s- ILLEGIBLE]
  [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]
Director
  Director   Director   Director
[-s- ILLEGIBLE]
NOTARY PUBLIC


 

5

03.   To pay and settle regularly and punctually all meter charges of electricity utilized by Lessee for their UPS and for the Service equipments including Lift Air condition units Light fittings Water pumps Fire protection unit, B.M.S. Components water bills and telephone bills and other charges to the respective authorities on account of electricity and Water consumed and telephone calls taken in the said demised premises during the continuance of the lease hereby created and shall forward receipts of such payments quarterly to the Lessor.
 
04.   To use the said demised premises for the sole purpose of IT related business of the lessee subject however to the provisions of the clause 4(9) hereof
 
05.   Subject to the provisions of the clause 5 (5) and (6) hereof not to hold the Lessor liable in any way whatsoever for failure to provide or damage caused to the Lessee by the unavailability of electricity and water to the demised premises
 
06.   Not to permit any act of commission or omission which would create a nuisance to tenants or occupiers of the neighbouring buildings
 
07.   The Lessee shall attend to all minor repairs per item of the demised premises (other than structural and external repairs) not exceeding a sum of Rupees Five Thousand (Rs.5,000/-) of lawful money of Sri Lanka per month
 
08.   Not to store chemicals inflammable liquids acetylene gas or alcohol or butyl or explosive oils compounds or substances upon the demised premises or use any such substances or fluids in the demised premises (other than domestic LPG cylinders for cooking or preparation of tea and other beverages) for any purpose other than for the specified use of the demised premises approved by the Lessor or its Agent/s and to be responsible for any accident or damage that may occur due to any unauthorized storage and to pay the total cost of the loss or damage caused within 14 days of its occurrence
 
09.   Not to sub-lease sub-let demise or in any manner the said demised premises or any part or portion thereof other than to a subsidiary company of the Lessee for any IT related business without the prior written consent of the Lessor. However the consent of the Lessor shall not be unreasonablywithheld or delayed.
 
10.   To keep the demised premises and every part or portion thereof including the fixtures fittings and all other service equipments/ instrument at the demised premises in good and proper order and condition and in the event of any damage being caused by the wilful or negligent act of the Lessee the Lessee shall make good of such damage ordinary wear and tear excepted provided that the maintenance of the same should be carried out by the Lessor as herein provided.
11.To/-


 

6

11.   To keep the said demised premises in a clean and sanitary state order and condition in conformity with the rules and conditions of the local authority.
 
12.   To permit the Lessor or its agents at all reasonable hours of the day convenient to the Lessee to visit and inspect the condition of the demised premises after Lessor giving prior written notice of twenty four (24) hours thereof to the Lessee.
 
13.   Not to cut damage in any way or suffer to be cut or damage in any way the roof floor walls windows doors or any other part of the demised premises
 
14.   Subject to clause 4(13) the Lessee shall be entitled to effect all necessary repairs alterations additions of a non permanent nature to suit the running of its IT office and to effect necessary wiring for purposes of telephone extensions, net working and electrical requirements of the Lessee’s Business.
 
15.   The Lessee shall throughout the lease period be responsible for insuring its own property against all losses or damages by fire malicious damage tempest riot and civil commotion and other risks and the lessor shall not be liable or be oblige to make good any loss or damage caused hereto or to replace the same
 
16.   To conform to all terms and conditions in the Fire Insurance Policy or policies in respect of the demised premises and not to do or cause to be done an act or thing whereby the policy or policies effected by the Lessor shall become vitiated or payment of moneys due thereon refused or the premium thereto increased and in such events to pay to the Lessor on demand all such sums paid by way of increased premium in consequence of the breach or non observance of this covenant.
 
17.   The Lessee shall appoint a fit and proper responsible person from the Lessee company for the purpose of correspondence with the Lessor
 
18.   The Elevators (Lifts) of the said demised premises shall be used by the Lessee and its clients, visitors, agents, employees, and workers and the electricity charges for operating the said lift shall be borne by the Lessee and the periodical service and overhaul of the said lifts shall be at the cost of the Lessor as per clause 5(10) hereof.
 
19.   Janitorial services shall other than general maintenance as per clause 5 (14) hereof be organised by the Lessee at its own expense.
 
20.   At the end of the term hereby created or at sooner determination thereof the Lessee shall hand over the Lessor quiet vacant and peaceful possession of the said demised premises in good order and condition reasonable wear and tear excepted and the Lessee shall be liable to replace the damages caused (if any) in removing the improvements partitions etc of the demised premises.
5. AND/-


 

7

5.   AND the Lessor to the intent and its obligations shall continue throughout the term hereby created doth hereby covenant with the Lessee as follows :-
 
1.   To permit the Lessee and its aforewritten to occupy the said demised premises during the term hereby created without any obstruction hindrance and/or interruption either by Lessor or by any person lawfully claiming any right under the lease Agreement and to warrant and defend the title to the demised premises and to indemnify and keep the lessee indemnified and saved harmless at all times from all claims demands costs damages losses which may be incurred or suffered by the lessee arising out of the title to the demised premises being defective.
 
2.   To pay and discharge or cause to be paid and discharged the existing rates and taxes due in respect of the said demised premises and duly pay all lease rentals and other charges in respect of the lease Agreement No. 595 and to comply with all the terms and conditions therein contained during the continuance of the Lease Agreement hereof and shall and will hold the Lessee and its aforewritten freed and indemnified and discharged from the payment of same and incurred in respect thereof.
 
3.   In the event the Lessor obtains a mortgage during these presents on the land morefully described in the Schedule hereto and on the said demised premises the Lessor shall pay all instalments of principal and interest due under such mortgage bond and shall ensure that all instalments of principal and interest in respect of any existing mortgages in respect of the demised premises are paid on the due dates without delay as provided in such bonds and keep the Lessee freed and indemnified from any claims damages actions and losses arising there from.
 
4.   A new access 25 feet wide capable of accommodating motor vehicles as shown in blue dotted lines on plan number 1028 dated 15 th September 1970 made by K. K. Thirunavukarasu licensed surveyor shall be duly provided by the Lessor to the Lessee as COMMON ACCESS to the demised premises and the entire premises of the Lessor prior to the completion of the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months set forth in clause 3 (1) hereof from the date of execution of this Agreement. A temporary wall shall be constructed adjacent to this access and any modifications needed to improve the appearance of buildings etc. along this access shall be done by the Lessor at its cost. On completion of this new access and due grant thereof to the Lessee the Lessee shall use only this new common access and not any other road ways as it’s common access to the said demised premises provided that such new access shall be free of any obstruction for the unimpeded use thereof by the Lessee. In the event of the Lessor requiring to construct a commercial building on the property marked as Lot 3 referred to in Plan No. 1028 of the Lessor which requires an amendment to the said new access, the Lessee shall use the alternative common access 25 feet wide capable of accommodating motor vehicles as shown in red dotted lines on the said Plan number 1028 over which the Lessee has been granted a right of way
and


 

8

    and other rights in this agreement subject to the compliance by the Lessor of the following conditions;
  i.   The said alternative common access is mutually beneficial to the Lessor and the Lessee
 
  ii.   the said alternative common access shall not be used by any industrial vehicles other than those vehicles mutually agreed
 
  iii.   The said alternative access and its surroundings shall be upgraded and landscaped so as to be similar to the said new access
    provided further that the said new access or the said alternative access shall provide full and unimpeded access to the Lessor without any obstruction or disturbance whatsoever and on mutual agreement between the parties hereto the Lessor shall convey the right of way and other rights over the said new access/ alternative access by way of a supplement to this lease agreement in lieu of the right of way and other rights granted to the Lessee under this agreement. In the event the alternative common access shown in red dotted lines on the said plan number 1028 is granted to use by the Lessee by the Lessor the Lessee shall cease the use of new access shown in blue dotted lines on plan number 1028 granted to the Lessee under this agreement.
 
5.   Prior to the completion of the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months the Lessor shall provide electricity from the substation of the Lessor to cover the requirement of the Lessees equipment (maximum 900 KVA) plus other equipment and lighting at the demised premises which the Lessor confirms will amount to Nine Hundred and Twenty (920) KVA as per the existing plan.
 
6.   Prior to the completion of the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months the Lessor shall provide a standby generator at its cost to meet contingencies in the event of shortage or failure of power supply as provided in clause 5(5).Required diesel to run the Generators shall be supplied by the Lessee at their cost and the periodical service and overhaul of the said generators shall be at the cost of the Lessor.
 
7.   In addition a Diesel storage tank to store fuel for a minimum of ten days shall be provided at the cost of the Lessor.
8. The
             
ORION DEVELOPMENT (PVT) LIMITED    
        Virtusa (Private) limited
[-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]
Director
  Director   Director   Director
[-s- ILLEGIBLE]
NOTARY PUBLIC


 

9

8.   The buildings of the demised premises shall be air conditioned at the cost of the Lessor prior to the completion of the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months and all related equipment shall be maintained by the Lessor during the term herein granted.
 
9.   A sprinkler system for fire protection of the demised premises shall be provided at the cost of the Lessor prior to the completion of the said rent free period and maintained by the Lessor
 
10.   The two (2) elevators at the demised premises shall be replaced and maintained by the Lessor prior to the completion of the said rent free period of 3 1 / 2 months and maintained by the Lessor provided however one (1) elevator shall always be functional during such work for use by the Lessee.
 
11.   The Lessor shall at the Lessor cost and with no charge to the Lessee provide the Lessee with space for covered parking of 120 cars in the adjacent building coloured in orange on the sketch plan marked as X2 and 40 parking slots near the demised building prior to the completion of the said rent free period. It is further agreed in the^event the Lessor intends to develop the building coloured in orange on the sketch plan marked as X2 herein contained and the Lessor undertakes to provide a similar alternative car park in the same/adjacent premises during such development period.
 
12.   On the request of the Lessee the Lessor agrees to develop within a period of two years from the date of commencement of this lease a further minimum of 160,000 Square Feet of available buildings along with space for car parking at the rate not exceeding of Rs.135/- per Square Foot. And the Lessor and the Lessee shall enter in to a fresh lease agreement as per new terms and conditions mutually discussed and agreed by both parties in respect of the said 160,000 Square Feet.
 
13.   Landscaping shall be done by the Lessor at the cost of the Lessor prior to the completion of said rent free period of Three and a half (3 1/2) months
 
14.   General maintenance and upkeep of the buildings and building maintenance & services shall be done by the Lessor at the cost of the Lessor.
 
15.   Roadways access ways and adjacent areas of the demised premises shall be maintained by the Lessor at the cost of the Lessor.
 
16.   The Lessor shall at its cost and within the said rent free period of 3 1 / 2 months from the date of commencement of the lease herein granted carry out external upgrading of the demised premises with cladding (opening and glazing) of the said demised premises and the said demised premises shall be upgraded internally at the cost of the Lessor with suspended ceilings fluorescent lights fittings painting of the entire building refitting of the doors and windows, carpeting and tiling and fitting of bathrooms and hygienic facilities according to the specifications previously agreed by the Lessor and the Lessee.
17. To/-


 

10

17.   To insure and keep insured at the cost of the Lessor the demised premises during the currency of this lease to its full insurable value against any loss or damage by fire lighting storm tempest explosion and civil commotion terrorism malicious damage riots and strikes and such other or similar causes or contingencies with the Sri Lanka Insurance Corporation Ltd or the National Insurance Corporation Ltd or any other Company or Corporation carrying on the business of insurance and regularly and punctually pay all the premium necessary for effecting or keeping in force such insurance and in the event of any loss or damage by any of the aforesaid agencies all sums of money received or recovered by the Lessor by virtue of such insurance shall be paid out and expended in rebuilding or reinstating the demised premises
 
18.   Both parties shall appoint a fit and proper responsible person from its Company for the purpose of correspondence with each party
 
19   On expiration of the lease hereby created or sooner determination the Lessor shall refund and repay to the Lessee 40% of the remaining interest free refundable deposit upon the Lessee surrendering the demised premises to the Lessor in good order repair and condition reasonable wear and tear excepted and remainder of the refundable deposit shall be refunded and repaid to the Lessee within 4 weeks of the Lessee surrendering the demised premises after deducting from the said deposit the sum total of any loss or damage that may have been caused by the Lessee to the demised premises or to its fixtures and fittings
 
6.   PROVIDED ALWAYS and it is hereby mutually agreed and declared between the Lessor and the Lessee as follows:-
 
1   The Lessor shall grant the Lessee peaceful vacant possession of the demised premises on the First day of July 2007 provided however the Lessor and its workmen shall be permitted by the Lessee to carry out the renovations and improvements without any interferences and hindrances to the demised premises as to enable the Lessor to comply with the provisions pertaining to the said renovations and improvements as set forth in this agreement
 
2.   The Lessee shall allow the Lessors identified workmen / servicemen to enter in to the demised premises at a mutually agreed time to carry out the necessary services and maintenance.
 
3   The Lessor and the Lessee agree that if the Lessor completes the renovation of part of the demised premises as agreed prior to the expiry of the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months and informs the Lessee that part of the building is ready the Lessee shall if it considers feasible commence business operations in the partially completed building and shall pay the lease rental proportionately to the square foot area that is being occupied by the Lessee. Provided further that the obligation of the Lessor to complete the entire building in terms of clause 5(16) and 6 (5) hereof during the said rent free period of 3 1/2 months shall continue to be valid and applicable to the Lessor.
To/


 

11

4.   To permit the Lessee at its own cost to erect display affix or exhibit on or to the exterior of the demised premises a name board of reasonable dimensions with or without illumination containing the name of the Lessee and the Lessee shall remove all such additions without causing damages to the demised premises on the termination of the agreement and on such removal of the additions any damages caused to the premises shall be settled by the Lessee to the Lessor
 
5.   If at the expiration of the term hereby created or sooner determination, the Lessee fails or otherwise neglects to peaceably surrender and yield up unto the Lessor the said demised premises the Lessee shall be liable to pay the Lessor RUPEES THREE HUNDRED AND FIFTY THOUSAND (Rs.350,000/=) per day as liquidated damages until such quiet and vacant possession is given to the Lessor
 
6.   At the cost and expense of the Lessor and within the said rent free period of 3 1 / 2 months from the date of commencement of the lease herein granted the demised premises shall be upgraded externally with cladding and glazing and in addition internally with:
  a .   Suspended ceilings
 
  b.   Energy saving light fittings
 
  c.   Complete painting
 
  d.   Refitting doors and windows
 
  e.   Carpeting
 
  f.   Tiling and fitting of hygienic facilities
 
  g.   Building Management System according to specifications previously agreed by the Lessor and the Lessee.
7.   That the Lessee paying the rent hereby reserved and observing and performing the several covenants herein contained shall peaceably hold and enjoy the demised premises during the term hereby created without any interruption by the Lessor or any other person claiming under or in trust for the Lessor. The Lessor hereby expressly warrants and defends title to the demised premises and expressly states that it has good legal and valid title to the demised premises and shall keep the Lessee indemnified and saved harmless from all claims demands costs damages losses which may be incurred or suffered by the Lessee arising out of the title to the demised premises being defective.
 
8.   If the rates and taxes imposed on the demised premises increases by more than Rupees Eight Hundred Thousand (Rs.800,000/-) per annum from the date of commencement of the term herein granted or an additional tax is imposed on the demised premises as a consequence of the business carried on by the Lessee the Lessee shall be liable to pay such increase or the additional tax amount to the Lessor.
 
9.   I. The Lessee shall be entitled to terminate this Agreement after a period of Three (3) years from the commencement of the lease herein granted by giving Six (6) calendar month’s prior written notice to the Lessor and on such termination the Lessor shall refund to the Lessee all unutilised lease rentals paid by Lessee to the Lessor together with the said refundable deposit subject to clause 5 (19) and the provisions herein contained.
11 If


 

12

    II If either party is in breach of any terms or conditions of the lease herein granted or if the Lessor is in breach of any of the terms or conditions contained in the said Lease Agreement No. 595 the aggrieved party shall be entitled to give fifteen (15) days written notice to the defaulting party to rectify such breach and at the end of such period if such breach is not rectified the aggrieved party may take steps to rectify such breach as aforesaid and in such event the defaulting party shall forthwith pay to the aggrieved party on written notification by the aggrieved party such sum of money expended by the aggrieved party to rectify such breach plus damages at Twenty (20%) per centum of the said cost for non-compliance by the defaulting party of such breach. In the event of non-payment or further breach by the defaulting party the aggrieved party shall be entitled to refer the same to an independent arbitrator as per Arbitration Act No.11 of 1995 and if the arbitration order is not given in fifteen (15) days time the aggrieved party shall be entitled to terminate the lease herein granted by giving a further fifteen (15) days written notice
 
10.   In the event of the Lessee being desirous of an extension of the term of occupation for a further period of five (5) years the Lessee shall Three (03) months prior to the expiration of this lease agreement notify the Lessor in writing and the Lessor shall extend the term on an agreed lease rental per square foot which shall not exceed Rs. 150 per square foot and on the same terms as herein contained. Such new agreement shall include the rights of access as set forth in clause 5(4)of this agreement.
 
11.   Placing of hoardings name boards shall be carried out by the Lessee with prior written approval and discussions made with the Lessor to the said demised premises morefully described in the First and Second Schedules hereto
 
    The Lessor shall within a period of Three and a half (3 1 / 2 ) months from the date of execution of these presents complete the renovations of the demised premises. In the event of delay neglect or failure on the part of the Lessor to complete the said renovation the Lessee shall permit the Lessor to complete the said renovation within an extended period of six weeks and further if the Lessor is unable to complete the renovation during the extended period a further extension of two and a half months will be granted subject to non payment of lease rental for such period that the Lessee permits the Lessor to complete the said renovation and
Subject
             
ORION DEVELOPMENT (PVT) LIMITED    
        Virtusa (Private) Limited
[-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]   [-s- ILLEGIBLE]
Director
  Director   Director   Director
 
        [- s- ILLEGIBLE]
NOTARY PUBLIC


 

13

    subject to the Lessor paying the Lessee interest on the refundable deposit at the said rate of 2% over the said SLIBOR (Sri Lanka Inter Bank Offer Rate) during the period of two and a half months provided however the Lessee shall be entitled to commence business in the comlepeted section of the said building. And in the event of delay neglect or failure on the part of the Lessor to complete the said renovations on the date of expiry of such extended period the Lessee shall at its option be entitled to terminate this agreement by a notice in writing to the Lessor and the Lessor shall refund to the Lessee the refundable deposit plus interest at the said rate from the date of execution of this agreement
 
13.   The Lessee is permitted to move in the Lessees equipment and make necessary fittings prior to the commencement of the lease
 
14.   The balance 50% of the refundable deposit of one years rental deposit amounting to RUPEES FORTY SEVEN MILLION SIX HUNDRED AND TWENTY ONE THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED AND FIFTY (Rs.47,621,650/-) shall be paid by the Lessee to the Lessor in the following manner:
 
  a) 10% shall be paid on submission and verification of Progress Report of Civil Work stage I

b) 10% shall be paid on submission and verification of Progress Report of Civil Work stage II

c) 10% shall be paid on submission and verification of Progress Report of Civil Work stage III

d) 10% shall be paid on submission and verification of Progress Report of Civil Work stage IV

e) 10% shall be paid on completion of building facade the Lessee shall be entitled to employ its own architects, engineers , quantity surveyors etc for purposes of verification of progress reports.
15.   The Lessee shall employ at its own cost its internal security guards for the points mutually agreed by the Lessor and Lessee as demarcated in the annexed document marked Y
 
16.   In the event of a significant portion of the demised premises or the building thereon being damaged beyond usage as a result of fire lighting explosion malicious agency strikes riots civil commotion terrorism or due to act of god other than due to an error omission or negligence of the Lessee as per clause 4 (10) the Lessee may terminate this agreement forthwith by notice to the Lessor or at its sole option to suspend this agreement by notice in writing to the Lessor for such period pending reinstatement of the demised premises to its original condition by the Lessor and in such event the obligation of the Lessee under this agreement (including payment of lease rentals) shall be deemed to be forthwith suspended and this agreement shall be revived only when the Lessee resumes the use of the demised premises for the business of the Lessee provided that the Lessee shall have the right at any time to terminate this Agreement by notice in writing to the Lessor during the said period of suspension.. The Lessor shall refund to the Lessee all unutilised lease rentals and the said refundable deposit subject to clause 5 (19) on such termination as aforesaid.
17.The/-


 

14

17.   The Lessee shall inform in writing to the lessor of any complaints regarding the Consultant employed by the Lessor on the maintenance and upgrading of the demised premises and the Lessor shall consider the complaints forthwith and remedy the complains without any delay after mutual discussion with the Lessee
 
18.   Both parties shall bear in equal share the lawyer’s legal fees and incidental expenses in respect of this Lease Agreement and the stamp duty shall be born by the Lessee
 
19.   All notices required to be served under these Presents shall be deemed to be sufficiently sent if addressed and posted by Registered Post to the Lessee and the Lessor at the above said Registered addresses and any change or changes in the respective addresses aforesaid may be given by Registered Post in like manner.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have hereunto and to three others of the same tenor and date as these presents affixed its respective common Seal at the place on the day month and year at the beginning hereof written.
THE FIRST SCHEDULE ABOVE REFERRED TO
1.   All that divided and defined allotment of land and buildings bearing Assessment No. 752 Danister de Silva Mawatha formerly Baseline Road which said allotment of land is marked LOT A in Plan No. 1187 dated 27 th , 29 th March 1985 and 1 st and 15 th April 1985 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor is a divided and defined portion of land from and out of the land called Umbichy Mills situated along Danister de Silva Mawatha formerly Baseline Road within the Municipality and District of Colombo Western Province and is bounded on the North by Lots D.N. & O in Plan No. 1187 and Lot 2 in Plan No. 1028 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor and bearing Assessment No. 752/1, Danister de Silva Mawatha on the East by Lot 2 in Plan No. 1028 and bearing Assessment No. 752/1, Daister de Silva Mawatha and Dematagoda Ela on the South by premises bearing No. G 658 Danister de Silva Mawatha and Lot B In Plan No. 1187 and on the West by Lot B in Plan No. 1187, premises bearing Assessment Nos. G 658 & G 716 Danister de Silva Mawatha Private Road and Lot N in Plan No. 1187 and containing in extent Six Acres Thirteen Decimal Seven Five Perches (A6-R0-P13.75) and registered in A 850/71 at the Colombo District Land Registry.
According to a more recent survey the above said Lot A is morefully described as follows.
All that divided and defined allotment of land marked Lot X (Part) depicted in Plan No. 1969 dated 23 rd March 1988 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor (being a resurvey of Lot A in survey plan No. 1187 dated 27 th , 29 th
March/-


 

15

March 1985 and 1 st and 15 th April 1985 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor) presently bearing assessment No. 752 and formerly No 752 (part of) situated along a road off Danister De Silva Mawatha formerly Baseline Road in the Dematagoda Ward No. 29 in the Palle Pattu of Salpiti Korale within the administrative limits of Colombo Municipal Council Colombo Western Province and which said Lot X is bounded on the North by Lot 6 (Approved private Road 40 feet wide) hereof and Lot 2 in plan No. 1028 bearing assessment No. 752/1 Danister De Silva Mawatha on the East by Lot 2 in plan No. 1028 bearing assessment No. 752/1 Danister De Silva Mawatha and Dematagoda Ela on the South by Premsies bearing Assessment No. G658 Danister De Silva Mawatha and Lot Y hereof on the West by Lot Y hereof premises bearing assessment No. G658 Danister de Silva Mawatha Private Road and premises bearing assessment G716 Danister De Silva Mawatha and Lot 2 in plan No. 1028 bearing assmt.752/1 Danister De Silva Mawatha and containing in extent Six Acres Thirteen Decimal Seven Five Perches (A6-RO-P13.75) according to the said Plan No. 1969.
THE SECOND SCHEDULE ABOVE REFERRED TO :-
Together with the right to use the following Road Reservations :
02.   All that divided and defined allotment of land marked Lot 2 (Reservation for a Private Street) depicted in Plan No. 873 dated 6-4-1964 made by S. Singanayagam Licensed Surveyor and Leveller of the land called Umbichy Mills situated along Baseline Road aforesaid and which said Lot 2 is bounded on the North East by Lot 1 in Plan No. 873 South East by Lot 1 in Plan No. 873 South West by Lot 4 in Plan No. 873 on the South East by Lot 1 in Plan No. 873 on the South West by Lot 4 in Plan No. 873 and on the North West by Lot 1 in Plan No. 873 and containing in extent Thirty Eight perches (A0-R0-P38.0) and registered in volume A 640/257 at the Colombo Land Registry.
 
03.   All that divided and defined allotment of land marked Lot 4 (Reservation for a Road) of the land called Umbichy Mills bearing assessment No.736, 750/1 and 752/10 Baseline Road situated along Baseline Road aforesaid and which said Lot 4 is bounded on the North East by Lots 1 and 2 in Plan No.873 on the South East by Lots 1 and 3 in Plan No.873 on the South West by Lots 5 & 6 in Plan No.873 and Baseline Road and on the North West by Lot 5 in Plan No.873 Baseline Road and Lot 7 in Plan No.873 and containing in extent One Rood Twenty Eight (A0 Rl P28) and registered in volume A 638/250 at the Land Registry Colombo.
 
04.   All that divided and defined allotment of land marked Lot 7 (Road) of the land called Umbichy Mills situated along Baseline Road aforesaid and
which


 

16

    which said Lot 7 in bounded on the North East by premises now bearing assessments Nos.758/3, 758/4, 758/5, 758/6 and 760 Baseline Road and Lot 4 in Plan No.873 on the South East by Lot 4 No.873 on the South West by Baseline Road and on the North West by Baseline Road and premises now bearing assessments Nos.758/3, 758/4, 758/5, 758/6 and 760 Baseline Road and containing in extent Eighteen Decimal Five Perches (A0 R1 P18.5) and registered in volume A 638/249 at the Land Registry Colombo.
Together with a further right of way over a new Road Reservation now in use marked Lot 6 in Plan No. 1969 dated 27 th , 29 th March 1985 and 1 st April 1985 made by P. Sinnathamby Licensed Surveyor and containing in extent One Rood Seventeen Decimal Six Nought Perches (A0-R1-P17.60) as per the said Plan No. 1969.
The Common Seal of the said
ORION DEVELOPMENT PVT LTD
Is hereto affixed in the presence of
             
1.
           
 
2.
           
 
           
Who do hereby attest the sealing thereof ORION DEVELOPMENT (PVT) LIMITED
 
           
W I T N E S S E S :-   [- s- ILLEGIBLE]   [- s- ILLEGIBLE]
 
      Dirctor   Director
1.
  [ILLEGIBLE]        
 
2.
  [ILLEGIBLE]        
 
           
The Common Seal of the said        
VIRTUSA (PRIVATE) LIMITED        
Is hereto affixed in the presence of        
 
           
1.       Virtusa (Private) Limited
 
           
2.
      [- s- ILLEGIBLE]
Director
  [- s- ILLEGIBLE]
Director
 
           
Who do hereby attest the sealing thereof    
 
           
W I T N E S S E S :-        
 
           
1.
           
 
           
2.
  [ILLEGIBLE]        
        [- s- ILLEGIBLE]
NOTARY PUBLIC
EXHIBIT 21.1
Subsidiaries of Virtusa Corporation
     
Name of Subsidiary   Jurisdiction of Incorporation/Formation
Virtusa Consulting Services, Pvt. Ltd.
  India
 
Virtusa (India) Private Limited
  India
 
Virtusa International, B.V.
  Netherlands
 
Virtusa (Private) Limited
  Sri Lanka
 
Virtusa Securities Corporation
  Massachusetts
 
Virtusa Software Services, Pvt. Ltd.
  India
 
Virtusa UK Limited
  United Kingdom
Exhibit 23.1
Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
The Board of Directors and Shareholders
Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries:
We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statement (No. 333-145636) on Form S-8 of Virtusa Corporation of our report dated May 29, 2008, with respect to the consolidated balance sheets of Virtusa Corporation and Subsidiaries as of March 31, 2008 and 2007, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in stockholders’ equity (deficit) and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended March 31, 2008, and our report dated May 29, 2008 relating to the consolidated financial statement schedule, which reports appear in the March 31, 2008 annual report on Form 10-K of Virtusa Corporation.
As discussed in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting for share-based payments effective April 1, 2005.
/s/ KPMG LLP
Boston, Massachusetts
June 3, 2008

EXHIBIT 31.1
Section 302 Certification
I, Kris Canekeratne, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Virtusa Corporation, certify that:
(1) I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Virtusa Corporation;
(2) Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
(3) Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
(4) The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
(b) [Paragraph omitted in accordance with SEC transition instructions contained in SEC Release No. 34-47986];
(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
(5) The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
Date: June 3, 2008
         
 
  /s/ Kris Canekeratne
 
Kris Canekeratne
   
 
  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer    
 
  (Principal Executive Officer)    

 

EXHIBIT 31.2
Section 302 Certification
I, Thomas R. Holler, Executive Vice President of Finance and Chief Financial Officer of Virtusa Corporation, certify that:
(1) I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Virtusa Corporation;
(2) Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
(3) Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
(4) The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
(b) [Paragraph omitted in accordance with SEC transition instructions contained in SEC Release No. 34-47986];
(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
(5) The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
Date: June 3, 2008
         
 
  /s/ Thomas R. Holler
 
Thomas R. Holler
   
 
  Executive Vice President & Chief Financial Officer    
 
  (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)    

 

EXHIBIT 32.1
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION
906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
In connection with the Annual Report of Virtusa Corporation (the “Company”) on Form 10-K for the period ended March 31, 2008 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Kris Canekeratne, Chief Executive Officer of the Company,
certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
(1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; and
(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
Date: June 3, 2008
         
 
  /s/ Kris Canekeratne
 
Kris Canekeratne
   
 
  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer    
 
  (Principal Executive Officer)    

 

EXHIBIT 32.2
CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350, AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE
SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002
In connection with the Annual Report of Virtusa Corporation (the “Company”) on Form 10-K for the period ended March 31, 2008 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Thomas R. Holler, Chief Financial Officer of the Company,
certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
(1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended; and
(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
Date: June 3, 2008
         
 
  /s/ Thomas R. Holler
 
Thomas R. Holler
   
 
  Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer    
 
  (Principal Accounting and Financial Officer)